DDS-CAD 7.3 Manual ENG PDF

Introduction
Editor's note
Strategies for handling projects

Dear reader,
Thank you for taking the decision to use DDS-CAD in your business. We
have created this online manual to help you get started. It is an important
part of what we provide to you and we are therefore constantly developing
it (just like our software).
This document was last revised on 23 August 2012. The first online edition
will be published in October 2012. A complete list of revisions can be found
on the following page.
We have several additions planned for the coming weeks. These topics are
denoted in the table of contents by double brackets. Topics that are
currently under revision are denoted by single brackets:
Basic functions
((Scheduled topic))
(Topic under revision)
If you have any questions on these or other topics, please refer to our
"History/changes" documentation in the "Help" menu.
If you have taken out a software maintenance agreement with us, you will
receive our regular online updates. This automatically includes an updated
configuration
configuration
version of the manual. As a user without a software maintenance
agreement, you can download the manual from our website
(www.dds-cad.com).
Yours sincerely,
extensions,
extensions,
Jens Ackermann
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
1
Introduction
Editor's note
Edition Chapter Modification

29/08/2011 3.3.2 The internal structure of a DDS drawing Newly created
8.3 Designing underfloor heating Updated
11 Distribution boards and switchboards Restructured, distribution
board documentation
removed to create chapter
14
14 Distribution board documentation Restructured
16.2 Working with sections (wall views) Updated and expanded
17.3.2 Snap areas Updated
17.4 Views and perspectives Updated
17.4.3 Navigation in the "camera" view Newly created
20.2 Undo/restore operation Newly created
14/09/2011 6.2.3 Substitute object for simulating sub- Newly created
networks/consumers
8.1 Heating and sanitation objects Newly created
Basic functions
9 Pipes and ventilation ducts Newly created

Newly created
1.1.1.1 10.3.5.2 ((Valves))
1.1.1.2 ((Safety facilities))
Pipe network calculation in

the potable water network
Adjustments, extensions, configuration
Index
2
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Foreword
DDS-CAD is more than drawing,

DDS-CAD is modelling
"Model ... image of an object or object region, in which the properties
considered important are highlighted and aspects regarded as circumstantial
are disregarded. In this sense, a model is therefore a simplified illustration of
reality. It serves as a tool for describing reality and for forming characterising
ideas and forms the basis for predicting future behaviour of the region
depicted." (Brockhaus encyclopaedia, multimedial premium, 2008)
Being up-to-date is the most important requirement for the documentation of

technical building services. The complexity of a system creates particular challenges
and the respective section in the life cycle of the facility demands the use of a
document in its own way: In the planning phase it is necessary to develop alternative
Basic functions
solutions, and to compare these to each other. Realisation is not without alterations
and management may also result in additions, inspections and repairs.
Documentation is always the source of information, the medium of communication
and the basis for actions.
The use of virtual models therefore appears to make sense: a model evolves
dynamically with the project. It accompanies the system even after its construction,
makes it possible to simulate subsequent changes and disturbing influences and
configuration
simplifies troubleshooting. The individual document is always a derivation from the
configuration
model.
Data Design System has been committed to the model way of thinking for more than
25 years. During this time, our product, DDS-CAD has evolved into a high-
extensions,
performance product with complex structures and interfaces for the widest variety of
extensions,
industry standard software systems.
This manual is designed to help you integrate DDS-CAD 7.3 in your day-to-day work.
Adjustments,
1
We continuously update it with our online updates . It is freely available from our
Adjustments,
website (www.dds-cad.com).
Data Design System

Ascheberg, September 2011
1
You will receive these automatically if you have signed a software maintenance agreement with us.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
3
Introduction
Foreword
Notes on the structure of this manual

This manual is intended for users with no practical experience with DDS-CAD. It is
divided into roughly four subject areas:
Part I introduces you to the DDS-CAD product philosophy. This section explains the
structure of the user interface and project management.
Part II explains the strategies for handling projects with DDS-CAD. It begins with
editing the floor plan, the building model, the building services model and their
calculation and evaluation.
Part III contains a description of the DDS basic functions, such as working with
geometric shapes, text, auxiliary and editing functions, etc.
Part IV describes ways to configure, expand and adjust the system.
The descriptions use symbols to denote the input controls:
Input elements
Basic functions
Key (keyboard)
Left mouse button
Middle mouse button (scroll wheel)
Right mouse button
Controls in dialogue boxes

OK Button
Selection (drop-down, list box)
Input field for values and text
Input
Display Display field for values and text

Radio button
Checkbox
Procedures are described as instructions with a description of the effect, e.g.:

 Click OK . The function is stopped.
Index
4
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Contents
PART I – INTRODUCTION 14

2 THE MODEL – THE CORE OF THE DDS PHILOSOPHY 16
3 AN INTRODUCTION TO DDS-CAD 19
3.1 Starting the program 19
3.2 Creating and managing projects 19
3.2.1 Project setup and the structure of the drawings list 19
3.2.2 Using the list of drawings in project management 22
3.2.3 Notes on the root directory for projects 24
3.3 At the drawing level 25
3.3.1 The user interface 25
3.3.2 The internal structure of a DDS drawing 26
PART II – STRATEGIES FOR HANDLING PROJECTS 28
4 IMPORTING EXTERNAL DATA 32

4.1 Notes on file formats 33
Basic functions
4.1.1 DWG and DXF 33
4.1.2 Portable Document Format (*.PDF) 33
4.1.3 Raster image (*.BMP; *.GIF; *.JPG; *.PNG; *.TIF; *.WMF) 33
4.2 The general import process 34
4.2.1 Copying files to the project 34
4.2.2 Importing 35
4.3 Notes on working with floor plans 35
4.3.1 Requirements for imported floor plans 35
4.3.2 Checking and correcting the scale ratio 38
4.3.3 Accurate placement of the storeys 41
configuration
4.3.4 Notes on importing altered plans 43
configuration
4.4 Imported files when exporting the model 45
5 BUILDING MODEL 47
5.1 Components and structural design 48
5.2 Requirements for the building model 49
extensions,
5.2.1 Levels of detail according to the task at hand 49

extensions,
5.2.2 Requirements due to the heat load calculation 50

5.3 Building model through graphical entry 51
5.3.1 General procedure 51
5.3.2 Capturing a region 52
5.3.3 Entering rooms 54
Adjustments,
5.3.4 Doors and windows 58

Adjustments,
5.3.5 Suspended ceiling 60

5.3.6 Room text/room stamp 61
5.3.7 Roof areas and dormers 62
5.3.8 Skylights and roof sections 67
5.3.9 Gutters 68
5.3.10 Downpipe 68
5.3.11 Roof structures 70
5.3.12 Recesses, openings 71
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
5
Introduction
Contents
5.4 Edit building model 72

5.4.1 Structural units settings 72
5.4.2 Editing the floor plan and room geometry 77

5.5 Compiling the building model 80
6 VENTILATION SYSTEMS 81
6.1 Entering and calculating the volume flows 82
6.1.1 Checking and correcting building data 82
6.1.2 Check and correct room data 83
6.1.3 controlled ventilation of residential buildings 83
6.2 Objects of the ventilation system 86
6.2.1 Air handling unit 86
6.2.2 Air terminals 86
6.2.3 Substitute object for simulating sub-networks/consumers 87
7 HEAT LOAD CALCULATION 89

7.1 General principles 89
7.1.1 Heat load calculation according to DIN EN 12831 89
7.1.2 Processing effort according to the data available 90
Basic functions
7.2 Checking and correcting building data 91

7.2.1 Geographical and meteorological data 91
7.2.2 Configuring the heat load calculation 92
7.3 Checking and correcting room data 94
7.3.1 General settings 94
7.3.2 Notes on the ventilation heat loss ΦV 95
7.3.3 Notes on unheated rooms – the factor bu 99
7.3.4 Notes on rooms spanning several storeys 100
7.3.5 Global settings for all rooms 101
7.4 Checking and correcting components 102
7.4.1 Terms and connections 102

7.4.2 The heat transfer coefficient (U-value) 105
7.4.3 Notes on the position code (reverse of the component) 111
7.4.4 Thermal bridges 116
7.5 Performing calculations and printing results 117
8 HEATING AND SANITARY FACILITIES 119

8.1 Heating and sanitation objects 119
8.1.1 General overview 119
8.1.2 Substitute objects for simulating sub-networks/consumers 120
8.2 Dividing the heat load into heating facilities 122
8.2.1 Specifying the building standard and adjusting a storey 123
8.2.2 Adjusting a single room 124
8.3 Designing underfloor heating 124
8.3.1 Introduction 124
8.3.2 Managing the heating regions and distributor 126
8.3.3 Selecting the manufacturer and system 128
8.3.4 Selecting and placing the heating region distributor 129
8.3.5 Heating regions 130
8.3.6 Calculating and optimising the facility 138
Index
6
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Contents
8.3.7 Printing results 144

8.3.8 Labelling heating regions 145

8.4 Designing radiators 146
8.4.2 Radiators 147
8.4.3 Managing the radiators in the Building Information dialogue 148
8.4.4 Install and dimension radiator automatically 151
8.4.5 Calculated results of the radiator calculation 154
8.5 Designing cooling units 154
9 PIPES AND VENTILATION DUCTS 155

9.1.1 Introduction and terms 155
9.1.2 Settings in the starting point 155
9.1.3 Display options 160
9.2 Strategies and concepts for designing the network 162
9.2.1 General notes 162
9.2.2 Notes on ventilation systems 164
9.3 Drawing a pipeline manually 166
Basic functions
9.3.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment 167
9.3.2 Drawing the pipeline route 176
9.3.3 The last segment, position and type of the endpoint 180
9.4 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network 182
9.4.1 Creating parallel pipes 182
9.4.2 The copy function for sub-sections 183
9.4.3 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network 187
9.4.4 Connecting objects automatically 188
9.5 Fixtures and fittings in pipes 198
9.5.1 Features common to all pipeline objects 198
9.5.2 Notes on the various pipeline objects 200
configuration
9.5.3 Manual installation of pipeline objects 201
configuration
9.6 Moulded parts and devices in the ventilation duct 203
9.6.1 Moulded parts in the ventilation duct 203
9.6.2 Devices in the ventilation duct 204
9.7 Segments in the pipeline route 205
9.7.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route 205
extensions,
9.7.2 Changing insulation status and linetype 206

extensions,
9.8 Editing pipes and ventilation ducts 208

9.8.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections 208
9.8.2 Changing the pipeline route 209
9.8.3 Editing moulded parts and fixtures 214
Adjustments,
10 NETWORK CALCULATIONS 215

Adjustments,
10.1 Introduction and general procedure 215

10.2 Labelling calculation points 215
10.3 Pipe network calculation in the heating pipe network 218
10.3.2 Configuring the calculation 219
10.3.3 Enabling the calculation and analysing the network 220
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
7
Introduction
Contents
10.3.4 Working with the pipe network table 221

10.3.5 Calculated results 224
10.4 Pipe network calculation in the potable water network 226

10.4.2 Configuring the calculation 227
10.4.3 Working with the pipe network table 228
10.4.4 Calculated results 231
10.5 Pressure loss calculation in the ventilation system 232
10.5.2 The "Pressure loss calculation" dialogue box 232
11 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS 237

11.1 Purpose and functions of the distribution board 237
11.2 The distribution board as an object 239
11.3 The distribution board as a database – the circuit table 240
11.3.1 Content and functions 240
11.3.2 Customising how the circuit table is displayed 244
11.3.3 Working with the circuit table 245
11.3.4 Reorganising a distribution board 247
Basic functions
11.4 Notes on the high-voltage current distribution board 255

11.4.1 Creating the energy balance 256
11.4.2 Sizing the cable dimension (final circuits) 264
11.5 Notes on data distribution boards 266
11.6 Notes on other low-voltage current distribution boards 268
12 ((INSTALLATION SYSTEMS)) 270

12.1.1 Introduction and terms 270
12.1.2 Settings in the starting point 270
12.1.3 Display options 273

12.2 Drawing a pipeline manually 274
12.2.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment 275
12.2.2 Drawing the pipeline route 283
12.2.3 Concluding an installation system 286
12.3 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network 288
12.3.1 The copy function for sub-sections 288
12.3.2 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network 292
12.4 Components in the installation system 293
12.4.1 Notes on the various pipeline objects 293
12.4.2 Manual installation of pipeline objects 295
12.5 Segments in the pipeline route 296
12.5.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route 296
12.5.2 Changing the linetype 297
12.6 Editing installation systems 299
12.6.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections 299
12.6.2 Changing the pipeline route 300
12.6.3 Editing moulded parts 305
Index
8
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Contents
13 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 306

13.1 Introduction 306
13.2 Lighting systems 307
13.2.1 ((Fluorescent and incandescent lamps)) 308
13.2.2 ((Support systems, light rails and strip lights)) 309
13.2.3 Installation in a suspended ceiling (single object) 310
13.2.4 Lighting calculation using the efficiency method 311
13.2.5 Lighting calculation with DIALux or Relux 316
13.3 Building management systems 319
13.3.1 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ETS (KNX) 319
13.3.2 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ELVIS 323
13.4 Telecommunications and information technology systems 327
13.4.1 Special features of data equipment 328
13.4.2 Special features of fire alarm systems 330
13.4.3 Numbering fire alarms 331
13.5 Cables, wires, circuit labels 332
13.5.2 Methods of 333
13.5.3 Labelling by connecting lines (correct) 336
13.5.4 Drawing the cable harnesses 337
Basic functions
13.5.5 Drawing a cable 339
13.5.6 Installation spanning several storeys 341
14 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DOCUMENTATION 346

14.1 Creating a drawing and enabling a distribution board 346
14.2 Managing sheetsand navigating between them 347
14.2.1 The sheet list 347
14.2.2 Navigating between sheets 348
14.2.3 Adding a sheet 348
configuration
14.3 Drawing circuits automatically 349
configuration
14.3.1 Organising sheet divisions 349
14.3.2 Specifying the start position before drawing 350
14.4 Drawing manually 351
14.4.1 Draw components 351
14.4.2 Drawing terminals 352
extensions,
14.5 Navigating between the circuit and the sheet 353
extensions,
14.5.1 From the drawn circuit to the circuit table 353

14.5.2 From the circuit table to the drawn circuit 354
15 EMERGENCY AND EVACUATION ROUTES 355

Adjustments,
16 ANALYSING – PRINTING – EXPORTING 356

Adjustments,
16.1 Working with part drawings (details) 357

16.1.1 Dividing sheet with subframes 357
16.1.2 Defining part drawings 358
16.1.3 Copying a part drawing definition 359
16.1.4 Managing part drawings 359
16.2 Working with sections (wall views) 360
16.2.1 Defining and editing a section 360
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
9
Introduction
Contents
16.2.2 Managing sections 363

16.3 Working with print layouts 363

16.3.1 Creating a new print layout 363
16.3.2 The user interface in the print layout 364
16.3.3 Inserting a model/part drawing/section 365
16.3.4 Inserting sheets, title fields and legends 365
16.3.5 Filling out the title field 366
16.4 Printing a drawing and producing a pdf file 368
16.4.1 Calling the functions 368
16.5 Part list 369
16.5.1 Creating the part list 369
16.5.2 Output as configured report 370
16.5.3 Absolute quantity vs. comparing two part lists 376
PART III – REFERENCE TO THE DDS BASIC FUNCTIONS 377
17 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS 378

17.1 Coordinate system 378
17.2 Grid 379
Basic functions
17.2.1 Snapping the grid at a point 380

17.2.2 Defining distances between the grid points 381
17.2.3 Rotating the grid and coordinate plane 382
17.3 Snap options in the toolbox 384
17.3.1 Snap grid 384
17.3.2 Snap areas 385
17.3.3 Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key 387
17.3.4 Snap points 387
17.3.5 Snap object 388
17.4 Views and perspectives 389
17.4.1 Enabling/disabling views 389
17.4.2 Navigation in plan view, front/side view, isometric 390

17.4.3 Navigation in the "camera" view 391
17.5 Working with layers 392
18 OBJECTS – BUILDING BLOCKS OF THE MODEL 395

18.1 ((General properties)) 395
18.1.1 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (ELP) 395
18.1.2 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (plumbing and heating) 397
18.1.3 The position of the object in the DDS model 398
18.1.4 Colour, layer and pen assignment of an object 399
18.1.5 ((Links to external information)) 400
18.2 Working with objects (dynamic symbol) 401
18.2.1 Preliminary remarks 401
18.2.2 Symbol at the cursor 403
18.2.3 Calibrating from cursor position 406
18.2.4 Calibrate from last point 411
18.2.5 Adjust installation height 415
18.3 Working with object groups 417
18.3.2 Inserting objects on a surface 418
Index
10
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Contents
18.3.3 Multiple objects on one line 426

18.3.4 Editing an object group 430

19 DRAWING AND LABELLING 431
19.1 Polylines and asymmetric polygons 432
19.1.1 Common features of the functions 432
19.1.2 Overview of the functions 433
19.1.3 Defining the starting point of the polyline 435
19.1.4 Draw polyline freely 439
19.1.5 Construct polyline horizontally 443
19.1.6 Changes in height in the polyline 448
19.1.7 End polyline, close contour 457
19.1.8 Edit polyline 459
19.2 Symmetrical shapes 462
19.2.1 Circle 463
19.2.2 Arc 464
19.2.3 Cylinder 465
19.2.4 Cone (cone/truncated cone) 466
19.2.5 Rectangle 467
19.2.6 Cuboid 468
19.2.7 Regular polygon 469
Basic functions
19.2.8 Pyramid 470
19.2.9 Prism 471
19.2.10 Truncated pyramid (polyhedron) 473
19.2.11 Ball 475
19.2.12 Ellipse 476
19.2.13 Elliptic arc 477
19.2.14 Network 478
19.3 Working with auxiliary geometries 479
19.3.1 Auxiliary geometry on an active point 479
19.3.2 Help geometry on active circle/arc 483
configuration
19.3.3 Help geometry on active line 484
configuration
19.3.4 Delete help geometry 487
19.4 Working with text and labels 488
19.4.1 Symbol text on objects, pipelines and in rooms 488
19.4.2 Position marker (on objects) 494
19.4.3 Free text 497
19.4.4 Move text and labels 498
extensions,
19.5 Working with the dimension type 499

extensions,
19.5.1 Terms and general connections 499

19.5.2 General application 501
19.5.3 Oblique dimension type 502
19.5.4 ((The properties of the dimension type)) 504
Adjustments,
20 GENERAL EDITING FUNCTIONS 505

Adjustments,
20.1 Copy, delete, move and edit objects 505

20.1.2 Select objects for editing 506
20.1.3 Remove selections 507
20.1.4 Editing functions for selected objects 508
20.2 Undo/restore operation 510
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
11
Introduction
Contents
20.3 The "Find and Edit Objects” function 511

20.3.1 Introduction and application 511
20.3.2 Filter by template of a reference object 512

20.3.3 Manually define properties of the search filter 513
20.4 The "Move Area” (Move region) function 513
21 WORKING IN THE DWG/DXF EDITOR 516

21.1 The "DWG/DXF Editor" action area 516
21.1.1 On editing the floor plan: Starting from the DDS model 516
21.1.2 To transfer a symbol: Starting from the program level 517
21.2 Strategies for editing DWG/DXF files 518
21.2.1 Isolate detail of interest 518
21.2.2 Adjust layer structures to the DDS model 520
21.2.3 Edit file properties 521
21.2.4 Define the insertion point (Origo) – Shift zero point 522
21.3 Transfer DWG/DXF objects to the DDS model 523
21.3.2 Create link to individual item 524
21.3.3 Link with a central management function 526
21.3.4 Save object mapping and transfer to the DDS model 527
Basic functions
21.3.5 Correcting the position of the objects in the DDS model 528
21.3.6 Hide original 528
21.3.7 Notes on the parts list 530
21.4 Apply changes – Save 531
PART IV – ADJUSTMENTS 532
22 WORKING WITH THE PRODUCT DATABASE 533

22.1 Basic relationships 533
22.1.1 The relationship between item and symbol 533

22.1.2 Data types and hierarchy of the data storage 534
22.1.3 Application of the hierarchy, search mechanisms 535
22.2 The product database in action 536
22.2.1 Accessing the product database 536
22.2.2 Item search 537
22.2.3 Expand product database – Create new item 538
22.2.4 Working with the manufacturer database (electrical) 543
22.2.5 Working with manufacturer databases (heating) 544
23 SYMBOL CREATION 545

23.1 Develop DDS symbols 545
23.1.2 Notes on the title field 548
23.1.3 Functions and commands for editing symbols 553
23.1.4 Notes on installation and labelling symbols 561
23.2 Drawing a DDS symbol (HCS) 563
23.2.1 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E) 564
23.2.2 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E) 566
23.2.3 Find and load master copy in the symbol catalogue (E) 568
23.2.4 General functions of symbol editing 570
Index
12
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Contents
23.3 Transferring a symbol from a DWG/DXF file 575

23.3.1 Export symbol to CFI 575

23.3.2 Apply CFI file as a symbol 576
23.4 Apply 3DS file as a symbol 576
23.5 Creating a logo 577
23.5.1 Logo in drawings 577
23.5.2 Logo in reports, lists and logs 580
23.6 Creating a legend 581
23.7 Creating an automatic title field 584
23.7.1 ((Introduction)) 584
23.7.2 Creating a title field from a template 585
23.7.3 ((Manually designing and editing a title field)) 588
23.7.4 The title field in the product database 588
24 CUSTOM CIRCUIT LAYOUTS 589

24.1 Relationships and terms 590
24.1.1 Access to customised circuit layouts 590
24.1.2 System layout 591
24.1.3 Custom layout 591
Basic functions
24.1.4 Variant 591
24.1.5 Types (of a variant) 592
24.2 Start editing mode 594
24.3 The layout manager 595
24.4 The user interface in editing mode 595
24.5 Configuring a circuit 597
24.6 Drawing in editing mode 598
24.6.1 Symbols for the equipment 598
24.6.2 Wiring lines and wiring points 598
24.6.3 Space requirement – start position of the next circuit 601
configuration
configuration
24.7 Exiting the editing mode 602
24.8 Apply variants to several circuits 603
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
13
Part I – Introduction
Introduction
DDS-CAD 7.3
14
Introduction Strategies for handling projects Basic functions Adjustments, extensions, configuration Index
Introduction
The model – the core of the DDS philosophy Erro
r!
Product database Item: Lamp

Part number Symbol number El. output
Description Dimensions Bulb

Lamps,
Lamps, outlets,
distribution boards,
cables, fuses, ... Position
X co-ordinate Z co-ordinate
Y co-ordinate Rotation
Drawing operation
Construct Object: Lamp
Position, location
Item
Basic functions
Distribution board
Text configuration
Object Colour, line
Database
Part list, project "Example"

UV01.1 UV01.1
Item no. Item name Quantity 1x36W 1x36W
Distributions
configuration
050502 AP Distribution board 24 TE 1 pc.
configuration
UV01
UV01.1 UV01.1
Cables and lines 1x36W 1x36W
010112 PVC sheathed cable NYM 3x1.5 18.39m UV01.2
UV01.2 UV01.1
Switching and connection devices
026102 EB Ecoline series switch 1 pc.
040131 UP Schuko outlet, single 2 pc. Installation plan
extensions,
Fluorescent lamps
extensions,
081006 LS lamp, free beaming 1x36W 4 pc.

F1 F2
Calculations
K1
Q1
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Feed Circuit 1 Circuit 2
Circuit diagram
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
15
Introduction
Erro The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

r!
2 The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

"Model … the building blocks of models are objects that are created by only
slight abstraction processes. In the user-friendly ideal case, objects are
matched to the originals so that (ideally) they are perceived, recognised and
processed by the human consciousness."
(Brockhaus encyclopaedia, multimedial premium, 2008)
In the foreword the development of three-dimensional virtual models was described

as the core concept of the DDS philosophy. But what does this mean, and how does
the model concept affect your day-to-day life?
Models consist of objects. When working with DDS-CAD, the use of virtual objects
that adhere to both graphical representational and reality-based properties is typical.
In other words, a virtual object is represented in the model by a symbol, but at the
same time refers to an actual object (e.g. a lamp). This is recorded and described in
the product database.
The item is a data record. It includes the item number, a description and the
addressing for a symbol for its graphical representation. In addition, the article
Basic functions
contains the relevant technical parameters of the real object. These include – for
example, for a fluorescent lamp – the electric output, the number of bulbs and the
physical dimensions. DDS-CAD uses these parameters in its calculation routines and
for properly setting the symbol sizes.
The three-dimensional building model creates the environment for installing the
objects. For example, the room geometry is used in the lighting calculation for the
selection and design of the lamps. The objects are introduced into the model by
automatic and manual drawing operations, where the object is given position
information (consisting of coordinates). The building model also has an effect here.
So for example, the installation height of the lamps is affected by the ceiling height or
by a suspended ceiling.
The structures for supply and operation are also modelled: a distribution system is
defined and the symbol of its housing is placed in the model. At the same time, the
distribution board is a database in which the final circuits are developed. You select
the type of circuit and determine the connection values and DDS-CAD suggests
equipment with suitable rated values. DDS-CAD automatically calculates the power
requirements of the distribution system, which are also referred to when constructing
the main distribution board. You connect the objects to the supplying distribution
board via cables. As a result, the circuit information flows to the connected object and
appears as text information (circuit label). Step by step, the model of the system
emerges, from which all documents and reports can be derived when needed:
• Representations of the electrical installation
• Distribution board documentation
• Part lists
• Calculation logs
Index
16
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
The model – the core of the DDS philosophy Erro
r!
Product database Item: Radiator

Part number Symbol number Dimensions
Description Manufacturer Capacity

Radiator
Pipes Position
Valves X co-ordinate Z co-ordinate
...
Y co-ordinate Rotation
Drawing operation
Object: Radiator
DDS-CAD building model Position, location
Item
Label
Attributes
Basic functions
Drawing
configuration
configuration
Item no. Item name Quantity
Heating – Technical equipment

GF978A Gas boiler burner 15kW 1 pc.
Heating – Piping
SS0912 Copper pipes, rods 5m 18x1 12.50m
Calculations SS0913 Copper pipes, rods 5m 22x1 23.85m
extensions,
extensions,
Heating – Piping formed parts

BE1808 CU Elbow fitting 90° 18x1 10 pc.
BE1809 CU Elbow fitting 90° 22x1 18 pc
Radiators and accessories

HKV D10 Radiator valve DN10 4 pc.
HKV D10 Lock shield valve DN10 4 pc.
Adjustments,
PK01512 Plan compact type 11 2 pc.

Adjustments,

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
17
Introduction
Erro The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

r!
The model – the core of the DDS philosophy

(plumbing and heating)

"Model … the building blocks of models are objects that are created by only
slight abstraction processes. In the user-friendly ideal case, objects are
matched to the originals so that (ideally) they are perceived, recognised and
processed by the human consciousness."
(Brockhaus encyclopaedia, multimedial premium, 2008)
In the foreword the development of three-dimensional virtual models was described

as the core concept of the DDS philosophy. But what does this mean, and how does
the model concept affect your day-to-day life?
Models consist of objects. When working with DDS-CAD, the use of virtual objects
that adhere to both graphical representational and reality-based properties is typical.
In other words, a virtual object is represented in the model by a symbol, but at the
same time refers to an actual object (e.g. a radiator). This is recorded and described
as an item in the product database.
Basic functions
The item is a data record. It includes the item number, a description and the
addressing for a symbol for its graphical representation. In addition, the article
contains the relevant technical parameters of the real object. These include – for
example, for a radiator – the output and the dimensions. DDS-CAD uses these
parameters in its calculation routines and for properly setting the symbol sizes.
The three-dimensional building model creates the environment for installing the
objects. You can use it to simulate the conditions of the real building and to model
the building services system. The objects are introduced into the model by automatic
and manual drawing operations, where the object is given position information
(consisting of coordinates). All input and calculated data are used continuously and
processed further internally. This principle can be explained using the heating system
as an example:
The structures of the building model are divided so that you can enter all data for the
heat load calculation according to DIN EN 12831. You enter the geographic location
and meteorological conditions for the building. You assign usage requirements for
the individual rooms and the physical properties for the components. DDS-CAD
calculates the standard heat load of the individual rooms and the building. The
results are used to calculate the underfloor heating and radiators. DDS-CAD designs
the heating surfaces according to the room-specific requirements and determines the
flow rates and pressure losses. These are used as input data by the pipe network
calculation.
All results of this process are derived from the model:

• Drawings on paper or in PDF or DWG/DXF format
• Part lists
• Printouts of the calculations in standardised forms
Index
18
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
An introduction to DDS-CAD Erro
r!
3 An introduction to DDS-CAD

3.1 Starting the program
Start DDS-CAD by double clicking on the DDS-CAD 7.3 icon on your desktop. This
will take you to the project level. The list of drawings of the most recently edited
project will appear on the screen:
Basic functions
The first time the program is launched, it automatically opens the "Start" project. You
configuration
can use this project to try out and test the software. However, it is not suitable for
configuration
editing your own projects. You will need to create and manage your own projects for
this purpose.
3.2 Creating and managing projects extensions,
3.2.1 Project setup and the structure of the drawings list

extensions,
In terms of content, a project in DDS-CAD can be compared to a building. From a

technical point of view, it is a folder that stores all relevant data. These data include
the floor plans and facilities of the various storeys, schematics, detailed drawings,
parts lists and calculation logs. All data produced by DDS-CAD automatically end up
Adjustments,
in the project folder. External data (such as floor plans that are sent to you) have to
Adjustments,
be saved in the project folder manually (see 4.2.1, page 34).
A project is divided into several levels and is managed through the list of drawings.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
19
Introduction
Erro An introduction to DDS-CAD

r!
Project Menu...
(1)
(5)
(2) (3) (4)

2
The dialogue box is divided according to application types (1) . For each application
Basic functions
type, the drawings are listed along with the following information:
(2) Indicator that a drawing file exists

The entries marked by "+" denote that there is a drawing file available. If this symbol
is missing, it means the information has been created in the project, but a drawing file
has not yet been created.
(3) Name of the drawing file

The names of the drawing files are formed
ppppGnnn.bim automatically and consist of three components. The
first four characters are taken from the project name.
Projec Drawing number

The fifth character is a code digit that identifies the
Application type:
1 ... Architecture application type. The last three characters form the
6 ... Electrical drawing number.
engineering
7 ... Air
conditioning/ventilation
The drawing number helps you to organise the internal
8 structure of the project (see below).
(4) Drawing specific details

For each drawing, you can enter text that is also used in the title field. Clicking Info
takes you to the input dialogue box. To manage the global project details, click Info
(5).
The internal structure of the project is organised (with the individual application types
in mind) by assigning a three-digit drawing number (from 000 to 999). Several
number ranges are reserved within this spectrum for various purposes. DDS-CAD
therefore uses the respective number to assign the drawing to one of the following
scopes of functions and provides the necessary functions in the user interface.
Meaning of the drawing numbers in DDS-CAD
2
The availability of the application types is controlled by the licence.
Index
20
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
000 … 099 For modelling the storeys in the respective application type. The user
interface includes the functions of the building model and the technical

building services for the respective application type. You can therefore
develop a building with a maximum of 100 storeys.
100 … 498 For the construction of other detailed and auxiliary drawings. You can only
use the technical building services functions of the respective application
type.
499 For the compilation of all storeys into a building.
500 … 899 This range of numbers is only relevant to the electrical engineering
application type and serves as the distribution board documentation. In
each drawing, you can show the internal structure of a distribution board.
The user interface includes functions for managing and building up the
different sheets.
900 … 999 For the construction of all kinds of schematics (e.g. cabling diagram,
system schematic, etc.) You can call up schematic symbols from all
application types in one uniform user interface and combine them with
each other.
In the project structure, you must ensure the logical arrangement of the storeys. Each
storey should be considered individually and the sequence of numbers must
correspond to the actual arrangement of the storeys from bottom to top. In this case a
Basic functions
storey is classed as the parts of the building where the floor essentially forms a
common plane. In the illustrations you can see two possible examples of a building
structure, each of which represent a functional project structure:
Whereas on the
left all storeys
003 005
have the same
geometry and
are located
002
DZ 004
DZ4
003 directly above
DZ3
one another,
DZ DZ2 001
configuration
001 002 DZ1
those on the
configuration
right are offset
DZ0 DZ0 against each
000 000
other.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
21
Introduction

r!
The sequence in the list of drawings must conform to the floors consecutive in height
(DZ). The difference in height from the floor of the current storey to the floor of the
next storey (DZ) can be adjusted (see 5.4.1.2, page 73).
3.2.2 Using the list of drawings in project management

3.2.2.1 Creating a new project
You can create new projects without
(1) having to close any drawings that you
(2)
may have open:
 Enter the project name (1). Create
(2) is enabled.
 Click Create (2). A query box asks
you if you want to save the current
project. A new project folder is cre-
ated in the root directory. (The il-
lustration shows part of Windows
Explorer).
Basic functions
3.2.2.2 Switching between projects

You can switch between projects without
having to close any drawings that you
may have open. To do this, select the
project in "Project". DDS-CAD
displays a query box to verify that the
current data should be saved.
3.2.2.3 Creating a new drawing in the project

You have to create a new drawing for example, if the prepared list of drawings
contains too few storeys. For the following example, it is assumed that six levels in
project 1 are not sufficient. One more level needs to be created.
(1)
(4)
(2) (3)
 Select the application type (1).

 Enter the new drawing number (2) (cf. 3.2.1, page 19).
Index
22
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Click Add (3). The "Information for model: ..." dialogue box appears.

 Enter a description for the new drawing (4), and click OK . A new row has
been added to the list of drawings.
3.2.2.4 Deleting a drawing from the project
An existing drawing
can be removed from
the current project.
(1)
Files with the *.BIM extension contain the plan of

the storey up to now and/or the distribution and (2)
all subordinated presentations and views (cf. (3)
3.3.2, page 26).
Basic functions
(4)
Files with the *.RDB extension contain the
building model of the storey. (cf. chapter 5, from
page 47).
 Highlight the entry of the drawing you wish to delete and click Delete (1). The
"Delete files..." dialogue box appears. It contains a list of the files that are asso-
ciated with the drawing to be deleted.
 Select the desired function (2) or (3). The entry or entries are removed from the
list. However, you can undo the operation by clicking Cancel .
configuration
 If you want to remove the entry from the list of drawings, check "Delete only
configuration
the description" (4)
 Click OK to perform the operation.
Note
If you only check "Delete only the description" (4) without highlighting the
extensions,
associated file with the *.BIM extension, this only removes the entry from the list of
extensions,
drawings. The drawing file is not physically deleted but only "hidden" in the list of
drawings.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
23
Introduction

r!
3.2.3 Notes on the root directory for projects
All projects are created in an active root directory. You enter the path to this directory
during the installation routine. However, you can structure your project filing more
accurately by creating additional root directories and switching between them. In this
3
way, you can allocate your projects according to your own filing structure . To do this,
use the "Set Current Project Directory" function.
Basic functions
Calling the "Set Current Project Directory" function.

 Close all drawings and dialogue boxes.
 Also close the list of drawings by clicking End . You will get to the project level
and will receive access to the "Set Current Project Directory" function.
Creating a new root directory

 Click New . The "Edit project/user directory" dialogue box appears.
 Enter a description for the new root directory.
 Set the desired path.
 Click OK . The root directory has been added to the list. You can enable the
root directory and create projects in it.
Enabling another root directory

 Select the desired root directory by double clicking . The dialogue box is
closed, the selected root directory is enabled. You get access to the projects
within this directory via the list of drawings.
3
Create the directory structure according to your own needs, for example by the year the project started, the name of your client
or other criteria.
Index
24
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
3.3 At the drawing level

3.3.1 The user interface
The user interface of an open drawing consists of several elements:
Menu bar
Execute command The message line pro- The toolbar contains general
vides information on the functions and access to the work-
Command input field ing modes (see below).
One function can be
launched per command.
The application is infre-
t
The docking window

contains several functions
(see below).
The toolbox contains the

specific functions of the
Basic functions
active working mode (see
toolbar below).
The status bar contains various information,
such as the coordinates of the cursor posi-
tions, the current layer, the object used, etc.
3.3.1.1 Toolbar and working modes

The toolbar gives you access to the most important common functions and allows
you to switch between the available working modes:
configuration
configuration
Project menu (page 19) Import and drawing manager (page 80)
Save Building model List of part drawings
Print (page 368) Measure List of sections

extensions,
extensions,
Undo Views (page 389) Part list (page 369)
Preparing for print

Adjustments,
(page 363)
Adjustments,
Working modes
The working mode is the working Text, labels
environment for a specific range of tasks. (page 488)
Switching to a different working mode
changes the content of the toolbox and
enables access to the respective
functions.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
25
Introduction

r!
3.3.1.2 Docking window
The DDS Explorer lists all open

drawings and shows the internal
structures. You can quickly switch
between drawings, models, presentations
and views (see below).
When opening the Help (for the current

function) the tab is automatically
activated.
The Room list is created when creating

the building model (see chapter 5,
page 47). You receive access to the
selected room.
The QuickEditor contains the command

list, which is written continuously while
the model is being constructed. The
command list makes internal connections
clear, which is why it is referred to where
Basic functions
The Change list stores all operations

since the last time the file was opened or
saved. The change list can be used to
undo multiple operations in one step (see
20.2, page 510).
3.3.2 The internal structure of a DDS drawing

4
In 3.2.1 we stated that there are various functional areas in a DDS project . In
addition, a DDS drawing is characterized internally by a multi-layered structure. Use

the DDS Explorer to navigate in the project and/or to switch between structure levels
(by double clicking ):
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Opened drawings Models Presentations Views
3.3.2.1 Level 1 – Open drawings

The top level lists all open drawings with the icon and description of the application
type, the drawing number and the first line of the drawing information.
4
The drawing number is used to decide whether the current drawing is suitable, for example, for modelling a storey or for the
construction of a circuit schematic.
Index
26
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
3.3.2.2 Level 2 – Models

Each drawing is divided into just one working model and any number of plot layouts:
The working model is the area of engineering activity and source of all derived
documents. Here you can visualise the initial situation (the floor plan), carry out
5
necessary demand assessments and model the building services according to your
requirements. The usual strategy here – the gradual development, assessment and
selection of different solutions – is implemented in the working model.
In the plot layout you can prepare a drawing sheet for formalised transmission. To do
6
this, you combine the drawing representations derived from the working model with
7 8 9
layout elements and explanations . However, the actual drawing output is not
connected to the use of the "plot layout" work area. If the formal layout design is
10
dispensable, you can display each presentation of the working model directly . To
build a plot layout, refer to chapter 16.3, from page 363.
3.3.2.3 Level 3 – Presentations
A model can be presented in multiple ways. The main application of this structure
11
level is in the working model . Editing is possible everywhere, changes in one
Basic functions
presentation are automatically transferred to all other presentations. There are
essentially four types:
The "2D" presentation contains the plan view of the entire working model and uses
graphical symbols to represent the objects. On the other hand, the various views of
the 3D presentation show all objects as solid bodies.
12
A part drawing shows a defined region of the working model in plan view, using
13
graphical symbols. A section shows a defined region of the working model as a
view and represents the objects as solid bodies.
configuration
3.3.2.4 Level 4 – Views
configuration
Several views can be produced from the 3D presentations of the working model.
They are created automatically when the perspective is changed and remain saved.
To learn more about using the various perspectives and their possibilities, read
chapter 17.4, page 389.
Adjustments,
Adjustments, extensions,
extensions,
5
e.g. heat load calculation or lighting calculation
6
Summary views, part drawings (see 16.1, page 366), sections (see 16.2, page 369)
7
Sheets of different formats, title fields (see 16.3.4, page 374)
8
Legends (see 16.3.4, page 374), text (see 19.4.3, page 509)
9
on paper, as PDF or DWG/DXF file
10
see 16.4, page 377 and 16.5, page 378
11
Plot layouts can only be presented in 2D and in plan view (other representations would not make sense).
12
see 16.1, page 366
13
see 16.2, page 369
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
27
Introduction
Part II – Strategies for handling projects

General electrical design
The following graphic illustrates possible ways of modelling of an electro-technical

system in DDS-CAD:
Possible courses of action in the general electrical equipment
Chapter 3.2
Page 19 Create project Chapter 5
Page 47
Chapter 4
Page 32
Apply Construct
floor plan (DWG) building model
Basic functions
Distribution board Plan installation equipment Plan

distribution board installation system
Individual objects
Chapter 12
Create Object groups Chapter 18.2 Page 270
distribution plans Page 401
Objects from DWG Chapter 18.3

Chapter 11 Page 417
Page 237 Lighting, lighting Chapter 21.3

calculation Page 523
Chapter 13.2
Chapter 14 Page 307
Page 346
Draw cables and lines Chapter 13.5
Page 332
Working in the floor plan
Chapter 16.5 Chapter 16.3

Design and
Page 369 Create part list Page 363
print layout
Index
28
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
The first step required is the creation of a project. You can then decide whether to
start editing the floor plan (grey area) or whether you simply want to develop a

distribution system with the associated distribution board plans. Both options are
possible.
The first steps in the floor plan depend on the requirements of the project. If you have
received DWG/DXF files of the floor plans, you can import these into the DDS model.
If you are working on the basis of a sketch or a printout, you can construct the floor
plan using the functions of the building model.
Once you have the finished floor plan you can get on with planning the installation
systems or installation equipment. To do this it may be necessary – even if a floor
plan is available as a DWG/DXF file – to define some or all rooms with the functions
of the building model. In the case of the lighting design in particular, a defined space
is required for the application of different functions.
You need to connect cables for a component label of the installation equipment
(circuit, distribution board), which requires that a distribution system is available. You
can create a part list at any time. DDS-CAD counts all visible objects and calculates
the drawn lengths. Similarly, you can derive a layout (sheet, with stamp, legends,
etc.) from the model at any time.
Basic functions
Planning work (lightning protection)
Load product database
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions, configuration
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
29
Introduction
Designing PV systems
After you have created your project, you can start building it. The process for editing
a photovoltaic system (PV) essentially follows the steps below:
• Plot available area
• Design system
• Installation planning
The available area can be an open area of ground or a roof area. The description
below is based on a roof-top system. The geometric and geographic parameters of
the building must be known. Possible starting material is a building floor plan on
paper or in DWG format, which you have created on site. Basically, you can define a
roof area freely without taking into account the supporting building. However, to get a
realistic representation of the planned system, it is advantageous to model the entire
outer shell of the building.
Designing the system (as

described here) includes
Chapter 3.2
all operations of selecting
Page 19
Create project and arranging the PV
Basic functions
modules and their

Chapter 4 calculation and
Import Page 32 documentation.
DWG file
Installation planning is
Chapter 5.3.2 used to prepare the
Measure outdoor Page 52
floor plan structural implementation
of the system. You select
Chapter 5.3.7 the required assembly
Roofs and materials and design the
roof structures Page 62
support systems for the
PV modules. You mark

Design Presentation out the dimensions, place
system (Rendering) the circuitry of the PV
modules, and output the
drawing representations.
Installation Chapter Hiba!
planning A hivatkozási
forrás nem
Chapter Hiba! Chapter Hiba!

A hivatkozási A hivatkozási
forrás nem forrás nem
Index
30
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Heating/plumbing/ventilation

Create project
Chapter 3.2
Page 19 Chapter 4
Page 32
Apply
accept
Chapter 7
Page 89 Develop building model,
Roof
Building data Walls
Heat load Ceilings
Rooms Components
Transmission Floors
heat loss Geometry Geometry
Doors/windo
Ventilation Properties Properties
heat loss
Chapter 5
Natural ventilation Page 47
Basic functions
Mechanical ventilation
Volume flows Divide heating load Sanitary objects
Switchboard Underfloor heating
Air passages Radiator
configuration
configuration
Duct system
Build pipe networks
Calculate heating Calculate potable

Pressure loss calculation pipe network water pipe network
extensions,
"Air conditioning/ventilation" module

extensions,
"Plumbing/heating" module
Design and print layout Part list

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Chapter 6 Chapter 16.3 Chapter 16.5 Chapter 8

Page 81 Page 363 Page 369 Page 119
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
31
Introduction
Erro Import external data

r!
4 Importing external data
When preparing a project and during the course of a project, you receive drawings
information and data to assist you in you work: floor plans, detailed plans, schematics
These include drawings
This chapter deals with

Basic functions
Index
32
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Import external data Erro
r!
4.1 Notes on file formats

4.1.1 DWG and DXF
DWG and DXF files are standard formats for exchanging drawings between different
CAD systems. Due to their historic development, these files are also the most flexible
and most suitable medium for working with DDS-CAD. You can import these
drawings into the model and in most cases use them directly for your own work. If
changes to the content are required, you can first open these files with an integrated
DWG/DXF editor and edit them (see chapter 1, from page 516).
4.1.2 Portable Document Format (*.PDF)

PDF was developed for the platform-independent distribution of electronic
documents. The recipient can view and print the document true to the original and, if
necessary, add comments but not change the content. PDF files are also used to
transfer drawings. However, because of that limitation they are less suited for use in
CAD systems. If no DWG/DXF files are available, then the PDF file is still the next
best solution. Please note the following points and recommendations for use:
Basic functions
For multi-page documents, only the first page is imported.
If you need other pages, you have to save them separately. To do this, create
individual PDF files with the required pages.
The import process internally creates a graphic file (*.PNG).

Due to this fact, there is a relatively high load on computing capacity. The image
structure and reactions from DDS-CAD can be slowed down as a result. We
therefore recommend that you use the PDF file as a template to reconstruct the
necessary drawing content with DDS-CAD. For floor plans, use the functions of the
building model (see chapter 5, page 47) and for other content use the general
configuration
geometric functions (see chapter 1, page 431). DDS-CAD detects lines and points in
configuration
the PDF file and you can use the snap functions. Finally, remove the PDF file from
the model and continue to work with the original DDS objects.
4.1.3 Raster image (*.BMP; *.GIF; *.JPG; *.PNG; *.TIF;

*.WMF)
extensions,
These pixel formats are mainly included for three reasons:

extensions,
• To receive a scanned floor plan

• To allow the use of aerial photography for planning photovoltaic systems
• To allow the inclusion of photographs (e.g. lamps, sanitary objects) into the
plot layout
Adjustments,
In the first two cases, proceed as with PDF files: Trace the structures required with
Adjustments,
DDS functions and then remove the image from the model. Raster images do not
contain any useful geometric information about points or lines. The snap functions
therefore do not have any effect.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
33
Introduction

r!
4.2 The general import process

4.2.1 Copying files to the project

To ensure consistent data management, external
drawing files must also be copied into the project
folder (cf.3.2.1, page 19). If you skip this step you
will likely experience problems when managing
14
DWG/DXF the project .
Copying with Windows Explorer

The use of Windows Explorer allows for a structured data storage.
You can clearly and easily manage incoming and outgoing data. We
recommend this option, especially for projects with a large number of
different files or planning states.
Note
Basic functions
The path of the active project is displayed in the title bar (1) of the program
window.
(1)
Copy function in DDS-CAD

By using the internal copy function, you do not have to exit DDS-CAD and do not
have to use any other software. Packed data (*.ZIP) are automatically extracted. If
you receive altered files with the same, the originals will not be overwritten. The date
and time are added to the file name of the original.
 Copy the file attachment from an email to any directory.

 From the menu, select "Insert"  "File" 
"Copy DWG/DXF/IFC files into Projectdir". The "DWG, DXF, IFC, ZIP, PDF-File"
dialogue box appears.
 Open the path and select the file by double-clicking . The file has been copied
into the project (and extracted at the same time where required). A message
provides confirmation.
 Click OK . You can perform the import.
Note
If you have replaced an existing DWG/DXF file in the project folder, the new
planning state is not yet visible in the working model. You have to activate the new
file (see 4.3.4.3, page 45).
14
For example, if you were to transfer the project folder to another computer and open the project there, the floor plans would
be missing. Instead you would see the message "Folgende Datei wurde nicht gefunden…" (The following file was not found...)
Index
34
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
4.2.2 Importing

If you have copied the data into the project folder, you can perform the import:
Import- and Model Admin
(2)
Basic functions
(1) (3)
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function. The "Inserted file administrator"
 Click New (1).
configuration
configuration
 Select the file (2). The "Locate File” dialogue box appears.
 Click OK (3). The drawing appears on the screen.
Note:
Up to this point, the procedure described above applies to any import process.
extensions,
The purpose of the operation (e.g. importing a floor plan or photo for the plot
extensions,
layout) has so far been irrelevant. In the case of a floor plan (that you intend to use
for planning) further checks and adjustments may be necessary. For more
information, please refer to the following chapter 4.3.
Adjustments,
4.3 Notes on working with floor plans

Adjustments,
4.3.1 Requirements for imported floor plans

The previous chapter 4.2 described the general import process as it applies to any
type of drawing file. When working with floor plans further checks and adjustments
may be necessary in order to make use of all DDS-CAD options. Based on the
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
35
Introduction

r!
assumption that you are going to be modelling the building installation of a multi-
storey building, the following rules apply:
• The size of the floor plan must conform to the scale of 1:1
• Each storey requires a separate drawing
• All storeys are precisely positioned on top of one another
• Remove any unnecessary information
4.3.1.1 The size of the floor plan must conform to the scale of 1:1
While modelling in DDS-CAD you work at the 1:1 scale. That means a measure in
the DDS model always matches the corresponding measure in the real world. The
default sizes of all components and objects are coordinated in this form and all
internal calculations work on this basis.
The size of the imported floor plan must therefore be checked and where necessary
corrected by a scaling factor. The operation required to do this matches all importable
file types (see 4.3.2, page 38).
4.3.1.2 Each storey requires a separate drawing

Basic functions
Chapter 3.2.1 referred to the internal structure and the logical arrangement of the
storeys in the project. Accordingly, each project represents a building and each
drawing one storey. When transferring floor plans there are three possible options in
terms of the arrangement and distribution of the storeys.
• Each storey is supplied in a separate file
• One file contains several storeys
• One storey has been divided into several files
Each storey in a separate file

This option requires the least amount of effort:
Index
36
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
One file contains several storeys

If you receive floor plans of all storeys in a single document, it is necessary to split
them up. When working with a DWG/DXF file, you can perform this operation entirely
in DDS-CAD:
First import the original file into
each storey. From this, use the
Ba- Gro Upp
Ba- Gro DWG/DXF editor to isolate the
Base- Ground_flo Upper_floo desired storey and save the
result with a different file name
Upp
(see chapter 1, from page 516)
Building
Building.dwg
One storey has been divided into several files

DWG/DXF files Model in DDS-CAD It may be that one storey has
Split floor plan Complete floor plan been divided up and is sent in
several files. You may need to
merge all parts through several
import operations. In the
Basic functions
graphic you can see the split
floor plan of a ground floor. To
edit with DDS-CAD two import
Ground floor part 1
processes are necessary. The
partial floor plans must be
combined precisely and in the
correct position (cf. 4.3.3,
page 41).
Ground floor part 2
configuration
configuration
4.3.1.3 All storeys are precisely positioned on top of one another
When building the network structure in a multi-storey building, vertical pipes (e.g.
pipes, cable trays, ventilation ducts) must pass from one storey to the next and
openings have to be planned. Therefore the correct position of the floor plan in the
model is absolutely crucial.
extensions,
extensions,
Position accuracy is the state in which

floor plans of all storeys are oriented
around a common reference point. The
Ba Gr Up graphic shows an example with three
storeys, where the position accuracy is
Adjustments,
given.
Adjustments,
The procedure for producing position

accuracy for imported DWG/DXF files
is found in 4.3.3, page 41.
4.3.1.4 Removing unnecessary information

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
37
Introduction

r!
CAD data contain a variety of information. In addition to the actual floor plan with
walls, doors, windows, and roofs there are also dimensions, text, layout elements
(title fields, legends), crop marks and much more. Many of these elements are not
needed during planning. In well-organised drawings they can simply be hidden:
Switch layer by clicking
 Select "Find layers of lines in drawing and turn them off” function. The cursor
turns into a crosshair.
 Point to an element in the drawing whose layer you would like to hide. Number
and name of the layer are displayed as information.
 Click . The layer is hidden.
 Click . The context menu appears and lists all hidden layers. In this way you
Basic functions
can re-activate each layer.
This method works for DWG/DXF files with differentiated and consistent layer
structure. In these cases, cleaning up the drawings is possible without editing in the
DWG/DXF editor. If on the other hand, there are many different object classes on a
layer or the layer structure has not been observed consistently, hiding a layer will
result in the loss of necessary information. In this situation, you should consider
editing the source file in the DWG/DXF editor (see chapter 21, page 516).
4.3.2 Checking and correcting the scale ratio

To model a system, the size of an imported floor plan must be adjusted to the actual
15
dimensions . That means an object dimensioned in the drawing must correspond
exactly to the size labelled during the review by the DDS "Measure between Two
Points” function. During the operation, first check the situation using a known
reference distance. Dimension lines or doors for example are suitable as reference
distances. If the measurement result differs from the known length, it is necessary to
determine a factor and use this to scale the floor plan. To do this, follow the steps
below:
• Measure reference distance
• Evaluate measurement result. Determine scaling factor
• Scale floor plan
15
The default sizes of all components and objects are coordinated and all internal calculations work on this basis.
Index
38
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
4.3.2.1 Measuring the reference distance

Measure
(1)
(2)
(3) The reference section is dimensioned in the

drawing at 2m. However, the measurement
results of this section show the value of 200m.
 Select the "Measure between Two Points” function. The cursor turns into a
Basic functions
crosshair. The message line shows the "Locate the first point to be measured”
prompt.
 Click the first end of the reference distance (1). The cursor shows the end of a
dynamic line (2).
 Click the second end of the reference distance. The "Measure between Two
Points” dialogue box appears. You can evaluate the measurement result
4.3.2.2 Evaluating the measurement result and determining the scaling factor
configuration
If the measurement result is
configuration
different to the labelled
(1)
length, you have to
determine the scaling
factor. In the example, it is
clear that the floor plan is
(2)
too large by a factor of 100.
extensions,
The scaling factor is then
extensions,
0.01. Other situations (for

example, after importing a
(3) PDF file) may result in
irregular values. In this case
use the scaling calculator.
Adjustments,
 Start the scaling calculator.

Adjustments,
 Enter the measurement result, the actual length of the reference distance and
the current scaling factor (1). DDS-CAD calculates the scaling as a scale ratio
and factor (2). You can also note down the calculated value or copy it to the
Windows clipboard.
 Calculated results in the Windows clipboard: Click on the (blue) text in the de-
scription field (3).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
39
Introduction

r!
4.3.2.3 Scaling the floor plan
Essentially, there are two ways to carry out the size adjustment. In this case,
adjusting in the DDS model (1) is the easiest, fastest and most common option. You
alter the size of the floor plan by using the previously determined scaling factor (see
below). In some problem cases it may be necessary to edit the source file (2), if the
scaling in the DDS model is not sufficient.
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
Adjustment in the DDS model

 Open the properties of the import
(3) object (1) and switch to the "
Rot./Pos./Scale” tab (3).

 Manually enter the factor (4) or
retrieve it (after having used the
(4) scaling calculator) from the Win-
dows clipboard (5). All values
change automatically.
(5)  Click OK The drawing is scaled
by the factor entered.
 Check that the operation was
successful. Measure the refer-
ence distance again.
Editing the source file

This operation is a backup method if the scaling factor is too large or too small. In this
case you open the DWG/DXF file in the editor and change the definition of the units
of length (see 21.2.3, page 521).
Index
40
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
4.3.3 Accurate placement of the storeys

Position accuracy is the state in which
floor plans of all storeys are oriented
around a common reference point. The
Ba Gr Up graphic shows an example with three
storeys, where the position accuracy is
given. When designing ceiling openings
and the handover of risers, the position
accuracy must be checked and
corrected if necessary.
A typical situation arises when in the

original DWG/DXF file, all storeys are
tiled on a single sheet. This means that
Ba- Grou each storey has a different relationship
seme nd
to the zero point of the original drawing.
The description of the following
Uppe
operations uses the terms below:
r floor
Building
Basic functions
Reference storey
The reference storey is used to check and create the position accuracy of all other
storeys. Its position is assumed to be correct.
Reference point
The reference point is a defined position, which is ideally located in the floor plans of
all storeys. For example, corners of chimneys, elevator shafts or stairwells are
suitable for this purpose. You choose the reference point yourself in terms of
suitability for purpose.
configuration
configuration
4.3.3.1 Checking position accuracy
When checking the position accuracy, you compare the positions of the floor plans in
the current storey to the reference storey. To do this, overlay the reference storey
over the model of the current storey. In the following example, the DWG/DXF import
has been completed for all storeys. The basement will serve as the reference. The
extensions,
drawing of the ground floor is open and is to be checked.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
41
Introduction

r!
Show DDS drawing
(1)
Gro
Ba-
(2) Ground floor in the correct posi-

tion, hide reference floor.
(3)
(4)
Gro
Ba-
Basic functions
Ground floor not in the correct

position, correct position.
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function.

The "Inserted file administrator” dialogue box appears. It lists all existing draw-
ings belonging to the current application type (1) of the project under the tab
“Complpete List of All Models in the Project”. The "On" column (2) contains an
indicator that displays the current status. Storeys with the symbol are invisi-
ble. Storeys with the symbol are visible.
 Click once on the symbol of the reference storey. The symbol changes to
and further settings are enabled.
It is useful to use different colours to distinguish between the storeys:
 Check "Default” (3). The colour selection (4) is enabled.

 Select a colour and click OK . The reference storey will be shown in the se-
lected colour. You can evaluate the position accuracy.
4.3.3.2 Producing position accuracy
Two operations are used to produce the correct positioning, which are useful in
different situations. You can either redefine the insertion point in the source file or
move the imported floor plan in the DDS model.
Defining the reference point in the source file

In this process the source file (DWG/DXF file) is opened, edited and saved again. In
the course of editing, you redefine the insertion point (origo) at the selected reference
point. The method allows you to clearly define and label its position. This is
necessary when distributing your own design as a DWG/DXF file to a third party; the
recipient can easily integrate your file into his own design. The disadvantage is the
fact that new (changed) DWG/DXF files must be edited in the same way.
Index
42
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Conclusion:

Use this method if you need a defined origo. This is necessary if you will be
sending your design to a third party for further processing.
Description: See 21.2.4, page 522.
Moving an imported floor plan in the DDS model

In this method, it is not especially necessary to adjust the DWG/DXF file. In the case
of changes occurring subsequently, it is highly probable that the position will still be
correct, even after the file is replaced. It is also easier to maintain changed files.
When transferring the design to a third party, no clear insertion point is present.
Therefore it could be more difficult for the recipient to integrate your design.
Conclusion:
Use this method if you do not need to integrate into the design of other project
participants, or if you are not permitted to move the insertion point (origo).
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
 Select the moved floor plan (in this case the ground floor) by clicking . The en-
tire floor plan is shown as a selected object.
 Click . The context menu appears.
configuration
 Select "Move Object(s) with Free Reference Point”. The message line shows the
configuration
"Choose Reference Point for Move” prompt.
 Click on the reference point of the moved floor plan (for example, the corner of
a chimney). The entire floor plan becomes the moveable symbol.
 Move the floor plan to the reference point of the reference storey (2). The point
captures the cursor and holds it tight.
extensions,
extensions,
 Click . The position of the previously moved floor plan is corrected. The refer-
ence points of the two floor plans are congruent (3).
 Hide the reference storey.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
4.3.4 Notes on importing altered plans

Adopting a modified floor plan into the current project is a frequently recurring action.
Choose one of the following three operations:
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
43
Introduction

r!
• Change external reference in the import object (see 4.3.4.1, page 44)
• Overlay floor plans (see 4.3.4.2, page 44)
• Overwrite old DWG/DXF file with new file (see 4.3.4.3, page 45)
4.3.4.1 Changing an external reference in the import object
At the start of the project you have imported the first version of the floor plan as a
DWG/DXF file. The DDS model thus contains an import object, which you can edit at
any time. If a visual comparison between the old and new design state is not
necessary, we recommend that you change the reference as a practical solution.
Application

Basic functions
 Copy the new files into the project (see 4.2.1, page 34).
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function. The dialogue box appears.
 Click on the entry of the floor plan to be replaced. The context menu appears.
 Select the "Edit Properties” function. The "Locate File" dialogue box appears.
 Click ... . The file selection dialogue box appears.
 Select the new DWG/DXF file.
 Click OK . The new floor plan appears on the screen.

4.3.4.2 Overlaying floor plans – importing an additional file
Overlaying the new floor plan over the existing floor plan
makes it possible to compare two design states. The graphic
shows a suggested example. The original floor plan (grey) is
Index
44
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
overlaid with the newly imported floor plan (black). The different colours visualize the
differences between the two design states.

Application
 Copy the new file into the project
and process the import (see 4.2,
page 34). The new floor plan ap-
pears on the screen and is placed
over the previously drawn objects.
 Rearrange the sequence of the floor
plans in the model. To do this, select
the entry in the list and check
"Bring to back” or "Bring to front”.
4.3.4.3 Overwriting an old DWG/DXF

file with a new file
Overwriting an existing DWG/DXF file with a new file with the same name (for
example, by a copy operation in Windows Explorer) is not recommended for reasons
of data management and verification. Nevertheless, this procedure is possible.
Basic functions
However, the design stage cannot be seen immediately after the copying process.
The new file must also be enabled in the import object:
extensions,
configuration
 Open the properties of the import object.

 Click Open in new window . The new DWG/DXF file is opened in the editor.
 In the DWG/DXF editor: Save and close the file. The new design state is visible.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
4.4 Imported files when exporting the model

During a project you may need to send your work to other people as a DWG or DXF
file. If you have imported DWG/DXF files into your DDS model, you can configure
how they behave during the export process. The settings are made either in the
"Insert File” dialogue box or in the imported files management:
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
45
Introduction

r!
Export model without imported file

Select this option to only allow the installations to be printed or exported, but not the
imported file.
Export model with imported file

Select this option to allow the installations and the imported file to be printed or
Basic functions
exported.
Export imported file as Xref

You should select this option to avoid large files when exporting to DWG/DXF. Using
this setting, only the installation is exported with an external reference to the imported
file. The recipient of your drawing needs the resulting DWG file AND the file you
imported.
Index
46
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5 Building model

The building model is a core element of the
DDS philosophy. It has drawing-related and
display functions and is also the basis for
most integrated calculations. Its importance
for successful project management
depends on the task at hand. You can
create the building model in several ways.
Building model
Chapter 5.1 Chapter 5.2 Chapter 5.3
Page 48 Page 49 Page 51
Components and
structural design
Enter building model
Basic functions
Requirements
graphically
Building model Areas

through graphical (outer contour)
t
Building model by IFC Chapter Hiba!
import A hivatkozási Rooms
forrás nem (inner contour)
Compile
building Chapter 5.5
Page 80 Doors/windows
configuration
Room text/
configuration
Roofs and roof structures room stamp
Automatic Suspended ceiling,

Skylights grid ceiling
roofs
Draw roof surfaces Gutters

extensions,
manually and rainwater

extensions,
i Chapter 5.3.7
Dormers Roof structures Page 62
Chapter 5.4
Adjustments,
Edit building model

Page 72
Adjustments,
Configure
structural units Ground plan and
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
47
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.1 Components and structural design
The graphic shows an overview of the structural design of the building model.
Accordingly, the building (=project) is divided into storeys (=drawing). One storey can
contain several regions and each region can in turn contain several rooms. The room
is composed of the components surrounding it.
Building The building is closely

connected to the current
DDS project. One
project can cover just
one building model.
A storey refers to the

parts of buildings that
form a common level.
Each storey
corresponds to a
drawing in the DDS
Storey project (see 3.2.1).
Basic functions
A region is the outer

framework for multiple
rooms. It specifies the
height of the rooms, the
exterior walls as well as
the floor and ceiling. A
region can comprise the
entire storey or only a
Region
part of it.
The room is the most

important structural unit

in the building model.
DDS-CAD uses the
information of a room for
calculations, displays
and data exchange
Room formats.
Ceiling Door
The term component
combines the surfaces
that make up a room:
Walls, floors, ceilings,
Component doors, windows and
roofs. Their properties
mainly affect the results
of the heat load
calculation.
Windows Floor Wall
Index
48
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.2 Requirements for the building model

5.2.1 Levels of detail according to the task at hand
In case there is no suitable IFC model available, a graphical capture of the floor plan
is necessary. You can adjust the complexity to the situation. This chapter describes
the various levels of detail from bottom to top:
Single region
A single region is sufficient if you only have to develop the outdoor installation of a
building. The graphical capture remains restricted to the outer building contour and
the roof. A typical example is the design of a PV system on the roof.
Individual rooms
The definition of individual rooms includes the graphical representation of room
contours, while considering the ceiling height and room designation. The method
presupposes the existence of a DWG/DXF file of the floor plan. The definition of the
region, the doors, windows and roof are omitted. This building model is sufficient for:
• Determining the building structure
• Determining room areas
Basic functions
• Inserting dynamic room texts/room stamps
• Sorting the parts list to rooms
• Transferring a room to the DIALux or Relux lighting calculation
• Installation of suspended ceilings
Complete floor plan ignoring the material properties

A completely captured floor plan also allows:
• A high degree of representational quality: You create the basis for three-
dimensional views, rendered displays and wall views.
configuration
• The complete building structure: If the results of a heat load calculation from an
configuration
external source are available, you can apply the standard heat load of the rooms
as information in the building model. You can take this as the basis for
developing the heating system.
In this case, you enter the complete building structure with regions, rooms, doors,
windows and roofs. The thermotechnical behaviour of the components is irrelevant,
extensions,
since a heat load calculation is not required. If you have to construct the floor plan
extensions,
manually (due to a lack of DWG/DXF file), remember to take note of the wall
thickness. In this way you ensure that the floor plan conforms to the dimensions of
the original. If you can get your hands on the floor plan of an imported DWG/DXF file,
you don't have to bear the wall thickness in mind. DDS-CAD automatically makes an
adjustment.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Complete floor plan including consideration of the material properties

The material properties of the components (U-value) are required for the heating
design.
Note:
The descriptions are based on the need to capture the floor plan in full including
consideration of the material properties.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
49
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.2.2 Requirements due to the heat load calculation
A complete building model with all material information is a necessary prerequisite for
a proper heat load calculation. During capture, when using doors and windows and
when drawing roofs, DDS-CAD always demands the assignment of an item from the
product database. By selecting an item you determine its physical properties and
thus the results of the heat load calculation. We can deduce a number of principles
from this fact:
• The same materials require the same item.

Different materials require different items.
If for example, there are two walls of equal thickness but different physical
properties (material, U-value) in the project, you will require two separate items.
If the required item (e.g. a special type of wall) is not available, you have to
create this item from scratch. The procedure is described in chapter 22.2.3,
from page 538.
• The different assignment of the item should already have taken place
when the room was defined.
In order to make the work easier and eliminate sources of error, you should
bear in mind the differentiation of the components when defining the room.
Basic functions
Assign the components with the same physical properties to the same items.
Subsequent correction of the item assignment is possible, but it means extra
work and is a source of error.
• The U-values can be corrected at any time.

If you have paid attention to the first two principles, you can correct the U-
valuesat any time: when defining the room (individually for each component
type) or in a subsequent systematic operation. Both procedures are described
in section 7.4.2, on page 105.
Index
50
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.3 Building model through graphical entry

5.3.1 General procedure
In the graphical entry of the floor plan, the contours of the regions and rooms are
entered. This task is made simpler by the previous import of a DWG/DXF file.
However, if you only have a drawing on paper, you then have to construct the floor
plan according to the original. In both cases the basic procedure is the same:
You start in each

Areas storey by defining
Chapter 5.3.2 Roofs
(outer contour) the regions. In this
Page 52
way you have
created the
Rooms Chapter 5.3.7 prerequisite for
Chapter 5.3.3 (inner contour) Page 62
Page 54 constructing the
roof. After defining
the room, you can
Room text/ Doors and Suspended ceiling, add room text,
room stamp grid ceiling doors, windows
windows
Basic functions
and suspended
ceilings.
Chapter 5.3.6 Chapter 5.3.4 Chapter 5.3.5
Page 61 Page 58 Page 60
You can access the functions when you open a drawing in the "Building" (1)
application type or activate the "Use Building" working mode in other application
types (2):
configuration
configuration
(1) (2) Use Building
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
51
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.3.2 Capturing a region
A region is the outer framework for multiple rooms. It

specifies the exterior walls as well as the floor and ceiling.
You draw the contour of the region as a polyline. The result
is a closed polygon which is provided with a height. The
following diagram describes the general procedure for
capturing a single region. There follows information on
special cases that require multiple regions in a single storey.
5.3.2.1 Procedure
Notes on "Define starting point"

Capturing a region Define region (floor/ceiling) Define the starting point at an outer corner
of the floor plan. If you are working on the
Start function basis of an imported DWG/DXF file, click
on a building corner. If you have to
Define construct the floor plan yourself, choose
starting point the zero point of the coordinate system as
the starting point. It is symbolised by the
Basic functions
"+" sign and snaps in the cursor if snap

Wall type points is enabled:
Draw contour
Close contour Notes on "Select New Side Type" with [W]

Selecting the wall type straight away is useful if you want to
avoid subsequent changes. As you continue, you can make a
Check new selection at any vertex. Press [W] again. If the
settings required wall type is not available, create a new item (see
22.2.3, page 538).

End
Notes on "Draw contour"

If the area has a polygonal character (left)
outline the contour. Select the counter-
clockwise drawing direction. For a rectangular
floor plan (right), you only need to define the
diagonal vertices of the area by clicking and
end the function with [Enter].
For tips on working with polylines, please read

page 439 onwards. You can also use auxiliary geometries to help you in constructing
a floor plan (see 19.3, page 479).
Index
52
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Notes on "Close contour" and "Check settings"

Once you have finished defining the area, the context
menu (click ) will offer several functions (also see
19.1.7, page 457).
If the contour is closed, DDS-CAD first asks for an item for the floor and ceiling of the
area. Once selected, the defined region is visible in the drawing with the drawn
contour (solid line) and a dashed helper line. The "Room Information" dialogue box
appears:
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Drawn contour Helper
The dialogue box lists each

component with a number. The
component selected in the list
appears in the drawing as a
selected object. Double clicking
takes you into editing mode,
from where you can correct the
wall type.
configuration
configuration
The settings apply by default for all rooms that are subsequently drawn in the region.
Therefore it is particularly important that the room height (1) is corrected. You can
use the description (2) to enter a name for the region. This name is used in the
various reports. The function ends when you confirm the settings with OK .
5.3.2.2 Notes on buildings with a courtyard

extensions,
extensions,
In the case of a ring-shaped

1st region (outer) building (with a courtyard) follow
the region capture procedure in
2nd region (cut-out)
two stages. First, define the
outer floor plan of the building
Adjustments,
and then the cutout for the

Adjustments,
courtyard.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
53
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.3.2.3 Notes on buildings with different heights on one storey
Multi-part buildings must be divided into different regions if the height of the building
parts are different:
The example shows a two-storey building. A

portion of the ground floor (region 1) is going
Up to be the staff rooms. Area 2 is a production
hall, whose height extends over almost two
Gr floors. In this situation, the ground floor has
Region 1 to be divided into two areas.
Region 2
When capturing the areas, make

(1) sure that they do not overlap.
Both areas must be separated
by a gap (1).
Basic functions
5.3.3 Entering rooms

When defining the room you enter the inner contours of a
room. Depending on the requirements, the following options
are available to you:
• Creating the room from DWG/DXF structures
• Manual graphical entry

• Automatic detection of residual areas
All three options should be considered equivalent. Select the option according to its
suitability to your needs.
5.3.3.1 Creating the room from DWG/DXF structures
You can transfer contours of rectangular rooms with doors, windows and room data
from an imported DWG DXF file. The rooms may be rectangular or trapezoidal. In
most cases, polygonal rooms must be defined manually. But even in these rooms,
you can then automatically transfer doors, windows and room data from the DWG
file.
The state of the starting material determines the effort required. In the best case, you
can capture the room contour, the doors and room data with a single click. However,
this possibility relies on the various elements being favourably positioned. It is
possible that you will need another click to transfer the room data, or you may have
to rely on a manual correction.
Index
54
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!

Preparation
The method requires the following conditions:
• The outer contour must be manually defined as a region (see 5.3.2, page 52).
• To retain an overview, the room database layers should be enabled.
• The floor plan must have been cleaned up. Inside the rooms, lines (e.g.
dimension lines, ceiling grids, helper lines, etc.) are not allowed in front of the
walls. Inside the room, the cursor must have a "clear view" to the wall lines. If
possible, only wall lines, doors, windows and room texts should remain visible:
Basic functions
Starting the function
 Start the “Define Rooms” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Select "Recognize DDS room object from selected DWG objects”. You can apply
the function or configure it.
Use function
(1)
configuration
Room definition
configuration
Configure function
extensions,
extensions,
(2)
Configuring the function

Adjustments,
In the default configuration, all options for capturing DWG/DXF structures are
Adjustments,
checked. In some cases, it may be necessary to exclude certain elements from being
captured after the function is started. For example, if the room data are no longer
current, or if doors are going to be replaced, the old objects do not have to be
transferred.
 Click again. The context menu lists all object classes that can be captured.
You can select each object class individually.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
55
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
 Change the status of the desired object class. The context menu is closed. You
can repeat this process for other object classes.
Using the function – capturing rooms

After the function is started, you move the cursor in the room to be captured. You
may need to find a suitable position because the cursor requires a "clear view" of the
room boundaries. DDS-CAD checks the status of the area surrounding the cursor. If
this area is bounded by four intersecting lines, the space in between is completely
filled in grey. DDS-CAD thus indicates that the area has been identified as a room.
The lines detected as the boundary are denoted by arrows (1).
 Click . The selected area is defined as a room. Depending on the configuration
and position of the cursor, the active object classes are captured. The function
remains active. You can add more rooms or capture object classes within the ac-
tive room that have not yet been detected.
Notes on doors
The function detects a door when capturing the room ("Interior Walls” object class) if
it is represented by a circular arc and opens into the captured room. The detected arc
is highlighted (2) during the operation. Other symbols are not recognised. You have
to define these doors manually (see 5.3.4, page 58).
Basic functions
Notes on windows
Windows are not captured together with the inner walls. They have to be transferred
individually after to room has been detected:
 Activate the room capture from DWG/DXF structures (see above).

 Point to the window symbol in the DWG/DXF. DDS-CAD recognises the window
width and highlights the detected object.
 Click . A window for the building model has been defined at the position indi-
cated.
Notes on room number, room name and other room data

If their position allows it, room number and room name may be read while capturing
the room (inner walls) and transferred into the "Room Information” dialogue box.
However, you must be aware that the arrangement must match the texts. For
information on correcting the room data, please see 5.4.1.3, page 74.
Warning
Once you have completed the operation, check the settings of all automatically
detected objects (sill height of windows, items, etc.)
Index
56
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.3.3.2 Manual graphical room capture

Entering a room
In manual graphical capture, you draw
the contour of the room as a polyline.
Start function The result is a closed polygon which is
Room definition provided with a height.
Define
starting point
Wall type
Draw contour Notes on "Define starting points"

When defining areas and rooms, helper lines are
automatically created. These represent the wall thickness.
Close contour They are visible in the model as a dashed line. Use the
intersections for your work:
Check
settings
Basic functions
Finished?
[ESC]
Notes on selecting "Wall type”

It becomes much easier to assign wall types as work
configuration
progresses. DDS-CAD automatically transfers the wall types
configuration
of the outer wall and of adjacent rooms. Therefore when
moving along a "known" wall (1) during room definition, it is
(2) not necessary to select the wall type. This may only be
required again when leaving the known wall (2).
(1) extensions,
extensions,
Notes on "Draw contour" and "Close contour"
Follow the same pattern as for defining areas (see 5.3.2.1,

page 52) and select the counter-clockwise drawing direction.
The line defined first is given the wall with the number "1". It
Adjustments,
is the reference wall of the room and is used by various

Adjustments,
functions for orientation and alignment (cf. 5.4.2.5, page 79).

The room becomes visible when the contour is closed. The
1
room area is shaded and the "Room Information” dialogue
box appears.
Check the settings (see 5.4.1.3, page 74) and click OK . You can define the next
room or end the function with [ESC].
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
57
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.3.3.3 Capture residual area as a room
If an area (1) is completely bounded by adjacent rooms (2) and/or an area (3), then it
can be automatically converted into a room. Use this option to define particularly long
or complex rooms.
 Start the room definition function. The
cursor turns into a crosshair.
(2
 Move the cursor into the undefined area
(1).
 Press [A]. The residual area is con-
(3
verted to the room. The "Room Informa-
(1 tion” dialogue box appears.
5.3.3.4 Copy room
You can copy any room and paste it into the model as many times
as you wish. Use this option in floor plans with uniform sized rooms:
Basic functions
Copy room
 Select a wall component of the room to be copied.
 Select the "Copy Room Object..”. The cursor moves the copied
room as a dynamic symbol. You can paste the room into the
model as often as you like, but you cannot rotate it.
5.3.3.5 Note on rooms spanning several storeys

Rooms that extend over several storeys must

be entered separately on each storey.
2nd
1st
Groun
5.3.4 Doors and windows

In the best case, doors and windows can be captured from
the imported DWG/DXF file (see 5.3.3.1, page 54).
Afterwards you have to check and correct the settings. If an
automatic detection is not possible, define these objects
manually. Adjust the height and sill height and/or the height of
the threshold. You can either input the width numerically or
define it graphically.
Index
58
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!

Doors
Window (1)
(2) (3)
Inserting a door/window
 Select the desired function. The product database is displayed.
 Select the required item. The object dialogue for the door/window is displayed.
 Adjust the height and sill height (2).
Fixed-width symbol
 Uncheck "Get width from model” (3). Input
"Width” (1) is enabled.
Basic functions
 Define the width (1) and click OK . The cursor moves the object within the
walls. You can fix it at the desired position by clicking .
Retrieve width from drawing
 Check "Get width from model” (3). Input ”Width” is disabled.


configuration
Click . The cursor moves the door or window as a movable symbol with
OK
configuration
low preset width.
 Move the DDS object to the corner of a symbol of the DWG/DXF file. The point
captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The first corner is fixed. You can set the width dynamically.
 Specify the second corner by clicking . The window or door is completed. The
extensions,
function remains active.

extensions,
Additional notes on handling symbols

In addition to the general symbol handling (see 18.2, from page 401) you can:
Change the hinge (of the door):
Adjustments,
 Press [Shift]+[Tab]. The symbol switches

Adjustments,
between right-hand hinge and left-hand hinge.

Change the reference point in the symbol
 Press [Tab]. The moves the symbol at the
right, left or centre reference point.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
59
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.3.5 Suspended ceiling
The suspended ceiling is a tool for positioning objects. You

can control the mounting height of these objects. Snap points
in the grid make it easier to accurately place the object.
Insert suspended ceiling

 Select the “Suspended Ceiling” function. The dialogue box appears.
Grid ceiling
(1)
Basic functions
 Adjust the mounting height (1) and click OK . The message line shows the
"Select a room".
 Click once in the room. The suspended ceiling is oriented parallel to the refer-
ence wall. The function remains active.
Correcting the position of the suspended ceiling

 Select the suspended ceiling by clicking . The suspended ceiling is displayed
as a selected object. Four handles are displayed, with which you can grasp the
object.
 Click on a handle. You can move the grid with the cursor and fix it again by
clicking .
Index
60
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.3.6 Room text/room stamp

Room texts are inserted into rooms as symbols. They can be
002 configured however you like, and display for example room
001 Bath numbers, labels, content of areas or the values of the heat
Corri
load calculation. This section describes on overview of their
003
use. For a detailed description on the significance of the
Offi- settings and on building your own text configurations, please
refer to chapter 19.4.1, from page 488.
Inserting room text or a room stamp

 Either select the function “Room Text...” or “Text all rooms”. The “Part text” dia-
logue box is displayed.
(1)
Text all rooms...
(2)
Room text...
Basic functions
 Select a text configuration (1). Set the design (2).

configuration
Click OK . Depending on the selected function, room texts will automatically
configuration
appear in the centre of each room, or the cursor will move the text as a dynamic
symbol.
Editing the content of the room text
The content of a room text is controlled by the data of the room. Therefore, you have
to edit the room to update the text.

extensions,
Select the "Room Information” function:

extensions,
 Click in the desired room. The "Room Information” dialogue box appears.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Correct the room data (see 5.4.1.3, page 74) and click OK . The text is up-
dated.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
61
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.3.7 Roof areas and dormers
With DDS-CAD you can automatically create simple roof structures and – in the case
of complex roof structures – design individual roof areas. An automatic roof is
possible if the planned roof has a rectangular area with symmetric apex position (left
picture). Both conditions must be met, otherwise it is necessary to design separate
roof areas manually (right picture):
Conditions for automatic roof met: Conditions for automatic roof not
met. All roof surfaces have to be
designed individually:
A
A
B B
A=B
A≠B
5.3.7.1 Automatic roof

Basic functions
The function draws a roof with a rectangular floor plan and symmetrical apex
position.
 Select the "RoofSymbol” function. The "RoofSymbol” dialogue box is displayed:
(1)
RoofSy
(2)
(3)
 Select the desired roof shape (2). The dialogue box displays the parameters
relevant to the roof shape. For more information click Help .
 Adjust all parameters. The next step depends on whether the floor plan com-
pletely is going to be fully covered with this roof, or only partially covered.
Index
62
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Complete roof covering

 Click OK . The roof covers the entire floor plan. The
function ends. If necessary, the orientation of the apex
must be corrected (see below).
Partial roof covering

 Click Define input positions (3). The dialogue box is closed. The
message line shows the "Choose first reference point for
roof" prompt.
 Define the diagonal of the planned roof area with two
clicks .
 Press [Enter]. The dialogue box reappears.
 Check the parameter settings and click OK . The roof
is finished. If necessary, the orientation of the apex must
be corrected (see below).
Basic functions
Correcting the apex position
To correct the apex position, change the rotation of the object around the Z axis by
90°:
configuration
(1
configuration
extensions,
extensions,

Adjustments,
Open the object dialogue of the roof by double clicking on it and open the
Adjustments,
"Rot./Pos.” tab.
 Change the value in Input ”Around Z-axis” (1) by 90° and click OK . The dia-
logue box is closed. The apex location has been changed.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
63
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.3.7.2 Drawing roof areas manually
If an automatic roof is not possible, use the "Free Roof” function. Here, you draw the
outline of each separate area as a polygon. The example shows a gable roof with the
areas (1) and (2). The apex is not centred and area (2) is not rectangular:
(1)
Free roof
(2)
Basic functions
The use of the function depends partly on the particular conditions of the project (see
below), but at the same time on two specific rules, whose consequence lies in the
correct definition of the starting point. The graphic shows the location of the starting
point and the drawing direction for both roof surfaces as a black line ( ).
Rule 1: The line drawn first is always the apex.

The apex line is the reference for setting the gable height. From that point, the roof
slopes down. The height of all other vertices of a roof area is calculated automatically
according to the pitch of the roof.
Rule 2: The drawing direction for an area must be counter-clockwise.

The drawing direction (counter-clockwise) corresponds to the mathematically positive
direction of rotation in the coordinate system (see 17.1, page 378). DDS-CAD needs
this direction for internal calculations.
The conditions of the project determine how the function is used. The procedures are
described separately for:
• Manual construction based on a sketch: This situation arises for example, when
designing rooftop PV systems for an existing building. The building, especially
the geometric parameters of the roof, have bee determined on site and must be
manually transferred into the DDS model.
• Copying on the basis of a 3D DWG/DXF file: You receive a DWG/DXF file, in
which the building (especially the roof) can be seen in the 3D view.
• Copying on the basis of a 2D DWG/DXF file: You receive a DWG/DXF file, in
which the roof is only shown in the plan view as an outline.
Index
64
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Manual construction based on a sketch

(2) (1)
[ ]
[]
[Ente
]
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
 Select the "Free Roof” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the starting point of the apex line (1). The cursor moves a polyline.
 Press the arrow key to specify the direction of the apex line (here []). The
"Collect Points” dialogue box (2) appears.
 Enter the apex length in metres (m) and click OK . The apex line is displayed
in the model.
 Press the arrow key to specify the direction of the first gable edge (here []).
The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears.
configuration

configuration
Enter the length of the gable edge (3) and the roof pitch (4) and click OK . The
gable edge is displayed in the model.
 Build the other roof edges.
 To close the contour, press [Enter]. The "Free Roof” dialogue box appears.
 Check all settings and correct the gable height in particular.
extensions,
extensions,
 Click OK . The roof is completed and the function ends.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
65
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
Copying on the basis of a 3D DWG/DXF file
(1)
(2)
[En-
 Import the DWG/DXF file (see chapter 4, page 32).

 Activate the 3D view and select a suitable perspective (see 17.4, page 389).
 Select the "Free Roof" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the corners of the roof area one after the other (2).
Basic functions
 Check all settings and click OK . The roof is completed and the function ends.
Copying on the basis of a 2D DWG/DXF file
[En-
 Import the DWG/DXF file (see chapter 4, page 32).

 Select the "Free Roof” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the corners of the roof area one after the other (2).
 Enter the pitch and the gable height.
 Check all other settings and click OK . The roof is completed and the function
ends.
5.3.7.3 Dormers
Index
66
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!

(4)
a)
(1) b)
Dormers c)
(2)
(3)
 Select the “Dormer” function. The “Dormer” dialogue box appears.

 Define the reference for the placement of the dormer (1):
a) for free entry of wall and gable height (4)
b) e.g. for converted attics without pitched roof area
Basic functions
c) e.g. if pitched roof area is present.
 Select the desired shape of the dormer (3). The dialogue box displays the pa-
rameters (2) relevant to the selected dormer.
 Set all parameters (2) and click OK . The dormer is moved at its outer side
(the wall) at the cursor.
configuration
configuration
 Move the dormer to the desired position and click . The dormer is fixed in place
and the function ends.
5.3.8 Skylights and roof sections

Adjustments,
extensions,
Skylights
(1)
 Select the "RoofWindow” function. The product database is displayed.

 Select the required item by double clicking . The dialogue box appears.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
67
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
 For a fixed sill height (1), enter the value and check "Lock sill height".
 Click OK . The cursor moves the window as a dynamic symbol.
5.3.9 Gutters
You can draw gutters without an existing roof. However, it is better if the roof is
present because the corners feature a snap function to the side of the eaves:
Roof corners
Dist: 1,039, 1,089, 2,054
Roof corners
Dist: 1,039, 1,089, 2,054
 Select the "Gutter” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

Basic functions
 Point to the first corner of the roof. The underside of the roof is detected.
 Click . The "Gutter” dialogue box appears.
(2)
Gutter
(1)
 Select the material for the gutter (1).

 In the "Alignment” tab (2) select the position of the reference line. You can spec-
ify whether you are drawing the left or right side or the centre line of the gutter.
 Click OK . The cursor moves a polyline.
 Draw the gutter. Each click fixes a corner.
 At the end, press [ESC]. The gutter is located underneath the edge of the roof.
5.3.10 Downpipe
Index
68
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
Downpipes use the polyline drawing
functions (see chapter 19.1, from

page 432). The following example has
been chosen for this section:
In a multi-storey building, a downpipe is
to begin from the gutter, go vertically
downwards by 20 cm and then bend at
an angle of 60° to the wall. Then it is to
lead along the wall, going vertically to the
ground.
Basic functions
Downpip
 Open the attic storey.

 Compile the building model (see 5.5, page 80).
configuration
configuration
 Select the "Downpipes” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message
line shows the "Specify first point" prompt.
 Point to the gutter. The suspended ceiling is displayed as a selected object.
 Click on the position for the branch off. The downpipe begins at the gutter (1).
The cursor moves a polyline.
extensions,
 Press  [PgDn]. The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears.

extensions,
 In Input "Delta down” enter the value for the height difference (20 cm) and click
OK . The position of the bend (2) has been defined.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Move the cursor to just in front of the wall.

 Press  [Shift]+[PgDn]. The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
69
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
 In Input “Angle (draw dir.)” enter the angle for the direction change. All other
values are re-calculated automatically.
 Click OK . The position of the bend (3) has been defined. The inclined portion
of the downpipe is visible in the drawing.
 Press  [PgDn]. The "Collect Points” dia-
logue box appears.
 In Input “Absolute Z-pos.” enter the target
height for the end of the downpipe.
 Click OK . The bottom end of the downpipe
has been set.
Warning!
Basic functions
When editing a multi-storey building, the ground is at a negative height from the
perspective of the attic storey. The height 0 always refers to the floor of the current
storey.
5.3.11 Roof structures

If the heating, plumbing and ventilation systems for the current project are also
created with DDS-CAD, you can simulate a part of the roof structures directly. To do
this, integrate the application type in the model of the attic storey (see 5.5, page 80).
If you only receive the roof

structure and the plans of the
other application types as a
DWG file, you can simulate
these systems. The "Furniture
and Fittings” function in the "Use
Building” working mode includes
Snap areas chimney stacks. You can use
the geometric features to create
your own three-dimensional
objects.
You should enable snap areas

Fixtures/stairs... for work on the roof. This
ensures that the mounting
height of the object is adjusted
to the position on the roof.
Index
70
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.3.12 Recesses, openings

Start the function in
the “Use Building”
toolbox or from the
16
"Insert” menu . The
special feature is the
information that
appears as text.
Builderwork...
(1) (3)
(2)
WD/E/ 10x11x20
OK=12.00cm FF
Basic functions
The content in Input ”Line 1” (1) can be entered freely. The text indicates the type of
recess and the application type where necessary.
The height data (2) is formed from the mounting height and the selected reference for
its label. To do this, you may choose the finished floor level (FF), the unfinished floor
(UF) or the lower edge of the ceiling (LEC), with or without prefix. Selecting the blank
line suppresses the height data at the symbol.
The dimensions (3) are taken from the item, if

stipulated there. If the item does not have
values for the size, you can enter these directly
configuration
Y
in the dialogue box. Please note that the
configuration
Z meaning depends on the viewing direction to
(4)
X
the opening. In the case of a wall opening (4),
the size of the opening is specified by the
17
X Y values X and Z . The value Y defines the wall
thickness. In the case of a floor opening, it is X
Z
and Y that specify the opening. The value Z
extensions,
18
(5) defines the floor thickness .
extensions,
Use "Length" / "Width”/ "Depth" to specify

whether the respective dimension is displayed
with the symbol.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
16
Or in electrical engineering, in the "Verlegesysteme" (Installation systems) working mode
17
The observer is standing in front of the opening looking at the wall.
18
The observer is looking at the opening from above.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
71
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.4 Edit building model

5.4.1 Structural units settings

5.4.1.1 Building
You confirm the basic settings in the

Building Information dialogue box. You
enter a name, define the purpose of the
building, its geographical location and
orientation (compass direction). The
settings affect the calculation of
• Heat load (DIN EN 128318)
• Potable water (DIN 1988)
• Photovoltaic systems (PV)
Basic functions
Building
(2) (1)
(3)
The type of use (1) affects the potable water pipe network calculation according to
DIN 1988. The peak flow is calculated according to the type of use. By selecting the
location (2) from the product database, DDS-CAD applies the standard outdoor
temperature Θe and the ground level above sea level.
The direction of north (3) is required to calculate yields for PV systems. The Polysun
Inside calculation module uses this setting to determine the orientation of the module
faces toward the Sun.
Index
72
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.4.1.2 Storey – Room overview

You can modify the settings for the current storey in the "Room List” dialogue box.
This gives you an overview of the areas and rooms and you can access their data.
The dialogue box plays an important role in the compilation of the building model.
Use Input "Storey height (from origo to origo)” (1) to define the height DZ of the
respective subsequent storey:
Floor - Room overview
(1)
005
004
DZ4
003
Basic functions
DZ3
DZ2 001
002 DZ1
DZ0
000
configuration
configuration
Example
The figure shows a broken building structure. Different height levels in the building
force a project structure in which the levels 001 to 004 are offset against each other.
The height difference between the levels 002 and 003 (DZ2) should be 1.3 m.
Procedure
extensions,
 Open the room overview for level 002.

extensions,
 Enter the value for DZ (in this case 1.3m) in Input "Storey height (from origo to
origo)” (1).
 Click OK . You will be asked whether the
height should apply to all rooms.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Click No . In the compilation of the two lev-

els there is a height difference between the
floors of 1.3 m.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
73
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.4.1.3 Room
The room properties affect calculation

results and displays.
 Select "Room Information”.
The following prompt is displayed:
"Point to the room you want to edit”.
 Click in the room. The dialogue box
is displayed. The room is shaded.
Room data
(1) (2)
(3)
Basic functions
(4)
The room number (1) is generated automatically, but can be adjusted as required
(maximum length: 16 characters). DDS-CAD prevents a room number from being
used more than once. The room description (2) is initially filled from the product
database when you select a room type with … . It can also be changed as
required.
Warning
For the heat load calculation, it is not enough to just change the text in the
description. Therefore select the room type from the product database (this
stipulates room temperature and air exchange rate). Click … and adjust the
text as required.
The room height (3) is taken from the region settings. However, you can apply
separate properties for any room. The value corresponds to the distance between the
upper edge of the finished floor and the ceiling. It affects the mounting height of
lamps, air terminals and the room volume.
Index
74
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
The table (4) numbers the components surrounding the room. The component
selected in the list appears in the drawing as a selected object. Double clicking

takes you into editing mode, from where you can correct the wall type.
5.4.1.4 Component
Walls, floors, ceilings, doors,

Ceiling Door windows and roof areas are
brought together under the
general term "Components".
Components can be edited
individually or in groups using
the "Find and Edit Objects”
function.
Window Floor Wall
Editing a single component

The properties are managed in the component dialogue box. You get to this either
Basic functions
via the "Room Information” dialogue box (1) or by double clicking on the
component in the model (2):
(2)
configuration
configuration
(1)
Adjustments,
extensions,
Editing components in groups

It is useful to be able to edit several components at the same time if lots of
components have the same properties. This situation arises for example, through
capture of a room on the basis of a DWG/DXF file (see 5.3.3.1, page 54).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
75
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
In this case, DDS-CAD automatically creates components that use a general item (1).
However, to prepare for a heat load calculation, all components must use an item
that allows an accurate description of its thermotechnical performance. Therefore, it

is advisable to use a function that allows you to visually check the position of the
components and that provides total access to the properties.
Building
(2)
Basic functions
(1) (3) (4)
 Open the “Building Information” dialogue box and select the "U-value" tab.
 Select a component type from the list (1). All components of this type are shown
in the model as selected objects (2).

 Click OK (3) to close the Building Information dialogue box. The components
remain selected.
 Select the “Edit Properties” function. The object dialogue of the component type
is displayed. You can allocate the items required.
Index
76
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.4.2 Editing the floor plan and room geometry

5.4.2.1 Enabling polygon functions
The geometry of the rooms and areas can be changed using the edit functions of the
polygon and/or polyline (see 19.1.8, page 459). This editing mode is turned off by
default and must be enabled.
Move node
Insert node
 Select a wall by clicking .
Basic functions
 In the "Advanced” sub-menu select the "Display contour as Polygon” option. The
outline of the room is displayed as a polygon with nodes and segments. For
more information on the various options, please see chapter 19.1.8, from
page 459.
Note
The option remains active and is valid for all other selected rooms and/or areas. If
at a later date this editing mode is no longer needed, you should disable it again
as a precaution. This will prevent accidental changes to the room geometry.
configuration
configuration
5.4.2.2 Dividing a room
You can use the “Split Room”

function to separate a room.
Following the operation there will
extensions,
be two rooms.
extensions,
Procedure
Adjustments,
 Select the “Split Room” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
Adjustments,
hair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Choose

start point on a wall in the room you want to split”.
Dividing a
 Move the cursor to the wall where you want to start the divi-
sion. The wall is displayed as a selected object.
 Click on the division point in the first wall. The cursor moves
a polyline. The message line shows the following prompt: "Set
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
77
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
path for splitting room. End by selecting a point on a wall in the room”.
 Click on the connection point in the second wall. The room has been divided.
The function is stopped.
5.4.2.3 Dividing a wall
Dividing a wall may be

necessary, for example, if the
wall type at a location is changed
or the temperature on the
Dividing a reverse of a portion of this wall
must be configured differently.
Basic functions
 Select the wall to be divided (click ).

 Select the "Split Wall” function. The cursor assumes a division symbol.
 Point to the division point and click . The wall has been separated into two in-
dependent components. You can configure each one separately.
5.4.2.4 Joining divided walls
Joining two wall components may be necessary if a door or a window is to be placed

over the dividing point.
 Select both wall components to be joined.
Join divided walls
 Select the "Merge Walls” function. The two components

have been merged.
Index
78
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Construct Erro
r!
5.4.2.5 Redefining the room's reference wall

All of a room's walls are numbered consecutively. The wall with the number "1" is the
reference wall of the room, to which the various other functions are oriented. Thus for
example, a suspended ceiling (see 5.3.5, page 60) is aligned parallel to the reference
wall. You can modify this situation by redefining the reference wall of the room.
Application
Basic functions
 Select the desired wall (in this case wall 4) by clicking .
 Select the "Set Side as first in Room”. The selected wall is given the number 1.
5.4.2.6 ((Separating adjacent rooms (clearing a wall))
5.4.2.7 ((Changing separated rooms to adjacent rooms (shared wall)))
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
79
Introduction
Erro Construct
r!
5.5 Compiling the building model

You can compile all storeys of the building into a common model, or show individual
models of other application types and storeys. The main applications of this function
are varied. It can be used for example:
• To create parts lists over all storeys (see 16.5, page 369)
• For inter-floor installation
Import- and Model Admi
• For designing rising

points
(1) • To display adjacent floor plans as
an aid planning work
• To display the planning of other
application types that affect your
(2) own work
•
Basic functions
To check the congruence of

storeys
(3)
• To compile the rendering model
To display a different model, start the "Import- and Model Admin” in the toolbar and
then select the "Complete List of All Models in the Project” tab. This lists all the
models (storeys) of the active application type (1). Models with the symbol are
invisible. Storeys with the symbol are visible.
To switch a drawing between visible and invisible, click once on the or

symbol. The change is visible on the screen immediately. Selection an application
type (1) filters the display in the list (2) to this application type.
For a better distinction between the models shown, each of them can be assigned a
unique colour (3).
Double clicking on a model shown

displays the "Insert file adminitrator"
dialogue box. It includes the same
functions as the "Import- and Model
Admin" mentioned above, but also allows
(4) changes directly in the selected model.
To do this, click Open (4).
Index
80
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Ventilation systems Erro
r!
6 Ventilation systems

Use the functions in
the “Duct Work”
application type to
design a ventilation
system.
The description here

assumes that the
building model has
been constructed and
the required air volume
flows of the rooms are
known.
In the first step you configure the ventilation system in the building model and specify
the volume flows as room data. In this way, you are preparing the layout for a
Basic functions
controlled ventilation of a residential building and the heat load calculation (see
7.3.2.2, page 97). Then you develop the ventilation system: You place the air
handling unit and the air terminals and construct the ductwork.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
81
Introduction
Erro Ventilation systems

r!
6.1 Entering and calculating the volume flows

6.1.1 Checking and correcting building data

You configure the general parameters of the system and for the entire building in the
building data.
Building
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
 Open the “Building Information” dialogue box and switch to the "Air Flow Re-
quirements" tab.
 Select the ventilation system (1).
 Enter the temperature of the supply air (2) and the building-related minimum air
exchange (3).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can configure the rooms.
Index
82
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
6.1.2 Check and correct room data

You define the air-conditioning behaviour of an individual room in the room data. You
select the type (1) and set the volume flow (2) as the air exchange rate per hour or in
cubic meters per hour. By entering the maximum air exchange rate (3) you are
specifying a limit for the air quantity adjustment for the controlled ventilation of a
residential building.
Room In-
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
configuration
configuration
 Select the "Room Information” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The
message line shows the “Point to the room you want to edit” prompt.
 Click in the room whose ventilation data you want to adjust. The "Room Infor-
mation” dialogue box is displayed.
extensions,
 Switch to the “Air Flow Requirements” tab.

extensions,
 Set the room type (1) in terms of ventilation.

 Check the minimum and maximum air exchange (2/3).
6.1.3 controlled ventilation of residential buildings

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
To ensure a minimum air exchange in well-sealed buildings, controlled ventilation of

a residential space is used. The additional heat recovery is a measure to save
energy. Here, the warm air is exhausted from exhaust air rooms, fed through a heat
exchanger and used to preheat the fresh air supplied. This is blown into the fresh air
rooms as supply air.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
83
Introduction

r!
To avoid excess or under pressure in the building, the sum of the volume flows for
supply and exhaust air must be the same in each case. To do this in DDS-CAD you
first balance the air volumes. In this way, the volume flows of the rooms are
equalised with each other within a given tolerance.
You can have the calculated volume flows displayed in the room label in the model.
Afterwards, select the air terminals and place them in the rooms. Finally, check the
capacity of the air terminals by carrying out a new calculation.
6.1.3.1 Balancing air volume in the building
Building
To balance the air volumes,

open the building information
dialogue under the “Air Flow
(2) Requirements” tab and click
Calculate (1). The calculation
algorithm proceeds in several

Basic functions
steps.
(1)
Step 1
DDS-CAD calculates the volume flow of a room based on the minimum air exchange
and calculates the sum of the volume flows for supply and exhaust air.
Step 2
DDS-CAD increases the lower volume flow to the higher value. The difference (e.g.
the additional supply air) is divided among the other fresh air rooms. In doing so, the
program checks whether the maximum values of the individual rooms are reached.
Step 3
DDS-CAD checks whether the total air exchange in the building is achieved and
whether in doing so the maximum values for air exchange in the individual rooms are
reached.
Index
84
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The verification of the maximum values and the total air exchange in the building may
result in information that DDS-CAD displays in an information list, where necessary.

Message in the information list Cause and possible remedy
"Balance between supply and exhaust Balancing is not possible if a volume flow has to be
air not possible...” raised to the extent that the maximum air exchange
rates of the rooms are exceeded. The message
indicates which volume flow (supply air/exhaust air)
cannot be increased. Check the ventilation settings
in the room data.
"Required building air exchange too The building air exchange ("minimum building") was
high...” determined to be too low. The balance between
rooms leads to significant exceedance. Check the
ventilation settings in the room data and/or correct
the minimum air exchange of the building.
Note:
In the worst cases, the air volumes can only be balanced with difficulty. For
smaller systems (in detached and semi-detached houses) you can check
"Balance between storeys). In this case, it is easier to achieve a balance of the
volume flows between fresh air and exhaust air rooms.
Basic functions
The next step is to place the air terminals (see 6.2.2, page Error! Bookmark not
defined.). Then carry out a new calculation to check their capacity.
6.1.3.2 Checking the capacity of the air outlets
Open the building information

dialogue under the “Air Flow
Requirements” tab and click
Calculate (1). The steps of the air
configuration
(1) volume balancing are repeated.
configuration
In addition, the air volume of
each room is distributed to the
installed air terminals.
The information
list reports all
extensions,
rooms where the

extensions,
(1) capacity of the

(2) air terminals is
insufficient. You
can use the
message to
Adjustments,
correct the room:

Adjustments,
 Select a line from the information list (1).

 Click Zoom object (2). The room is displayed magnified in the centre of the screen.
You can place additional air terminals.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
85
Introduction

r!
6.2 Objects of the ventilation system
6.2.1 Air handling unit

To call an air handling unit, select the “Air Handeling Unit (AHU)”
function. DDS-CAD accesses the product database. You can also
load data records from various manufacturers (see 22.2.5,
page 544).
Equip-
You can also expand the product database and create your own
items (see 22.2.3, page 538). In terms of symbols used, you can
refer to external data in the DWG/DXF (see 23.3, page 575) and
3DS formats (see 23.4, page 576).
6.2.2 Air terminals

Basic functions
This chapter describes

the use of air terminals
as a single object,
Air passage
which is first placed as
a symbol and later
connected to the
ventilation duct. In
another method, an air
terminal can be applied
when constructing the
duct network as the end

of a pipe section (see
9.3.3, page 180).
(2)
(1)
Application
 Select the “Air Terminal” function. The “Air Terminal” dialogue box appears.
 Select an item (1).
 Adjust the mounting height and mount type (2).
 Click OK . The cursor moves the symbol.
Index
86
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Note – air terminals with side connection
When using air terminals with side connection, make sure the rotation is correct. If
a passage is to be automatically integrated into the duct system later on (see
9.4.4.4, page 193), the connection point must be directed towards the duct.
The position of the connection

point is displayed in different
ways, depending on the object.
The graphic shows three exam-
ples. The connection point indi-
cator (1) has been highlighted for
(1) clarity.
Changing material (3/4)

You can force a material change for the course of the connection after exiting the
main duct (3) and after the first bend (4). Enable the function and select the desired
material (5)
Basic functions
(3)
(4)
(5)
configuration
6.2.3 Substitute object for simulating sub-networks/consumers
configuration
6.2.3.1 Introduction
The substitute object for ventilation consumers is used to simulate individual

consumers and sub-networks. By using this method you can simulate parts of the
extensions,
ventilation system without fully constructing the system in DDS-CAD. For example,
extensions,
you can collect the volume flows of part of a building in an object in order to allow a
short-term calculation of the main pipe sections.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
87
Introduction

r!
6.2.3.2 Selection and use
Use as a dynamic symbol

Call the "Free duct load in the "Insert” menu.
Use as the end object of a

ventilation duct
When building the ventilation
network, you can end the duct
with the substitute object.
Basic functions
6.2.3.3 Configuring the substitute object

(3) (2) (1)
 Determine the medium by selecting the item (1).

 Define the connection values by inputting them manually (2).
 Enter the length (3) of the symbol in millimetres (mm).
Index
88
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Heat load calculation Erro
r!
7 Heat load calculation

7.1 General principles
7.1.1 Heat load calculation according to DIN EN 12831
The heat load calculation determines the heat supply required for a building as well
as the rooms within the building. The calculation is designed to assist the
dimensioning of the heating surfaces in the individual rooms as well as of the heat
generator. The algorithms used in DDS-CAD are based on DIN EN 12831:2003 and
the Supplement 1 of 2008.
A heat load calculation with DDS-CAD requires the building model (see chapter 5)
and – in the case of a planned ventilation system – the rooms' volume flows entered
and balanced in the DDS ventilation module (see chapter 6.1.3.1, page 84). The
following graphic shows the general procedure prescribed by the DIN standard on the
left and, on the right, the necessary operations in DDS-CAD:
Basic functions
Heat load calculation according to Operations in DDS-CAD
DIN EN 12831
Determine meteorological data Design ventilation system
Define status of each room Configure building data
Define properties of the components Configure room data
Calculate transmission heat loss Check components
configuration
configuration
Calculate ventilation heat loss Perform calculation
Calculate total heat loss Print results extensions,
Calculate heat-up load

extensions,
Chapter 7
Calculate total heat load Page 89
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The effort for a calculation is always determined by the current starting position and
the available data. Therefore the following chapter describes some conceivable
situations. The various strategies for processing the project with DDS-CAD are
derived from this. Afterwards there are notes on the important settings for achieving
an accurate calculation result.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
89
Introduction
Erro Heat load calculation

r!
7.1.2 Processing effort according to the data available
Different situations can arise considering the available starting data and the data to
be found. Please note that there may be some overlapping in the project:
Standard case: Special case:

Chapter 7.2 Standard heat load is known
Standard heat load is not known Page 91
Check and correct building data Building data...
Check and correct room data Enter heat load
Chapter 7.3
Check and correct components Page 94 Perform calculation
Component position (to external

air, heated/unheated space, soil) Chapter 7.4
Page 102
Basic functions
U-values
Yes Chapter 7.4.3
U-value Page 111
Enter
known?
No Chapter 8
Calculate Chapter 7.4.2.3 Page 119
Page 108
Perform calculation
Place heating surfaces
Underfloor heating
Print results
Chapter 7.5
Page 117 Radiator
In most cases, there are no reliable data about the standard heat load of the rooms.
These data therefore have to be calculated. A decisive parameter is the heat transfer
coefficient of the components (U-value). Known U-values can be entered directly.
Unknown U-values have to be calculated. Here, the composition of a component is
structured in tabular form and the U-value is updated at the same time. In rare cases,
you can refer to a documented heat load calculation and transfer the data into the
building model manually.
Note on underfloor heating

If underfloor heating is planned, the U-value for the floor has to be calculated in
each case, and the location of the heat pipe has to be defined! (See 7.4.2.3, page
108)
Index
90
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.2 Checking and correcting building data

7.2.1 Geographical and meteorological data
In the building data you can define basic settings for location, name and use of the
building (1). You get access to the U-values of all materials used in the project (2)
and you can configure the heat load calculation algorithm (3).
Building
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
(6)
Basic functions
(7)
(8)
You assign meteorological data

to the building by way of the
location (4) . DDS-CAD
transfers the standard outside
temperature Θe (5), the mean
annual temperature Θm,e (6) and
configuration
the height above sea level (7)
configuration
from the product database. You
can change these values
manually if necessary.
Height above
To start with, the value for
ΔZ Input "Base height” (8) is
extensions,
Base height transferred from Input "Height

extensions,
NN = 0
above sea level” (7). If the two
values match, this corresponds
to a building with a floor slab on
the ground. If the building is partially recessed into the ground, reduce the value in
Input " Base height” (8). The difference between the two values corresponds to the
Adjustments,
depth ΔZ that the building is sunk into the ground.

Adjustments,
DDS-CAD automatically defines the component position of the outer walls in the
basement storeys ("against outside air" or "against soil"). If the exterior walls are
more than 2/3 in the ground according to ΔZ, all exterior walls of the basements are
calculated "against soil". On the other hand, if the proportion in the soil is low, the
calculation is made "against outside air".
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
91
Introduction

r!
Warning
When automatically detecting the component position, DDS-CAD assumes the

ground is level. A slope of the building (where only some exterior walls are in the
ground) is not recognised. In this case, you need to correct the component
position of the exterior wall manually (see 7.4.3, page 111).
7.2.2 Configuring the heat load calculation
(1)
(2) (8)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
Basic functions
(6)
(7)
(1) The values for the temperature Θe and the mean annual temperature Θm,e (1) are
transferred from the general settings as meteorological data.
(2) You must always check the groundwater depth and adjust to the prevailing local
conditions.
Note
If the distance between the floor slab and the water table is less than 3m, the
calculation of the transmission heat requirement will consider all components in
contact with the soil with the correction factor GW of 1.15 (see
DIN EN 12831 Supp. 1; section 3.4.3).
(3) The building location e (shielding coefficient) affects the ventilation heat loss. The
value depends on the shielding class and the number of exterior walls exposed to the
wind. You can configure the shielding class. DDS-CAD determines the number of
exterior walls "against outside air" and selects the required value.
(4) The air tightness of the building shell n50 is the parameter for determining the
natural infiltration. Wind flow and temperature differences cause a pressure
difference between the interior and the exterior of the building. This results in an
Index
92
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
exchange of air, which takes place thanks to gaps (e.g. windows) in the building
shell.

There are five levels of air tightness, where an air exchange rate (per hour) is
specified for each level at a pressure difference of 50 Pa pressure differential
between inside and outside. If you select a setting in "Air exchange rate n50",
then the associated numerical value is displayed in Display "Air exchange rate”. It is
transferred to each heated room and included in the calculation of the ventilation heat
loss (see 7.3.2, page 95).
(5) The building mass affects the heat storage capacity Ceff and thus the calculated
result of the reheating energy ΦRH (with intermittent heating mode). The DIN standard
refers to two levels for light and medium duty and/or heavy duty construction.
(6) Thermal bridges such as window lintels, window sills etc. affect the U-value of a
component and thus the transmission heat loss through the component. Their
influence therefore needs to be considered in the heat load calculation. In
"Consider thermal bridges ΔUWB" select how this should be considered:
Setting Meaning
Without on-site DDS-CAD applies a flat-rate factor of 0.1 to the building. It is
Basic functions
consideration assumed that the structural design of thermal bridges has been
carried out without special thermal protection measures.
With on-site DDS-CAD applies a flat-rate factor of 0.05 to the entire building.
consideration It is assumed that the structural design of thermal bridges has
been carried out to DIN 4108 Supplement 2.
Detailed evidence The heat load calculation is carried out in detail, taking into
account each individual thermal bridge in the building. This
setting requires that all thermal bridges have been introduced in
the building model (see 7.4.4, page 116).
(7) Options opens a dialogue box for default settings. You can select the international
configuration
version of DIN EN 12831 (8) and modify the temperature of the reverse of internal
configuration
walls globally if no room has been defined there (9). This situation arises during the
graphical room capture along chimneys and shafts.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
93
Introduction

r!
7.3 Checking and correcting room data

7.3.1 General settings

Check the room height in the
“Room Data” tab (1). This affects
the volume of the room and thus
the heat load.
(1) (2) Selecting a room type from the

product database (2) define the
default values for the required
internal temperature of the room
as well as the hygienically
necessary minimum air
exchange. Check these settings
in the "Heat Load” tab and make
any necessary corrections.
If a reheating factor for the room

Basic functions
is to be included, check "Add

reheating heat load” and select
the value (3).
(3) "Manual” (4) allows you to enter

the transmission and ventilation
heat losses manually. Use this
method
a) if these values are known (to
save time)
b) for rooms that extend over
several storeys (see 7.3.4,
page 100).
Index
94
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.3.2 Notes on the ventilation heat loss ΦV

The ventilation heat loss is the amount of heat that escapes out of the building as a
result of ventilation processes (e.g. leaking through windows or doors, through
chimney flues and air-conditioning systems). The colder air that is flowing in has to
be heated. The critical values are the volume flow (which results from the air
exchange) and the temperature of the air that is flowing in.
With regard to the calculation, DIN EN 12831 distinguishes between

• natural ventilation (no air-conditioning systems, e.g. through windows)
• mechanical ventilation (with air-conditioning systems)
The calculation algorithms are therefore fundamentally different from each other.
Note:
To accurately determine the ventilation heat loss in buildings with mechanical
ventilation, you need the DDS ventilation module, including the "Kontrollierte
Wohnraumlüftung" (Controlled ventilation of residential buildings) module. If these
modules are not contained in your licence, DDS-CAD always assumes that the
ventilation is natural ventilation.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions, configuration
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
95
Introduction

r!
7.3.2.1 Natural ventilation
A natural ventilation (through cracks in the building shell, e.g. windows) is

automatically applied by DDS-CAD if the DDS ventilation module and the "Ventilation
of residential buildings” module are not included in your license.
On the other hand, if both

modules are included, select the
ventilation system in the Building
(1)
Information dialogue under the
“Air Flow Requirements” tab (1).
In this way, all rooms are
classed as naturally ventilated.
The calculation with natural ventilation compares the influences of natural infiltration
and the hygienic minimum air volume flow:
Formula Meaning and reference

Basic functions
symbol
inf,ie Natural infiltration (=air tightness of the building shell n50)
Wind flow and temperature differences cause pressure from outside on the
building. This cold outside air enters through permeable joints (e.g. windows)
and must be heated up. To calculate the natural infiltration:
 Define the air-tightness of the building shell (n50), see 7.2.2, page 92.
nmin Hygienic minimum air volume flow

For hygiene reasons, a minimum air exchange is required for each room. The
minimum exchange of room air nmin is accepted as a suggestion from the product
database when you select the room type.
 If required, correct Input "nmin" in the "Room Information” dialogue win-

dow (1)
The resulting losses of heat due to

both causes are first calculated
separately and presented (3).
Whichever value is highest is
considered to be the ventilation
heat loss that applies for this room
(3) (4).
(1)
For natural ventilation, it is

assumed that the air flowing in has
(4)
(2) thermal properties of the outside
air. Due to this assumption, the
temperature of the air flowing in (2)
cannot be entered. The value that is displayed is not taken into consideration for the
calculation.
Index
96
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.3.2.2 Mechanical ventilation

The consideration of mechanical ventilation requires the DDS ventilation module,
including the "Controlled ventilation of residential buildings” module. In the Building
Information dialogue, select the ventilation system (1) and define the supply air
temperature (2). The room type (3) decides which ventilation parameters (4) are
enabled.
Building Room Infor
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
(3)
(5)
(4)
Warning! configuration
configuration
After changing the ventilation parameters in the building or room dialogue
ALWAYS calculate the volume flows. Only then do the changed settings take
extensions,
effect in the heat load calculation. To do this, click Calculate in the Building
extensions,
Information dialogue (5).

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
97
Introduction

r!
If the building has a ventilation
system, the hygienic minimum air

exchange rate (1) has no effect.
The DIN EN 12831 standard
assumes that this value is
provided by the system and the
(1)
(2) comparison with the natural
(3) infiltration is skipped.
(4)
(5)
Instead, the following effects need to be considered:
Formula Meaning and reference

symbol
inf,ie Natural infiltration (=air tightness of the building shell n50)
Wind flow and temperature differences cause pressure from outside on the
Basic functions
building. This cold outside air enters through permeable joints (e.g. windows)
and must be heated up. The heat loss through natural infiltration is known as
ΦV,inf,i (1). To calculate the natural infiltration:
 Define the air-tightness of the building shell (n50), see 7.2.2, page 92.
SU,i Supply air volume flow

The supply air volume flow is the air added to the room directly via valves. The
difference between the temperature of the supplied air and the required room
temperature must be compensated by the heating system. A thermally relevant
volume flow only arises if the temperature of the injected air is less than the
standard internal temperature of the room. The heat loss of the supply air flow
is called ΦV,SU,i (2).
 Adjust the volume flow and the temperature of the supply air in the DDS
ventilation module. See above.
mech,inf,ie Outside air flow due to mechanical infiltration (4)

If the ventilation system in the room under consideration creates low pressure,
cold outside air is drawn in through permeable joints (e.g. windows) and has to
be heated up. For exhaust air rooms of a toilet ventilation system, enter the
value manually. In other ventilation systems, this value is calculated. If the
exhaust air flow of the building is greater than its supply air flow, this results in
a loss of heat.
mech,inf,ij Overflowing air from adjacent areas due to mechanical infiltration
Air flows in from adjacent rooms if the room under consideration is an exhaust
air room or is connected to an exhaust air room via an opening.
 Set the value manually and define the temperature of the inflowing air (5).
Index
98
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

7.3.3 Notes on unheated rooms – the factor bu
DIN EN 12831 stipulates that, to calculate the heat that is lost to unheated adjacent
rooms, the temperature reduction factor bu is to be used. This factor takes into
consideration the difference between the temperature of the unheated room and the
standard outside temperature Θe. In DDS-CAD, a room is considered to be unheated
if "Heated” (1) has not been selected. The dialogue window also displays "bu"
(3). You can determine the factor bu in two variants – depending on the values that
are known:
Calculating temperature reduction factor bu

 Select "Room temp. Θint" (2)
 Enter the temperature of the unheated room. The
(1)
(2) temperature reduction factor bu is calculated in
DDS-CAD.
Entering the temperature reduction factor bu
Basic functions
 Select "bu" (3). An input field for bu is displayed
(4).
 Enter the numerical factor or click … (4) to se-
lect a standard value.
(3)
(4)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
99
Introduction

r!
7.3.4 Notes on rooms spanning several storeys
If – as in the image to the left – a room

spans several storeys, we recommend the
following strategy in terms of the heat load
2nd calculation:
The rooms are detected and calculated

1st separately according to the storey. Then
note down the heat losses in the upper floor
and use "Manual" to set these to "0".
Gro Check "Manual" in the ground floor too
and add the upper floor values.
Building model structure
Measure rooms
separately
Basic functions
Heat load calculation
Calculate rooms
separately
1st floor
Note down ΦV,i and ΦT,i

ΦV,i and ΦT,i

Set "manual" = 0
Ground floor
ΦV,i and ΦT,i

check "manual"
ΦV,i and ΦT,i

Add values from 1st
fl
Index
100
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.3.5 Global settings for all rooms

You can define global settings for every room when calculating the ventilation heat
loss and the reheating load.
Building
Basic functions
(1)
configuration
 Open the Building Information dialogue box and switch to the "Heat Load” tab.
configuration
 Click Set all . The "Set all” dialogue box appears.
 Click the option for the desired processing step.
 Configure the associated parameters.
 Click OK . The configuration is applied to all rooms in the building model.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
101
Introduction

r!
7.4 Checking and correcting components

7.4.1 Terms and connections

A component may be a wall, a floor, a door and so on. Therefore walls, floors,
ceilings, etc. can be summarised under the term "component groups". The sum of all
relevant component properties determines the transmission heat loss. Relevant
properties of a component are its dimensions, its type and its position.
Components - component groups
Wall Floor Door Window
Ceiling Roof Thermal bridge
U-value from... Drawing operation
Item of the component type

Basic functions
Component type Component properties

manual input
U-value
Dimensions
Calculation
Component type
Assignment from Item
Component location
product database
Component location to...
Outside air
Assignment by... heated room
Automatic detection unheated room
Manual adjustment Soil
Transmission heat loss
The dimensions of a component are defined when constructing the building model as
described in chapter 5 (from page 47) by corresponding drawing operations. It is an
individual property of each individual component in the building. Component type and
position code are discussed in the following sections.
Index
102
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.4.1.1 Component type

The component type is the classification of the component in a group of other
components with the same thermotechnical behaviour. This classification is also first
defined when constructing the building model, by selecting an item (1). The graphic
shows an example of a wall, to which the item "AW54" has been allocated.
(1) (2)
A component's U-value (2) is always directly linked to the item (1). To start with, it is
taken from the item (e.g. AW54) when constructing the building model, but must be
Basic functions
corrected by manual input or calculation before the heat load calculation takes place
(see 7.4.2, page 105). You can see an overview of all component types in the
building model in the Building Information dialogue, under the "U-Value” tab:
Building
configuration
The term "component type" can be differentiated by the various component groups
Adjustments,
(wall, floor, ceiling, etc.). In this case we talk about wall types, floor types, ceiling
types, etc.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
103
Introduction

r!
7.4.1.2 Position code
The position code is an individual property of the separate component and describes
the situation on its reverse. According to DIN EN 12831, a component can be
directed against outside air, heated and unheated rooms and against soil. The
calculation algorithm for heat loss depends on that accordingly.
The position code is initially determined

4 3 automatically when constructing the building model.
3 4 2 DDS-CAD recognises whether there is a heated or
unheated room at the reverse, for example. In
1
5 addition, DDS-CAD automatically divides a
3
continuous wall if two rooms adjoin its reverse. The
2 4 2 position code is calculated automatically in this
case too. If necessary, you may need to divide a
1 1 wall manually (see 5.4.2.3, page 78) and correct
the position code manually (see 7.4.3, page 111).
The status – calculated automatically (3) or selected manually (4) is shown under the
"Heat Load” tab of the component dialogue. The example (below) shows that the
position code of this exterior wall is set to "Calculated”. In addition, the calculated
Basic functions
results of the component (5) are displayed.
(3)
(4)
(5)
Index
104
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.4.2 The heat transfer coefficient (U-value)

7.4.2.1 Preliminary remarks, calling the "U-value" function
The U-value describes the heat loss of a component type based on its material
composition and the temperature difference between front and back in watts per
square meter and Kelvin (W/m²⋅K).
If the U-values used in the project are known, a calculation is no longer necessary
and you can enter the values manually. If the components' U-values are not know,
then they must be calculated. The composition of a component (the layering) is
structured in tabular form. There are two ways to adjust the U-values:
• Overview of the U-values in the Building Information dialogue
• "U-value" tab in the dialogue of a specific component
Overview of the U-values in the Building Information dialogue

The Building Information dialogue contains a list of component types used in the
project. These are differentiated only by their items. This method is suitable for
checking and globally correcting several component types:
Basic functions
Building
extensions,
configuration
If the U-value = 0, this component type is not included in the heat load calculation.
This may be a default or an error. To edit the U-value of a component type:
 Select the entry by clicking . The context menu appears.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select "Edit Properties”. The "U-Value Calculation” dialogue box appears.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
105
Introduction

r!
The text colour of the entries and the various indicators show the current status of a
component type (see below).
Layering Pipe Meaning

Heat load The U-value has been transferred from the
calculation product database but not yet adjusted.
Manual The U-value has been entered manually
The U-value has been calculated according to the
layering.
Underfloor The underfloor heating cannot be calculated. To
heating do this, you have to construct the layering and
calculation define the position of the heat pipe.
The layering of this floor type has been
constructed, but the position of the heat pipe has
not yet been defined. The underfloor heating
cannot be calculated yet.
The layering of this floor type and the position of
the heat pipe have been defined. The underfloor
heating can be calculated.
Basic functions
Calling the "U-Value” tab for a specific component

You can open the room data for any component by double clicking in the model or
from the list of components. Select the "U-Value” tab. Changes are applied to all
components that use the same item.
Index
106
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.4.2.2 Assigning known U-value manually

If the U-value of the component is known, you can assign it to the component
directly. This method saves time compared to constructing a layering arrangement.
Warning!
This method is not possible for floors with underfloor heating. For these floors, a
layering arrangement has to be built up and the position of the heat pipe defined
(see below).
(1) (2)
Basic functions
(3)
Application
configuration
configuration
 Click Manual (1). The "Manual U-Value” dialogue box appears.
 Enter the U-value and density.
 Click OK . The list (2) displays information on a manually entered U-value. The
new values are displayed (3)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
107
Introduction

r!
7.4.2.3 Calculating the U-value through layer structure
If the U-value of a component is not known, you must determine this by calculation.
To do this, construct the component in layers from inside to outside. Using the
material properties of each individual layer, DDS-CAD calculates the resulting U-
value, the density and the dew point on the surface of the component.
At the same, the software has to differentiate between composite and non-composite
components:
Non-composite components consist of only one

area segment, i.e. 100% of the area is formed by one
and the same layering. Typical examples are solid
100% brick walls.
The layering is formed once for 100% of the area.
Basic functions
Composite components consist of more than one

area segments with different layers (e.g. walls in
timber frame construction, roof areas). In this case,
70%
each area segment needs to be built up separately.
30%
The layers are built up proportionally in succession.
Index
108
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Application – constructing the layering:

 Start the "U-Value” function according to one of the methods described above.
The "U-Value” dialogue box appears. The table displaying component layering is
empty.
 Click Add (1). The product database enables the materials selection.
 Choose the material of the first (inner) layer by double clicking . The product
database is closed. The first layer has been inserted into the table.
 Adjust the area segment (2) and the thickness of the layer (3) in millimetres
(mm). To do this, click in the corresponding field. The current U-value is calcu-
lated and displayed straight away (4).
(5)
(2) (3)
Basic functions
(1)
(4)
configuration
configuration
 Repeat the procedure until the layering of the area segment is complete.
 For a composite component, build any other area segments in the same way
until the sum of the area segments is 100%.
extensions,
 Check the settings of the interior and exterior heat transfer resistances Rsi/Rse
extensions,
(5) and click OK . The calculated U-value now applies to all components of the
project that are associated with this item.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
109
Introduction

r!
Modifying the layer structure
You can edit the layering of a component later. This means you can move their
position in the table (6), use the context menu (7) to modify their properties or delete
the layer.
(7)
(6)
(7)
Basic functions
Underfloor heating: defining the position of the heat pipe

 Select the layer containing the pipe by clicking . The context menu appears.
 Select "UFH pipe layer”. The "UFH Pipe Layer” dialogue box appears.
 Enter the height of the pipe (centre line) above the lower edge of the layer and
click OK . The value is transferred to the table. It can be corrected by clicking
.
Note
When you select an item for the floor, you can use the "component" filter to see
the layerings prepared according to DIN EN 1264 Part 4.
Index
110
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.4.3 Notes on the position code (reverse of the component)

7.4.3.1 Preliminary remarks
In order to calculate the heat load of a room correctly, the situation at the reverse of
the component must be determined. During the graphical capture of the areas and
rooms, DDS-CAD: already detects for example, whether there is a heated or
unheated room at the reverse of a wall and which temperatures prevail there.
Sometimes it may be necessary to bypass the automated results and define the
position code manually:
Example 1 – Townhouse with adjoining buildings

You are editing a townhouse, which is directly adjacent
to other heated buildings (1). By default, DDS-CAD
assumes that the reverse of all exterior walls is directed
(2
against outside air. In this case, correct the position
(1 (1
code setting for the partition walls to the other buildings
(2).
Basic functions
Example 2 – Single storey
You are editing a single storey in a large building. The
adjacent floors (1) are not part of your remit. In this
case it is sufficient to only capture the relevant storey in
(1) the building model. However, you have to check and
correct the position code of the ceiling and the floor (2).
(2)
(1)
Example 3 – Components in contact with the soil on slopes configuration

configuration
You are editing a building on a hillside. Here, one
exterior wall (1) of the ground floor is to be calculated
extensions,
against the soil, while the other exterior walls border the
extensions,
(1) outside air. In this case too, you have to check the
position code of the exterior walls and divide them
where necessary (see 5.4.2.3, page 78).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
For more information on components in contact with the soil, please refer 7.4.3.4,
page 114.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
111
Introduction

r!
7.4.3.2 Correcting the position code manually
To correct the position code:

 Select "Manual” (1). You can select the position code.
 Select the position code. DDS-CAD expects specific data, depending on the set-
ting.
Basic functions
(1)
outdoor against soil (2)

DDS-CAD refers to the building settings and
automatically determines the factors for
• the fluctuation of the average temperature (fG1)
• the difference between standard outside

temperature and the mean annual outdoor
temperature (fG2)
• the influence of groundwater (GW)
(See also chapter 7.2, page 91).
(2)
Outdoor against air

The temperature at the reverse of the component is transferred from the building
settings (see 7.2, page 91).
Indoor against unheated room

You can set the temperature at the reverse of the component manually or use the
temperature reduction factor for unheated adjacent rooms (bu). You can take default
values from the product database. To do this, click … .
Indoor against heated room

Enter the temperature at the reverse of the component.
Index
112
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.4.3.3 Resetting manual changes to the position code

You can reset manually changed position codes for the whole model back to the
status "calculated":
Building
Basic functions
(1)
 Open the building information dialogue box and switch to the "Heat Load” tab.
 Click Set all . The "Sett all” dialogue box appears.
configuration
configuration
 Select "from manual to calculated position code”.
 Click OK . The position code has been set to "calculated" for all components in
the model.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
113
Introduction

r!
7.4.3.4 Notes on components in contact with soil
The position code is shown in

the list of components in the
"Room Information” dialogue
box. The example shows a room
in the basement. The exterior
walls (1 and 2) and the floor are
directed against the soil.
Basic functions
DDS-CAD automatically sets the floor of the lowest storey "against soil". The same
applies to the exterior walls if the building is sunken into the ground. This setting is
configured in the Building Information dialogue (see 7.2.1, page 91).
In general, the transmission heat loss of a component is determined by its thermal

transfer coefficient (U-value). In the case of components in contact with soil, the heat
transfer is also affected by the soil. The U-value calculated from the material
properties of a floor panel must be corrected for this. The resulting value (Uequiv) is
ultimately used to calculate the transmission heat loss of components in contact with
soil. DDS-CAD determines Uequiv according to DIN EN 12831, from tables 4 to 7. The
following example shows an excerpt from table 4:
B'-value Uequiv,bf (for z=0) [W/²mK] Uequiv therefore

[m] depends on two
No Usoil = Usoil = Usoil = Usoil = parameters:
insulation 2.0 1.0 0.5 0.25
W/m²K W/m²K W/m²K W/m²K • the U-value
2 1.3 0.77 0.55 0.33 0.17 • the value B'
4 0.88 0.59 0.45 0.30 0.17
6 0.68 0.48 0.38 0.27 0.17

Index
114
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The component dialogue of a floor in contact with soil displays all relevant data.

(2) (1)
(4)
(2) (5)
Basic functions
The U-value of the component (1) can be entered manually or calculated precisely by
constructing the layering (see 7.4.2, page 105). The value B' (2) results from the ratio
between the observed area of the floor panel (3) and half of its circumference (4).
configuration
configuration
The value of B' can only be calculated precisely for a single room if it is directly
connected to the exterior wall. For interior rooms (without exterior wall) B' is
calculated for the entire building and transferred to the room.
The corrected U-value Uequiv (5) is interpolated with values and intermediate values
from the DIN standard tables.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
115
Introduction

r!
7.4.4 Thermal bridges
If thermal bridges (e.g.window lintels, window sills, etc.) considered in detail, first
check the configuration of the heat load calculation in the Building Information
dialogue (see 7.2.2, page 92). Next, you have to add the relevant components – in
the case of a window. To do this, use the list of components in the "Room
Information” dialogue:
Room Inform
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
 Select the component to which you want to assign the thermal bridge (1).
 Select the "thermal bridge" component type in the drop-down list (2).
 Click Add (3). The product database is displayed.
 Select the desired item. The "Thermal bridge” dialogue box appears.
 Check the length (4) and click OK . The thermal bridge has been inserted into
the list of components and can be used in the calculation.
Index
116
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
7.5 Performing calculations and printing results

You can start the heat load calculation at any time from the Building Information
dialogue or from the room data.
Warning!
Modified settings are only considered in the results and the printouts after
performing the calculation. Therefore, you must repeat the calculation after
changing a setting.
Building Room data
Basic functions
(2)
(1) (3) extensions, configuration

configuration
Starting the calculation
extensions,
 Click Calculate (1). The results (2) are updated.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
117
Introduction

r!
Printing the calculation results
 Click Print (3). A selection of different reports is displayed.

 Select the desired report. The report is created. The taskbar at the bottom of the
screen shows the button with the symbol:
 Click . The print preview is displayed: You can print the document.
The following reports are available:
Report filename Contents

HRE_Part_Heating_Loss.rpt You get a list of all components used on the
building exterior surfaces with U-value, wrap
area and heat loss.
HRE_Part_Heating_Loss_Graph.rpt The heat losses of the exterior surfaces are
displayed in a table. Their share of total heat
loss is illustrated by a diagram.
HRE_EN12831_Project.rpt You get a precise breakdown of the heat load
calculation for the entire project.
HRE_U-Value calculation.rpt You get a list of all component types whose
Basic functions
U-value has been assigned and/or calculated

when constructing the layering.
Index
118
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Heating and sanitary facilities Erro
r!
8 Heating and sanitary facilities

8.1 Heating and sanitation objects
8.1.1 General overview
To access the heating and sanitation functions, open a drawing of this application
type (cf. 3.2.1, page 19) and select the "Use Application Default Tools" working
19
mode. You call appropriated objects in the upper part of the toolbox (1). This
includes items for direct use (e.g. sanitary facilities), but also units for operating a
facility (e.g. heat generator, hot water tank). The common feature of these objects is
their use as a dynamic symbol.
After starting one of these functions (e.g. the basin) the product database is
displayed. You select the required object as an item from here. Then you are taken to
the object dialogue, where you can make other settings. After confirming with OK
the cursor moves the symbol of the object. You can place this in the model as many
times as you need.
Basic functions
Default
Washbasins, sinks, bidets
configuration
(1)
configuration
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
Valve
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
All objects have insert points for media lines. Their technical parameters (e.g. flow
pressure, flow rate, etc.) are stored in the item and are evaluated by the calculation
after connection to the pipe network. The functions of the lower area (2) are always
related to the structure of a pipe network and are linked to this.
19
Substitute objects for the simulation of consumers and sub-networks are excluded (see 8.1.2, page 123)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
119
Introduction
Erro Heating and sanitary facilities

r!
8.1.2 Substitute objects for simulating
sub-networks/consumers
Substitute objects are used to simulate individual consumers and sub-networks.

The benefits can be illustrated by two examples:
As insert points for objects in DWG files

It is possible that you may receive a final design of the sanitation facilities as a DWG
file. The sanitary objects contained in the file do not have the necessary insert points
20
and information required to calculate the potable water network . However, you can
use the design indirectly, by using the substitute objects. You define the connection
values in this object's dialogue box.
For simulating sub-networks – properly creating load conditions

Supposing that you are designing a central heating system to supply several
buildings and/or parts of buildings. In this case, you do not need to plan the entire
system, but rather you can access data of the remote sub-networks. You can map
each sub-network with the substitute object and perform the pipe network calculation
with the correct load conditions.
Basic functions
8.1.2.2 Selection and use
Use as dynamic symbol

Call the "Sanitary Load” or
the "Heat/Cool Load” in the
"Insert” menu.
Use as the end object of

a pipeline (potable water only)
When building the potable
water network, you can end
the pipeline with the
substitute object. In this
way, you can connect DWG
objects (1) directly, without
having to place DDS
objects beforehand.
20
Technical details for individual objects are generally not included in DWG files (cf. 4.1.1, page 34)
Index
120
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.1.2.3 Configuring a substitute object for potable water consumers

(3) (2) (1)
 Determine the medium by selecting the item (1).

 Define the connection values by inputting them manually (2).
Basic functions
 Enter the length (3) of the symbol in millimetres (mm).
8.1.2.4 Configuring a load object for heating consumers
The substitute object for heating

consumers is always equipped with the
(1) (2) "flow" and "return" media.
 Configure the symbol (1). You can set
the flow and return arrangement in
order to move the insert points for the
configuration
pipelines into the right position. The
configuration
result of the settings appears in a
preview.
 Observe the system data settings (2).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
121
Introduction

r!
8.2 Dividing the heat load into heating facilities

With DDS-CAD you can design radiators and underfloor heating. It may be that the
heat load of a room is not going to be provided by a single heating facility (radiator
OR underfloor heating), but is to be provided by a combination of several heating
systems. In this case, you can distribute a room's heat load to multiple facilities and
optimise their dimensioning. In addition to underfloor heating and radiators, further
heating facilities can be taken into account, but not be dimensioned by an internal
calculation.
Heating facilities Dimensioning

Underfloor heating Internal calculation in DDS-CAD (see 8.3,
page 124)
Radiator Internal calculation in DDS-CAD (see 8.4,
page 146)
Electrical heating Manual
Ventilation system Manual
Direct heating Manual
Basic functions
Furthermore, an additional heat gain (e.g. by sunlight or permanently running

electrical appliances) can be considered.
Divide heat load on heating facilities
Set building standard Chapter 8.2.1

Page 123
Adjustments in the storey

Adjustments to individual rooms Chapter 8.2.2

Page 124
Index
122
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.2.1 Specifying the building standard and adjusting a storey

The distribution of the heat load to various heating facilities should first be defined
globally for the entire building:
Building
(3)
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
 Select the "Building Information” function. The "Building Information” dialogue
box appears.
 Switch to the "Heating Facilities” tab.
 Define the proportion (2) of the heat load (1) that can be apportioned to the heat-
ing facilities.
configuration
 Click Set The settings are transferred to all rooms in the building. Subse-
configuration
quently, you can adjust each storey and each separate room.
If the heating facilities of an entire floor differ from the building standard, adjust the
storey settings:
 Open the storey.

extensions,
extensions,
 Select the "Building Information” functions and switch to the "Heating Facilities”
tab.
 Click Set curr. . The settings are transferred to all rooms of the current storey.
Subsequently, you can adjust each separate room.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
123
Introduction

r!
8.2.2 Adjusting a single room
If the heating facilities of individual rooms differ from the building standard, adjust the
settings of these rooms:
Room data
 Select the "Room Informa-

tion” function. The message
line shows the “Point to the
room you want to edit”
prompt.
 Click in the room whose
heating facilities you want
to adjust. The "Room In-
formation” dialogue box is
Basic functions
displayed.
 Switch to the "Heating Fa-
cilities” tab.
 Adjust the settings of the
heating facilities. Define the
proportion of the heat load
(1) that can be apportioned
to the heating facilities, ei-
ther as a percentage (2) or
(1) (2) (3) (4) in absolute terms (3).
 Enter any heat gain for the

room from other heat sources (e.g. electrical equipment) (4).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The function remains active. You can
select another room by clicking or end the function with [ESC].
8.3 Designing underfloor heating

8.3.1 Introduction
With DDS-CAD you can design underfloor heating systems in full, or only draw the
heating regions as required. In this regard, we refer to the detailed and the simplified
method.
The detailed method allows the calculation and documentation of the system
(according to DIN EN 1264). It provides technical building requirements, which must
be considered when constructing the building model and when calculating the heat
load.
Index
124
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The simplified method is the quick way to graphic representation. The graphic shows
the process at a glance. If you choose the simplified method, you can jump directly to

chapter 8.3.5, on page 130:
Detailed method:
Requirements
Design underfloor heating Chapter
Flooring construction 7.4.2.3
Building technical Position of the heating tube Page 108
requirements
Chapter 7
Heat load calculation Page 89
Select manufacturer
and system Adjust heating Chapter 8.2
facilities Page 122
Select and place

heating circuit distributor
Chapter 8.3.3
Chapter 8.3.4 Page 128
Page 129
Define underfloor heating
regions
Define underfloor heating regions
Basic functions
Calculate and Check basic settings
optimise system Chapter 8.3.5 for drawing
Page 130
Calculated results Define and edit heating

regions
Chapter 8.3.6
Underfloor heating labels Page 138
Part list and log Simplified method:
configuration
Chapter 8.3.7 Draw underfloor heating
configuration
Page 144
Define underfloor heating

regions
At the beginning of the detailed method, select the manufacturer of the system
extensions,
components and a product. Then define the heating region distributor and draw the
extensions,
heating regions. Use the calculation to size and optimise the system and prepare the
output of the calculation results.
Note on the part list

Adjustments,
The general part list includes distributor and heat pipe, but no system plates or
Adjustments,
insulating materials. Use the underfloor heating print function to enter these (see
8.3.7, page 144).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
125
Introduction

r!
8.3.2 Managing the heating regions and distributor
Heating region distributor and heating regions are managed in the Building
Information dialogue under the "Underfloor Heating” tab. The upper table contains
the heating region distributor. The lower table lists all heating regions in the project –
each with their technical parameters. Clicking on a row in the table opens a context
menu with functions for editing.
Building
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7) (8)

The upper area is where you define the manufacturer (1). The underfloor heating
system must be developed with actual system components (see 8.3.3, page 128).
New (2) creates a new heating region distributor (see 8.3.4, page 129). Heating
region distributors are a prerequisite for the subsequent calculation, but not for
building the heating regions. You can change the configuration of the system as
desired (see 8.3.4, page 129).
Find by pointing (3) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of an
object you are interested in. After being opened, the dialogue box is invisible and you
can select the heating region distributor and/or the heating in the model by clicking
. The management dialogue box reappears when the corresponding row is selected.
Use the scroll bars or the zoom function (4) to view the table.
Draw Cut out Split into (5) are used to construct the heating regions (see 8.3.5,
page 130).
Options (6) configures the basic settings for drawing and calculating the heating
regions. In this way, you choose between the detailed or simplified method.
Calculate (7) starts the calculation routine.
Print (8) starts the output of the calculation results (see 8.4.5, page 154).
Index
126
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Information in the heating region table

Entry in the table Contents Colour highlighting (text colour)
Type Unheated area Green
Normal temperature (heated normally) Blue
Higher temperature (higher surface Orange
temperature)
Room no. Position of the heating region (storey,
region and room number)
Room text Name of the room in which the
heating region is located.
Manif. ID/Reg. ID Distributor number and heating region Red No connection to distributor
number
Pipe dist, mm Laying distance, pipe-to-pipe distance Blue Manually fixed
Area, m² Area of the heating region in square Blue Manually fixed, no division
metres
Pipe length, m Length of the heating cable Red Max. pipe length exceeded
Adjust value For hydraulic balancing of the pipe
network in l /min or as kvs-value
(depending on distributor).
Basic functions
Flow, l/h Volume flow in the heating region
Pr. drop, Pa Pressure loss of the heating region Red Maximum pressure loss
exceeded
Spec output, W/m² Specific power Red No power in the heating system
(see 8.2.2, page 124)
Output, W Output Red Actual output<target output or no
output specified in the system
Calc. Surf. temp., °C Calculated surface temperature Red Maximum surface temperature
exceeded
configuration
Supply temp., °C Flow temperature Red Flow temperature > 100°C
configuration
Return temp., °C Return temperature
Pipe pr. drop, Pa Pressure loss across the heat pipe
Kv, m³/h Kv value
Max. pipe length, m Maximum pipe length
extensions,
Max. Pr. drop, Pa. Maximum pressure loss

extensions,
Specific targ. output, Specific target output Yellow Worst room

W/m²
Green Target output lowered to
actual output
Red No power in the heating
system (see 8.2.2, page 124)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Diameter, mm Pipe diameter

Vel., m/s Flow speed
Max. Surf. temp., °C Maximum surface temperature
Manufacturer Name of the manufacturer Brown Different manufacturer
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
127
Introduction

r!
8.3.3 Selecting the manufacturer and system
The underfloor heating must be developed using actual system components. To do

this, you need to load the manufacturer's data record and activate a system:
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
Basic functions
 Click (1). The “Select Manufacturer Database(s)” dialogue box appears. This
lists the data records of all available manufacturers.
 Enable the manufacturer required by Activate (2) or double clicking . The "X"
character is displayed in front of the row. Activate is blocked. The data record is
used in the project and cannot be turned back off.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed.
 Click … (3). The product database shows the selected manufacturers along
with their systems.
 Select the manufacturer and the system of the underfloor heating. The product
database disappears. You will be asked whether the system should be used for
all rooms.
 Click Yes . The system appears in Display " Manufacturer” (4).
Note:
The prompt "Use the selected manufacturer/type in all rooms?" is only relevant for
subsequently exchanging a system of an existing facility.
Index
128
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.3.4 Selecting and placing the heating region distributor

The heating region distributor(s) is/are a prerequisite for the subsequent calculation,
but not for building the heating regions. You can change the configuration of the
system as required, by changing, adding or removing the heating region distributor,
or correct the assignment of the heating regions.
(3)
Basic functions
(1) (2)
configuration
configuration
 Click New (1). The product database is displayed and lists the heating region
distributors of the previously selected manufacturer.
 Select the required item. The product database disappears. The "Distributor” dia-
logue box appears.
extensions,
 Check the installation height (2) and click OK . The cursor moves the heating
extensions,
region distributor as a movable symbol.

 Fix a distributor at the desired position. The function remains active. You can
place additional distributors.
 End the function with [ESC]. The dialogue box lists all used distributors (3).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Note:
You can view and edit each entry via a context menu (see 8.3.2, page 126).
Similarly, you can also delete, move or modify the distributors directly in the
model.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
129
Introduction

r!
8.3.5 Heating regions
All heating regions are listed in the Building Information dialogue in a table and are
21
represented in the model by shaded polygons . The shape of a heating region can
automatically be adjusted to the room or be drawn manually. In this way, you can edit
several rooms in one step. DDS-CAD automatically splits the heating regions at the
room boundaries. The colour of the polygon shows
the status of the heating region (3):
• Not heated: Green
• Normal temperature: Blue
• Higher temperature: Red
Move node
Basic functions
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The status (3), the assignment to

the distributor (4) and other
technical parameters are defined
in the "Underfloor Heating region” (7)
dialogue box. You get to this
dialogue box either via the entry of
the heating region in the building
dialogue or directly by double
clicking on the region marked in the model.
The position in the building (1) is indicated along with the numbers of the storey, the
region and the room as well as the room name. Furthermore, each heating region
contains a consecutive distributor-related number (2).
From the heating region you can access the properties of the floor (5), in which the
heat pipe is embedded. Please note that a change will affect all floors of the same
21
Unheated areas (2) are not shown in the table.
Index
130
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
floor type (see 7.4.1, page 102). The item (6) used and the calculated results (7) of
the region are displayed in the lower part of the dialogue box.

8.3.5.2 Basic settings
You have to check two basic settings for the definition of heating regions. Click Options
(1). In the "Options” dialogue box, specify the distance to the wall (2) and adjust the
consideration of the heat load (3):
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
Input "Distance to walls” (2)

A room automatically restricts the expansion of the heating region. In doing so, the
configuration
distance (2) set between the heating region and the walls is maintained.
configuration
"Allow rooms without underfloor heat load or pipe” (3)
By default, heating regions are defined to
dimension underfloor heating. DDS-CAD
automatically checks compliance with the
building's technical requirements. If these are not
extensions,
met, DDS-CAD stops executing the function.

extensions,
For a purely graphic representation of the heating

regions (without subsequent calculation) suppress the check by selecting " Allow
rooms without underfloor heat load or pipe” (3).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
131
Introduction

r!
8.3.5.3 Drawing and editing heating regions
The definition and editing of heating regions are also started from the Building
Information dialogue:
(4)
(1) (2) (3)

Basic functions
Draw (1)
The function creates new heating regions and edits existing ones. After calling the
function, you can choose from the context menu whether existing heating regions are
drawn over, connected to each other, or whether the remaining area of the room
should be filled with new heating regions. The drawing application is equal to working
with the polygon (see 19.1, page 432). You can also use specific auxiliary functions
(see below). A new heating region is always assigned to the active distributor (4).
You can change this assignment later (see 8.3.5.1, page 130).
Cut out (2)
The function is only used to reduce existing heating regions. In this way you can, for
example, consider storage spaces, pillars and stair openings. The drawing
application is again equal to working with the polygon (see 19.1, page 432).
Split into (3)
You can manually split existing heating regions into equal-sized sub-areas (see
page 137).
The following pages contain an overview of the various operations and descriptions
of their respective procedures.
Index
132
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Overview: Draw heating regions
Operation Example Referen
ce
Draw heating regions manually page 13

The operation produces heating regions on a rectangular 4
or any polygonal surface, whose contour has to be de-
termined manually. When doing so, you can comply with
room limits or exceed them as required.
If the area completely or partially extends over several
rooms, each room receives its own heating region (top
and middle pictures). DDS-CAD divides the area at the
room boundaries and ignored regions outside of defined
rooms.
You can make additional divisions later either manually or
by calculation.
Basic functions
Automatic heating region in a room page 13
A single room is to be completely covered by a heating 5
region.
Fill residual area of a room with a heating region page 13

Parts of a room have been covered with one or more 5
heating regions. The remaining area is to be filled auto-
matically by additional heating regions.
configuration
Draw over heating region page 13
configuration
When drawing a heating region, there may 6
be overlap with existing ones. The areas
covered are cut from the existing region.
Join heating regions page 13

extensions,
Two adjacent heating regions are merged 6
extensions,
with each other.
Split heating region page 13

The heating region A0 is too big. It is to be 7
Adjustments,
divided into a certain number of heating

A0 A1 A2 A3
Adjustments,
regions with the same size.
Cut-out in a heating region page 13

A sub-area (e.g. for storage space) is to be 7
cut out of an existing heating region.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
133
Introduction

r!
Draw heating region manually

Example
The operation produces heating regions on a

rectangular or any polygonal surface, whose con-
tour has to be determined manually. When doing
so, you can comply with room limits or exceed
them as required.
If the area completely or partially extends over
several rooms, each room receives its own heat-
ing region (top and middle pictures). DDS-CAD
divides the area at the room boundaries and ig-
nores regions outside of defined rooms.
You can make additional divisions later either
manually or by calculation.
Basic functions
Procedure
 Click Draw . The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Click on the starting point. The cursor moves a dynamic line.
 Specify the area that is to be covered by heating regions. You can draw a rectangular or
any polygonal area (see below).
 Press [Enter]. The area definition is stopped. DDS-CAD divides the area at the room
boundaries. All areas outside of defined rooms are ignored. The "Underfloor Heating
Region” dialogue box appears.
 Check the settings and click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The function remains
active.
Rectangle:
(2)
[Enter]
(1)
 Define the diagonal of the rectangle with two clicks .

Polygon
[Enter]
 Define the contour of the area counter-clockwise in each case by clicking .

Index
134
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Automatic heating region: Fill single room
Example
A single room is to be completely covered by a

heating region. If a division is necessary later on,
it is implemented manually or by calculation.
Procedure
[Enter]

 Point to the room that is to be covered by the region.
Basic functions
 Select the "Overwrite” function. The context menu is closed.
 Press [Enter]. The room gets a heating region. The "Underfloor Heating Region”
 Check the settings and click OK . The function remains active.
Fill residual area of a room with a heating region

Example
configuration
Parts of a room have been covered with one or
configuration
more heating regions. The remaining area is to
be filled automatically by additional heating re-
gions.
Procedure
extensions,
extensions,
[Enter]
Adjustments,

Adjustments,
 Point to the room that is to be covered by the region.

 Select the "Fill the remaining space” function. The context menu is closed.
 Press [Enter]. The residual area is filled. The "Underfloor Heating Region” dialogue
box appears.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
135
Introduction

r!
 Check the settings and click OK . The function remains active.
Draw over heating region

Example
When drawing a heating region, there may be overlap

with existing ones. The areas covered are cut out from
the existing heating region and added to the new one.
Procedure
[En-

Basic functions

 Draw the area of the new heating region over the existing one. The overlapping area
has been cut out of the existing region. The "Underfloor Heating Region” dialogue box
appears.
 Check the settings and click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The function remains
active.
Join heating regions

Example
Several heating regions are merged with each other.
Procedure
[En-

 Click in the first heating region. The cursor moves a dynamic line.
 Click in the furthest heating region. The touching heating regions are merged into a
common area. The function remains active.
Index
136
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Split heating regions

Example
The heating region A0 is too big. It is to be divided into a

certain number of heating regions with the same size.
A0 A1 A2 A3
Note
The division (horizontal/vertical) is directed parallel to
the reference wall 1. You may need to correct this
before the operation (see 5.4.2.5, page 79).
Procedure
A0 A1 A2 A3
Basic functions
 Enter the desired number of sub-areas.
 Click Split into . The dialogue box is closed. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the heating region to be divided. The heating region is separated into the
specified number of sub-areas. All sub-areas are the same size. The function remains
active.
Cut-out in a heating region
configuration
configuration
Example
A sub-area (e.g. for storage space) is to be cut out of an

existing heating region.
extensions,
extensions,
Procedure
 Click Cut out . The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Define the contour of the cut-out. In graphic terms, proceed as with a heating region
(see page 134). The area has been cut out of the existing heating region. The function
Adjustments,
remains active.
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
137
Introduction

r!
8.3.6 Calculating and optimising the facility
The calculation function dimensions the heating regions defined in the building
according to DIN EN 1264. The calculated results of the heating regions and heating
region distributors are shown in dialogues, and output in calculation logs. The
pressure losses of the heating region distributors are transferred to the heating pipe
network calculation, where the hydraulic balancing of the distribution valves takes
place (see 10, page 215).
DDS-CAD proceeds room by room during the calculation, whereby first the least
favourable room with the highest specific heat loss (W/m²) is considered. For the
heating regions, the ideal distances of the heat pipes are determined. Pressure loss
and pipe length are monitored. Exceeding these parameters will automatically divide
the regions. You can configure the division.
If the room has separate heating regions for higher and normal temperatures, the
higher temperature regions will be examined first. Their surface temperature must be
higher than that of the normal temperature region (cf. 8.3.5.1, page 130). Therefore
you can apply more output to the room, without exceeding the limit and unloading the
normal temperature region. Based on this assumption, the aim for the higher
Basic functions
temperature regions is the smallest possible pipe-to-pipe distance that does not
exceed the maximum surface temperature. When dimensioning normal temperature
regions on the other hand, the aim is to achieve the largest possible pipe-to-pipe
distance, which is necessary to cover the calculated heat load.
Set calculation parameters Global parameters

Chapter 8.3.6.1
Page 139
Global parameters Flow temperature
and spread
Room-specific parameters Criterion for automatic

division of the heating

i
Calculate
Room-specific parameters
Start calculation Chapter 8.3.6.2
Automatic division of the Page 140
heating regions
Check results
Keep or change
manufacturer/system?
No
OK?
Calculate or force
Y pipe to pipe distance?
Display results Ratio of target output to

actual output
Label heating regions
Part list Chapter 8.3.6.3

Page 142 Chapter 8.3.7; 8.3.8
from page 144
Calculation log
Index
138
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.3.6.1 Setting global calculation parameters

To start with, you have to
define global calculation
(2) parameters. By doing so,
you define the system
(3)
temperatures and set the
criteria for the automatic
(4) distribution of the heating
(5)
(6) regions. To do this, open
(7) the Building Information
dialogue and click Options
(8) (1).
Basic functions
(1)
Setting the system temperatures

The return temperature is generally calculated from the flow temperature (2) and the
temperature difference (3). You can calculate the flow temperature in accordance
with DIN EN 1264 or define it manually. To do this, check "Calculate the optimal
flow temperature”.
Automatically split heating regions
configuration
The calculation monitors the pipe length of the individual heating regions and the
configuration
respective pressure loss. After you have defined the settings, DDS-CAD
automatically separates a heating region:
• (4) if the max. pipe pressure drop is exceeded
• (5) if the pressure loss or the pipe length are exceeded
• (6) if the max. pipe length is exceeded
•
extensions,
(7) if exceeded values are ignored, heating regions are not split.
extensions,
Taking floor coverings into account (8)

In the calculation, you can choose between two options in terms of floor coverings:
Option A: The thermal resistance of the floor covering (R_Lamda_B) is assumed to
be at least 0.1m²K/W. DDS-CAD checks the settings of the floor structure, and
Adjustments,
compares the resulting value to the defined lower limit. The calculation always
Adjustments,
assumes the higher value.

Option B: The floor structure settings always apply. In other words, the thermal
resistance of the floor covering can also be less than 0.1m²K/W. Due to the lower
thermal resistance, it is possible to achieve smaller heating regions and thus a more
economical design.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
139
Introduction

r!
8.3.6.2 Setting room-specific calculation parameters
Setting the room-specific

calculation parameters is
primarily a tool for
subsequent optimisation.
If the calculation process
(1) gives unfavourable results,
you can optimise various
parameters for a room and
(2) repeat the calculation.
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
Division of the room areas (1)

The division of the room areas is determined by the global calculation parameters.
If you would like to make a different rule for the room, check "Overwrite the global
split settings: Split regions according” and set the division criteria (see 8.3.6.1,
page 139).
Manufacturer/System (2)
The system components are determined globally in the Building Information dialogue
and transferred to the individual rooms (see 8.3.3, page 128). If you want to make a
different rule for individual rooms, check "Overwrite the global manufacturer” and
select the desired product.
Pipe-to-pipe distance (3)

By default, the pipe-to-pipe distance is calculated by DDS-CAD. As such, different
objectives apply to normal temperature zones and higher temperature zones. In each
case, the largest and/or smallest possible pipe-to-pipe distances are determined (see
8.3.1, page 130). This may result in over-dimensioning in a room. As part of the
optimisation process, you can alter the pipe-to-pipe distance and then repeat the
calculation:
The pipe-to-pipe distance is calculated by DDS-CAD.
The pipe-to-pipe distance is fixed.
The maximum pipe-to-pipe distance is given. The
calculation can set a smaller distance.
Index
140
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The smaller the pipe-to-pipe distance, the greater the power output and the

surface temperature in the respective room zone.
Ratio of target output to actual output (4)

In small rooms with a large heat load, underfloor heating is often unable to supply the
required amount of heat without significantly exceeding the surface temperature. In
these cases, the target output of the underfloor heating has to be reduced and the
remaining amount of heat applied through another heating facility (e.g. radiators).
The image shows an example:
(5) The calculation for the room's

underfloor heating gives a target
output of 2350 W (5). However,
(6) in compliance with the maximum
surface temperature, the
underfloor heating can emit
(8) 893 W to the room (6). This
(4) value corresponds to only 38% of
the required output.
Basic functions
For optimisation, you can set this
maximum possible actual output
as the new target output for the
underfloor heating (4).
The new setting is automatically

transferred to the heating
facilities configuration (7). Here it
is clear that the underfloor
heating can only provide part of
(9) the standard heat load.
configuration
Compensate for the missing
configuration
portion with another heating
facility.
In the example, you will also see

(7) a difference between the
standard heat load Qn (8) under
extensions,
the "Underfloor Heating” tab, and

extensions,
the adjusted heat load under the

"Heating Facilities” tab (9). This
difference arises from subtracting
the heat loss across the floor
from the transmission heat load
Adjustments,
of the room (only if underfloor

Adjustments,
heating is present).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
141
Introduction

r!
8.3.6.3 Calculating the system and checking messages and results
You can start the calculation process from the Building Information dialogue or from
the "Room Information” dialogue. In both cases, the entire building is calculated.
Basic functions
 Click Calculate . The algorithm starts. The calculated results appear in the tables of
the Building Information dialogue and the room data. If necessary, an information
list is also displayed. This lists errors and provides warnings and information.
 If necessary, optimise the system and repeat the calculation. In doing so, please
refer to the notes of the information list (see below).
Index
142
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Working with the information list

Each line of the information list represents a room and/or a heating region. Proceed
step by step, as follows:
 Select an entry from the list. The room and/or the heating region are displayed
as a selected object.
 Click Zoom object . The room and/or the heating region are displayed zoomed in the
centre of the screen.
 Click OK . The information list is closed.
 Rectify the problem and run the calculation again.
Possible messages, their meanings and options for remedying the cause
Message in the information list Notes and references

"This room has heating regions, but no Calculating the heat load  Page 117
target output for the underfloor heating. Setting the heating facility  Page 124
Calculate the heat load or set the output in
the heating facility."
"Warning: This heating region cannot be Inserting distributors  Page 129
Basic functions
divided into more than n parts. Insert more Splitting heating region manually 
distributors or split manually." Page 137
"Warning: This zone cannot be calculated Setting the pipe-to-pipe distance 
because the required heat load is already Page 140
covered by the higher temperature zone.
Manually set higher temperature zone to a
larger pipe-to-pipe distance."
"The floor in this room has no underfloor Position of the heat pipe  Page 110
heating pipe. Define the position of the pipe
in the U-value calculation."
"The actual output x W of this room is
configuration
smaller than the target output y W. Install
configuration
radiators."
"The surface temperature of x°C of this Flow/return temperature  Page 139
heating region is greater than the permitted Room temperature  Page 94
maximum of y°C. Correct flow, return, or Pipe-to-pipe distance  Page 140
room temperature or set larger pipe-to-pipe
distance."
extensions,
"Warning: The pipe length including Automatic division  Page 139

extensions,
connection lengths of x m of this heating

region is greater than the permitted
maximum of y m. Move the distributor closer
to the heating region or enable automatic
division."
"Note: The target output (QHF) x W has
Adjustments,
been reduced to the actual output

Adjustments,
(QHFCalc) y W. Install radiators."

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
143
Introduction

r!
8.3.7 Printing results
You can print out the calculation log to evaluate the underfloor heating. Start the print
function in the Building Information dialogue or in the "Room Information” dialogue:
Basic functions
 Click Print . The reports selection is displayed.

 Select the report by double clicking. The report is created and displayed as a
new window.
 Open the window in your Windows taskbar.
Report Contents
HU_Underfloorheating_report_EN_1264.rpt You receive a report on the underfloor
heating calculation according to
EN 1264. It contains
• Cover page
• Evidence of the heat balance
• Room list with list of the heating re-
gions
• List of the heating regions by dis-
tributors (sorted by pressure loss)
HU_Underfloorheating_material_list.rpt You receive a list of all materials used

that are required to construct the
underfloor heating in the building.
Warning!
The general part list includes
distributors and heat pipes, but no
system plates or insulating materials.
Use this report for a complete part list
for the underfloor heating.
Index
144
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.3.8 Labelling heating regions

Use the “Part Text” function to identify the
heating regions.
The following description illustrates a
simple example. For a detailed description
of the function, please refer to
chapter 19.4.2, page 494.
Part Text
(2)
Basic functions
(1)
 Select a heating region by clicking . configuration

configuration
 Select the “Part Text” function. The "Part text” dialogue box is displayed. The
extensions,
"Underfloor Heating” object (1) has been detected.

extensions,
 Adjust the layout of the text symbol (2).

 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The cursor moves a text symbol.
 Move the text symbol to the heating region. The symbol recognises the heating
Adjustments,
region and displays the name and the technical parameters in the text.
Adjustments,
 Fix the text symbol at the desired position by clicking . The function remains
active. You can label further heating regions.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
145
Introduction

r!
8.4 Designing radiators

8.4.1 Introduction
With DDS-CAD you can design new heating facilities and simulate existing facilities.
In both cases, you have to rely on the use of actual product data. Dimensions and
output are the relevant design parameters. Output, water quantity and pressure loss
are required for the pipe network calculation.
Use the "Hersteller Datenbank laden" (Load manufacturers database) function to call
the product data (see 22.2.5, page 544). You can then insert and dimension radiators
in the model through an automatic selection. Any necessary corrections to the
positions and/or the properties of individual radiators are carried out manually.
This chapter first describes the properties of a single radiator and then the
management function for radiators in the Building Information dialogue. Using this
function, you can design radiators according to the following diagram:
Plan radiator
Requirements
Basic functions
Building technical Chapter 7

requirements Heat load calculation Page 89
Adjust heating Chapter 8.2

Select manufacturer facilities Page 122
Install and dimension radiator Chapter 22.2.5

automatically Page 544
Configure options for

installation and calculation Manual corrections to radiators
Replace
existing
Button [Calculation] Lock radiator
Install
additional
No
OK? Change
Y position
Print
calculation results Chapter 8.4.4 Chapter 8.4.3.3
Page 151 Page 150
Index
146
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.4.2 Radiators

In most cases, radiators are installed and calculated automatically. In some cases,
manual adjustments or additional radiators are required.
(2)
Heating/Coo
(1)
(3)
(4)
Load
manufacturers
d b
Basic functions
Application
 Select the "Heating/Cooling Equipment” function. The product database shows
the preloaded product data of the radiator manufacturer.
 Select the item. The "Heating/Cooling Equipment” dialogue box shows the di-
mensions (1). To start with, standard items are chosen for the radiator valve and
the lock shield valve (2). You can also use real product data.
configuration
 Enter the desired installation height (3). The lower edge of the radiator is used as
configuration
the reference.
 For wall mounting with the symbol function [Ctrl]+[D] (see page 405) define
the distance to the wall (4).
 Click OK . The cursor moves the radiator symbol.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
147
Introduction

r!
8.4.3 Managing the radiators in the Building Information dia-
logue
8.4.3.1 General overview
Building
The radiator list (1) of the

Building Information dialogue
(1) contains all the radiators that
are currently in the building.
(2) You can control the display with
a filter (2). Choose a single
room, the current storey or the
entire building. Each row
represents one radiator. It
contains information, settings
and calculated results (see
Basic functions
8.4.3.2, page 149). Use the

dialogue box's scroll bars or
zoom function (3) to view the
table. Clicking opens a
(3) context menu with various
functions (see 8.4.3.3,
page 150).
(4) (5) (6) (7)

Find by pointing (4) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of an
object you are interested in. After opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible
and you can select the object in the model by clicking . This will take you back into
the calculation dialogue, where the corresponding row is highlighted.
Options (5) configures the calculation. You specify the parameters for automatic
installation and the radiator design.
Calculate (6) starts the automatic installation and radiator design.
Print (7) allows the output of the calculation results in various reports (see 8.4.5,
page 154).
Index
148
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.4.3.2 Information in the radiator list

Details in the radiator list
Reference Contents
Room Position of the radiator in the model, given as storeys, region and room
number.
Room text Name of the room in which the radiator is located.
Locked The radiator may be changed by the calculation.
The radiator is locked against changes.
Clicking the symbol changes the status.
Length, mm Dimensions in millimetres (mm): Overall length, height, depth
Height, mm
Width, mm
Target W Target output of the radiator. If several radiators are located in one
room, the room's standard heat load is divided across the radiators.
Afterwards, the target output corresponds to the portion of the room's
standard heat load allotted to that radiator.
Qh_max. W Actual output of the radiator.
Basic functions
% Ratio between actual and target output as a percentage (%).
Dimensioned The radiator has not been calculated or is no longer up-to-date.
The radiator has been calculated. The text colour indicates the
status of the parameter, i.e. the success of the design (see
below).
Manufacturer Name of the radiator manufacturer.
Type
Return temp. °C Calculated return temperature under the set conditions.
ID
configuration
configuration
Phi_HL,Ausl,b,i W Designed heat load of the heated room in watts (W):
Sum of transmission and ventilation heat losses and the heat-up load
of the room (to compensate for the effects of intermittent heating).
Room target Standard heat load of the heated room in watts (W):
output, W Sum of transmission and ventilation heat losses
Room actual Output of the installed radiator actually provided
extensions,
output, W
extensions,
Meaning of the text colours in the radiator list

Colour Meaning
Black The parameter is within the set tolerances.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Orange The parameter is outside the set tolerances (see 8.4.4.3, page 152).
Blue The radiator cannot be changed by the calculation. It has been manually fixed or
does not originate from a manufacturers database.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
149
Introduction

r!
8.4.3.3 Functions in the context menu
Add new
The function inserts a new radiator into the list. After calling the function, the " Room
selection” dialogue box is displayed:
 Select the room where the new radiator is to be
placed. The product database is displayed.
 Select the desired item. The new radiator is
displayed in the list. When confirmed, it is
placed in the centre of the room.
Change
The function replaces the item of the selected radiator.
Change all
The function replaces all items of all radiators and
assigns an item of the same model series from the
selected manufacturer. DDS-CAD uses the structural
dimensions of the existing radiators as the basis for
Basic functions
the selection.
Delete
The function deletes the selected radiator.
Delete all
The function deletes all radiators from the list and the model.
Lock/lock all
If a radiator is not to be changed by the calculation, you can disable it. Use this
option for example, for simulating existing facilities. The radiator calculation transfers
the output of this radiator to the pipe network calculation.
Zoom
The selected radiator is displayed magnified in the centre of the screen.
Zoom all
The entire drawing is visible on the screen.
Index
150
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
8.4.4 Install and dimension radiator automatically

The radiator calculation by DDS-CAD can accomplish several tasks, depending on its
configuration. Depending on the variety of tasks, carry out one or more calculation
processes, each with the following actions:
 Define the scope of the tasks (1). The display is adapted.
 Configure the calculation with Options (2)
 Click (3). The radiators are selected or modified and applied to the model.
Calculate
The calculation results can be printed.
(6) (7)(11
(1)
(4)
(10
Basic functions
(12
(13
(8)
(9)
configuration
configuration
(3)
(2)
(5) extensions,
extensions,
The decisive factor here is the configuration of the calculation. Here, you can first
decide whether the radiator is to be dimensioned – and thus changed (4) or whether
only their output for a given spread is to be re-calculated (5). To do this, please read
the following sections.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
8.4.4.2 Options for automatically installing new radiators
If the calculation is to install new radiators, check " Install radiators” (6). DDS-CAD
first checks a room for any windows present and their sizes. Afterwards, radiators
suitable for the selected type (7) are installed below the window according to the
installation parameters (8). Window width and installation height define a frame for
the overall dimensions (see 8.4.4.3, page 152). You can filter the window to be
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
151
Introduction

r!
considered according to their sill heights (9). You also have to make the following
decisions:
How should DDS-CAD process windowless rooms?
"Set radiators in windowless rooms” (10)

DDS-CAD considers windowless rooms. New radiators are inserted in the centre of
the room. You define the dimensions according to 8.4.4.3, page 152
Windowless rooms are not given new radiators.
How should DDS-CAD process rooms which already contain radiators?
"Consider only rooms without radiators” (11)

If there is already a radiator in a room, this room is not given any more. DDS-CAD
only optimises the existing radiators.
If the radiators in the room are not sufficient, the calculation may install more
radiators. The limit values Input "Don’t install in rooms with less than” and Input
"Max radiator output” apply as boundary conditions (see below).
What are the minimum and maximum outputs of a radiator?

Basic functions
The limit values Input "Don’t install in rooms with less than” (12) and Input "Max.
radiator output” (13) control the number of radiators in the room. For the explanation,
it is necessary to make a distinction between whether the room already contains
radiators at the time of the calculation process, or whether it is empty:
Input "Don’t install in rooms...”

Radiator present? Meaning
No If the standard heat load falls below the input value, this room is
not given a radiator.
Yes If the unfulfilled heat load falls below the input value, it is
distributed to the radiators present.
Input "Max radiator output”

Radiator present? Meaning
No The room is given as many radiators as required so that the
heat load is met. However, no radiator exceeds the input value.
Yes If the unfulfilled heat load exceeds the input value, it is
distributed to several additional radiators.
8.4.4.3 Options for the radiator calculation
The calculation is used to optimise the radiators: The effective heating area must be
large enough to provide the required output under the current system
temperatures (1). At the same time, they must not be designed too large for
economical reasons.
Index
152
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
During the
(1) (2) (3) (6)
operation, DDS-

CAD searches for
radiators with
appropriate
structural
dimensions (2),
(4) which may vary
(5) within defined
tolerances (3).
For rooms with windows, you can have length and height calculated as a function of
the window dimensions. It is also possible to use fixed settings. To do this, set the
respective flag accordingly. The graphic shows an example: The optimal length (4) is
to be calculated from the window width minus the adjusted value (in this case
120 mm). For the height (5) on the other hand, a fixed value has been set. DDS-CAD
uses the manufacturer's product data for this purpose. For rooms without windows,
Basic functions
the fixed values always apply.
The three dimensions and the output are always subject to

priority (6). If for example, two radiators are within all
tolerances, then the priority decides which is used. By default,
(7) the output is given the highest priority, followed by the height,
(8) the length and finally the depth. You can change the priority
sequence by clicking on the priority (7) and moving it with the
arrows (8).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
153
Introduction

r!
8.4.5 Calculated results of the radiator calculation
You can print out the calculated results in reports. Start the print function in the
Building Information dialogue:
Basic functions
 Click Print . The reports selection is displayed.

 Select the report by double clicking. The report is created and displayed as a
new window.
 Open the window in your Windows taskbar.
The following reports are available:
Report Contents
HH_Heater_placement.rpt All radiators are listed individually along with
room number and technical parameters.
HH_Heizkörperliste Fabrikate.rpt The radiators are differentiated by make and
model. Same items are added.
HH_Heaterlist room.rpt The radiators are listed according to their
position in the rooms. Same items are added.
8.5 Designing cooling units

Index
154
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Pipes and ventilation ducts Erro
r!
9 Pipes and ventilation ducts

9.1.1 Introduction and terms
Pipes and ventilation ducts are related functions in DDS-CAD that are very similar in
character, behaviour, and hence their application. For this description, they are
therefore combined under the term "Pipelines" or "Pipeline functions", with specific
differences being taken into account by corresponding notes and sections.
A pipeline is a construction of continuously

22 27
generated objects installed in a row. Each
pipeline has a start and an end point. In
25
between are segments, which are connected by
23 24 26 28 suitable components (e.g. pipe bends). These
structures are created automatically when you
are drawing and can be used in the command
22
list . The example shows a pipe drawn from left
23
to right . The numbers illustrate the relationship
Basic functions
between the visible object in the model and the
corresponding entry in the command list.
24
The starting point (22) defines the medium as a fundamental property of the
25
pipeline and the nature and presentation of the first segment . The pipeline route (23
to 27) in the example only consists of pipe sections and bends. In addition, fittings,
valves and other fixtures are used. You can also define special pipeline sections
where, for example, a different material, a section-based insulation or a different view
configuration
should be used (see 9.7, page 205). The command list uses specific entries to
configuration
describe all fixtures and section breaks. In the endpoint (28) the type of ending with
which the pipe has been terminated is described.
9.1.2 Settings in the starting point

The starting point is where you define the medium of a pipeline as well as the nature
extensions,
and presentation of the first segment – the initial properties of the pipeline. The
extensions,
respective start dialogue is used to manage these properties. Depending on the

situation, it is displayed at the start of a new pipeline or when editing an existing
26
one .
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
22
cf. 3.3.1.2, page 27
23
The direction is indicated by the arrows (see 9.1.3, page 163)
24
The medium applies to the entire pipeline route.
25
Material, size, insulation and presentation may be changed further along the pipeline route.
26
For example, if you start a pipe at a free point, DDS-CAD does not receive any instructions and you have to define all the
parameters yourself. However, if you begin at the connection point of an object (such as the cold water connection of a wash
basin), it will draw information about the medium and the starting height of the line from said object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
155
Introduction
Erro Pipes and ventilation ducts

r!
9.1.2.1 General settings and specific settings for piping
Start (1)
A pipeline can be started by various
operations. A manual setting in this area
is only required when starting at a free
(1) (3) (4) (5)
point (see 9.3.1.1, page 168).
Starting height (2)

The starting height describes the distance
(2) between the centre axis of the
pipe/ventilation duct and the top edge of
the finished floor. Their definition is only
important when starting in a free point. If
the pipeline begins at an object, DDS-
CAD automatically detects the starting
(8) (7) (6)
height and applies it.
Apply from connection (3)

Using this area's settings, you define the behaviour of a pipeline
(A), which branches off via a tee (B) from a main pipeline (C).
Basic functions
(A (B (C
"Medium"
Default setting: The medium of the branching pipeline (A) is determined by the
main pipeline (C). Any possible change of medium is transferred automatically.
The medium of the branching pipeline can be changed manually. This setting must
be made manually as required (e.g. connection between hot water pipe and
circulation pipe).
"Material and colour"

Default setting: The material and colour of the branching pipeline (A) is determined
by the main pipeline (C). Any possible change is transferred automatically.
The material can be determined by selecting an item. The colour is independent of
the medium and can be selected in the "Farbe/Layer/Stift" (Colour/Layer/Pen) tab.
"Insulation"
Default setting: The insulation material of the branching pipeline (A) is determined
The insulation material of the branching pipeline (A) is independent of the main
pipeline and can be defined in the "Insulation” tab (see 9.1.2.3, page 157).
Index
156
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Using insulation (4)

"Use insulation"
The material defined in the "Insulation” tab is used from the starting segment to the
end and/or to the section change.
The pipeline remains uninsulated from the starting segment to the end and/or to
the section change.
Section by section insulation: see 9.7.2, page 206
Medium (5)
The medium is the determining fundamental property of the pipeline and cannot be
changed in the course of the pipeline. Changing the medium always affects the entire
pipeline. For a better overview, all available media have been organised into groups.
"Material" (6), "Dimension" (7), item (8)

The settings (6) and (7) together form a search filter for the item (8):
 Select the "Material" (6) group. The available sizes are made available in
"Dimension" (7).
 In "Dimension" (7) select the required size. DDS-CAD automatically acti-
Basic functions
vates the appropriate item (8). You can also select the items manually. To do
this, click … .
9.1.2.2 Specific settings for ventilation ducts
The general settings for ventilation ducts

see 9.1.2.1 see 9.1.2.6 are largely similar to the general pipe
settings. Specific features consist in the
use of speed levels and in the selection of
the material.
configuration
configuration
Here, you first determine the shape of the
duct cross-section (1). The importance of
the other parameters is based on this
shape. For information on the significance
of the levels, please see 9.1.2.6,
page 160.
(1)
Adjustments,
extensions,
9.1.2.3 Insulation
This tab contains the initial properties of the insulation. You select the material and
the presentation of the insulation, from the starting segment to the end of the pipeline
and/or section change, in accordance with 9.7.2, page 206. Insulation must always
be taken into account when working with DDS-CAD. It has a visual impact and
affects calculations:
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
157
Introduction

r!
In the pipe network calculation (potable water)
Hot water pipes and circulation pipes must be fully insulated! In its calculations,
DDS-CAD checks the temperature of the hot water pipe and the prevailing
ambient temperature in the room. The insulation used determines the resulting
temperature loss and hence affects the size of the circulation pump. It follows: the
better the insulation, the smaller the circulation pump.
In the part list
The insulating materials used are included in the part list.
In the representation
The insulating materials used are displayed in the model according to their
thickness. In this way, you can visualise the whole space required by a pipe.
(1) (2) (3)

(5)
(4)
Basic functions
In the case of ventilation ducts you define the insulation thickness (1) manually and
select the desired material (2) from the product database. In the case of pipes DDS-
CAD automatically searches for the first insulating material with sufficient inner
diameter (4) on the basis of the outer diameter of the pipe (3). With … you can
manually select the insulation material from the product database, and DDS-CAD in
turn automatically checks whether the selected material fits the pipe. Display "Pipe
dimension” (3) is coloured red if the inner diameter of the insulating material is too
small.
For the colour representation in the model, first the "No active pen" (5) pen is
suggested. As a result, the insulation adopts the pen of the pipe or of the ventilation
duct. You can effect a colour distinction by selecting a pen.
9.1.2.4 Representation (by linetype)
Pipes and ventilation ducts can be

affected individually in their
representation. This tab is where you can
define the linetype for the representation
in the model, from the starting segment to
the end of the pipeline or to the section
change accordingly.
Index
158
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Type of representation (1)

Normal The pipeline is represented by solid lines. Colour and shading are
determined by the chosen medium and displayed according to the
selected view (see 9.1.3, page 160).
Dashed The pipeline is represented by dashed lines and no shading. You can
define the shape of the dashed line by setting the length for at most three
different line segments as well as the gaps between the segments. For
unneeded segments, enter the value "0".
Not visible The pipeline is not visible, but is included in the part list and the network
calculations.
Representation changed in sections: see 9.7, page 205
9.1.2.5 Connection type (pipes only)
Under the "Connection type” tab you can

define production lengths for a pipe as
(2) well as the required connecting
27
(1) elements . DDS-CAD monitors the
drawn length and places the connecting
element automatically. You can make the
Basic functions
setting both before drawing a new pipe or
28
for an existing pipe .
 Check "Automatically use” (1).
(3)  Define the production lengths (2), the
longest (top) and the shortest (bot-
tom).
 Select the item (3).
configuration
When drawing the pipe,
configuration
Length DDS-CAD automatically
sets the connections
according to the space
Length available and only uses
the active lengths. The
connecting elements are
extensions,
Length included in the part list

extensions,
along with their numbers.

The pipe is displayed with
Length Length the total length in metres.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Note:
If necessary, you can place the connecting elements manually (see 9.5.2.1,
page 200). You define the integration of valves and fittings in the object dialogue
of the respective component (see 9.5.1.2, page 199)
27
e.g. flange, bushing, screw
28
In this second case, refresh the view after configuring the setting. The changed setting will only then become active.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
159
Introduction

r!
9.1.2.6 Pressure loss (ventilation ducts only)
You can customise how the ventilation

duct behaves in the pressure loss
calculation (see 10.5, page 232). To do
this, check or uncheck " Lock
dimension” (1).
(1) (2) (3)
"Lock dimension” (1)

The dimension of the ventilation duct is not changed by the pressure loss
calculation in this segment.
The pressure loss calculation can change the dimension of the ventilation duct in
this segment.
In addition, the different segments of a ventilation network can be allocated to a

velocity level. For each level, in the pressure loss calculation you can set the
Basic functions
boundary conditions that must be met during a calculation-based sizing. Each level is
represented by a specific colour. Optionally, you can display the ventilation network
in the colours of the velocity level or the medium (see 161).
"Associate level” (2)

The velocity level of the current pipeline segment is taken from the previous
connection (e.g. in the case of a branch from the tee).
You can determine the velocity level freely (3).
9.1.3 Display options

The representation of pipes and

ventilation ducts is controlled via
the View menu and should be
adapted to the situation. The
For pipes... For ventilation ducts... graphic shows the different
options for pipes (left) and
ventilation ducts (right). In all
cases, there are flags that can be
either active or inactive.
Index
160
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
In terms of content, the representation options distinguish between pipes and

ventilation ducts in just two functions.
2D simple/expanded representation (pipes only)

On: Diameters and insulation thicknesses are visualised
according to the selected materials, so that this view reflects the
actual space required by the pipes.
Off: The pipes are represented in a line, regardless of their size.
View segments in colours

On: The entire area of pipes and/or ventilation ducts is filled by
the colour of their medium and/or their individually chosen colour.
Off: Pipes and/or ventilation ducts are displayed as lines.
Show drawing direction (arrows)
Basic functions
On: The flow direction of the pipes and/or ventilation ducts is
visualised by arrows.
Off: The flow direction is not shown.
Show connections from the storey above/below

Pipes and ventilation ducts are passed from one storey to
configuration
another through drawing operations (see 9.3.3.1, page 180). This
configuration
results in transfer points, which are set as visible in the storey
being shown and are used to continue the pipeline (see 9.3.1.7,
page 175). The example shows the transition points of various ventilation ducts. You
can see the cross-section and dimension.
Level representation (ventilation only)

extensions,
Ventilation ducts (including transitions/reducers) can be divided into different velocity

extensions,
levels for sizing by the pressure loss calculation (see 9.1.2.6, page 160). These
levels are visualised by different colours when level representation (left) is enabled. If
level representation is disabled, the ventilation ducts are coloured the same (right).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Level 1 Level 2
Level 4 Level 3
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
161
Introduction

r!
9.2 Strategies and concepts for designing the
network
9.2.1 General notes
When building a pipe or duct system, you can be flexible and act according to the
overall design status. DDS-CAD offers all possibilities for a practical and step-by-step
approach.
Generally speaking, you will begin with defining the main pipeline and riser points,
coordinate these with colleagues from other professional disciplines and correct as
appropriate. As the design status progresses and information becomes more and
more detailed, you can also advance the network design in stages. In DDS-CAD you
can size the network in each processing stage based on the information available to
you. In this process, you start working with estimated or roughly calculated
requirement values, which you can incorporate into the respective network via
29
substitute objects .
Basic functions
1 2
You can use this methodology in further planning, refine the network and also
perform calculations:
1.1 1.2 1.3
1.4 1.5 1.5
29
Substitute objects for ventilation (see 6.2.3, page 90); Substitute objects for potable water and heating facilities (see 8.1.2,
page 123)
Index
162
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
If the positions of the real objects are fixed, remove the substitute objects and
connect the real objects to the pipe network. We recommend using a step-by-step

approach in this regard. This is illustrated by the following example of a sanitary
system.
We have already explained the role of the main

pipes. If the pipes carry several media in parallel,
you first draw a reference line manually (see 9.3,
page 166). You can then have DDS-CAD
generate the parallel pipes (see 9.4.1, page 182).
Step 1
The main lines are
drawn manually
(see 9.3,
page 166).
Step 2
Basic functions
The distribution line
of a medium is pre-
pared manually
(see 9.3,
page 166).
Step 3
The prepared dis-
tribution line of the
first medium is du-
plicated (see 9.4.2,
configuration
page 183).
configuration
Step 4
The objects are
automatically con-
nected (see 9.4.4,
page 188).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
163
Introduction

r!
9.2.2 Notes on ventilation systems
When constructing the ventilation network, please note the following:
Each medium must be considered separately.

Supply air, extract air, outgoing air and intake air are each individual lines. The
systems of the various media must be drawn and sized separately.
Work with the expected dimensions.
To accommodate the space requirements of the ventilation network right from the
start, you should use the expected dimensions.
Do not plan too tightly.
The pressure loss calculation can increase the dimensions and thus the space
requirements. Only the width of rectangular ducts is changed, not their height. In
tubular ducts, the change takes effect along the central axis.
Using the example started above, we also provide you with two possible approaches
for working in the rooms. The aim is to construct a ventilation system whose main line
has been prepared:
Basic functions
Working concept I – Place air terminals and connect to duct

In this method, the air terminals have
already been placed as objects
(see 6.2.2, page Error! Bookmark not
defined.). You now need to connect the
previously free objects to the duct
system. Basically you have three
options.
• branch off from the existing duct and connect at the air terminal.
• start at the air terminal and connect at the duct.
• automatically connect the air terminal at the nearest duct (see 9.4.4.4, page 193).
Index
164
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Working concept II – End ducts with an air outlet

Working concept II assumes that the air terminals are inserted into the model directly
when constructing the duct system:
 Start the sub-section at an existing duct (page 171/172).

 Draw the duct and end it with an air terminal (page 180).
 For more branches, convert a bend into a tee (page 173).
Copying a branch
Buildings with a regular room distribution allow the preparation of a finished branch
Basic functions
with connected air outlets as a template. The sub-section can then be inserted into
the appropriate rooms and subsequently edited (see 9.4.2, page 183).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
165
Introduction

r!
9.3 Drawing a pipeline manually

Manually drawing pipes and ventilation ducts is indispensable when designing the
network. You can develop a complete network manually without using auxiliary
30
functions , but you cannot use any auxiliary function without having done manual
preparation beforehand. The procedure (using the example of a pipe) always
corresponds to the order shown. The ventilation ducts behave in a similar way:
Options for inter-floor

installation At free point
Show connec- At the end of the pipe

tions from the Start "Pipeline"
lower/
upper floor
On the object
Define starting point and (e.g. washbasin, boiler)
draw direction
As branch from a pipeline
(T-piece)
Pipeline Draw subsequent path At a bend (convert bend

Basic functions
to T-piece)
At interconnection point
Define endpoint
(End pipe) from adjacent floor
Draw horizontal Open at the last point

Chapter 9.3.1
Page 167
With object at the last
Draw vertical point
Avoid clashes As interconnection point

(over/under bending) to adjacent floor Chapter 9.3.3
Page 180
Insert mouldings and As connection to the
insulation during the process object (washbasin)
As connection to
pipeline
Chapter 9.3.2
Page 176
30
e.g. copy sub-networks (9.4.2, page 187) or automatically use connection functions (9.4.4, page 192)
Index
166
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.3.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment

Description Options Referenc
e
Starting at a free point page 168

h
h
Starting at the pipe page 170

end (continue pipe)
Branch from a hori- page 171

zontal pipe
Basic functions
Branch from a vertical page 172
pipe
h
Starting at an object page 174

(e.g. boiler)
configuration
configuration
Starting at a bend page 173
(convert bend to tee)
extensions,
Starting at the transi- page 175

extensions,
tion point from adja- h

cent storey
h
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
167
Introduction

r!
9.3.1.1 Starting at a free point
You can define the pipeline's starting point by clicking at any X/Y position.
The start dialogue is displayed and you are given full access to all parameters.
Note
Use this option, for example, to prepare individual pipeline sections and sub-
networks. You can incorporate these later on in your work and complete the
network in stages.
General use
(5) (6)
(4)
Smart start
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Start the pipeline function.

 Click on the starting position. The start dialogue is displayed.
 Select a starting option (1; see below), the medium (2) and the material (3). In
the case of a wastewater pipe, you can make specifications for the slope (4) (see
below). For notes on the other settings, please refer to chapter 9.1.2, page 155.
 Click OK . The pipeline starts at the specified position. The selected starting
option (1) and any specifications relating to the drawing direction (4) determine
how the function behaves.
Index
168
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Notes on the starting options

The starting option defines the height of the starting point (A). In the course of the
first segment (B) DDS-CAD assumes default settings, which in turn are specific for
each starting option:
Free
You enter the height of the starting point (A) in figures in
(B the pipeline's starting dialogue. With the default settings
for the drawing direction, the first segment (B) runs
horizontally without incline or slope. You can determine
the course of the first segment (B) by moving the cursor.
(A
On the ceiling
The starting point (A) is set at the room height. With the
(A (B default settings for the drawing direction, the first
segment (B) runs vertically downwards. DDS-CAD
queries the values for the change in height (see 9.3.2.4,
page 178). The starting point is also a transition point to
the storey above. There you can resume the pipe and
Basic functions
continue it (see 9.3.1.7, page 175).
In the floor
The starting point (A) is at the bottom edge of the floor.
With the default settings for the drawing direction, the first
segment (B) runs vertically upwards. DDS-CAD queries
the values for the change in height (see 9.3.2.4,
the storey below. There you can resume the pipeline and
configuration
(B continue it (see 9.3.1.7, page 175).
configuration
(A
Notes on the slope (wastewater pipe only)

extensions,
extensions,
When working with wastewater pipes, you

can set a slope. This is maintained over
the course of the pipe, as long as no
changes are made. Enable the slope in
the "Direction & Pos” tab and define the
desired value.
Adjustments,
A negative value lets the pipe fall, while a

Adjustments,
positive value lets it rise.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
169
Introduction

r!
9.3.1.2 Starting at the pipeline end (continue pipeline)
The open ends of a pipeline can

be resumed and continued. In
this way, you can complete the
network and integrate prepared
pipeline sections. Properties and
drawing direction are taken from
the existing pipeline.
Application
Horizontal pipeline
Basic functions
Smart start
Vertical pipeline

 Point to the end of the pipeline that you want to continue. The pipeline is high-
lighted. A menu is displayed, listing several connection points.
 Select "Starting point...” or "End point...”.
In the case of a horizontal pipeline the cursor moves the movable pipeline in the
specified direction. You can draw the further course using the mouse.
In the case of a vertical pipeline DDS-CAD queries the desired continuation in a
dialogue as a relative jump in height (in relation to the height of the connection
point) or as an absolute target height (in relation to the floor) (see also 9.3.2.4,
page 178).
Index
170
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.3.1.3 Branch from horizontal pipeline

When branching from a horizontal pipeline DDS-CAD automatically inserts a tee. You
determine installation location, dimension of the branch and drawing direction:
Application
(2) (3)
Define position:
On ongoing section
(5)
(1)
Smart start At the start of line section
(4)
At the end of line section
Basic functions
 Start the pipeline function (1).
 Point to the position of the branch. If the position of the cursor is clear, the pa-
rameters of the pipe are displayed in an information box (2). if the position is not
clear, a menu lists the possible connections (3).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The "General Tee with re-
ducer” dialogue box is displayed (pipes: see 9.5.2.3, page 200; Ventilation ducts:
see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Error! Bookmark not
configuration
defined.).
configuration
 If necessary, adjust the size of the branch and check the item (4).
For a horizontal branch

 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can
draw the pipeline.
extensions,
extensions,
For a vertical branch

 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed.
 Press  [PgDn] or  [PgUp]. DDS-CAD que-
Adjustments,
[PgUp] [PgUp]
ries the height (see 9.3.2.4, page 178).
Adjustments,
For an inclined branch (circular cross-sections

only)
 Enter the direction in degrees (5).
 Click OK . DDS-CAD queries the height
(5) (see 9.3.2.4, page 178).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
171
Introduction

r!
9.3.1.4 Branch from vertical pipeline
When branching from a vertical pipeline, the installation

position of the tee is defined by entering the height (h) in
figures. You determine the dimension of the branch in the
tee dialogue box. You set the direction dynamically by
moving the cursor or you can define it as the angle to the
h X-axis (6).
Application
(1)
(6)
Basic functions
Pipeline
(5)
(3)(2) (4) (7)


 Point to the vertical pipeline (1). A menu lists the possible connections.
Note:
To install the tee, the entry which states only medium, size and the Z height is
critical. The displayed height is equal to half the distance between the upper and
lower ends of the vertical (here the end point and bend).
 Select the entry for the installation of the tee (here, "PWC Cold-
water” Ø250 Z=1.273). The "New height" dialogue box appears.
 Define the installation height as an absolute value (2, in relation to the floor) or a
relative jump (3, to the height of the calculated centre point).
 Click OK (4). The "General Tee with reducer” dialogue box is displayed.
 If necessary, adjust the size of the branch and check the item (5). If you want to
set the direction of the branch in numbers, enter the angle between the X-axis
and the desired draw direction (6)
 Click OK (7). You can draw the pipe.
Index
172
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.3.1.5 Starting at a bend (convert bend to tee)

You can start the pipeline at a bend (1). DDS-CAD
(1) converts it into a tee.
Application
(1)
Basic functions
Smart start
configuration
configuration
 Point to the bend. It is highlighted.
 Click . The "General Tee with reducer” dialogue box is displayed.
extensions,
extensions,
 Set the draw direction (1) and click OK . The cursor moves the pipeline in the
specified direction.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
173
Introduction

r!
9.3.1.6 Starting at an object (e.g. boiler)
You can start a pipeline at the connection point to an

object (e.g. a boiler). DDS-CAD detects the position of the
connection point, the media and suggests a size. You
select the material of the pipeline from the product
database. You can then specify the draw direction freely.
Application
(1)(2)
Basic functions
Pipeline
(3)
(4)

 Point to the object. The object is highlighted. If the position of the cursor at a
specific connection point is definite, the name of the object and medium, size
and height of the connection point are displayed in an information box (1). if the
position is not clear, a menu lists the possible connections (2).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The product database is dis-
played. The display is limited to the proposed size of the connection point (3)
and only the corresponding materials are shown.
 Choose the material. You can draw the pipeline (4).
Index
174
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.3.1.7 Starting at the transition point from an adjacent storey

A pipeline whose start or end point has been defined as
"on the ceiling" or "in the floor" generates a transition point
(1) in the adjacent storey. From there you can start the
pipeline and transfer to the next storey as a riser (2) or
(1)
use it for the installation in the current storey (3).
h
(3)
The transition point sets all the technical properties and
(2) the drawing direction. You only define the transfer (2) or
the jump in height (h).
h
(1)
Application
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
Show connections
from the lower floor/
upper floor
Smart start
configuration
configuration
 Enable the "Show connections from below” and/or "Show connections from
above” option. The transition points (1) are visible.
extensions,

extensions,
Start the pipeline function and point to the transition point. The symbol is high-
lighted. An information box shows the starting option (floor or ceiling), starting
height Z and the medium.
 Click . The "New Z-height” dialogue box queries the height.

Adjustments,
For the direct transfer to the following storey (2) click UKD/FFB . The riser pipe has
Adjustments,
been passed to the following storey, the function remains active.

 For the application in the current storey (3) enter the jump in height (h) as a rela-
tive jump (in relation to the current height of the starting point) or as an absolute
amount (in relation to the floor) and click OK . You can continue drawing the
pipeline at the new height.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
175
Introduction

r!
9.3.2 Drawing the pipeline route
Pipes and ventilation ducts behave in a similar way to

general polylines. In the simplest case – the horizontal
installation without change in height – you define the
route using the cursor. Each click defines a fixed
point (1), which is initially interpreted by DDS-CAD as a
bend.
(1)
As long as no other fixed point has been set, the bend
15° behaves dynamically. The cursor position determines
the direction and angle. An automatic Ortho mode
31
ensures that commercially standard bends are used
as the cursor moves.
30°
The direction and length of the bend (1) and the
segment following it (3) are fixed with the following
fixed point (2). You can continue the work.
Basic functions
45° When drawing a pipe the last stage is always to define

(2) the position of the fixed point (2) in the desired manner.
This creates a variety of individual situations, which can
usually be resolved through direct drawing operations
(3) (keyboard shortcuts).
In other cases, you have to configure the geometry of the fitting or fixture by manual
entries in the object dialogue. This happens, for example:
• With inclined changes in direction in pipes and circular ventilation ducts

• If the required component changes the geometry of the subsequent pipeline (e.g.
reducing bends, transitions for ventilation ducts)
In this situation, open the

context menu (click ) and
select the required function.
For pipes... For ventilation ducts...
In this way you get to the
object dialogue, where you
can configure the
component.
For more information on the use of bends, tees and transitions for pipelines see
chapter 9.5, from page 198. The similar functions for ventilation ducts are described
in chapter 9.6, from page 203. For notes on step-by-step insulation and on dashed
line representation, see chapter 9.7, from page 205.
31
The example shows the angles of 15°, 30° and 45°.
Index
176
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The following sections contain descriptions for the direct drawing operations
(keyboard shortcuts). Specifically, these apply to the following options:

• Horizontal installation – positioning the fixed point by entering a measurement
• Horizontal installation – positioning the fixed point at a distance from a
reference
• Height change in the pipeline route or transition to another storey
• Undo last drawing step
• Collision detection and collision avoidance
9.3.2.2 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point by entering a measurement
Example: Segment (1) is to lead to the new fixed point (2) in a certain direction by a
certain length via a 90° bend:
(2)
(1)
[]
Basic functions
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The key determines the direction. The "Collect Points”
dialogue is displayed.
 Enter the value in metres (m). A helper line indicates the position of the new
fixed point with the current setting.
 Click OK . The operation is finished. You can continue your work.
9.3.2.3 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point at a distance from a reference
configuration
Example: The position of the fixed point (2) is to be
configuration
(a)
(2) defined at a certain distance (a) to an obstacle (e.g. a
wall). The length of the segment (3) results from the
(3) operation.
extensions,
extensions,
[Shift] + []
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the border of the obstacle. DDS-CAD de-
tects the intersection. This is the reference for defining the fixed point (2).
 Press the arrow keys to specify the direction for the location of the new fixed
point (here [Shift]. The "Relative from snap point” dialogue box appears.
 Enter the distance from the reference point to fixed point in metres (m).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
177
Introduction

r!
9.3.2.4 Height change in the pipeline route or transition to another storey
The operation achieves two

Z
objectives:
DZ Height change in the pipeline route

Z Y with a gradient angle α. You define
a
the new working height as a target
height Z (absolute value, relative to
the floor) or as the difference ΔZ
X (relative to the current working height).
The pipeline is continued in the
current storey.
Transition to an adjacent storey in the

gradient angle α. The pipeline runs to
the ceiling or to the floor and stops.
The result is a transition point in the
Transition to an adjacent storey adjacent storey, where you can
resume the pipeline and continue it.
The gradient angle remains active.
Basic functions
 Press [PgUp] (move upwards) or [PgDn] (move downwards). The height

query dialogue box appears.
 Enter the gradient angle α.
Transition to an adjacent storey

 Click Go to Floor . The pipeline has been transferred. The pipeline function remains
active and you can define a new starting point.
Height change in the pipeline route

 To define a new installation height Z: "Absolute height"
Input
To define a height difference ΔZ: Input "Up" or "Down".

 Click OK . The pipeline is located at the new height. You can continue the
work.
Index
178
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.3.2.5 Undo last drawing step

If you have made a mistake in the route, DO NOT end the
pipeline function with [ESC]! You can revert the pipeline
route drawn up to now to an earlier position:
[Step back] [Step back]
 Press [backspace] or select the function with the same name in the context
menu. The last fixed point is undone. The function remains active.
9.3.2.6 Collision detection and collision avoidance
While working with a pipeline function, DDS-CAD checks whether the pipeline
collides with other pipelines. The check is performed over all DDS pipeline functions.
You can show the ventilation ducts predefined in electrical engineering, for example,
Basic functions
and develop the pipeline system of the cable ladders without any collisions. The
building's structural elements are also checked in an IFC model with suitable quality.
The check is performed dynamically while you are drawing. If the cursor approaches
an obstacle at the same height, DDS-CAD detects a collision. A menu (1) is
displayed at the cursor, offering three options. Select an option by clicking :
(2)
(1)
configuration
configuration
(4)
(3)
extensions,
extensions,
(5)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
(2) Manual configuration for collision avoidance

After calling the function, the "Avoid clashes” dialogue box is displayed. You can set
collision avoidance as over- or under-crossing. You can also define the angle of the
bend (5) and the distance to the obstacle. Clicking OK negotiates the obstacle
according to the settings. The next click fixes the working height and you can
continue with your work.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
179
Introduction

r!
(3) automatic over-crossing / (4) automatic under-crossing
Options (3) and (4) apply the current settings of the "Avoid clashes” dialogue box to
the current situation. The next click fixes the working height and you can continue
with your work.
9.3.3 The last segment, position and type of the endpoint

The ending functions for a pipeline can be divided to two groups:
• A function in the context menu or a keyboard shortcut converts the current fixed
point to the pipeline's endpoint.
• The connection to an object or to a different pipeline defines the endpoint.
9.3.3.1 Ending functions in the context menu
For pipelines... For ventilation ducts...

Basic functions
Function/Key Note
End function The pipeline is ended at the current fixed point. The pipeline
[ESC] function is ended.
Close and start new The pipeline is ended at the current fixed point. The pipeline
[Enter] function remains active and you can define the next starting
point.
End in the storey below A bend is placed at the position of the fixed point. This bend
[Ctrl]+[End] leads the pipeline vertically downwards or upwards. The
pipeline ends as a riser section in the floor/in the ceiling, and
End in the storey above may be continued in the adjacent storey (as per 9.3.1.7,
[Ctrl]+[Home] page 175).
End pipe/duct The "Rohrtrasse beenden" (End pipe) or "Kanaltrasse

[E] beenden" (End duct) dialogue box is displayed. You can
define specific settings.
End with cap These functions end the pipeline with the object specified.
The respective dialogue is displayed for configuration. The
End with air outlet
Index
180
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
[A] pipeline function remains active.

End with cover
[S]
End with consumer You can configure a substitute object to simulate a con-
sumer/sub-network.
For ventilation ducts: see 6.2.3, page 87
For pipes (potable water only): see 8.1.2, page 120
9.3.3.2 Connection to an object
Objects have connection points at which the medium is also defined. If the active
pipeline approaches the connection point of an object, DDS-CAD performs a check. If
the media match, the object is highlighted and the connection point's information is
displayed.
Basic functions configuration

configuration
 Click . The "Connect pipes” dialogue box appears. This offers several connec-
tion options, which are visualised in a preview.
 Select the connection type and click OK . The connection is created. The pipe-
line function remains active. You can define a new starting point.
extensions,
extensions,
9.3.3.3 Connection to a pipeline
You can connect a pipeline to an already existing one if their media

32
match or are suitable for a connection . The connection can be
made on the current section by a tee or at the open end.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
If you approach a pipeline with the appropriate medium at the same

height, a menu is displayed containing the pipeline information and
functions for avoiding collisions (see 9.3.2.6, page 179).
32
For example, a connection between a hot and a cold water pipe is prevented by DDS-CAD. On the other hand, it is possible
to connect the circulation to a hot water pipe via a tee.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
181
Introduction

r!
To establish the connection, click on the pipeline
information. The connection is made immediately.
However, if there is a height difference, DDS-CAD

points this out. To establish the connection, click .
Select the connection type in the "Connect pipes”
dialogue box (see above).
9.4 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network

9.4.1 Creating parallel pipes
It is often the case that parallel pipeline routes of different media are desired. A
corresponding auxiliary function generates a maximum of four parallel pipes to the
selected segment of a reference line (2). During the operation you specify
• the media of the new pipes in the planned order of your arrangement
•
Basic functions
the distribution of the new pipes to the right or to the left of the reference line
• the distances between the pipes
The sizes and materials of the new pipes are taken from the reference line. Of
course, they may need to be changed later. In the following example, several pipes
are to be created parallel to the sub-segment of a cold water pipe and arranged on
both sides of the reference line.
(1) (2) (3)

(4)
(6)
(5)
 Select the pipeline segment (1).

 Click . The context menu is displayed.
 Select "Draw parellel pipe chain”. The "Parallel Drawing” dialogue box is dis-
played. The medium of the reference line is stated (2). Below is a selection of dif-
ferent media for the first parallel pipe (3)
Index
182
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Select the medium of the first parallel pipe (3). Another menu (4) is displayed,
where you can define another parallel.

 Select all other required media in the desired arrangement.
 Use (5) to define the arrangement of the parallels in relation to the reference
line. In the example, circulation and hot water pipes (in flow direction) should ap-
pear to the left of the reference line and flow and return should appear to the
right.
 Define the distance between the pipes (6).
 Click OK . The new pipes appear parallel to the selected segment of the refer-
ence line. You can integrate them into your networks.
9.4.2 The copy function for sub-sections

By using the "Repeat branches” (pipes) or "Repeat
branches” (ventilation ducts) functions, you can
duplicate an existing sub-section and insert it into
the model several times. Sub-sections that start in
a free point or as a branch from a main duct are
ideal templates. The copy can also be placed at a
Basic functions
free point or integrated into an existing duct via a
Repeat branches
tee.
Repeat branch
configuration
configuration
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
(1)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select the starting point of the sub-section (1). In the example, the tee of the
branch has been chosen.
 Select "Extend selection and copy paste tree”. The entire subsequent sub-
section is automatically selected and the dialogue is displayed.
 Select the desired option (2).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
183
Introduction

r!
Use on of the four options to configure how the copied sub-section is pasted. In doing
so, the required settings are enabled. To do this, please read the following sections.
Paste into existing section

The copied sub-section (1) is pasted into an existing
pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number of
copies (2). The set distance (4) applies from the insertion
of the first copy (3) onwards. The flow direction of the
target pipeline (5) indicates the arrangement of the
(2)
copies (6). The direction of the branching tees (right/left)
(4) is taken from the original.
In this way for example, you can transfer the installation

of one room to one or more other rooms:
Basic functions
(1)
(3)
(6)
(5)
 Select the sub-section to be copied (1) and start the copy function. The dialogue
box appears.
 Select "Insert in existing net same twist”.
 Enter the number of copies (2) and the distance (4).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. DDS-CAD expects the insertion point in
the target pipeline.
 Click on the insertion point (3) of the first copy. The first sub-section has been
inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. If there
are multiple copies the function is ended. If you have only set one copy, the func-
tion remains active. You can define further insertion points.
Index
184
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Rotate 180° and paste

pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number of
copies (2). The set distance (4) applies from the insertion
of the first copy (3) onwards. The flow direction of the
target pipeline (5) indicates the arrangement of the
(2) copies (6). The direction of the branching tees (right/left)
is rotated by 180° compared to the original.
(
(3)
(1)
Basic functions
(5)
(6)
box appears.
configuration
 Select "Insert in existing net opposite twist +180”.
configuration
extensions,
inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. They are
extensions,
rotated 180° relative to the original. If there are multiple copies the function is
ended. If you have only set one copy, the function remains active. You can
define further insertion points.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
185
Introduction

r!
Paste into new Z-height (at a free point)
The copied sub-section (1) is inserted into the model at a

free point by clicking . The starting point (2) of the new
sub-section is located at the set height (3). The entire
sub-section is rotated by the set angle (4) relative to the
original.
After the operation, you can incorporate the new sub-

(3) section into the network (see 9.4.3, page 187).
(4)
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
box appears.
 Select "Insert one copy at given height".
 Enter the installation height (3) for the starting point of the new sub-section.
 Enter the rotation (4) of the sub-section relative to the original.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. DDS-CAD expect the insertion point.
 Click on the insertion point (2). The new sub-section has been inserted at the
selected position with the settings for height and rotation. The function remains
active. You can define another insertion point.
Index
186
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.4.3 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network

You can incorporate the open end of a sub-section into the overall network in two
ways:
Option A
 Start the pipeline function at the open end of the sub-section (as per 9.3.1.2,
page 170).
 Draw the continuation of the pipeline to the main line and make the connection in
accordance with 9.3.3.3, page 181.
Option B
 Select the open segment of the pipeline
by clicking . The segment is temporarily
converted into a polyline.
 Click on the node at the open end of
the segment. You can move the open end
of the segment with the cursor.
Basic functions
 Point to the pipeline where the connection
is to be made. If the pipeline contains the
same medium, it is displayed as a se-
lected object.
 Click . The previously open end has
been connected via a tee.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
187
Introduction

r!
9.4.4 Connecting objects automatically
9.4.4.1 Introduction and general use
An automatic connection function for heating and sanitary objects as well as air
terminals provides assistance while you are building the respective network. It allows
the automatic connection of one or more objects of the same type (such as
washbasins) to the relevant media pipes in one step. Radiator connection pipes can
also be passed directly to the storey below. Any possibly existing connections are
automatically deleted and then renewed. The function assumes that the structure of
the network has been prepared.
Example (sanitary functions):

Several washbasins have been placed and the distribution pipes for hot and cold
water have been prepared. None of the objects are connected at the beginning of the
operation.
Basic functions
Calling the connection function

 Select the objects to be connected.
 Select "Connect selected object(s)”. The dialogue box appears. You can config-
ure the function.
Index
188
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Configuring the connection function
The connection function behaves according to the options of the selected object
group. For example, with washbasins you can see several connection types for each
of wastewater (1) as well as hot and cold water (2). By checking "Connection" you
can suppress or enable the connection function for these media entirely and select a
connection option. A preview (3) shows you the results for each medium and makes
the selection easier. The settings (4) are used to define specific parameters (see
9.4.4.3, page 191).
(4)
(1)
(3)
(2)
Basic functions
Executing the connection function
To execute the function, click OK . If the object only has one connection point for a
medium, the connections are executed and the function is ended. Radiators in
particular, but also WCs may contain several connection points for a medium. In this
case DDS-CAD required the position data for the connection. A message about the
medium is displayed and you are prompted to select the connection points:
Adjustments,
configuration
extensions,
 Confirm the prompt with OK . The object is magnified.

 Point to the desired connection point on the object. A message about the con-
nection point is displayed.
 Click . DDS-CAD checks the other media. If there are several connection
points, the routine is repeated. If you have defined all the connection points, the
connections of all selected objects will be executed in this form.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
189
Introduction

r!
9.4.4.2 Connection to pipes in the storey below
Various objects can be connected to pipes in the storey below. The example shows
radiator connections:
Basic functions
Application
Prepare the objects in the upper storey and the distribution pipe in the lower storey.
The operation is executed in the upper storey.
(1)
(2)
 Show the storey below (see 5.5, page 80). In addition to the radiators, the distri-
bution pipes in the storey below are visible.
 Select the objects to be connected and start the connection function.
 Select the desired connection type (1).
 Switch to the "Settings“ tab and check "Connect to pipes in the storey below...”
(2).
 Click OK . The connections to the selected objects are executed in both sto-
reys. The operation is ended.
Index
190
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.4.4.3 Specific settings for sanitary objects

This section describes all settings for
sanitary objects at a glance. Please note
that the object types only query the
(1) relevant settings. For example, a tap
(2) does not have a connection point for
(3) wastewater pipes. These parameters
(4) are therefore not included in the
dialogue. The graphic (left) has been
(5) combined from the settings dialogues of
all functions.
(6)
Input
"Distance to wall” / "Calculate” (1)
The settings control the installation depth for hot and cold
water pipes in the wall and/or the jump by the pipe from the
Basic functions
object to the rear. The status in "Calculate” is crucial.
"Calculate”
configuration
The value in Input "Distance to wall” is ignored. DDS-CAD checks the actual
configuration
distance of the object to the wall and guides the pipe into the wall. The installation
depth is calculated from the pipe diameter. Use this setting if the pipe is to
penetrate into the solid wall.
The pipe jumps from the object to the rear by the distance entered. The actual
distance to the wall is ignored. Use this setting if the object has been mounted on a
front wall, for example.
extensions,
extensions,
Input "Slope” / "Calculate” (2)

The settings control the slope of the horizontal wastewater pipe from the object to the
connection with the collecting main or with the downpipe. The status in
"Calculate” is crucial
Adjustments,
"Calculate”
Adjustments,
The slope of the collecting main is read and transferred to the wastewater pipe
from the object up to the connection. The input slope is ignored.
The input slope of the wastewater pipe from the object up to the connection to the
collecting main or to the downpipe applies.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
191
Introduction

r!
"Avoiding collisions” (3)

When connecting the object to hot and cold water pipes installed in parallel, DDS-
CAD automatically avoids collisions. The connecting line for the distant medium is
guided over or under the closer medium and connected via a bend. The connection
can be made by either a 90° or a 45° connection:
"Bend” (4)
This setting is specifically for floor drains.
2×45° 1×90° It configures the first bend on its way from
the drain to the collecting main.
Basic functions
T-piece for vertical pipe - 45°/90° (5)

This setting configures the
wastewater connection
from washbasins, WCs,
bathtubs, shower pans and
domestic appliances to a
downpipe.
Input
"Height for bend“ / "Calculate” (6)
This setting is specifically for wastewater lifting units. It defines the height of the
backwater loop. The status in "Calculate” is crucial.
"Calculate”
The input height of the backwater loop is ignored. DDS-CAD calculates this value
depending on the storey height.
The input height of the backwater loop applies.
Index
192
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.4.4.4 Automatic connection of air terminals

DDS-CAD differentiates between air terminals that are connected from the side or
from above:
Both images show the connection to the nearest duct in the current storey. Please
note that air terminals with a lateral connection to the duct must be rotated if the
connection is to work.
The position of the connection point is

displayed in different ways, depending on
Basic functions
the object. The graphic shows three
examples. The symbol (1) has been
highlighted for clarity.
(1)
In addition, you can supply the air terminals

to be connected from above via the storey above. Through a setting in the
connection function (page 197) DDS-CAD creates a connection from the air terminal
to the ceiling. This creates a transition point on the next storey, where you can
resume these connections and continue them. In the two images you can see a
corresponding example:
configuration
configuration
(2)
(1)
(1)
extensions,
extensions,
Left: View from below from the room to the air terminal in the suspended ceiling (1)
Right: View in the intermediate space between the suspended ceiling and concrete
floor with the connection to the top.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
193
Introduction

r!
The function assumes that the structure of the network has been prepared. In the
following example, several air terminals have been placed and the main line of the
ventilation system has been drawn. None of the objects are connected at the
beginning of the operation.
Calling the connection function

Basic functions
 Select the objects to be connected.

 Select "Connect selected object(s)”. The dialogue box appears. You can config-
ure the function.
Configuring the connection function

The connection function behaves according to the options of the selected air
terminals. It offers several connection types (1) and a preview (2) shows the result.
Here too, DDS-CAD recognises the two basic types of air terminals. Only the
connection options that are possible are enabled and displayed.
(4)
(2)
(1)
(3)
Depending on the connection option chosen, settings on how the bends (3) are used
may be required. The settings (4) are used to define specific parameters (see
page 197).
Index
194
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Executing the connection function

To execute the function, click OK . If the
connection function settings match the conditions in
the model, the connections are made and the
function is ended. If this is not the case, the affected
air terminals are ignored. An information list is
displayed, indicating critical situations. Use the
information list as an aid:
Basic functions
Message in the information list Cause and possible remedy
"It is not possible to connect to the duct The main duct is too short, the air outlet is
(the connection may be outside the outside the duct end. Move the air outlet or
duct). Operation cancelled." extend the duct.
"The connection is only possible if the You have selected multiple objects and one
connection point allows lateral or more objects can only be connected from
connection, not above/below. Operation above/below. Connect the objects in their
cancelled." own group or individually.
"The connection is only possible if the You have selected multiple objects and one
object has connection points on the top. or more objects can only be connected from
configuration
Operation cancelled." the side. Connect the objects in their own
configuration
group or individually.
"It is not possible to connect at the There is not enough space between the air
current angle (not enough distance outlet and the duct. Select a larger angle or
between duct and object). Operation move the air outlet.
cancelled."
"Only 90° bends are possible in You have chosen an incorrect angle. Use a
extensions,
rectangular ducts. Operation cancelled." 90° bend to connect the outlet to the
extensions,
rectangular duct.
"The distance between the air outlet and The distance from air outlet to duct is too
duct is too small for the selected small for the set parameters. Select a
connection. Operation cancelled." different connection type, angle, distance, or
move the air outlet.
Adjustments,
"Some objects of the connection are The connection is made, but some objects
Adjustments,
overlapping (e.g. bends). Is this are overlapping (e.g. bends). Check the
intentional?" connection in 3D.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
195
Introduction

r!
Checking and correcting connection conditions
Each row in the information list represents one air terminal. Using the information list,
you are taken directly to the respective air terminal:
 Select an entry. The air outlet is displayed as a selected object.
 Click Zoom object . The associated air outlet is displayed magnified in the centre of
the screen. You can check the local conditions.
Notes on connection options
Option Example Notes

From below/side Lateral connection/connection from
using 90° bend above
Other settings are not required. All
bends are executed at 90°. Where the
height of the air outlets if the same as
the main duct, the connection is created
directly without bends.
Basic functions
From above Connection from above

Select the angle of the first bend (1).
The second bend (2) is executed at 90°.
You define the length from the main
(1) (2) duct to the first bend (a) in the settings
(page 194).
From side using Lateral connection
one bend Select the angle of the bend.

two bends Select the angle of the bends. You

define the length from the main duct to
the first bend (a) in the settings
(page 194).
three bends Select the angle of the bends. You
define the length from the main duct to
the first bend (a) in the settings
(page 194).
Free with flexible Lateral connection/connection from
duct above
Other settings are not required.
Index
196
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Notes on specific settings

This section describes all connection
settings at a glance. Please note that the
connection options query the relevant
(1)
settings.
(2)
(3/4/5)
Input "Distance (a)” (1)
The settings define the distance from the main duct to the first bend for the following
connection options:
Option a=0.5m a=1m
Basic functions
From above
(vertical)
From side using

two bends
(horizontal)
From side using

three bends
configuration
(horizontal)
"Connect to ceiling” (2)

configuration
"Calculate”
extensions,
extensions,
The connections of the selected air terminals lead to the ceiling (cf. page 193)
The selected air terminals are connected to the nearest duct on the current storey.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
197
Introduction

r!
9.5 Fixtures and fittings in pipes

In 9.1.1 (page 155) we mentioned

that fixtures and fittings are also
pipeline objects. They are listed as
part of the pipeline route in the list
of commands between the starting
point and endpoint. You can see
the correlation in the image,
represented using the example of
two bends, a tee, a valve and a
pump.
In addition to their specific features

and forms of application, all pipeline objects also share common features. These are
described at the beginning for all object types. Afterwards we will explain the specific
features of each separate type.
9.5.1 Features common to all pipeline objects

Basic functions
9.5.1.1 Direction, orientation, rotation on the pipe axis
All pipeline objects have options that configure their rotation and/or orientation on the
pipe centre line. Essentially we have to distinguish between two groups:
The rotation of bends and tees always affects the flow direction of the connected pipe
33
segment, which is why this parameter is set when drawing the pipe . In pipes that
flow purely horizontally and vertically, this is done automatically by a drawing
operation. You only have to enter the rotation manually as an angle when there is an
inclined jump in height or an inclined branch, or when flowing from a horizontal line.
Fixtures are generally inserted into an existing pipeline subsequently. This

automatically takes you to the object dialogue, where the rotation is defined as an
angle. Since fixtures do not affect the direction of the connected pipe segment, any
subsequent change is not critical.
For both groups, there is also a distinction as to whether they are in a horizontal
(lying down) or a vertical (standing) pipeline.
33
A subsequent change is possible in terms of the program, but should only be performed with extreme caution. In any case,
connected pipes are separated by rotated connecting pieces. The connection to the following network must be renewed
manually.
Index
198
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Rotation in horizontal pipes

In a horizontal pipe, the angle of rotation is relative to the flow direction of the pipe.
From the point of view of the flow direction, the object rotates counter-clockwise:
Top=270°
Fittings Bends and T-parts
Left=180° Right=0°
Direction of Bottom=90°
t l
Rotation in vertical pipes

In vertical pipes, the angle of rotation is relative to the global co-ordinate system. Set
the direction in Input "Angle to X-axis”. All other parameters are irrelevant.
90°
Y
Basic functions
Fittings Bends and T-parts
180° 0°
(1)
270° X
9.5.1.2 Connection type
configuration
configuration
You can define the type of incorporation
into the pipe network for all pipeline
objects. Under the "Flange” tab you can
select the connecting element as an item
(1). In order to actually use it, check
"Add flange to object” (2). In this way the
extensions,
connecting elements are displayed in the

extensions,
model and included in the part list.

(2) (1)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
199
Introduction

r!
9.5.2 Notes on the various pipeline objects
9.5.2.1 Pipe coupling
Pipe couplings (e.g. flanges) are installed in the pipe network

through the following options:
• Automatically by defining production lengths (see 9.1.2.5,
page 159)
• Automatically by installation points of pipeline objects (see
9.5.1.2, page 199)
• Individually, by manual insertion (see 9.5.3, page 201)
Pipe coupling
Basic functions
9.5.2.2 Bend
Bends are always installed in the pipe when drawing and configured automatically in
most cases. Each fixed point that is followed by a new segment after a direction
change is converted into a bend (see 9.3.2.1, page 176). The technical parameters
(material and size) are taken from the pipe used. The geometric parameters (angle
and direction) are determined by the drawing operation.
A manual configuration
may be required in special
cases, for example if no

see 9.5.1.1
suitable drawing operation
is available for the desired
change of direction. In this
case, call the object
dialogue of the bend via
the context menu (click )
or press [B] (cf. 9.3.2.1,
page 176).
9.5.2.3 Tee
Index
200
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Tees are installed in the pipe network through the following options:

• Automatically when branching from an existing pipeline (see
9.3.1.3, page 171 and 9.3.1.4, page 9.3.1.4)
• Automatically when converting a bend to a tee (see 9.3.1.5,
page 173)
• Manually, when drawing the line (see 9.3.2.1, page 176)
Tee
see 9.5.1.1

9.5.2.4 Reducer
configuration
Reducers are installed in the pipe network through the following
options:
• Automatically, through the pipe network calculation
•
extensions,
Manually, by subsequent insertion (see 9.5.3, page 201)
extensions,
Reducer
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
9.5.3 Manual installation of pipeline objects

All pipeline objects that do not alter the direction of the pipe can be inserted later.
The procedure is shown using a valve as an example. All other functions behave in a
similar way.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
201
Introduction

r!
Insert valve (2)
(1)
Procedure:
 Select the required function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line
shows the "Locate flow segment and press left mouse button” prompt.
Basic functions
 Click at the position where the component is to be inserted. The object

dialogue of the component is displayed.
 Select the item (1), set the required parameters and click OK . The component
is part of the pipe.
Index
202
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.6 Moulded parts and devices in the ventilation

duct
9.6.1 Moulded parts in the ventilation duct
Moulded parts behave in a similar manner
in the ventilation duct, as fittings do in
pipes (see 9.6, page 203. They are
configured either automatically by a
drawing operation or by manual
adjustment. However, the manual
configuration is accorded more
(1) importance.
You can enter the dimensions of a

moulded part in its object dialogue.
A diagram (1) shows the connections to
the respective setting values (2).
Basic functions
(2)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
203
Introduction

r!
9.6.2 Devices in the ventilation duct
Devices such as attenuators, dampers, etc. are added to an existing duct

subsequently. You will find all the functions in the toolbox. The procedure is shown
using an attenuator as an example. All other functions behave in a similar way.
Attenuator
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Procedure:
 Select the desired function. The cursor turns into a crosshair and moves the
symbol of the built-in device. The message line shows the following prompt: "Lo-
cate flow segment and press left mouse button”.
 Click in the duct. The object dialogue of the built-in part is displayed.
 Select the desired item (1) and correct other settings (2) where necessary.
 Click OK . The built-in device is located in the duct. The function remains ac-
tive. You can insert the same device at other locations by clicking .
Warning!
Components that depend on flow, such as flow rate regulators, are inserted in the
drawing direction of the duct.
Index
204
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.7 Segments in the pipeline route

The nature of the pipeline functions was described in 9.1.1 (page 155). It was said
that the initial properties of the pipeline are defined in the starting point and that these
can change over the pipeline route – with the exception of the medium. This change
in dimension is effected by corresponding components (e.g. reducers). To change
the material, various aspects of the representation and the insulation, you can divide
the pipeline into sections. If two consecutive segments have identical properties, they
can be merged back together.
9.7.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route

The following operation is used to disconnect a continuous pipeline into two
segments, whose colours or materials can then be changed separately from each
other. To start with, we have a continuously drawn pipe (1).
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
(4)
Split pipe
configuration
configuration
 Select the "Split a pipe” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message
line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and press left mouse but-
ton”.
 Click on the position where the division is to be made (2). The "Start drawing
extensions,
pipes” dialogue box is displayed.

extensions,
 Uncheck "Associate material / color” (3).

 Select the properties (4) for the new pipeline segment.
 Click OK . The two pipeline segments have different properties. The operation
Adjustments,
is ended.
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
205
Introduction

r!
If two consecutive line pipeline segments have identical properties, they should be
merged together. Unnecessary divisions complicate subsequent processing.
 Select the ends of the adjacent segments.

 Select "Merge with connected chain”. If properties are the same, the merge is
carried out and the operation is ended. If the segments have different settings, a
corresponding message is displayed. In this case it is not possible to merge the
segments.
9.7.2 Changing insulation status and linetype

To change the insulation status or the line type in the pipeline, no prior split is
necessary. You can carry out the change through two corresponding functions, when
drawing the pipeline or through subsequent processing.
Basic functions
Both functions operate according to the same principle. You create an entry in the
command list, which defines the status of this position until the next change. The
graphic shows an example:
Insulation
The pipe was been
drawn from left to right.
Command (35) enables
the insulation.
Command (41) disables
it.
Linetype:
A ventilation duct is to
be marked as partially
obscured. Command
(45) starts the labelling.
Command (47) ends it.
Index
206
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The use of both functions is described using the example of insulation:

Changing the state while drawing
 Fix the point for the beginning of the insulation by clicking .

 Select the "Insert insulation” function.
The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Check "Use insulation” and click OK . The pipe uses the insulation as it con-
tinues. You can end its use in the same way.
Inserting a status change retroactively

You can insulate an existing pipe retroactively in sections and/or undo the use of
Basic functions
insulation.
configuration
Insulation
configuration
extensions,
extensions,
 Select "Insert insulation” function in the toolbox. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and
press left mouse button”.
 Click on the position in the pipe, from which the insulation is to be enabled or
disabled. The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Configure the insulation and click OK . The selected setting applies from the
selected position in the drawing direction of the pipe. The function remains active
and can be used further along the pipe.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
207
Introduction

r!
The procedure for
changing the linetype is
the same. In the context

menu (while drawing)
select the "Insert stippled
/ dotten Start of Pipe”
function.
To insert the label
retroactively, call the
Dashed pipe "Dashed pipe” or
"Dashed duct” function
from the toolbox. For
notes on the settings,
please refer to chapter
9.1.2.4, page 158.
9.8 Editing pipes and ventilation ducts

9.8.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections
Basic functions
An object must be selected before it can be

edited. In addition to the general selection
functions (see 20.1.2, page 506) there are
two other methods used for editing
pipelines. These mainly ensure the
complete deletion of a section with or
without the branching sub-sections.
 To call the function, select the pipeline segment where editing is to start.
 Select the desired selection function.
Select entire section

DDS-CAD selects the section from the
selected segment to its end point. Branching
pipelines are ignored and not included in the
editing.
Select section from selected piece

selected segment and all branching sub-
sections up to their end points.
Index
208
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
9.8.2 Changing the pipeline route

9.8.2.1 Move fitting or moulded part
(2) The pipeline route is fixed by the position of

bends and tees. You can move both
components along the pipeline route.
(1) The connected segments are updated
automatically.
(1)
 Select the component by clicking . Handles are displayed on the component.

 Click on a handle. The object is movable. Tees can be moved over each
other. Bends move along the axis of the previous segment.
 Click on the new position. The component is fixed and the pipeline route cor-
rected. The operation is ended.
Basic functions
Example 1 – Moving a tee:
Before After
configuration
Example 2 – Moving a bend:
configuration
Before After
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
209
Introduction

r!
9.8.2.2 Editing the route of a segment
A segment is the
connection between two
pipeline objects, e.g. from
the starting point to next
bend (left) or between two
bends (right). To enable a
segment for editing, select
it by clicking .
Start and end points can be

edited as nodes. They are displayed as a solid square . By contrast, an open
square is displayed in the centre point of the segment . Click on the respective
symbol to open the context menu with the editing functions:
Node
Editing with polyline: move The node (in this case the starting point of the line)
can only be moved in the flow direction of the
segment. The segment is thus extended or
shortened. If necessary, the direction of the next
Basic functions
bend also changes; its position remains unchanged.

The function starts when you click the symbol .
Start pipe movement The node (in this case the starting point of the line)
can be moved in any direction. This may change the
direction and position of the bend.
When approaching another pipeline with the same medium, the connection can be made
via a tee (see 9.4.3, page 187).
Segment
Editing with polyline: parallel shift The segment is shifted in parallel. The
function starts when you click the
symbol
Move pipe insert The segment is split and you can change
the route (see below).
Index
210
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The function "Displace parallel polyline-like” is best described using an example. It is

assumed that the pipeline route is necessary because of a change in the floor plan.
An obstacle is to be circumvented:
Before After
Start of the editing
 Select the segment by clicking . The centre point is marked by an open square.
Basic functions
 Click on the symbol . The context menu is displayed.
 Select "Displace parallel polyline-like”. The cursor moves the two movable ends
of the new sub-segments.
The colour of the movable sub-segments can be black or red. This symbolises the
status of the bends, if a fixed point is defined at the current cursor position.
Colour Meaning
Black The angle of the first bend is equivalent to a commercially available standard
size (15°, 30°, 45° or 60°).
configuration
Red The angle of at least one bend differs from the commercially standard sizes.
configuration
Defining the new pipeline route
Define the new pipeline route. Set the positions of each of the new bends by clicking
: Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
211
Introduction

r!
End of the editing
The function remains active until it is terminated. After you have fixed the last bend,
press [ESC]. The pipeline will be displayed with the new route.
[ESC]
9.8.2.3 Editing the route of a pipeline segment
The operation is useful for example, to straighten the pipeline route. You can remove
bends without having to break up the pipeline and subsequently repair it.
Before After
Basic functions
However, it is critical that you first define the pipeline segment to be edited and
convert it into a polyline. You can then edit it. At the end of the operation, you need to
resolve the polyline back into individual segments. This procedure is also best
described using an example.
Defining a pipeline segment converting it to a polyline
(1)
Before: Individual
objects of the selected
(2)
After: Selected segment

as polyline object
(3)

 Select "Start polyline-like edit”. The separate objects (2) are compiled into a
polyline object and labelled separately in the model (3).
Index
212
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Nodes and segments of the newly formed object can be edited using the polyline

options. Click on the respective symbol to open the context menu with the editing
functions:
(4)
To edit the example described above, use the "Delete node” function (4). In this way,
you get a visually continuous route (5). However, the remaining segment is still a
Basic functions
polyline. This polyline has to be converted back into a pipeline.
(5)
Converting a polyline into a pipeline

By re-converting into a pipeline, you incorporate the previously edited segment back
into the network and enable its calculation:
 Select the pipeline segment. configuration

configuration
extensions,
extensions,
 Select "Stop polyline-like edit”. The operation is ended.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
213
Introduction

r!
9.8.3 Editing moulded parts and fixtures
9.8.3.1 Converting 90° bend into two 45° bends
You can convert a single

90° bend into two 45°
bends and vary the
distance between the two
bends.
Basic functions
 Select the bend.

 Select "Replace with two bends”. The "Update bend” dialogue is displayed.
 Adjust the distance between the bends and click OK . The single bend has
been replaced by two 45° bends. The operation is ended.
9.8.3.2 Converting two 45° bends into one 90° bend
You can merge two 45°

bends into one 90° bend.
 Select the two bends. You cannot select any other objects.
 Select "Replace with one bend”. The bends have been replaced. The operation
is ended.
Index
214
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Network calculations Erro
r!
10 Network calculations

10.1 Introduction and general procedure
In DDS-CAD you can calculate heating, potable water and wastewater networks.
As preparation work, mark the relevant starting points of a network and assign them
a shared pipe network name. Then start the calculation function, define the boundary
conditions and run the calculation. The pipe network is automatically balanced during
the calculation. You can print the results of the calculation.
Complete pipe network is constructed Requirements
Consumers
Label calculation points
Pipes
Chapter 10.2
Page 215
Fittings
Basic functions
Pipe network calculation Pipe network calculation Pressure loss calculation in the
Heating pipe network Potable water network ventilation system
Introduction Introduction Introduction
Configure Configure The "Pressure loss

calculation calculation calculation" dialogue box
Enable calculation, Work with the pipe

analysis of the network network table
configuration
configuration
Work with the pipe
Calculated results Chapter 10.5
network table
Page 232
Calculated results
Chapter 10.3.5.2
extensions,
Page 225
extensions,
Chapter 10.3
Page 218
10.2 Labelling calculation points

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
To prepare for a pipe network calculation, you have to assign the pipe network name
and define the starting position for the network analysis. To do this, set one or more
calculation points (depending on the type of network). The line segment in which a
calculation point is located, is declared as the main line. All lines branching off are
therefore sub-sections.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
215
Introduction
Erro Network calculations

r!
At the same time, the calculation point defines the logical flow direction in the
network.
A calculation starting point that is defined at the end segment of a pipeline

automatically reverses the flow direction of the entire pipeline. The former end
segment is converted into a start segment by the operation:
before after
Notes on the heating pipe network

Heating pipe networks are calculated in sections, where each heating line requires
exactly two calculation points (for flow and return).
If all radiators are supplied by a single

Calculation points:
"Entire network"
pump, the entire pipe network can be
captured in one step.
Basic functions
Calculation points "Line 1"

On the other hand, if a large heating
facility works via distributors in several
lines with separate pumps and control
equipment, then each line has to be
34
calculated individually . In this
example therefore, the calculation

Calculation points points for flow and return have to be
"Line 2"
defined for both line 1 and line 2.
Notes on the potable water network

Potable water networks can be calculated together or separately.
In the continuous system the cold water
Calculation points "Potable
water" pipe is led into the building. It supplies
HW the taps and the hot water tank. The tank
Circ
is where the hot water and circulation
pipes start. In this case, set a calculation
point for all three media and assign them
a shared common pipe network name.
CW
34
It is not possible to calculate the entire system in one step.
Index
216
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
If the network structure is appropriate, you can consider both the cold water line and
35
the hot water line separately and assign different pipe network names. However, it

is not possible to calculate hot water and circulation lines separately.
Notes on the ventilation network

In the pressure loss calculation, supply air, extract air, outgoing air and intake air are
each individual lines. The systems of the various media must be sized separately.
Therefore, define a pipe network name for each medium.
First medium and new pipe network name
(3)
(1)
(4)
(2)
Basic functions
Set
calculation point
 Select the "Set a calculation point” function. The message line shows the
"Locate flow segment and press left mouse button” prompt.
 Click on the first or last segment of a pipeline (1) or the branch of a new sub-
section (2). The "Properties of Calculation Point” dialogue box is displayed.
configuration
 Assign the pipe network name (3) and click OK . The calculation starting point
configuration
is symbolised by a rectangle with rounded corners (4). The function remains ac-
tive. Depending on the type of network, you may have to define the calculation
starting point of the missing media (see below).
Assigning an additional medium to the pipe network name

If the calculation point is to be assigned to an already
extensions,
extensions,
existing pipeline network name, open "Circuit

name” and select the desired entry.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
35
It may be that only one medium or the other is present in the system.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
217
Introduction

r!
10.3 Pipe network calculation in the heating pipe

network
10.3.1 Introduction
When calculating the heating pipe network, DDS-CAD first determines the volume
flow required by the consumers. Then the system dimensions the sizes of the pipes
such that a maximum heating medium flow velocity and/or a certain pressure loss
cannot be exceeded at any point. The pipe dimensions are adjusted in the model
where required. A hydraulic balancing also takes place, in which the preferences for
radiator valves and lock shield valves are calculated. DDS-CAD thus ensures that for
the designed system there is:
• uniform heat dissipation/heating times in all rooms
• good regulation behaviour by the thermostatic valves
• optimal return temperatures
• optimised energy consumption (heating, pump's electrical consumption)
The expansion vessel used is checked and compared with the parameters of the
calculated system. If DDS-CAD notices a difference, an appropriate size is
suggested.
Basic functions
Warning!
For a correct calculation, all fixtures necessary for operation (pumps and valves)
and safety devices must be inserted in the network. However, the heat generator
(if it is not known) can be skipped.
Building
 Select the "Building Informa-

tion” function and switch to the
"Heating/Cooling Systems”
tab. The table lists all heating
(1) lines.
 Select the network that you
want to calculate (1) and click
Calculate (2). The "Heating pipe
network calculation” is dis-

played with the "Options" tab
active.
(2)
 Configure the calculation.
Index
218
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
10.3.2 Configuring the calculation

Use the options
to define the
(7) system
(1) parameters and
any boundary
(2) (8) (9) conditions to be
observed.
(3) (4) (5) (6)
The system parameters include system temperatures (1) and the medium used in the
system (5).
Basic functions
The boundary conditions stipulate the limit values of variable parameters and how
DDS-CAD is to react if values deviate from these limits. The network can be
dimensioned such that a maximum flow rate and/or a maximum pressure drop is not
exceeded at any point in the network (1). You also select a minimum size (3), which
(regardless of these limits) must not be exceeded. If valve authority and/or pressure
loss of the radiator valves exceed the specifications, DDS-CAD can shift the excess
pressure loss to the lock shield valves (7).
The radiator outputs required when dimensioning can either be read from a
calculated radiator design (see 8.4.4, page 151) or be read as a fixed specification
configuration
from the product database (8). Choose the second option for example, if you are
configuration
working with pre-specified radiators in an existing network.
You may have different pipe materials in the pipe network as a result of extensive
changes. If you want to ensure a uniform material is used, check "Same material in
entire pipe network” (9). DDS-CAD uses the first sub-section as a basis and transfers
its pipe material to all other sub-sections. In this way, the size adjustment is not
extensions,
affected. If the materials of the sub-sections are to remain unchanged, uncheck the
extensions,
box. In this case, DDS-CAD only changes the sizes.
During the calculation, you can also change the make of the radiator valves and lock
shield valves (6). To do this, check "Replace all radiator valves and lock shield
valves”. Then determine the manufacturer and the item.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
219
Introduction

r!
10.3.3 Enabling the calculation and analysing the network
Switch to the "Calculate” tab. DDS-CAD analyses the pipe network. If there are no
errors in the pipe network (case A), you are taken to the pipe network table. The
dialogue box displays the number of radiators and/or underfloor heating distributors
within the building and reports the number of correctly and incorrectly connected
objects (1).
A
Basic functions
(1)
However, if the system determines that there are incorrectly connected radiators in
the network, it displays an information list (case B). In this case:
Case B – There are incorrectly connected radiators in the line

A list of the incorrectly connected radiators is displayed.
 Select the row and click Zoom object . The radiator is displayed magnified in the cen-
tre of the image.
 Stop all functions and correct the radiator connection.
 Repeat the procedure until the "Heating pipe network calculation” dialogue box is
displayed without any error messages.
Index
220
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
10.3.4 Working with the pipe network table

The pipe network table lists all sub-sections of the active main line with its settings
and calculation results.
Use the dialogue

box's scroll bars
(1) or zoom function
(2) to view the
entire table.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
The filter (1) is used to enable the display of the main line. Clicking on a sub-
section opens a context menu with additional functions:
"Lock” fixes the size of the sub-section, so that it cannot be changed by the
calculation.
Warning!
Locking a sub-section in the feed has no effect on the parallel sub-section in the
configuration
return (and vice versa).
configuration
"Lock all” fixes the sizes of the entire network. In this way you can simulate an
existing pipe network, for example. DDS-CAD only calculates the volume flows and
pressure losses under the current conditions and outputs them in the logs. extensions,
"Zoom" magnifies the selected sub-section in the centre of the screen. Use "Zoom
extensions,
all” to make the whole drawing visible on the screen.
Meaning of other functions and displays:

Find by pointing (3) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of a
sub-section. After opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible and you can
Adjustments,
select the sub-section in the model by clicking . This will take you back to the pipe
Adjustments,
network table, where the corresponding row is selected.
Calculate (4) starts the pipe network calculation.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
221
Introduction

r!
10.3.4.2 Information in the pipe network table
Data in the pipe network table

Column Contents
Sub-section The full name of the sub-section is composed of the number of the
main line and the number of the sub-section.
From Number of the sub-section from which the sub-section branches off.
Room Position of the sub-section's end object, given as storey, region and
room number.
End object Type of the end object in the sub-section (e.g. "tee" or "radiator")
Qh, W Power (in watts) that is transmitted through this sub-section.
Volume flow, l/h Volume flow in the sub-section (in litres per hour)
Speed, m/s Velocity in the sub-section (in metres per second)
Invalid path blank
Freeze pipe The size of the sub-section may be changed by the calculation.
dimension
The size of the sub-section is locked against changes.
Basic functions

NW, DN Size (nominal width) of the sub-section. You can define a size by
clicking on .
Pipe length, m Length of the sub-section in metres
Pipes, Pa/m Pipe friction pressure drop (in pascals per metre)
Pipes, Pa Pipes pressure loss (in pascals)
Fittings zeta Resistance coefficient of the fittings
Fittings, Pa Pressure loss due to individual resistances (in pascals)
Fixtures, Pa Pressure loss due to fixtures (in pascals)
X Position of the sub-section's end object in the compiled building model

(see 5.5, page 80), given as an absolute co-ordinate.
Y
Z
Index
222
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
10.3.4.3 Starting and executing the calculation

If you have configured the calculation, you can dimension the pipe network:
Basic functions
(1)
Application configuration
configuration
 Click Calculate (1). The "Select pump” dialogue box is displayed.
extensions,

extensions,
Set the pump pressure and click OK . The "Safety valve response pressure”
dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the response pressure and click OK . An information list provides vari-
ous notes. If the expansion vessel used is too large, a smaller one is suggested.
If it is too small, it is automatically replaced by a larger one.
Adjustments,

Adjustments,
Confirm the information list with OK . The "Heating pipe network calculation" is
displayed with the calculated results.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
223
Introduction

r!
10.3.5 Calculated results
10.3.5.1 Pipe network table and printout of the results
The pipe
network table (1)
shows the
calculated
results of each
individual sub-
section, as well
as pressure
loss, pump
pressure and
volume flow of
the entire
network (2).
Clicking OK
(1) (2) (3) (3) takes you
Basic functions
back to the
Building
Information
(4)
(5) (6)
dialogue.
Index
224
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Print (4) starts the printout of the calculated results for the selected line. Select the
desired report.
Report Contents
HPS_Rohrnetzberechnung einzelner List of the sub-sections of the selected line
Strang.rpt according to the pipe network calculation.
HPS_Ventilauslegung einzelner Strang.rpt Valve default settings for all radiators in
the line, separated by room.
Pressing System (5) gives you a view of the most important system parameters. OK
(6) transfers the calculated result into the drawn pipe network. DDS-CAD opens all
storeys and change the sizes.
10.3.5.2 ((Valves))
10.3.5.3 ((Safety facilities))
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
225
Introduction

r!
10.4 Pipe network calculation in the potable water net-

work
10.4.1 Introduction
By calculating the potable water pipe network in accordance with DIN 1988, the sizes
of the supply and circulation pipes are defined and transferred to the drawn network.
DDS-CAD uses a different approach for this process. All consumption points and
individual resistances are included. Cold water and hot water networks can be
considered both separately and together. For example, the calculation of the hot
water network does not require that a cold water network exists. The same goes for
the opposite case.
Warning!
The hot water and circulation pipes must be insulated in order to ensure a correct
calculation (see 9.7, page 205).
Basic functions
Building
(1)  Select the "Building Infor-

mation” function and switch
to the "Potable water” tab.
The table lists all potable
water lines.
 Select the network that you
want to calculate (1) and
click
Calculate (2). The "Potable wa-
(2)
ter pipe network calculation”
is displayed with the "Op-
tions” tab active.
Configure the calculation.
Index
226
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
10.4.2 Configuring the calculation

You use the options to
define the system
parameters and the
boundary conditions of
the dimensioning (1)
and you specify
globally whether the
consumption points (2)
(1) (2) should be included in
the calculation.
Include consumption points

Option Meaning
All The volume flows (VR) of all consumption points in the network are
Basic functions
added to the peak flow (VS).
Only each The peak flow (VS) is calculated depending on the selected use (see
greatest of all 5.4.1.1, page 72):
similar tap Business, hospital, school
points The volume flows (VR) of all consumption points in the network are
added to the peak flow (VS).
Residential building, hotel
Objects of the same type in the room are compared. The room's
largest consumption point is considered for the peak flow (VS).
Only the Objects of the same type in the room are compared. The room's
largest in the largest consumption point is considered for the peak flow (VS).
configuration
room
configuration
Only the Objects of the same type in the region are compared. The region's
largest in the largest consumption point is considered for the peak flow (VS).
region
Note:
extensions,
You can modify how each separate consumption point is considered in the
extensions,
calculation individually (see 10.4.3.1, page 228).

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
227
Introduction

r!
10.4.3 Working with the pipe network table
The pipe network table

is divided into sections.
The upper part (A) lists
(1) all sub-sections of the
active main line. Use
the scroll bars or the
zoom function (2) to
A view the settings and
calculated results. The
(2) lower part (B) adds the
volume flows and
pressure losses of the
active main line.
B
Activate the desired
main line in the filter (1).
(3) (4) Clicking on a sub-
section opens a context
Basic functions
menu.
"Lock” fixes the size of the sub-section for the calculation.

"Lock all” fixes the sizes of the entire network. In this way you can simulate an
existing pipe network. DDS-CAD only calculates the volume flows and pressure
losses.
"Zoom" magnifies the selected sub-section in the centre of the screen. Use "Zoom
all” to make the whole drawing visible on the screen.
"Edit Properties” is only active for sub-sections,

whose end object is a consumption point. A dialogue
shows the parameters of the selected consumption
point and its behaviour in the pipe network (5). If
necessary, you can remove a single consumption
point from the globally affected configuration (see
10.3.2, page 219) for the pipe network calculation
and consider it separately:
Yes: The consumption point is included in the
calculation.
(5) No: The consumption point is not included in the
calculation.
As per setting...: see 10.3.2, page 219.
Continuous run units: The consumption point is
considered a continuous run unit.
Find by pointing (3) is a navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation results of a
sub-section. After opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible and you can
select the sub-section in the model by clicking . This will take you back to the pipe
network table, where the corresponding row is selected.
Calculate (4) starts the pipe network calculation.
Index
228
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
10.4.3.2 Information in the pipe network table

Data in the pipe network table (upper part)
Column Contents
Sub-circuit The full name of the sub-section is composed of the number of the main
line and the number of the sub-section.
From Number of the sub-section from which the sub-section branches off.
Room Position of the sub-section's end object, given as storey, region and
room number.
End object Type of the end object in the sub-section (e.g. "tee" or "washbasin")
Def. Yes The object is always included in the
consideration calculation.
No The object is not included in the calculation.
Global settings see 10.4.2, page 227.
Continuous run unit The object is identified as a continuous run unit
and included in the calculation.
Considered Specifies whether the consumption point is included or not. This depends
on the general default according to 10.4.2 and individual object
properties according to 10.4.3.1.
Basic functions
VR, l/s Total flow rate
VS, l/s Peak flow rate
Invalid path blank
Freeze The size of the sub-section may be changed by the calculation.

The size of the sub-section is locked against changes.
NW, DN Size (nominal width) of the sub-section. You can define a size by clicking
configuration
on .
configuration
Pipes, mbar Pressure loss of the pipes
Fittings, mbar Pressure loss through fittings
Valves, mbar Pressure loss through valves
Filters, mbar Pressure loss through filters
Meters, mbar Pressure loss through meters
extensions,
Water tanks, Pressure loss through water tanks

extensions,
mbar
Geodetic, mbar Pressure loss through geodetic head
Sanitary Pressure loss through sanitary objects
objects, mbar
Adjustments,
Total, mbar Total pressure loss

Adjustments,
X Position of the sub-section's end object in the compiled building model

(see 5.5, page 80), given as an absolute co-ordinate.
Y
Z
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
229
Introduction

r!
10.4.3.3 Executing the calculation
If you have configured the calculation, you can dimension the pipe network:
(1)
Basic functions
Application
 Click Calculate (1). The calculation routine starts. For large networks, an information
window is displayed, showing the processing status. In the case of an existing
circulation line, the "Auswahl der Pumpe" (Select pump) dialogue box is dis-
played. If there is no current circulation line, the calculation is performed without
any prompt.
 Set the pump pressure and click OK . The main dialogue of the pipe network
calculation is displayed with the calculated results.
Index
230
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
10.4.4 Calculated results

The pipe network table shows the calculated results of each individual sub-section,
as well the supply pressure and the pressure surplus of the entire network. The
properties of the consumption points have been added to the calculated values.
Clicking OK (1) takes you back to the Building Information dialogue.
Basic functions
(1)
extensions,
configuration
(2)
Print (2) starts the printout of
the calculated results for the
selected line. Select the desired
report.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Report Contents
HTS_Drinking water.rpt List of the sub-sections after the pipe network calculation
with the pressure losses and the parameters of the sanitary
objects.
HTS_Circulation.rpt You get a list of all sub-sections of the circulation and hot
water pipe with the pressure losses, heat losses and the
parameters of the sanitary objects (calculated by
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
231
Introduction

r!
differentiated procedures).
10.5 Pressure loss calculation in the ventilation

system
10.5.1 Introduction
Supply air, extract air, outgoing air and intake air are each individual lines. They must
be dimensioned separately. The duct network calculation performs the following
functions:
• Dimensioning of the ducts and pipes
• Pressure loss calculation
• Dimensioning of the fan
• hydraulic balancing of the dampers and air outlets
Basic functions
Building
 Select the "Building Infor-

mation” function. The
"Building Information” dia-
logue box appears.
 Switch to the "Pressure
(1) Loss Calculation” tab. The
(2) table lists the names of all

ventilation lines.
 Select the line that you
want to calculate (1) and
click Calculate (2). The
"Pressure Loss Calculation”
10.5.2 The "Pressure loss calculation" dialogue box

The pressure loss calculation dialogue lists the current duct and pipe network with
the associated parameters. You can calculate the duct and pipe network and specify
settings for the pressure loss calculation.
Index
232
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

The table on the left (1) contains sub-sections along with their dimensions, velocities
and pressure losses. The components of a selected sub-section are displayed in the
table on the right (2) along with their data (dimension, velocity, zeta coefficients and
pressure loss).
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
 Select a sub-section and click on a row in the table (1). The components of
the selected sub-section are displayed along with their data (dimension, velocity,
zeta coefficient and pressure loss) in the table on the right (2).
 Click on a component in the right-hand table (2).
This opens a context menu with the following contents:
configuration
configuration
Message in the context menu Function
"Zoom all" The drawing is displayed in full on the screen.
"Zoom selected object to the right" The selected component is magnified and
displayed in the top right of the screen.
"Zoom selected object in full" The selected component is magnified and
extensions,
displayed in the centre of the screen.

extensions,
"Edit selected object" The object dialogue of the component is displayed.

You can change the component's settings.
"Apply changes" Changes made manually are not altered by the
calculation.
"Select object in drawing" A navigational aid to quickly get to the calculation
Adjustments,
results of an object you are interested in. After

Adjustments,
opening the function, the dialogue box is invisible

and you can select the object in the model by
clicking . This will take you back to the
calculation dialogue, where the corresponding row
is highlighted.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
233
Introduction

r!
The different colours and font thickness mean:
Colour / font Meaning

thickness
"Bright blue" The value is too low compared to the specifications with
impermissibly low set value.
"Pale blue" The value is too low compared to the specifications with
basic set value.
"Bright red" The value is too big compared to the specifications with
impermissibly high set value.
"Pale red" The value is too high compared to the specifications with
basic set value.
"Green" The value has been changed by the calculation.
"Black bold" The value is part of the determining line in the system and
affects the fan's parameters.
"Black" The value is within the tolerance.
10.5.2.1 "Config” tab
The "Config” tab (1) shows the actual state of the duct network, as it is represented in
Basic functions
the model. You can print out the current values in reports.
(2)
 Click Print (2). A selection of different reports is displayed.

 Select the desired report by double clicking . The report is created. The taskbar
at the bottom of the screen shows the button with the symbol:
 Click this button. The print preview is displayed and you can start printing.
Index
234
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Report Contents

VP_Data dampers.rpt You receive a list of air outlets with the associated
calculated results.
VP_Ventilation pressure loss You receive a list of the pressure loss calculation
details.rpt with all moulded parts of the selected line.
VP_Ventilation pressure loss You receive a list of the pressure loss calculation of
branch.rpt the selected line.
10.5.2.2 "Calculate” tab
In the "Calculate” tab you can size the pipes and ducts and balance the system.
Pressing UPDATE transfers the calculated results to the "Config” tab.
(1)
Basic functions
(1)
configuration
configuration
"Calculate adding transitions“ mode:
When sizing the ducts and pipes, further reducers are automatically inserted by the
program. The sizing and thus further reducers are affected by the values specified in
the settings. Only the width of rectangular ducts is changed during sizing, not their
height. Tubular ducts are re-sized along their central axis.
extensions,
extensions,
"Calculate without adding additional transitions” mode:

When sizing the ducts and pipes, the program does not insert any additional
reducers. Only those tees and reducers present in the drawing are adapted in size.
"Only adjust Air Terminals and Dampers” mode:

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The dimensions of the ducts and pipes are not changed. The air outlets and dampers
are adjusted according to their set values. After sizing the duct and pipe network, you
can apply the changes to the DDS drawing.
10.5.2.3 "Tree view" tab
This tab provides you with a better overview of the network structure.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
235
Introduction

r!
(1)
(2)
10.5.2.4 "Config" tab
The "Config" tab defines the boundary conditions and parameters for the pressure
loss calculation and duct network calculation.
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
 Select the design velocities (1).

 Select the "Min dimensions" that can be used in the network (2).
 Specify the "Flow limits" as a percentage (3).
 Select the "Max dimensions" that can be used in the network (4).
 Set the maximum number of iterations for the calculation steps (5).
 Select the round-off values for dimensioning the rectangular ducts (6).
Index
236
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Distribution boards and switchboards Erro
r!
11 Distribution boards and switchboards

11.1 Purpose and functions of the distribution
board
The distribution board is a key feature with the character of an object, a database
and a management interface. The function is used both for power distribution as well
as for low voltage systems (telephone switchboards, switchboards for alarm
systems). To simplify the description, the term "distribution board" is used for all
types of systems.
The object is where you describe

the external properties of a distribu-
tion board, such as name, item and
install height in the floor plan. Here
you can
• create a new distribution board

• edit distribution board data
Basic functions
• activate existing distribution
boards
• call the building's symbol in the
installation plan or distribution
schematic diagram
The database
is where you manage the content
of the distribution board, its circuits
and equipment. You can:
configuration
configuration
• build the distribution structure
• establish the energy balance
• size the lines
• connect and label components
in the installation plan
• compile documentation on the
extensions,
distribution boards
extensions,
The management function is

used to compile the distribution
board documentation (see 0, pa-
Adjustments,
ge 346). The database is analysed

Adjustments,
graphically and can be output as a

circuit diagram, in lists and reports.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
237
Introduction
Erro Distribution boards and switchboards

r!
Distributio Product database

b d
Object
Housing
Equipment
Database
Feed
Final circuit 1
Final circuit 2
Feed Final circuit 1 Final circuit 2

Basic functions
Circuit Circuit Circuit
Σ Capacity Capacity Capacity
Equipment Equipment Equipment

Part list UV01

F1 F2 Item no. Item name Quantity
020605 MCB 1p 2 pc.

020603 Latching relay 1 pc.
K1
020606 Main breaker 3/ 63A 1 pc.
Q1
FDX606 Terminal 1.5mm² 8 pc.
FDX612 Terminal 10mm² 5 pc.
Feed Final circuit 1 Final circuit 2
Circuit diagram UV01
Sheet management
Index
238
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
11.2 The distribution board as an object

You manage the object properties of the distribution board under the "Define board”
tab. Here you can create new distribution boards, define the names, description and
properties of the housing. The object accesses the product database and takes the
information about the symbol and its physical dimensions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Basic functions
Creating a distribution board
 Click New (2). In "Define board” a new distribution board number is
displayed.
 In Input "Reference" (3) enter the short description for the distribution. This ap-
pears in the circuit label of the connected components and as a distribution
board label in the installation plan.
 In Input "Description” (4) enter the function of the distribution. This appears in
the title fields of the distribution board documentation and can be enabled as
configuration
symbol text in the installation plan.
configuration
Enabling a distribution board
Enable a distribution board (1) if the project already contains several distribution
boards and you want to edit, draw or label a specific one.
Positioning the distribution board housing

extensions,
extensions,
You can position the distribution board housing in the installation plan and for the
representation of the cabinet structure.
 Select an item (7).
 Enter the install height in Input
"Bottom" (5) or Input
"Top" (6). The other value
Adjustments,
is recalculated.
Adjustments,
 Click Place symbol (8). The symbol is displayed at the cursor as a dynamic sym-
bol.
 Fix the symbol in the model. The function is ended.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
239
Introduction

r!
11.3 The distribution board as a database – the cir-

cuit table
11.3.1 Content and functions
The "Circuit List” tab is used to manage the contents of the distribution board. The
function managed all circuits of the active distribution system and calculates the
power requirements of the operating currents of the final circuits and checks the
dimensions of the equipment. Equipment that is too small is highlighted (in red).
A calculation compares the equipment to the current load conditions.
The picture shows a high-voltage current sub-distribution system with one feed (1),
one series fuse and/or RCD for each of several circuits (2) and some final circuits (3):
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
New (4) starts the function to create a new circuit (see 11.3.3, page 245).
Draw circuit (5) is only enabled when the installation drawing is open and calls the line
of the selected circuit for drawing. In this way you can label and electrically connect
the components in the drawing (see 13.5, page 332).
Circuit tools (6) can make extensive changes throughout the entire distribution board
database. This may include the reorganisation of the numbers and names of circuits,
components, cables and terminals. Any subsequent changes to the structure of the
distribution board always shifts, deletes and re-inserts these elements. In this case, if
the numbering ends up out of order it can be reorganised by pressing Circuit tools .
(see 11.5; page 266).
Index
240
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Each cell in the circuit table is used for a specific purpose to configure a circuit and/or

its equipment. Double clicking in that cell calls the function:
Cell "1" (a)
In this cell, define the assignment of
the circuit to a busbar for the first or
second level. The final circuits 2.1 to
2.3 are part of level 2. They are
controlled by a shared resource. The
final circuits 3 and 4 pick up from the
main busbar.
In order to also allocate the circuits 3

and 4 to level 2, double click on cell
1 of circuit 3. This results in the
following final circuits also being
assigned to level 2. Double clicking on
cell 1 again assigns this circuit and all
Basic functions
subsequent ones to the main busbar.
The final circuits at level 2 must

directly follow each other. So for example, it is not possible to supply circuit 4 via
level 2 while leaving circuit 3 on the main busbar. Level 2 must be defined as a circuit
when configuring the distribution board.
Cell "2/3" (b)
Cell "2/3" affects the allocation, if the

current row has its own power supply
configuration
via the main busbar (final circuit 3, 5, 6
configuration
and 7) or if the voltage is drawn from
the preceding circuit (final circuit 4 and
8). The two settings are exchanged by
double clicking on cell "2/3" for one
row.
extensions,
extensions,
In addition, the colour of the horizontal bar shows whether a line has already been
drawn for this circuit in the working model of the installation plan. In the example this
applies to the final circuits 3 and 4. There is not yet a line for the final circuits 5 to 8.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
241
Introduction

r!
Cell "circuit" (c)
This function manages the technical parameters of the circuit. DDS-CAD

distinguishes between two basic types. Feeds, supply lines to sub-distribution boards
and distribution board circuits are one basic type. Final circuits belong to the second
type. Both types differ in how they handle the operating currents.
Feeds calculate their own operating current by adding the associated final circuits,
taking into account the coincidence factor. You define the operating current of the
final circuits when creating the circuit.
The dialogues of both types are the same in areas (1) and (2). The functions in area
(3) only apply to feeds.
Area (1) contains basic definitions,

such as name, system and the
(1) assignment of the phase
conductor.
Area (2) contains the circuit's

technical parameters. It shows the
Basic functions
(2) power balance and allows you to

adjust the equipment to changing
loads.
(3) Area (3) retrieves the power

balance of the supplied sub-
distribution board and transfers it
to (2).
Cell "Device" (d)

The function manages the properties
of a device (e.g. fuse, switch, etc.)
Change opens the product database.
Text generates a text symbol for
use in the distribution board
documentation.
Button [Aux Contacts] opens the product database and allows the selection of
auxiliary contacts which are allocated to the equipment. The example shows a three-
pole contactor, to which an additional auxiliary contact block has been assigned.
Index
242
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Cell "cable" (e)

The function manages all parameters of the line and/or cable. The dialogue box is
divided into several levels.
The "Cable and Conduit” tab contains

the technical properties of the line. This
is where you can adjust the settings for
the number of wires, the cross section
and the cable type.
The conduit can be activated for

corresponding cable installation
methods. The part list reports the same
length of conduit for the cable that has
been drawn.
For each cable, you can define the

name of the terminal block and the
terminal number of the first phase
conductor.
Basic functions
"Load Data and Calculation”
contains the connection values of the
supplied system. If you change a
parameter (e.g. efficiency), DDS-CAD
instantly adjusts all of the dependent
parameters (in this case the delivered
power Pab). The operating current is
transferred to the circuit parameters for
calculating the power balance and is
also used to calculate the permissible
configuration
cable length. Press Calculate to start the
configuration
cable calculation according to the
installation conditions.
Cell "description" (6)

extensions,
extensions,
The "Description” cell can hold three lines of text that

describes the function of the circuit. It is displayed in the
pages of the distribution board documentation. Try to write
unique descriptions.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
243
Introduction

r!
11.3.2 Customising how the circuit table is displayed
The display of the circuit table is variable and can be customised. For example, you
can make the display layout easier to read and hide unnecessary columns. You can
also specify which data should be displayed in the cells.
Example:
To monitor the power
balance, the settings of
the coincidence factor
and the value of the
operating current are
needed in the "circuit"
cell.
In addition, the columns

"Comp. 3" and "Comp. 4"
are not needed. They
should therefore be
hidden.
Basic functions
 Click in a cell in the circuit table. A context menu is displayed.

 Select the "Options” function. The "Options” dialogue box is displayed:
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Select "Circuits” (1). The parameters of the selected cell (2) can be enabled for
display or disabled.
 Set the display for the selected cell.
 Disable the display of unneeded columns (3)
 Click OK . The circuit table only displays the desired content:
Index
244
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
11.3.3 Working with the circuit table

11.3.3.1 Creating a new circuit
By creating a
new circuit,
(3)
you insert a
new row in
the circuit
(4) table. The
order in the
database also
determines
(5) the order in
the
distribution
(6) diagram.
(1) (2)
(7) (8)
Basic functions
 Click New (1). The "New Circuit” dialogue box is displayed. All circuit layouts
are arranged in different tables. By checking "Show user defined Circuits” (2)
36
you switch between the standard tables and your own circuit layouts .
 Select a table (3). The content of the bottom list (4) changes.
 Select a circuit layout (4).
 Correct operating current (7), the coincidence factor (6) and the other parameters (5) 37.
 Click Add or Insert (8):
configuration
configuration
Einfügen inserts the new
circuit above the selected

row.
Hinzufügen places the new
circuit at the end of the

extensions,
circuit list.
extensions,
This starts an automatic query

mechanism to select the required equip-
ment and the circuit description. Which compo-
nents are queried depends on the selected circuit
layout. The request for the circuit description ends
Adjustments,
the routine. Once confirmed with OK , the new

Adjustments,
circuit is part of the distribution board.
36
For more information on editing and creating new circuit layouts, please refer to chapter 1 on page 603.
37
Notes on selecting the circuit layout and the effect of the parameters of operating current (Ib1), operating current (Ib2), use
category and coincidence can be found in the online help or in 11.4, page 262.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
245
Introduction

r!
11.3.3.2 Functions in the context menu
There are additional tools

available to you when
constructing the distribution
system. You can access all of
the functions via a context
menu. Some functions can
alternatively be used via
keyboard shortcuts.
 Select the rows that you
are interested in.
 Click . The context menu
is displayed.
Function/shortcut Meaning
Cut out The component is copied to the clipboard and removed from the
Basic functions
component table. You can paste it at another position.

Paste The component is copied from the clipboard into the selected cell.
component
Delete component The component is removed from the table.
Edit component The cell's properties dialogue is opened. When you call an empty
Double click cell, the product database is displayed so you can select the
equipment.
Cut out row The selected circuits are copied to the clipboard and removed from
[Ctrl]+[X] the table. You can paste them at another position.
Copy row The selected circuits are copied to the clipboard. You can paste
[Ctrl]+[C] them at another position.

Paste row The circuit is copied from the clipboard into the table. It is inserted
[Ctrl]+[V] above the selected row.
Delete row The circuit is completely removed from the table, along with all
[Del] current paths.
Calculate A dialogue box is displayed to calculate the cable cross section,

while taking into account the set load and the installation
conditions according to DIN VDE 0100 5th Supplement.
Update devices The equipment of the selected circuit is re-sized and adjusted to
the current load conditions.
Options Function for configuring the circuit table (see 11.3.2, page 244).
Zoom to the cable Navigational aid in the installation plan for locating the cable.
New Creates a new circuit (see 11.3.3.1, page 245).
Draw Starts the cable installation in the installation plan (see 13.5.5,
page 339)
Go to single- Navigational aid in the distribution board documentation. DDS-
pole/multi-pole circuit CAD opens the page where the selected circuit was drawn.
diagram page
Index
246
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
11.3.4 Reorganising a distribution board

While editing the project, you will constantly be working with the distribution boards.
You're inserting new circuits, deleting unnecessary ones and moving existing ones.
During these processes, the names and IDs become mixed up. Therefore you should
carry out a reorganisation every so often.
By using the"Ändern" (Edit) function (1) you can adjust the names of the circuits and
equipment to a selected pattern or naming schema in stages. You can also modify
the technical parameters and re-size the equipment.
(a) (b) (c)
Example:
The example shows a
distribution board whose circuit
IDs (a), component names (b)
and cable IDs (c) are
disordered. They should follow
a uniform schema. To do this,
use Change (1).
Basic functions
(1)
Change calls a dialogue box, which provides different options for modifying each object
class (circuit, comp. group, cables or terminal list). By selecting the object class (2)
configuration
DDS-CAD shows the options available for modifying it (3). Area (4) is where you
configuration
define the scope of the operation.
To implement the example outlined

above, you need the following three
steps:
• Change the circuit IDs
extensions,
(2)
• Change the component names
extensions,
• Change the cable IDs

The example is described in the following
(3) pages. At the end, you will receive
detailed information about the various
Adjustments,
settings and options for modifying them.

Adjustments,
(4)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
247
Introduction

r!
11.3.4.1 Example of reorganisation
Step 1 – Change the circuit IDs

 Configure the settings:
Object:
"Circuits”
Type of change:
Circuit numbers with sub-number on
level two
Scope:
Full table
 Click OK . The "Edit” dialogue box

is closed, the circuit IDs are changed
(1).
Basic functions
(1)
The new circuit IDs can now be used as a template and numbering schema for the
other object classes.
Index
248
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Step 2 – Change the component names

In the second step, the names of the main switch and the fuses are adjusted to the
circuit IDs. To do this, you need to define the component groups and select a method
for labelling them.
 Click Change . The "Edit” dia-
(1)
 Select the "Comp. group”
setting (1).
(2)
(3)  Define the desired object
(4) groups (2) that are to be af-
fected by the change. You can
manually enter the equipment
IDs separated by comma or
select from a list.
 For "What kind of edit-
ing/settings”, select "New Cir-
cuit Numbers” (3)
Basic functions
Click Method (4). The "Numbering method" dia-
 Select "Same as circuit number" (5) and
click OK . The dialogue box is closed, the
(5) numbering schema is selected. You return to
the "Edit” dialogue box.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The
name of the selected component groups has
been adapted to the respective circuit ID (6).
configuration
configuration
extensions,
(6)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
249
Introduction

r!
Step 3 – Change the cable IDs
In the third step, the cable IDs are also adapted to the circuit IDs.
 Click Change . The "Edit” dialogue box

is displayed.
 Select the "Cables” setting (1).
 For "What kind of editing/settings”,
select "New Cable Numbers" (2).
 Click OK . The dialogue box is
closed. The name of the cable has
been adapted to the respective cir-
cuit ID (3).
Basic functions
(3)
Note:
In this case it is not necessary to re-configure the setting for the method. The
setting selected in the previous step remains active.
Index
250
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
11.3.4.2 Defining the scope

The example described in 11.3.4.1 has
been run through for the complete table
in all steps. However, you can also
define a scope for the operation and thus
restrict the operation to certain areas (1).
(1)
Full table
The function searches the entire table for the objects to be modified. Manually
defined objects are not changed.
Basic functions
From ... to ... in the table
The function searches a defined range of the table for the objects to be modified.
Manually defined objects are not changed.
Specify the range to be searched by

entering a start and an end in Input
"From" and Input "To". To do this, select
the name of a device
(cable ID or component name), which
belongs to the respective circuit.
configuration
configuration
Full table and manual components
The change is applied to all object groups. This setting is only useful if the "Comp.
group” option has been selected.
Full table and manual components from ... to ...

The change is applied to all objects that are located in the defined range ( Input
extensions,
"From" ... "To"). This setting is only useful if the "Comp. group” option has been
extensions,
selected.
All manual components

The change is applied to all manually defined object groups. This setting is only
useful if the "Comp. group” option has been selected.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
251
Introduction

r!
11.3.4.3 Options for editing object classes
Circuits
Changes to the "Circuits" object class affect the
text and parameters of the circuits.
(1) (2) (3)
New circuit IDs (1)

The circuits in the scope of
application are re-numbered.
Specify the naming schema (4) (5)
( Method ) and Input "Start
Basic functions
number". Input
1
Circuit numbers with sub-number on level two (1)
Circuits at level two are numbered by a decimal point.
1.1 1.2 1. 1.4 1.5
Phase distribution: L1>L2>L3 (2)

The circuits of the scope of application are assigned to the phase conductors in the
order L1, L2, L3. The load on the phase conductor is not taken into consideration.
Phase distribution: Uniformly distributed load (2)
The division of the circuits in the scope is arranged so that a nearly symmetrical
distribution of the load is present in the distribution system.

Circuit is pluggable/circuit is non-pluggable (4)
The setting indicates the circuits in the scope as a
stationary or non-stationary connection. The effect is
visible in the circuit diagram.
Expand circuit names
The IDs/names of the circuits within the scope can be expanded to include additional
characters. The extra characters appear BEFORE the old circuit IDs.
Re-calculate (5)
All circuits are re-calculated according to their load. The dimensions of the equipment
are adjusted.
Reset page references (DC)
Select this function when a component has been deleted, but still cannot be redrawn.
This may be necessary in certain cases.
Change coincidence factor (3)
The circuits in the scope receive a new coincidence factor.
Index
252
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Object group

Changes to the "object group" object class
will affect the labels and/or parameters of
the components.
(1) (3)
(2) (4)
(5)
New component names (1)

The components in the scope are re-numbered. Specify the naming schema ( Method )
and Input "Start number".
Basic functions
Add block separator/Remove block separator (3)
Displaying the block separators is switched on or off for the components within the
scope.
Transfer to materials list/Don't transfer to materials list (5)

The components within the scope are included in the materials list / are not included
in the materials list.
First letter in component name (4)

Displaying the first letter in the component name (1) is switched on or off for the
components within the scope.
configuration
configuration
Edit name (1)
The names of the components (F-fuses, S-switches...) are changed. You can filter
the objects to be changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in
Input "Old value”. If Input "Old value" remains blank, all components are changed.
Edit additional name (2)

extensions,
An additional name of max. 8 characters can be defined for the components within
extensions,
the scope and be displayed in the circuit diagrams. You can filter the objects to be
changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in Input "Old value”. If
Input "Old value” remains blank, all components are changed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
253
Introduction

r!
Cable
Changes to the "cable" object class will affect

the labels and/or parameters of the cables and
wires.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
New cable ID (1)

The cables within the scope are re-numbered. Specify the naming schema ( Method )
and Input "Start number”.
Edit cable type (3)

The cables within the scope are assigned a different type. You can filter the cable
types to be changed. Enter the cable type to be changed in Input "Old value”.
If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cable types are changed.
Change cable dimension (2)

The cables in the scope are given a new cable dimension. You can filter the cable
dimensions to be changed. Enter the cable dimension to be changed in Input "Old
value”. If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cable dimensions are changed.
Edit additional name

An additional name of max. 8 characters can be defined for the cables within the
scope and be displayed in the circuit diagrams. You can filter the cables to be
changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in Input "Old value”.
If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cables are changed.
Expand cable names (1)

The IDs/names of the cables within the scope can be expanded to include additional
characters. The extra characters appear BEFORE the old cable ID. You can filter the
cables to be changed according to their naming schema. Enter the schema in Input
"Old value”. If Input "Old value” remains blank, all cables are changed.
Index
254
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Terminal block

Changes to the terminals are visible in the line
dialogue boxes.
(3) (1)
(2)
Basic functions
New terminal ID (2)
The terminals of the terminal block (3) are re-numbered. Specify the naming schema
( Method ) and Input "Start number”.
New terminal block name (1)

The terminal block (3) is given a new name.
11.4 Notes on the high-voltage current distribution

board
configuration
configuration
By building the distribution board structure, you create the basis for the energy
balance, the distribution system diagrams and the circuit labelling for the switching
and terminal equipment in the installation plan. To do this, define the circuits, taking
into account the connection values and the coincidence factor. When doing so,
proceed in a structured manner as follow: extensions,
First develop the sub-board and then the main distribution board.
extensions,
The sub-board must be created first, before a supply line to the sub-board can be
defined in the main distribution board. In a subsequent step, transfer the energy
balance of the supplied sub-board into the main distribution board.
Start each distribution board with a feed.

Adjustments,
The feed adds the connection values of the systems, taking into account the
Adjustments,
coincidence factors. Transferring the energy balance to the main distribution board is
only possible if a feed has been defined in the sub-board.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
255
Introduction

r!
11.4.1 Creating the energy balance
By configuring the high-voltage current distribution board, you are making

preparations for calculating the energy balance and for sizing the equipment. It is
essential that the following boundary conditions are observed:
• Each sub-distribution contains one feed.
• The technical parameters of the final circuits are correctly defined.
• Load distribution and equipment have been checked.
• The main distribution supplies the sub-distribution.
This section provides detailed information on the points mentioned above. A diagram
on page 263 shows the relationships.
11.4.1.1 Configuring the feed to the sub-board

When creating a feed, DDS-CAD automatically assumes an operating current (Ib1) of
63 A. The equipment is sized accordingly (nominal current of the fuse – 63 A;
dimension of the supply line – 10 mm²). If the feed is defined in the distribution board,
the nominal current (Ib1) is set to "0":
Basic functions
The actual load is only created with the addition of final circuits. Here, the operating
currents of the final circuits are multiplied by the coincidence factor and added to the
feed.
Any change to the load conditions within the distribution board is immediately
recorded and displayed. The "circuit" cell always displays the value of the phase
conductor under the highest load. In the following example, single pole final circuits
have been added. DDS-CAD assigns the circuits to a phase conductor in consecutive
order (L1, L2, L3). Therefore, the higher nominal current is only displayed in the feed
when a fourth circuit is added.
Index
256
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
11.4.1.2 Configuring final circuits

Operating current Ib1 (1) and the coincidence factor (2) are crucial for the energy
balance of the final circuit. You enter these data when creating the new circuit. The
utilisation category (3) is also significant to correctly selecting the equipment. It is
controlled by selecting the circuit layout and can be changed manually if needed. The
operating current Ib2 (4) is only important for using tapped winding.
The operating current Ib1

(1) flows in the rating of the
connected equipment via
the line. It is passed to the
line and used to define the
cable dimension. DDS-
CAD automatically
searches for equipment
that matches the operating
current (Ib1) and utilisation
category (3).
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
(3)
(4)
To calculate the power balance of the whole distribution board, the operating current
Ib1 (1) is reduced by the coincidence factor and added to the feed of the distribution
board. Starting currents that are expected in motor circuits are included in this
calculation.
configuration
Example 1 – Lighting circuit (resistive load)
configuration
Entered values and settings
Circuit layout "ZMF3A – Light with protective device"
Operating current (Ib1) 24 A
Coincidence 50%
extensions,
extensions,
Calculated values and automatic settings

Usage category AC1 – Resistive
Fuse MCB (B), rated current 25 A
Load of the superordinate supply line 12 A
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Cross-section of the cable 2.5 mm²

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
257
Introduction

r!
Example 2 – Motor circuit (inductive load)

Entered values and settings

Circuit layout "YYFKQ – Motor Start Delta with
protective device"
Operating current (Ib1) 24 A
Coincidence 50%
Calculated values and automatic settings

Usage category AC3 – 2 cables
Fuse MCB (B), rated current 32A
Contactor rated current 24 A
Load of the superordinate supply line 13.86 A
Cross-section of the cable 2.5 mm²
Warning!
Basic functions
The dimensions of the components and cables are filtered according to the
operating current in the product database. Should the product database provided
incorrectly sized components, you have neglected to make corrections in Input
"Main load (lb1)”. You can cancel the function and re-start or continue and change
the necessary parameters later on.
11.4.1.3 Balancing load distribution and equipment in the sub-board
Several changes may be required while configuring the sub-board. New circuits may
be added gradually, existing ones moved and surplus ones deleted. In addition, load
parameters of the final circuits are changed. During this process, the following effects
are expected:
• unsymmetrical load distribution
• exceeding the rated currents of one or more devices
Exceeding the rated currents can therefore be a direct consequence of an
unsymmetrical load distribution. Cases of the rated current being exceeded are
indicated visually. The name of the equipment is displayed in bold red font. However,
adjustment is not automatic but must be triggered by starting a calculation function.
To do this, you have the following options:
• Produce a symmetrical load in the distribution board
• Balance the dimensions of individual circuits
• Balance the dimensions of the entire distribution board
Index
258
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Procedure for producing a symmetrical load in the distribution board

 Open the distribution board:
(1)
 Click Circuit tools (1) The "Edit” dialogue box is displayed:
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Choose the settings "Circuits” (1) and "Phase Distribution" (2) for the "All in
Circuit List" (3), and click OK . The "Edit” dialogue box is closed. All modified
configuration
configuration
cells are displayed in bold green font and the load on the feed has been cor-
extensions,
rected.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
259
Introduction

r!
Procedure for balancing the dimensions of individual circuits
 Open the distribution board and click on the circuit to be balanced. The
context menu is displayed:

Basic functions
Select "Update Components Dimension”. The devices on the circuit have been
adjusted to the load conditions. The names of the changed equipment are dis-
played in bold green text.
Procedure for balancing the dimensions of the entire distribution board
 Open the distribution board:

(1)
Index
260
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Click Circuit tools (1) The "Edit” dialogue box is displayed:

(1)
(2)
(3)
 Choose the settings "Circuits” (1) and "Re-calculate" (2) for the "All in Circuit
List" (3), and click OK . The "Edit” dialogue box is closed. All equipment has
been balanced to the current load conditions. The names of the changed equip-
ment are displayed in bold green text.
Basic functions
11.4.1.4 Energy balance in the main distribution boards
If the sub-boards are configured, you can defined a "Zuleitung zur Unterverteilung …"
(Supply line to sub-distribution...) in the main distribution board. While opening the
function, DDS-CAD queries which sub-board is to be supplied. You then call the
energy balance of this sub-board and transfer it to the main distribution system.
Procedure: "Supply line to the sub-board" from the main distribution board
 Create the main distribution board and define its feed.
configuration
configuration
 To supply the sub-board, you also need to define a new circuit. Select "VSF –
Supply to Sub-Switchboard" or "VSP – Supply to Sub-Switchboard with kWh me-
ter" (1):
(1)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
261
Introduction

r!
 Click Add or Insert to start the procedure. The “Make Connection to:” dia-
 Select the sub-board to be supplied and click OK to stop the process. The
"Supply line to sub-distribution” circuit is part of the main distribution board. You
can call the energy balance of the sub-board and transfer it to the main distribu-
tion board.
Procedure: Calling the energy balance from sub-distribution
 Open the circuit parameters of the supply line by double clicking on the circuit
cell (1).
(1)
Basic functions
This "Supply" dialogue box is displayed, the load conditions (2) are not up to
date:
(2)
(3)
 Click Calculate . DDS-CAD transfers the operating currents of the sub-board to the
main distribution board. You can continue the work.
Warning!
Repeat the update each time the load is shifted in the sub-board.
The following page shows a schematic representation of the relationships.

Index
262
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Main distributor
Supply from transformer L1 L2 L3

Display
Synchronism: 80% 70.88 A 58.08 A 51.36 A 70.88 A
74.2 A 61.74 A 56.7 A
Supply to upper floor sub-board L1 L2

L3 Display
Supply to ground floor sub-board L1 L2

L3 Display
Sub-board: ground floor
Basic functions
Supply from main distributor L1 L2
L3 Display
Final circuit 1 47.4 A 36.2 A 25.0 A
External conductor:
L1 11.2 A
Operating current:
16 A
Final circuit 2
External conductor:
configuration
L1 11.2 A
configuration
Operating current:
16 A
Final circuit 3
External conductor:
L1 11.2 A
Operating current:
16 A
extensions,
extensions,
Final circuit 4
External conductor:
L1 25.0 A
Operating current:
25 A
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Sub-board: upper floor
Supply from main distributor L1 L2

L3 Display
58.6 A 52.0 A 56.0 A

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
263
Introduction

r!
11.4.2 Sizing the cable dimension (final circuits)
By configuring the distribution system, DDS-CAD first sizes the cable dimensions
according to the load. The reduction in load rating due to unfavourable installation
conditions as per DIN VDE 0100 Supp. 5 is not included in this calculation.
You can also perform this correction via the circuit table. Alternatively you can call the
line to be calculated by double clicking from the installation drawing. We describe
using the function via the circuit table:
Warning!
The function described only considers the loop impedance of the current line to
the current distribution board when calculating the short-circuit ampere. The
upstream network via the supply line from the main distribution board and to the
transformer is not included. This calculation is therefore only suitable for sizing
final circuits .
 Open the distribution board and click on the circuit to be balanced. The
context menu is displayed:
Basic functions
 Select "CDC Calculation”. The "IEC 60364 based calculation” dialogue box is
displayed.
Index
264
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The dialogue box is divided into two levels. Under the "Calculation" tab you can

define the technical parameters of the circuits that are to be considered during the
sizing process. You can also start the calculation from this tab.
Basic functions
Under the "Cable installation input” tab you can define the cable length to be
calculated, the accumulation and the prevailing environmental conditions. This is
where you define the worst case in the line:
extensions,
configuration
To execute the calculation, click Calculate dimension . To apply the amended cable
dimension in the circuit table and in the drawing, click OK . To abort and close the
Adjustments,
calculated results, click Cancel .

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
265
Introduction

r!
11.5 Notes on data distribution boards

To create a data distribution board, follow the procedures described in chapter 11.2,
page 239. Make sure to select the correct distribution board housing. The product
database contains various types of data and network cabinets:
Basic functions
Configuring a data distribution board with patch panels is realised by using the "New
Circuit” function (see 11.3.3.1, page 245). The main selection (1) contains the
different categories. In the selection (2) choose the required patch panel. The circuit
parameters (3) are irrelevant and have no function.
(1)
(2)
(3)
After starting with Add or Insert DDS-CAD first asks for the desired item for the
patch panel.
Index
266
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

 Select an item. The dialogue for the circuit description is displayed and asks for
the name for the patch panel:
Basic functions
 Enter the name for the patch panel and click OK The dialogue for the circuit
description is displayed and asks for the name of the port for the data outlet:
 Continue naming the data outlets until all ports are labelled. The process is then configuration
configuration
ended. You can add additional components.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
267
Introduction

r!
11.6 Notes on other low-voltage current distribu-

tion boards
To create a low-voltage current distribution board (e.g. a telephone switchboard),
follow the procedures described in chapter 11.2, page 239. The product database
contains various types of low-voltage distribution boards and switchboards:
Basic functions
Index
268
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Configuring a low-voltage distribution board is realised by using the "New Circuit”

function (see 11.3.3.1, page 245). Select the "Devices" entry in the main selection (1)
and the desired cable type in the selection list (2). The circuit parameters (3) are
irrelevant and have no function.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
After starting with Add or Insert DDS-CAD asks for the cable name.
configuration
configuration
By confirming the name, the cable becomes part of the distribution board. You can
make any necessary adjustments to the cable type afterwards.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
269
Introduction
Erro Lightning protection and earthing systems

r!
12 ((Installation systems))

The functions for constructing cable
ladders, canals and conduits can be found
in the "Use Cable Tray, Trunking and
Conduit" working mode. All three functions
behave in a similar manner. Their
functionality is best explained using cable
Cable ladders as an example. Start the function
Canals in the toolbox. DDS-CAD expects a start
Conduits point to be specified.
12.1.1 Introduction and terms

Cable ladders, canals and conduits are related functions in DDS-CAD that are very
Basic functions
similar in character, behaviour, and hence their application. For this description, they
are therefore combined under the term "Pipelines" or "Pipeline functions", with
specific differences being taken into account by corresponding notes and sections.
34 A pipeline is a construction of continuously

generated objects installed in a row. Each
29 pipeline has a start and an end point. In
32
between are segments, which are connected by
suitable components (e.g. pipe bends). These
31 33 35 structures are created automatically when you
30
are drawing and can be used in the command
38
list . The example shows a pipe drawn from left

39
to right . The numbers illustrate the relationship
between the visible object in the model and the
corresponding entry in the command list.
The starting point (29) defines the starting height

40
of the pipeline and the direction and representation of the first segment . The
pipeline route (30 to 34) in the example only consists of cable ladder sections and
bends. In addition, tees, junctions and transitions are used. You can also define
special pipeline segments where, for example, a different material or an amended
representation should be used (see xxx). The command list uses specific entries to
describe all fixtures and section breaks. In the endpoint (35) the type of ending with
which the pipeline has been terminated is described.
12.1.2 Settings in the starting point

The starting point is where you define the starting height, the nature and the
representation of the first segment – the initial properties of the pipeline. The
respective start dialogue is used to manage these properties. Depending on the
38
cf. xxx, page xxx
39
The flow direction is indicated by the arrows (see xxx, page xxx)
40
Material, size, insulation and presentation may be changed further along the pipeline route.
Index
270
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Lightning protection and earthing systems Erro
r!
situation, it is displayed at the start of a new pipeline or when editing an existing
41
one .

12.1.2.1 General settings

configuration
Start (1)
A pipeline can be started by various operations. A manual setting in this area is only
required when starting at a free point (see 9.3.1.1, page 168).
extensions,
Starting height (2)

extensions,
The starting height describes the distance between the centre axis of the
pipe/ventilation duct and the top edge of the finished floor. Their definition is only
important when starting in a free point. If the pipeline begins at an object, DDS-CAD
automatically detects the starting height and applies it.
Adjustments,
Apply from connection (3)

Adjustments,
Using this area's settings, you define the behaviour of a pipeline

(A), which branches off via a tee (B) from a main pipeline (C).
(A (B (C
41
For example, if you start a pipe at a free point, DDS-CAD does not receive any instructions and you have to define all the
parameters yourself. However, if you begin at the connection point of an object (such as the cold water connection of a wash
basin), it will draw information about the medium and the starting height of the line from said object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
271
Introduction

r!
"Material and colour"
Default setting: The material and colour of the branching pipeline (A) is determined
The material can be determined by selecting an item. The colour is independent of
the medium and can be selected in the "Attributes” tab.
"Material" (6), "Dimension" (7), item (8)

The settings (6) and (7) together form a search filter for the item (8):
 Select the "Material" (6) group. The available sizes are made available in
"Dimension" (7).
 In "Dimension" (7) select the required size. DDS-CAD automatically acti-
vates the appropriate item (8). You can also select the items manually. To do
this, click … .
12.1.2.2 Specific settings for cable canals
The general settings for ventilation ducts

see 9.1.2.1 see 9.1.2.6 are largely similar to the general pipe
settings. Specific features consist in the
Basic functions
use of speed levels and in the selection of

the material.
Here, you first determine the shape of the

duct cross-section (1). The importance of
the other parameters is based on this
shape. For information on the significance
of the levels, please see 9.1.2.6,
page 160.
(1)
12.1.2.3 Representation (by linetype)
Cable installation systems can be affected

individually in their representation. This tab
is where you can define the linetype for the
representation in the model, from the
starting segment to the end of the pipeline
or to the section change accordingly.
Type of representation (1)

Normal The pipeline is represented by solid lines. Colour and shading are
determined by the chosen medium and displayed according to the
selected view (see 9.1.3, page 160).
Index
272
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Dashed The pipeline is represented by dashed lines and no shading. You can
define the shape of the dashed line by setting the length for at most three

different line segments as well as the gaps between the segments. For
unneeded segments, enter the value "0".
Not visible The pipeline is not visible, but is included in the part list and the network
calculations.
Representation changed in sections: see xxx
12.1.3 Display options

The representation of pipes and ventilation
ducts is controlled via the View menu and
should be adapted to the situation. The graphic
shows the different options for pipes (left) and
ventilation ducts (right). In all cases, there are
flags that can be either active or inactive.
Basic functions
Show drawing direction (arrows)
On: The flow direction of the pipes and/or ventilation ducts is
visualised by arrows.
Off: The flow direction is not shown.
Show connections from the storey above/below
configuration
Pipes and ventilation ducts are passed from one storey to
configuration
another through drawing operations (see 9.3.3.1, page 180). This
results in transfer points, which are set as visible in the storey
being shown and are used to continue the pipeline (see 9.3.1.7,
page 175). The example shows the transition points of various ventilation ducts. You
can see the cross-section and dimension. Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
273
Introduction

r!
12.2 Drawing a pipeline manually

Manually drawing pipes and ventilation ducts is indispensable when designing the
network. You can develop a complete network manually without using auxiliary
42
functions , but you cannot use any auxiliary function without having done manual
preparation beforehand. The procedure (using the example of a pipe) always
corresponds to the order shown. The ventilation ducts behave in a similar way:
Options for inter-floor

installation At free point
Show connec- At the end of the pipe

tions from the Start "Pipeline"
lower/
upper floor
On the object
Define starting point and (e.g. washbasin, boiler)
draw direction
As branch from a pipeline
(T-piece)
Pipeline Draw subsequent path At a bend (convert bend

Basic functions
to T-piece)
At interconnection point
Define endpoint
(End pipe) from adjacent floor
Draw horizontal Open at the last point

Chapter 9.3.1
Page 167
With object at the last
Draw vertical point
Avoid clashes As interconnection point

(over/under bending) to adjacent floor Chapter 9.3.3
Page 180
Insert mouldings and As connection to the
insulation during the object (washbasin)
process
As connection to
pipeline
Chapter 9.3.2
Page 176
42
e.g. copy sub-networks (9.4.2, page 187) or automatically use connection functions (9.4.4, page 192)
Index
274
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.2.1 Starting point and direction of the first segment

Description Options Referenc
e
Starting at a free point page 168

h
h
Starting at the pipe page 170

end (continue pipe)
Branch from a hori- page 171

zontal pipe
Basic functions
Starting at a bend page 173
(convert bend to tee)
Starting at the transi- page 175

tion point from adja- h
cent storey
configuration
h
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index configuration
extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
275
Introduction

r!
12.2.1.1 Starting at a free point
You can define the pipeline's starting point by clicking at any X/Y position. The
start dialogue is displayed and you are given full access to all parameters.
Note
Use this option, for example, to prepare individual pipeline sections and sub-
networks. You can incorporate these later on in your work and complete the
network in stages.
General use
(5) (6)
(4)
Pipeline
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(3)

 Click on the starting position. The start dialogue is displayed.
 Select a starting option (1; see below), the medium (2) and the material (3). In
the case of a wastewater pipe, you can make specifications for the slope (4) (see
below). For notes on the other settings, please refer to chapter 9.1.2, page 155.
 Click OK . The pipeline starts at the specified position. The selected starting
option (1) and any specifications relating to the drawing direction (4) determine
how the function behaves.
Index
276
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Notes on the starting options

The starting option defines the height of the starting point (A). In the course of the
first segment (B) DDS-CAD assumes default settings, which in turn are specific for
each starting option:
Free
You enter the height of the starting point (A) in figures in
(B the pipeline's starting dialogue. With the default settings
for the drawing direction, the first segment (B) runs
horizontally without incline or slope. You can determine
the course of the first segment (B) by moving the cursor.
(A
On the ceiling
The starting point (A) is set at the room height. With the
(A (B default settings for the drawing direction, the first
segment (B) runs vertically downwards. DDS-CAD
queries the values for the change in height (see 9.3.2.4,
the storey above. There you can resume the pipe and
Basic functions
continue it (see 9.3.1.7, page 175).
In the floor
The starting point (A) is at the bottom edge of the floor.
With the default settings for the drawing direction, the first
segment (B) runs vertically upwards. DDS-CAD queries
the values for the change in height (see 9.3.2.4,
the storey below. There you can resume the pipeline and
configuration
(B continue it (see 9.3.1.7, page 175).
configuration
(A
Notes on the slope (wastewater pipe only)
When working with wastewater pipes, you
can set a slope. This is maintained over
extensions,
the course of the pipe, as long as no

extensions,
changes are made. Enable the slope in

the "Direction & Pos” tab and define the
desired value. A negative value lets the
pipe fall, while a positive value lets it rise.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
277
Introduction

r!
12.2.1.2 Starting at the pipeline end (continue pipeline)
The open ends of a pipeline can

be resumed and continued. In
this way, you can complete the
network and integrate prepared
pipeline sections. Properties and
drawing direction are taken from
the existing pipeline.
Application
Horizontal pipeline
Basic functions
Pipeline
Vertical pipeline

 Point to the end of the pipeline that you want to continue. The pipeline is high-
lighted. A menu is displayed, listing several connection points.
 Select "Starting point..." or "End point...".
In the case of a horizontal pipeline the cursor moves the movable pipeline in the
specified direction. You can draw the further course using the mouse.
In the case of a vertical pipeline DDS-CAD queries the desired continuation in a
dialogue as a relative jump in height (in relation to the height of the connection
point) or as an absolute target height (in relation to the floor) (see also 9.3.2.4,
page 178).
Index
278
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.2.1.3 Branch from horizontal pipeline

When branching from a horizontal pipeline DDS-CAD automatically inserts a tee. You
determine installation location, dimension of the branch and drawing direction:
Application
(2) (3)
Define position:
On ongoing section
(5)
(1)
Pipeline At the start of line section
(4)
At the end of line section
Basic functions
 Start the pipeline function (1).
 Point to the position of the branch. If the position of the cursor is clear, the pa-
rameters of the pipe are displayed in an information box (2). if the position is not
clear, a menu lists the possible connections (3).
 Select the desired connection option by clicking . The "General Tee with re-
ducer” dialogue box is displayed (pipes: see 9.5.2.3, page 200; Ventilation ducts:
see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Error! Bookmark not
configuration
defined.).
configuration
 If necessary, adjust the size of the branch and check the item (4).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
279
Introduction

r!
12.2.1.4 Starting at a bend (convert bend to tee)
You can start the pipeline at a bend (1). DDS-CAD

(1) converts it into a tee.
Application
(1)
Basic functions
Pipeline

 Point to the bend. It is highlighted.
 Click . The "General Tee with reducer” dialogue box is displayed.
 Set the draw direction (1) and click OK . The cursor moves the pipeline in the
specified direction.
Index
280
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.2.1.5 Conduit – starting at a box

You can start a pipeline at the connection point to an
object (e.g. a boiler). DDS-CAD detects the position of the
connection point, the media and suggests a size. You
select the material of the pipeline from the product
database. You can then specify the draw direction freely.
Application
(1)(2)
Basic functions
Pipeline
(3)
(4)
configuration
configuration
 Point to the object. The object is highlighted. If the position of the cursor at a
specific connection point is definite, the name of the object and medium, size
and height of the connection point are displayed in an information box (1). if the
position is not clear, a menu lists the possible connections (2).
extensions,

extensions,
Select the desired connection option by clicking . The product database is dis-
played. The display is limited to the proposed size of the connection point (3)
and only the corresponding materials are shown.
 Choose the material. You can draw the pipeline (4).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
281
Introduction

r!
12.2.1.6 Starting at the transition point from an adjacent storey
A pipeline whose start or end point has been defined as

"on the ceiling" or "in the floor" generates a transition point
(1) in the adjacent storey. From there you can start the
pipeline and transfer to the next storey as a riser (2) or
(1)
use it for the installation in the current storey (3).
h
(3)
The transition point sets all the technical properties and
(2) the drawing direction. You only define the transfer (2) or
the jump in height (h).
h
(1)
Application
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)

Show connections
from the lower floor/
upper floor
Pipeline
 Enable the"Show connections from below” and/or "Show connections from

above” option. The transition points (1) are visible.
 Start the pipeline function and point to the transition point. The symbol is high-
lighted. An information box shows the starting option (floor or ceiling), starting
height Z and the medium.
 Click . The "New Z-height” dialogue box queries the height.
 For the direct transfer to the following storey (2) click UKD/FFB . The riser pipe has
been passed to the following storey, the function remains active.
 For the application in the current storey (3) enter the jump in height (h) as a rela-
tive jump (in relation to the current height of the starting point) or as an absolute
amount (in relation to the floor) and click OK . You can continue drawing the
pipeline at the new height.
Index
282
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.2.2 Drawing the pipeline route

12.2.2.1 Horizontal route (no change in height)
Installation systems behave in a similar way to general

polylines. In the simplest case – the horizontal
installation without change in height – you define the
route using the cursor. Each click defines a fixed
point (1), which is initially interpreted by DDS-CAD as
a bend.
(1)
As long as no other fixed point has been set, the bend
behaves dynamically. The cursor position determines
the direction and angle. An automatic Ortho mode
ensures that commercially standard bends are used as
the cursor moves.
The direction and length of the bend (1) and the

(2) segment following it (3) are fixed with the following
fixed point (2). You can continue the work.
Basic functions
(3)
12.2.2.2 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point by entering a measurement
Example: Segment (3) is to lead to the new fixed point (2) in a certain direction by a
certain length via a 90° bend (1):
(2)
configuration
(3)
configuration
[]
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The key determines the direction. The "Collect Points”
extensions,
 Enter the value in metres (m). A helper line indicates the position of the new
extensions,
fixed point with the current setting.

12.2.2.3 Horizontal – positioning the fixed point at a distance from a reference

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
(a) Example: The position of the fixed point (2) is to be

(2) defined at a certain distance (a) to an obstacle (e.g. a
wall). The length of the segment (3) results from the
(3) operation.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
283
Introduction

r!
[Shift] + []
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the border of the obstacle. DDS-CAD de-
tects the intersection. This is the reference for defining the fixed point (2).
 Press the arrow keys to specify the direction for the location of the new fixed
point (here [Shift]. The "Relative from snap point" dialogue box appears.
 Enter the distance from the reference point to fixed point in metres (m).
12.2.2.4 Height change in the pipeline route or transition to another storey
The operation achieves two

Z
objectives:
Basic functions
DZ Height change in the pipeline route

Z Y with a gradient angle α. You define
a
the new working height as a target
height Z (absolute value, relative to
the floor) or as the difference ΔZ
X (relative to the current working height).
The pipeline is continued in the
current storey.
Transition to an adjacent storey in the

gradient angle α. The pipeline runs to
the ceiling or to the floor and stops.

The result is a transition point in the
Transition to an adjacent storey adjacent storey, where you can
resume the pipeline and continue it.
The gradient angle remains active.
 Press [PgUp] (move upwards) or [PgDn] (move downwards). The height

query dialogue box appears.
 Enter the gradient angle α.
Transition to an adjacent storey

 Click UKD/FFB . The pipeline has been transferred. The pipeline function remains
active and you can define a new starting point.
Height change in the pipeline route

 To define a new installation height Z: "Absolute height"
Input
To define a height difference ΔZ: Input "Up" or "Down".

 Click OK . The pipeline is located at the new height. You can continue the
work.
Index
284
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.2.2.5 Undo last drawing step

If you have made a mistake in the route, DO NOT end the
pipeline function with [ESC]! You can revert the pipeline
route drawn up to now to an earlier position:
[Step back] [Step back]
 Press [backspace] or select the function with the same name in the context
menu. The last fixed point is undone. The function remains active.
12.2.2.6 Collision detection and collision avoidance
While working with installation systems, DDS-CAD checks whether the pipeline
collides with other pipelines. The check is performed over all DDS pipeline
43
functions . The check is performed dynamically while you are drawing.
Basic functions
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
configuration
configuration
(5)
If the cursor approaches an obstacle at the same height, DDS-CAD detects a

collision.
extensions,
A menu (1) is displayed at the cursor, offering three options. Select one of the three
extensions,
options by clicking :
(2) Manual configuration for collision avoidance

After calling the function, the "Avoid clashes” dialogue box is displayed. You define
the obstacle as over- or under-crossing, the angle of the bend (5) and the distance to
Adjustments,
the obstacle. Clicking OK negotiates the obstacle. The next click fixes the
Adjustments,
working height and you can continue with your work.
(3) automatic over-crossing / (4) automatic under-crossing

The methods automatically apply the current settings from the "Avoid clashes”
dialogue box.
43
For example, if you are editing the ventilation system with DDS-CAD in addition to the electrical system, you can show the
cable ladders in the ventilation ducts and develop the pipeline route without any collisions.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
285
Introduction

r!
12.2.3 Concluding an installation system
12.2.3.1 By function in the context menu or keyboard shortcut
Function in the context Note

menu / keyboard
shortcut
End function The installation system is ended at the current fixed point.
[ESC] The function is ended.
Close and start new The installation system is ended at the current fixed point.
[Enter] The function remains active and you can define the next
starting point.
End in the storey below A bend is placed at the

[Ctrl]+[End] position of the fixed point.
The installation system
End in the storey above moves this bend up or
[Ctrl]+[Home] down. It ends in the floor
or in the ceiling and can
be continued in the adja-
Basic functions
cent storey.
12.2.3.2 By connecting to existing installation systems
44
You can end the current installation system by connecting it to an existing system
of the same type.
At the open start or end point

The example shows a ladder ring being closed. When approaching the starting point,
the segment is highlighted and a menu is displayed. Select "Starting point” or "End
point". If both systems are at the same height, the connection is made straight away.
If there is a difference in height, a dialogue box asks for the method of height
balancing to be used (see below).
At a segment
Cable ladders and conduits can be connected by being joined to a continuous
45
segment . For cable ladders, a tee is inserted at the connection point. For conduits,
a corresponding outlet is inserted. When approaching the existing installation system,
this will be highlighted. A menu is displayed with the pipeline information and
functions for collision avoidance. Select the pipeline information to establish the
connection.
44
You can only connect a ladder to a ladder, but not to a canal.
45
Cable canals do not have this option.
Index
286
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Compensating for a difference in height
Basic functions
Height differences are detected by DDS-CAD and reported in a message. To create
the connection, click . A dialogue box is displayed that configures the height
compensation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
287
Introduction

r!
12.3 Auxiliary functions for constructing a network

12.3.1 The copy function for sub-sections

By using the "Repeat branches” (pipes) or "Repeat
branches”" (Copy tees) (ventilation ducts)
functions, you can duplicate an existing sub-section
and insert it into the model several times. Sub-
sections that start in a free point or as a branch
from a main duct are ideal templates. The copy can
also be placed at a free point or integrated into an
Copy branches
existing duct via a tee.
Copy tees
Basic functions
(2)
(1)
 Select the starting point of the sub-section (1). In the example, the tee of the
branch has been chosen.
 Select "Extend selection and copy paste tree”. The entire subsequent sub-
section is automatically selected and the dialogue is displayed.
 Select the desired option (2).
Use on of the four options to configure how the copied sub-section is pasted. In doing
so, the required settings are enabled. To do this, please read the following sections.
Index
288
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Paste into existing section

pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number (2). The
set distance (4) applies from the insertion of the first copy
(3) onwards. The flow direction of the target pipeline (5)
indicates the arrangement of the copies (6). The direction
(2)
of the branching tees (right/left) is taken from the original.
(4)
(1)
Basic functions
(3)
(6)
configuration
(5)
configuration
box appears.
 Select "Insert in existing net same twist”.
extensions,
extensions,

inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. If there
are multiple copies the function is ended. If you have only set one copy, the func-
Adjustments,
tion remains active. You can define further insertion points.

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
289
Introduction

r!
Rotate 180° and paste

pipeline (target pipeline) with the desired number (2). The
set distance (4) applies from the insertion of the first copy
(3) onwards. The flow direction of the target pipeline (5)
indicates the arrangement of the copies (6). The direction
(2) of the branching tees (right/left) is rotated by 180°
compared to the original.
(
(3)
(1)
Basic functions
(5)
(6)
box appears.
 Select "Insert in existing net opposite twist +180".

inserted at the selected position, the others follow at the set distances. They are
rotated 180° relative to the original. If there are multiple copies the function is
ended. If you have only set one copy, the function remains active. You can
define further insertion points.
Index
290
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Paste into new Z-height (at a free point)

The copied sub-section (1) is inserted into the model at a
free point by clicking . The starting point (2) of the new
sub-section is located at the set height (3). The entire
sub-section is rotated by the set angle (4) relative to the
original.
After the operation, you can incorporate the new sub-

(3) section into the network (see 9.4.3, page 187).
(4)
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
box appears.
 Select "Insert one copy at given height".
configuration
configuration
 Enter the installation height (3) for the starting point of the new sub-section.
 Enter the rotation (4) of the sub-section relative to the original.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. DDS-CAD expect the insertion point.
 Click on the insertion point (2). The new sub-section has been inserted at the
selected position with the settings for height and rotation. The function remains
extensions,
active. You can define another insertion point.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
291
Introduction

r!
12.3.2 Incorporating free sub-sections into the overall network
You can incorporate the open end of a sub-section into the overall network in two
ways:
Option A
 Start the pipeline function at the open end of the sub-section (as per 9.3.1.2,
page 170).
 Draw the continuation of the pipeline to the main line and make the connection in
accordance with 9.3.3.3, page 181.
Option B
 Select the open segment of the pipeline
by clicking . The segment is temporarily
converted into a polyline.
 Click on the node at the open end of
the segment. You can move the open end
of the segment with the cursor.
Basic functions
 Point to the pipeline where the connection

is to be made. If the pipeline contains the
same medium, it is displayed as a se-
lected object.
 Click . The previously open end has
been connected via a tee.
Index
292
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.4 Components in the installation system

In xxx it was mentioned that fixtures and fittings are also pipeline objects. They are
listed as part of the pipeline route in the list of commands between the starting point
and endpoint. You can see the correlation in the image, represented using the
example of two bends, a tee, a valve and a pump.
In addition to their specific features and forms of application, all pipeline objects also
share common features. These are described at the beginning for all object types.
Afterwards we will explain the specific features of each separate type.
12.4.1 Notes on the various pipeline objects

12.4.1.1 Bend
Bends are always installed in the pipe when drawing and configured automatically in
most cases. Each fixed point that is followed by a new segment after a direction
change is converted into a bend (see 9.3.2.1, page 176). The technical parameters
(material and size) are taken from the pipe used. The geometric parameters (angle
Basic functions
and direction) are determined by the drawing operation.
A manual configuration
may be required in special
cases, for example if no
see 9.5.1.1
suitable drawing operation
is available for the desired
change of direction. In this
case, call the object
dialogue of the bend via
the context menu (click )
configuration
or press [B] (ch. 9.3.2.1,
configuration
page 176).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
293
Introduction

r!
12.4.1.2 Tee
Tees are installed in the pipe network through the following options:
• Automatically when branching from an existing pipeline (see
9.3.1.3, page 171 and 9.3.1.4, page 9.3.1.4)
• Automatically when converting a bend to a tee (see 9.3.1.5,
page 173)
Tee
Basic functions
see 9.5.1.1
12.4.1.3 Reducer
Reducers are installed in the pipe network through the following

options:
• Automatically, through the pipe network calculation
• Manually, by subsequent insertion (see 9.5.3, page 201)
Reducer
Index
294
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.4.2 Manual installation of pipeline objects

All pipeline objects that do not alter the direction of the pipe can be inserted later.
The procedure is shown using a valve as an example. All other functions behave in a
similar way.
Insert valve (2)
(1)
Basic functions
Procedure:
 Select the required function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line
shows the "Locate flow segment and press left mouse button” prompt.
 Click at the position where the component is to be inserted. The object
dialogue of the component is displayed.
 Select the item (1), set the required parameters and click OK . The component
is part of the pipe.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
295
Introduction

r!
12.5 Segments in the pipeline route

The nature of the pipeline functions was described in 9.1.1 (page 155). It was said
that the initial properties of the pipeline are defined in the starting point and that these
can change over the pipeline route – with the exception of the medium. This change
in dimension is effected by corresponding components (e.g. reducers). To change
the material, various aspects of the representation and the insulation, you can divide
the pipeline into sections. If two consecutive segments have identical properties, they
can be merged back together.
12.5.1 Changing the material or colour in the pipeline route

The following operation is used to disconnect a continuous pipeline into two
segments, whose colours or materials can then be changed separately from each
other. To start with, we have a continuously drawn pipe (1).
(1)
Basic functions
(2)
(3)
(4)
Split pipe
 Select the "Split a pipe” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message
line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and press left mouse but-
ton”.
 Click on the position where the division is to be made (2). The "Start drawing
pipes” dialogue box is displayed.
 Uncheck "Associate material / color” (3).
 Select the properties (4) for the new pipeline segment.
 Click OK . The two pipeline segments have different properties. The operation
is ended.
Index
296
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
If two consecutive line pipeline segments have identical properties, they should be

merged together. Unnecessary divisions complicate subsequent processing.
 Select the ends of the adjacent segments.

 Select "Merge with connected chain”. If properties are the same, the merge is
carried out and the operation is ended. If the segments have different settings, a
corresponding message is displayed. In this case it is not possible to merge the
segments.
12.5.2 Changing the linetype

To change the insulation status or the line type in the pipeline, no prior split is
necessary. You can carry out the change through two corresponding functions, when
drawing the pipeline or through subsequent processing.
Basic functions
Both functions operate according to the same principle. You create an entry in the
command list, which defines the status of this position until the next change. The
graphic shows an example:
Insulation
The pipe was been
drawn from left to right.
Command (35) enables
the insulation.
Command (41) disables
configuration
it.
configuration
Linetype:
A ventilation duct is to
be marked as partially
obscured. Command
(45) starts the labelling.
extensions,
Command (47) ends it.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
297
Introduction

r!
The use of both functions is described using the example of insulation:
Changing the state while drawing
 Fix the point for the beginning of the insulation by clicking .

 Select the "Insulation" function. The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Check "Use insulation” and click OK . The pipe uses the insulation as it con-
tinues. You can end its use in the same way.
Inserting a status change retroactively

You can insulate an existing pipe retroactively in sections and/or undo the use of
insulation.
Basic functions
Insulation
 Select "Insert insulation” function in the toolbox. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Locate flow segment and
press left mouse button”.
 Click on the position in the pipe, from which the insulation is to be enabled or
disabled. The "Insulation” dialogue box is displayed.
 Configure the insulation and click OK . The selected setting applies from the
selected position in the drawing direction of the pipe. The function remains active
and can be used further along the pipe.
Index
298
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The procedure for
changing the linetype is

the same. In the context
menu (while drawing)
select the "Insert stippled
/ dotten Start of Pipe”
function. To insert the
label retroactively, call
the "Stippled pipe" or
Insert stippled / "Stippled duct" function
from the toolbox. For
notes on the settings,
please refer to chapter
9.1.2.4, page 158.
12.6 Editing installation systems

12.6.1 Selection functions for lines and sub-sections
Basic functions
An object must be selected before it can be
edited. In addition to the general selection
functions (see 20.1.2, page 506) there are
two other methods used for editing
pipelines. These mainly ensure the
complete deletion of a section with or
without the branching sub-sections.
 To call the function, select the pipeline segment where editing is to start.
configuration
configuration
 Select the desired selection function.
Extend Selection of this Circuit

selected segment to its end point. Branching
pipelines are ignored and not included in the
extensions,
editing.
extensions,
Extend Selection of all Sub Circuits

Adjustments,
selected segment and all branching sub-

Adjustments,
sections up to their end points.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
299
Introduction

r!
12.6.2 Changing the pipeline route
12.6.2.1 Moving moulded parts
The pipeline route is fixed by the position

of bends and tees. You can move both
components along the pipeline route. The
Move tee/junction... Move bend... connected segments are updated
automatically.
Move bend...
 Select the component by clicking . Handles are displayed on the component.

 Click on a handle. The object is movable. Tees can be moved over each
other. Bends move along the axis of the previous segment.
 Click on the new position. The component is fixed and the pipeline route cor-
rected. The operation is ended.
Basic functions
12.6.2.2 Move start/end point
You can change the route of an installation system by moving the start or end point:
 Select the first or last segment by clicking . The
start and/or end point is represented by a solid
square .
 Click on the symbol . A context menu is dis-
played.
Node
Editing with The node (in this case the starting point of the
polyline: move line) can only be moved in the flow direction of
the segment. The segment is thus extended or
shortened. If necessary, the direction of the
next bend also changes; its position remains
unchanged. The function starts when you click
the symbol .
Move cable ladder The node (in this case the starting point of the
start line) can be moved in any direction. This may
change the direction and position of the
following bend.
When approaching another pipeline with the same medium, the connection can be made via
a tee.
Index
300
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.6.2.3 Moving/inserting a segment

You can change the route of an
installation system by moving segments in
parallel or inserting new segments into the
route.
 Select the segment by clicking . An open square is displayed in the centre

point .
 Click on the symbol . A context menu with two functions is displayed.
Segment
Editing with polyline: The segment is shifted in
parallel shift parallel. The function
starts when you click
the symbol
Move pipe insert The segment is split and
you can change the route.
Basic functions
The function "Displace parallel polyline-like” is best described using an example. It is
assumed that the pipeline route is necessary because of a change in the floor plan.
An obstacle is to be circumvented:
Before After
configuration
configuration
Start of the editing
extensions,
extensions,
 Select the segment by clicking . The centre point is marked by an open square.
 Click on the symbol . The context menu is displayed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Select "Displace parallel polyline-like”. The cursor moves the two movable ends
of the new sub-segments.
The colour of the movable sub-segments can be black or red. This symbolises the
status of the bends, if a fixed point is defined at the current cursor position.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
301
Introduction

r!
Colour Meaning
Black The angle of the first bend is equivalent to a commercially available standard
size (15°, 30°, 45° or 60°).
Red The angle of at least one bend differs from the commercially standard sizes.

Define the new pipeline route. Set the positions of each of the new bends by clicking
:
Basic functions
End of the editing

The function remains active until it is terminated. After you have fixed the last bend,
press [ESC]. The pipeline will be displayed with the new route.
[ESC]
12.6.2.4 Editing the route of a pipeline segment
The operation is useful for example, to straighten the pipeline route. You can remove
bends without having to break up the pipeline and subsequently repair it.
Before After
However, it is critical that you first define the pipeline segment to be edited and
convert it into a polyline. You can then edit it. At the end of the operation, you need to
resolve the polyline back into individual segments. This procedure is also best
described using an example.
Index
302
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Defining a pipeline segment converting it to a polyline

(1)
Before: Individual
objects of the selected
(2)
After: Selected segment

as polyline object
(3)
Basic functions
 Select "Start polyline-like edit”. The separate objects (2) are compiled into a
polyline object and labelled separately in the model (3).

Nodes and segments of the newly formed object can be edited using the polyline
options. Click on the respective symbol to open the context menu with the editing
functions:
extensions,
configuration
(4)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
To edit the example described above, use the "Knoten löschen" (Delete node)
function (4). In this way, you get a visually continuous route (5). However, the
remaining segment is still a polyline. This polyline has to be converted back into a
pipeline.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
303
Introduction

r!
(5)
Converting a polyline into a pipeline

By re-converting into a pipeline, you incorporate the previously edited segment back
into the network and enable its calculation:
 Select the pipeline segment.

 Select "Stop polyline-like edit”. The operation is ended.
Basic functions
Index
304
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
12.6.3 Editing moulded parts

12.6.3.1 Converting 90° bend into two 45° bends
You can convert a single 90°

bend into two 45° bends and
vary the distance between the
two bends.
 Select the bend.
Basic functions
 Select "Replace with two bends". The "Update bend" dialogue is displayed.
 Adjust the distance between the bends and click OK . The single bend has
been replaced by two 45° bends. The operation is ended.
12.6.3.2 Converting two 45° bends into one 90° bend
You can merge two 45° bends into one 90° bend.
extensions,
configuration
 Select both bends. You cannot select any other objects.

 Select "Replace with one bend". The bends have been replaced. The operation
is ended.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
305
Introduction

r!
13 General electrical installation
13.1 Introduction
When working on the electrical installation,
you can choose between two methods of
working.
WM: Basic
Use Application Default Tools
In the "Use Application

Call function Default Tools” working mode
you access the product
database by calling the
Find and select function. This gives you an
an item extensive range of items.
Plug-in Search functions help you to
46
Set object choose the right one . After
parameters Help searching
selecting the item you are
for items taken to the object dialogue,
Basic functions
where further settings can be

Place symbol adjusted. After confirming
the cursor moves the
symbol.
46
See 22.2.2, page 549
Index
306
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
In the "Use Customer

Call function Specified Product and
Symbols”" working mode a
symbol selection box is
displayed in a narrow strip
Select symbol
when the function is called.
Plug-in After the object has been
selected, the cursor will
Place symbol immediately move its symbol.
No other settings are
expected. You can make
necessary changes later.
This method of working is
quicker, but the part list is
less differentiated.
13.2 Lighting systems
Basic functions
There are three component groups available in DDS-CAD for constructing lighting
systems. These can be used as objects. You can also exchange data between DDS-
CAD and the lighting calculation programs DIALux and Relux. For a simple and
rough calculation use the lighting calculation according to the efficiency method:
Surface-mounted, recessed, pendant and compact lights

Fluorescent lamps (see 13.2.1, page 308)
Llight tracks
Incandescent
Elements for the construction of light rail systems: Power
configuration
rails, connectors, power feeds, no light source
configuration
(see 13.2.2, page 309)
Light outlets, spotlights, emergency lamps, information lights, safety

lights, exterior lighting incl. lighting masts, accessories (e.g.
Relux Conversion
transformer)
(see13.2.1, page 308)
DIALux Conversion
extensions,
Light calculation Interfaces between DDS-CAD and DIALux and/or Relux

extensions,
(see 13.2.5, page 316)
Internal lighting calculation by the lumen method

(see 13.2.4, page 311)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
307
Introduction

r!
13.2.1 ((Fluorescent and incandescent lamps))
Fluorescent and incandescent lamps
are divided in the product database in terms of the installation type (1). This is a
property of the item, which controls the position of the mounting point on the symbol
and the location of the symbol in the room.
Overview: Types of mounting for fluorescent and incandescent lamps

Mounting type Example Note
1 Surface- Automatically activates snap

mounted areas (for work on sloping
ceiling roofs).
luminaire
2 Flush mounted
Basic functions
3 Pendant
luminaire
9 Wall mounted
Index
308
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.2.2 ((Support systems, light rails and strip lights))

Use the function to build
Feed T-connection Corner joint
support systems for
lighting systems. The
product database
contains the necessary
elements, such as power
Conductor rails, connectors and
feeds, which are
combined into one
Endplate system. Bulbs are not
included and must be
inserted separately.
All objects of this function are handled as dynamic symbols and include their number
in the part list – including the light rails.
Basic functions
You can choose light rails with a defined length as items (1) or define them freely in
the object dialogue (2). In this case, DDS-CAD automatically inserts an item whose
description does not contain any indication of length (3). Please note this with regard
to the part list. If you are using light rails of different lengths, you should create
specific items for this purpose (see, page xxx).
Note on the construction of light rails

When constructing light rail systems you should note that an electrical connection
is only possible at a feed. Power rails and connectors have no electrical
connection points.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
309
Introduction

r!
13.2.3 Installation in a suspended ceiling (single object)
(1)
Basic functions
You can control the mounting height of the lights by adjusting the height of the
suspended ceiling. To do this, select the "Suspended ceiling" mounting type for the
light (1).
The incorporation of the symbol is supported by snap points in the centre-points of a

grid plate and at their outer sides. :
Warning!
The suspended ceiling is not taken into account by the subsequent object group
functions or included in the lighting calculations.
Index
310
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.2.4 Lighting calculation using the efficiency method

The lighting calculation according to the efficiency method determines the required
number of lamps in a room or an area to achieve a certain level of illuminance. As a
result of this operation, lamps of the selected type are placed in the model as an
object group.
Warning!
The efficiency method is a rough estimate process that assumes the following
boundary conditions to obtain a realistic result:
 cube-shaped room (rectangular floor plan)
 ratio of room length to room width between 1.6:1 and maximum 4:1
 completely empty room
 constant and completely diffuse reflection from the room's boundary surfaces
 uniform light flux distribution over each sub-area
 uniform arrangement of the lamps in the room
 Fluorescent lamps are mounted in the longitudinal direction of the room
Basic functions
Often rooms have a floor plan whose rectangular shape is not ideal and is interrupted
in some places. Therefore, in principle the light calculation in DDS-CAD works in
polygonal rooms. You must decide on an individual basis whether a light calculation
makes sense for the given room geometry or not. The following diagrams illustrate
this point:
Perfect rectangle: Slight deviation Strong deviation

from rectangle: from rectangle:
configuration
Lighting calculation is fully lighting calculation seems lighting calculation does
configuration
applicable reasonable. not seem reasonable.
When calculating a polygonal room, DDS-CAD determines

extensions,
its area. The number of lamps is calculated so that the
extensions,
desired illuminance for a rectangular room of this size is

achieved.
A warning message (1) is displayed in the results view.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
(1)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
311
Introduction

r!
13.2.4.2 Calling the lighting calculation
The lighting calculation can be started in two ways:
Lighting calculation with active light
Start from
toolbox
(1)
Basic functions
Lighting
(2)
Lighting calculation with active lamp: You can call a single lamp, configure all of its
properties (item, rotation and attributes) and use it to execute a lighting calculation. If
the cursor moves the lamp as a dynamic symbol, start the lighting calculation via the
context menu (click ).
Starting from the toolbox: You can start the lighting calculation as an independent
function. You define the lamp's properties during the course of the application (see
below).
A wizard is displayed in both cases. It provides three methods (1) with which the
room area to be calculated can be defined.
 Select the desired method (1) and click Continue (2). The algorithm of the chosen
method starts and prompts you to input the room data.
Index
312
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.2.4.3 Determining the area to be calculated and inputting the room data

Depending on the chosen method, DDS-CAD automatically detects the room data or
waits for them to be input:
Pick a room by clicking

This method assumes a room definition
according to 5.3.3, page 54. The lamps
are automatically arranged in the model.
After starting the method:
 Click in the desired room. The
"Room Information” dialogue box ap-
pears. All data (1) are automatically
transferred from the building model.
Basic functions
Define a free contour
The area is drawn as a rectangle or
polygon, the lamps are automatically
arranged in the model. After starting:
 Click on the first corner of the
room area. The cursor moves a dy-
namic line.
 Draw the room (see 19.1.4,
page 439). The "Room Information”
dialogue box is displayed, the size
configuration
has been entered graphically.
configuration
 Enter the missing data.
Input data manually and place dynami-

cally
Immediately after starting the method, the
extensions,
"Room Information” dialogue is displayed.

extensions,
Enter all data manually in this dialogue

box. The room size is thus not entered
graphically in this method, but numerically
as a rectangle. Once the algorithm has
finished, the calculated lamps are
Adjustments,
displayed as dynamic symbols at the

Adjustments,
cursor. You can move them freely in the

model and fix them as often as desired.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
313
Introduction

r!
13.2.4.4 The room's technical lighting parameters
Call the "Room Information” dialogue box in addition to information about the
technical lighting conditions of the room and the required quality of illumination:
 Determine the required illumi-

nance (1) that is to be achieved
at the working height (2).
 Select the reflectance values for
Ceiling, Walls and Floor (3).
 Determine the maintenance fac-
(2) tor related to the degree of pol-
(1) lution (4).
(3)  Click Next . The "Input product
(4)
data" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
13.2.4.5 The lamp's parameters
In the "Input product data" dialogue box, specify the lamps used. If you started the
light calculation from the context menu of the active lamp (see 13.2.4.2, page 312),
DDS-CAD automatically transfers all properties. Check and correct the settings:
Determine the type of

illuminant (1) and select the
desired item (2).
(1)
(2) The light flux (3) refers to the
(3) entire illuminant with all bulbs.

(4) For safety, check the
manufacturer's specifications,
(5) since the product database
does not contain product-
specific information, but rather
only general lighting. The lamp
type (4) describes the radiation
characteristics.
(6)
Define the type of mounting (5)
and check (in the case of fluorescent lamps) that the lamp is arranged in a
longitudinal direction in the room. Adjust the orientation (6) accordingly.
 Click Next . DDS-CAD calculates the necessary number of lamps and distrib-
utes them. The "Product placement" dialogue box is displayed and shows the
calculated results.
Index
314
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.2.4.6 Product placement (lights)

The dialogue box shows the calculation
results and the calculated number of
lamps (1). The arrangement of the lamps
(1 (2) is determined automatically. However,
you can manually select a different
arrangement. Calculation results are
updated automatically.
(2
Pressing Finish displays the light box in
the defined region or as a dynamic symbol
at the cursor.
13.2.4.7 Correcting the calculation and printing results
Basic functions
The calculated lamps are parts of an object group (box). You can perform the
calculation again later on and print the calculation results:
 Select a lamp. The object is shown dark, all are displayed light blue.
 Choose "Select group". All objects are displayed in dark blue.
 Click again. The context menu is displayed.
 Select “Edit Properties”. The "Room Information” dialogue box is displayed.
configuration
Next (1) starts the calculation routine
configuration
again, Print (2) generates a report.
(2) extensions,
extensions,
(1)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Report Contents
EL_Lightcalculation.rpt Log with information about the room, desired design values,
data about the lamp and calculation results.
EL_Lightcalculation_as_list.rpt List of all lighting calculations in the project with the data for
the lighting calculation in abbreviated form.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
315
Introduction

r!
13.2.5 Lighting calculation with DIALux or Relux
DDS-CAD has bi-directional interfaces to the lighting calculation

programs DIALux and Relux. Both functions assume a room
definition according to 5.3.3, page 54. The following descriptions
assume that this prerequisite is satisfied.
DIALux Conversion
DDS-CAD generates a transfer file that contains the room
geometry. Open this file in DIALux or Relux. You specify the
technical lighting properties of the areas in the room and the
interior furnishing of the room and design all the lighting for the
Relux Conversion
room.
After the project has been completed and saved in DIALux or Relux, switch back to
DDS-CAD. Open the transfer files again, connect the lamps from the transfer file to a
Basic functions
lamp in the DDS product database and have the lamps incorporated into the model.
From the perspective of DDS-CAD, DIALux and Relux differ in that DIALux can
handle several rooms whereas Relux can only handle a single room. In both cases,
the interfaces are operated along the same principle, but DIALux offers more options.
Therefore we shall describe the rest of the procedure using the DIALux interface as
an example.
13.2.5.2 Transferring rooms and starting the calculation

(1)
(2)
(3)
DIALux Conversion
 Start the "DIALux Conversion Utility” function. The "Export and Import STF for
DIALux" dialogue box is displayed. You can transfer all rooms to DIALux or just
individual ones (1)/(2).
 Select the desired function (you have to specify a single room by clicking ).
The transfer file has been written to the project folder. The dialogue remains
open. You can start the lighting calculation.
 Click Open STF in DIALux . The calculation program starts and opens the exported
data.
Index
316
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Carry out the lighting design in the calculation program and save your work. The
calculation program enters information about the lamps used and their positions

in the transfer file. This file can be read and analysed by DDS-CAD.
Note:
If you need information about DIALux or Relux, please refer to the documentation
for the respective system or contact customer support.
13.2.5.3 Transferring lamps to DDS-CAD
The calculation program has added to the transfer file. Information about the lamps
used (lamp type) and their positions in the model have been entered into the file.
Each lamp type from the transfer file must now be connected to a lamp from the DDS
product database. We recommend that you create your own items in order to capture
the actual lamps used in the parts list (for information on creating your own articles,
see 22.2.3, page 538).
 Switch back to DDS-CAD and start the "DIALux Conversion Utility" function. The
"Export and Import STF for DIALux" dialogue box is displayed.
 Click Open STF file (1). The table lists all the lamps that have been used in the
Basic functions
calculation program for this project.
(2)
(1)
(3)
 Select a lamp from the transfer file (in this case DIAL 1 SiNOVA). configuration
configuration
 Select the component type (2) and click … (3). The product database is dis-
extensions,
played.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
317
Introduction

r!
 Select the desired item and click OK . The lamp from the transfer file has been
assigned to a DDS item (5):
(4)
(5)
(6)
 Repeat this step for all lamps. You can transfer all rooms to DIALux or just indi-
vidual ones (5)/(6).
 Select the desired function (you have to specify a single room by clicking ).
The lamps are at the specified positions in the model.
Basic functions
Index
318
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.3 Building management systems

13.3.1 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ETS (KNX)
DDS-CAD ETS
Develop Place KNX

building model Create project
objects
Export KNX objects for ETS Macro:

ImportDeviceListXML X
DDS-CAD Design topology

Import KNX objects from ETS
Check and configure

Macro:
symbol text
ExportDeviceListXML X
Basic functions
Notes on the building model
The building structure is
DDS-CAD ETS required to transfer the project
to ETS. The names of the
storeys are taken from the
drawings list. The room names
come from the building model.
Only the room contours are
needed to exchange data.
Doors, windows, roofs and other
building elements are irrelevant
configuration
to this application purpose (cf.
configuration
chapter 5.2.1, page 49).
extensions,
extensions,
Notes on KNX objects

You call KNX components for installation in the
building via the "KNX systems" function in the
Adjustments,
toolbox. On the other hand, modular devices are

Adjustments,
used when constructing the distribution board

(see xxx).
KNX systems
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
319
Introduction

r!
Export KNX objects for ETS
If you have used all KNX components for the planned system, export the objects for
ETS. DDS-CAD generates an XML file, whose name can be chosen freely. The first
processing stage in DDS-CAD is now complete:
 Select "File  "Export" (Export)  and then the
"Export KNX objects for ETS" function.
Creating a project in ETS

Start ETS, create a new project and enter the
project name. After confirming with OK you
are taken to the workspace in the new ETS
project with the windows
• Topology
• Building
• Group addresses
Basic functions
Index
320
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Import data from DDS-CAD into ETS

Warning!
To exchange data you need additional ETS macros (tools that are not
automatically included with ETS).
 Start the ETS macro (1).

 In the menu, select the function
ImportDeviceListXML_X (2). The
"Öffnen" (Open) dialogue box is
(1) displayed.
(2)  Select the file that you previously
created with DDS-CAD. ETS
analyses the project and re-
quests each KNX object from
DDS-CAD (3) is allocated to a
product from the ETS catalogue.
 Set the allocation between the
DDS object and the KNX prod-
Basic functions
uct. Confirm the allocation
with OK . The query for the
(3) next KNX object is displayed.
 Repeat the allocation until the
query no longer appears. The
project has been transferred to
ETS. The KNX components are
displayed in the "Topologie" (To-
pology) and "Building Informa-
tion” windows with no physical
configuration
address:
Designing the topology in ETS

Editing in ETS creates
configuration
Before After
the topology of the
extensions,
system and the

extensions,
components receive
their physical
addresses.
Exporting data from ETS to DDS-CAD

Adjustments,
If you have finished designing the system in ETS, you can save the result in a
Adjustments,
transfer file for DDS-CAD.

 Start the ETS macro. The macro's menu is opened.
 Select "ExportDeviceListXML_X". The "Save as" dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter a filename. Save the file in the DDS project folder.
 Click Save . You can transfer the data into the DDS project.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
321
Introduction

r!
Importing KNX objects from ETS to DDS-CAD
 Select the "Insert” menu  "File"  and then the "Import KNX devices" function.
The "Open" dialogue box is displayed.
 Select the file that you
created previously with
ETS. This opens the
"Administrator" dialogue
box and shows the topol-
ogy of the system and
the position of the com-
ponents in the building.
 Click Close . The data
have been transferred to
the KNX objects in the
entire project.

Checking and configuring symbol text

Basic functions
Importing the ETS data causes all

(1) individual details of the KNX components
to be transferred to the corresponding
objects in the DDS model. You can check
these under the "PLogical Device Info.
(ETS)" (1) tab for each object.
The physical address is displayed as text

on the object if the symbol text is set as
"Free text + bus address" (2).
(2)
Index
322
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.3.2 Data exchange between DDS-CAD and ELVIS

DDS-CAD Elvis
Develop building model,

Create project
Place objects
Render model Import 3D model
Open interface to Elvis,

Open file for editing
save perspectives
Export perspectives
Developing the building model and placing objects
Basic functions
For a high-quality
visualisation, you
should prepare the
model in DDS-CAD, so
that the visual impact is
satisfactory.
configuration
configuration
• correct positions of the components (correct height, objects for wall mounting
must be placed on the wall line).
• the complete building model with windows and doors. Furnishings (e.g. furniture)
are not transferred, but they can be simulated by geometric shapes.
extensions,
• possibly design of other DDS application types. If you have also modelled the
extensions,
heating, plumbing, and ventilation systems with DDS-CAD, you can display these
models.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
323
Introduction

r!
Rendering the model
Switch to the "Use 3D

Navigate and Render tools”
working mode. The render
WM: Render method is not important for
the actual transfer and
display in Elvis.
The function for preparing
the data transfer uses
screenshots, which you can
use to check the stored
perspectives. Therefore,
select a rendering method,
which also remains clearly
visible in reduced
representations.
Basic functions
Opening the interface to Elvis and saving perspectives

 Select "Tools" menu  "Admin Elvis views" function.
 Set the desired perspec-
(1) (2) (3) tive for the visualisation.
The dialogue remains
open.
 Enter a title for the view
(1). You can add com-
ments (2) as additional

information, but this is not
essential.
 Click on the link (3). The
dialogue box disappears
from the screen.
 Press Enter . The current
perspective has been
saved and is used for
checking by a screenshot
(4).
 Repeat the process for all
(4)
perspectives in the cur-
rent storey.
 Complete the same steps
in all the other storeys.
Index
324
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Exporting perspectives
The export is done for all storeys together in one step. It does not matter what storey

is opened.
 Click Export to Elvis .
 Make sure that the
file storage is correct
(we recommend that
you save the file in
the DDS project
folder).
 Enter the names
without numbers or
special characters!
 Click Save . DDS-
CAD creates the
transfer file.
Basic functions
Starting Elvis and creating the project
Create a new project in Elvis. A wizard guides you
through the process.
Importing a 3D model
To import the transfer file
from DDS-CAD:
configuration
configuration
 Go to the Project
Folder Explorer and
click on the "Pages"
folder (1). The context
(1) menu is displayed.
(2)  Select "Add" "Import
extensions,
3D model". The
extensions,
"Open" dialogue box is

displayed.
 Select the transfer file
in the DDS project
Adjustments,
folder. Elvis imports

Adjustments,
the data from the pro-

ject. The data of the
DDS project are listed
by storey in the Pro-
ject Folder Explorer
(2).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
325
Introduction

r!
Opening the file for editing
The import process unpacks the transfer file and lists the relevant files in the Project
Folder Explorer. For further editing, use the files which bear the name of the imported
file and just one extra digit. The digit (here 0; 1; 2) is the label for the storey and is
taken from the DDS drawings list. Open this file by double clicking .
Basic functions
An opened file in Elvis displays the model from the first saved perspective
(Camera1). All saved perspectives are arranged as Camera 1 to Camera n at the
bottom of the screen. You can use the Elvis server to switch between the
47
perspectives . All lamps are listed on the left-hand side. The label contains the
name of the room in which the object is located and the name of the DDS symbol file.
The top edge contains all other possible data points.
47
Press [Ctrl]+[F5]. The server starts (which can take several seconds). You can then view the visualisation from the saved
perspectives.
Index
326
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

13.4 Telecommunications and information techno-
logy systems
There are six component
Telephone and Data
groups available in DDS-
CAD for constructing
Audio/Intercom and Signal telecommunications and
information technology
Aerial/Antenna systems.
Timing devices
Fire and Security
FDS area
Basic functions
All objects are treated as dynamic symbols. This chapter describes specific features
of data equipment and fire alarm systems.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
327
Introduction

r!
13.4.1 Special features of data equipment
In DDS-CAD a component cannot be connected by two different cables, therefore

multiple data outlets (RJ45) must be combined from the main object and one or more
auxiliary objects. In principle the following situations are possible:
• Data outlets for wall mounting or in the wall duct
• Data outlets in the floor duct
13.4.1.1 Data sockets for wall mounting
A "Data socket 3xRJ45" shall serve as an example. It is displayed as a default

symbol for a data socket. The positions of the auxiliary objects are marked by
rectangular placeholders.
The associated auxiliary object visually consists of a rectangle the size of the
placeholder. In order to not distort the part list as a result of the combination, you
should also disable the quantification of the auxiliary objects (1).
Main object Auxiliary object

Basic functions
(1)
RJ45
Make sure the RJ45

mount heights are equal
and combine the objects
so that they are displayed
visually as a
symbol.
You can now assign a line to each auxiliary symbol. Use the combination as a
template to place additional data outlets.
Index
328
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.4.1.2 Data sockets in the floor duct

A flush-mount unit in the floor duct shall serve as an example. The installation spot
(1) is to be used for a "Terminal box Cat.6 4x RJ45 FBK":
(1)
Main object Auxiliary object
Basic functions
(1)
extensions,
configuration
The symbols for the main

and auxiliary object
look the same
visually.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Pay attention to the correct mount height, enable snap points and fix the objects in
the centre of the installation spot. You can then assign a line to each object. Use the
combination as a template to place additional data outlets.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
329
Introduction

r!
13.4.2 Special features of fire alarm systems
The objects of fire alarm systems and the identification of monitoring areas is
performed by two different component groups.
To call the fire alarm, select the "Fire and Security" function. You
get access to the technical components of the hazard detection
equipment:
To identify the monitoring areas, select the "FDS Area":

Basic functions
max. distance
point ceiling-detector
max. monitoring area

Index
330
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.4.3 Numbering fire alarms

To identify the fire alarm, use the
"PositionMarker” function. Pre-configured
label types are available for the different
types of labelling. The graphic (left) will serve
as an example. The following description
1 1 1
illustrates a simple example. For a detailed
1 2 3
description of the function, please refer to
chapter 19.4.2, page 494.
PositionMarker
(1)
Basic functions
(2) 1
3
(3)
configuration
configuration
 Select the "PositionMarker” function. The dialogue box (see above) is displayed.
 Select the type (1), prefix (2) and the number (3) for the first component and click
OK . The cursor turns into a crosshair.
extensions,
 Use your mouse to point to the first component to be identified. The component
extensions,
is displayed as a selected object. The number of this component is displayed at

the cursor.
 Move the cursor to the desired position and fix the label by clicking .
 Move the cursor to the next component and repeat the operation for the other
Adjustments,
components. The number is incremented automatically.

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
331
Introduction

r!
13.5 Cables, wires, circuit labels
13.5.1 Introduction
All objects in the electrical installation include the tabs "Connected” and “Text” in their
object dialogue. The information contained in "Connected” is presented taking into
account the symbol text settings for the symbol.
(2)
(1)
UV01.1
Basic functions
The example shows the symbol of a fluorescent lamp with its label. All relevant fields
under "Connected” (1) have been filled out. However, according to “Text” (2)
distribution board ID and circuit ID are retrieved.
This section deals with the allocation of circuit information to the individual objects, in
other words filling out the "Connected” tab. Essentially this can be done by two
different methods. You can enter the label manually or apply it as a result of
connecting an electrical line from the distribution board to the object.
The act of connecting an electrical line to an object transfers the information

automatically from the distribution board to the object. Subsequent changes in the
distribution board (e.g. correcting circuit IDs) are automatically transferred to the
connected components, so that you can always control the circuit labels via a central
function. You can adjust the effort for installing cables to the intended use.
For pure labelling, DDS-CAD does not require a meticulously drawn line, and no
drawing-related connection between distribution board and connected objects is
necessary. You can draw a minor line (e.g. small cross-sections) temporarily from
component to component. However, if the lines are significant for the part list, they
must be laid correctly.
Select the method that is most suitable for your purpose!

Index
332
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.2 Methods of

13.5.2.1 Labelling by manual captions
The manual input is the

ideal choice if you do
not want to design and
document any
distribution boards in
DDS-CAD. In this case,
you can quickly apply
the labelling to the
objects.
UV01.1 UV01.1
UV01.1 UV01.1
Basic functions
UV01.1
 Select several (or all) components that belong to the same circuit.
configuration
configuration
 Select “Edit Properties”. The "ElpSymSymbol" dialogue box is displayed.
 Switch to the "Connected” tab.
 Enter the data and confirm with OK .
extensions,
 You reach the dialogue box for setting object properties. The components are
extensions,
labelled in the model.
However, this method is not suitable if you are designing the distribution boards in
DDS-CAD. In this case, we recommend the second method.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
333
Introduction

r!
13.5.2.2 Labelling by connecting lines (temporary installation)
The aim of this method is to join several objects

(belonging to a common circuit) by a line for the
UV01.3 UV01.3
purposes of identifying the circuit. Cable routes
and installation methods are ignored. Select this
UV01
method if you are designing and documenting
UV01.3 UV01.3
the distribution boards in DDS-CAD. The line
length is irrelevant for the part list. We assume
that the distribution board has been constructed
UV01.3
in accordance with chapter.
Please refer to xxx.
13.5.2.3 Labelling by connecting lines (correct installation)
This method aims to identify connected objects AND correctly detect cable lengths
for the part list. Measured against the two other methods, it involves greater effort
and requires some practice. Having said this, the "Start Trunk” function is a tool
available that can make this work much easier. Therefore you should weigh effort
and benefits against each other and find a good balance.
Basic functions
13.5.2.4 Cable harness
The cable harness is an auxiliary function

SV01 DV01 used for mapping installation zones in the
building and for installing several cables
in parallel in the same route. From a
technical point of view, it may be regarded
as a bus system. By constructing a cable
harness system you create a network of
UV01
cable pathways that connects the

individual distribution boards to each
other, branches out into different regions
and that can also end in stub lines. During
M UV01.3 the subsequent cable installation, you do
not have to draw every line from the
RJ45 distribution board to the consumer.
DV01.1.1-1 Instead, it calls on the exit point of the
DV01.1.1-2 cable harness, and it starts in the active
DV01.1.1-3 distribution board.
SV01.2
Index
334
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.2.5 Opening the distribution board and starting the cable

First you have to open the distribution board. You can do this either by double-
clicking the distribution board symbol in the model or by calling the "Circuit List”
function in the tool box:
Double click
(1)
Circuit List
(2)

configuration
 Select the "Circuit List” tab.
extensions,
extensions,
 Check the description of the circuit, and correct if necessary: Double click on
the cell of the description. The dialogue box is displayed.
 Correct the circuit description and click OK . The dialogue box is closed.
 Click Draw . The parameters settings dialogue box is displayed.
Adjustments,

Adjustments,
Check and correct the settings and click OK . The cursor turns into a cross-
hair. You can draw the cable.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
335
Introduction

r!
13.5.2.6 Drawing the cable
After the start of the cable, point to the first

(1)
component to be connected. When the
cursor gets close, it is enabled and is
(3) displayed as a selected object (1). Clicking
(2) establishes the connection, the cursor
moves the line as a polyline (2) and the
circuit label is displayed on the object (3).
UV01.3 UV01.3
Guide the cable from object to object in this
way. Once all objects are connected, end
UV01 the function with [ESC].
UV01.3 UV01.3
The cable installation functions are very

UV01.3 comprehensive; however, they are hardly
needed by this method.
13.5.3 Labelling by connecting lines (correct)

Basic functions
This method aims to identify connected objects AND correctly detect cable lengths
for the part list. Measured against the two other methods, it involves greater effort
and requires some practice. Having said this, the "Start Trunk” function is a tool
available that can make this work much easier. Therefore you should weigh effort
and benefits against each other and find a good balance.
13.5.3.1 Cable harness
The cable harness is an auxiliary function

SV01 DV01 used for mapping installation zones in the
building and for installing several cables
in parallel in the same route. From a

technical point of view, it may be regarded
as a bus system. By constructing a cable
harness system you create a network of
UV01 cable pathways that connects the
individual distribution boards to each
other, branches out into different regions
and that can also end in stub lines. During
M UV01.3 the subsequent cable installation, you do
not have to draw every line from the
RJ45 distribution board to the consumer.
DV01.1.1-1 Instead, it calls on the exit point of the
DV01.1.1-2 cable harness, and it starts in the active
DV01.1.1-3 distribution board.
SV01.2
Index
336
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.4 Drawing the cable harnesses

The cable harness is an auxiliary function that acts like a bus system. It makes sense
to use a harness in buildings where many cables run in parallel over long
48
distances .
SV01 DV01 Before beginning the actual cable

installation, prepare the installation zones
in the building graphically. In this way you
Cable harness create a network of cable pathways that
connects the individual distribution boards
to each other, branches out into different
regions and that can also end in stub
Cable harness UV01
lines.
The graphic shoes a safety distribution

board (SV01), a data distribution board
M
Cable
(DV01) and a high-voltage current

distribution board (UV01). All three
distribution boards are joined by a cable
RJ45 harness system.
Basic functions
During the subsequent cable installation,
you do not have to draw every line from
SV01 DV01 the distribution board to the terminal
device. Instead, you can enable the
distribution board and the cable in
accordance with Hiba! A hivatkozási
configuration
forrás nem található. and call on the
configuration
cable harness at any point. However,
UV01 mathematically the cable begins in its
distribution board and automatically takes
the prescribed installation route.
M UV01.3
extensions,
extensions,
RJ45
DV01.1.1-1
DV01.1.1-2
DV01.1.1-3
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
SV01.2
48
In small units with star-shaped cable installations, the cable harness does not add much value.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
337
Introduction

r!
13.5.4.1 Calling the cable harness
 Select the "Start Trunk” function. The "Installation Specifica-

tions” dialogue box is displayed.
 Set the required installation method and click OK . The cur-
sor turns into a crosshair. You can start the cable harness at a
distribution system or an existing cable harness.
13.5.4.2 Starting a cable harness at a distribution board
If you want to start the cable harness at a distribution board:

 Point to the distribution system. The component is displayed as a selected ob-
ject:
Basic functions
 Click . The cursor moves a movable line that you can guide in any direction.
Start drawing. Each mouse click defines a break point.
13.5.4.3 Starting a cable harness at an existing harness
You want to build a system of cable harnesses. To do this, existing cable harnesses
must be branched.
 Point (without clicking) to the cable harness:
 Press [F2]. The cursor moves a movable line that you can guide in any direc-
tion. Start drawing. Each mouse click defines a break point.
Index
338
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.4.4 Drawing the path of the cable harness

Horizontal installation
Each click fixes the line at the position of the cursor.
Vertical installation (change in height):

Entering a difference: reference is the current working height
[PgUp] Vertically upwards by a difference in metres (m).
[PgDn] Vertically downwards by a difference in metres (m).
Entering a target height: reference is the height 0

[Home] Vertically to a target height in metres (m).
[End]
13.5.4.5 Connecting the cable harness to the distribution system
If the cursor gets close to a distribution system, the program snaps the cursor with
the cable harness and holds it tight.
Basic functions
 To establish the connection, click .
13.5.5 Drawing a cable

13.5.5.1 Calling the cable
 Select the "Circuit List” function. The distribution board's dia-
 Select the "Circuit List” tab. You go to the circuits table in this
configuration
distribution system.
configuration
 Check the description of the circuit, and correct if necessary:
Double click on the cell of the description. The dialogue box
is displayed.
 Correct the circuit description and click OK . The dialogue
box is closed. The circuit description in the cell has been
extensions,
changed and the row of the circuit is selected.

extensions,
 Click Draw . The cable parameters settings dialogue box is displayed.

 Check and correct the cable's settings and click OK . The cursor turns into a
crosshair. You can start the cable at a distribution system or an existing cable
harness.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
339
Introduction

r!
13.5.5.2 Starting the cable at a component
You want to start the cable at a component (e.g. switches, sockets, lamp or
distribution boards, etc.).
 Point to the component. The component appears as a selected object:
 Click . A circuit label is displayed on the component immediately. The cursor

moves a movable line that you can guide in any direction. Start drawing. Each
mouse click defines a break point.
13.5.5.3 Starting the cable at the cable harness
You have prepared a system of cable harnesses. The cable is to start at the harness
in terms of the drawing and in the distribution mathematically.
 Point (without clicking) to the cable harness:
Basic functions
 Press [F2]. The cursor moves a movable line that you can guide in any direc-
tion. Start drawing. Each click defines a break point.
13.5.5.4 Drawing the path of the cable
Horizontal installation
Each click fixes the line at the position of the cursor.
Vertical installation (change in height):

Entering a difference: reference is the current working height
[PgUp] Vertically upwards by a difference in metres (m).
[PgDn] Vertically downwards by a difference in metres (m).
Entering a target height: reference is the height 0

[Home] Vertically to a target height in metres (m).
[End]
13.5.5.5 Connecting the cable to a component
If the cursor gets close to a symbol, the program snaps the cursor with the cable and
holds it tight.
 To establish the connection, click . The component receives a circuit label.
Index
340
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.6 Installation spanning several storeys

This section describes guiding cables across several storeys. Essentially it has to be
said that for cable harnesses or cables and wires, there is no "on the ceiling" or "in
the floor" transfer function. Nevertheless, in order to determine the correct line
length for the part list, we recommend distinguishing between two fundamental
cases:
• A distribution system supplies several consumers on the storeys (left picture)
• A main distribution system supplies sub-distribution systems on the storeys
(right picture)
Basic functions
For both situations the same fact applies that the drawing operation only refers to one
storey. In the first case, the target of the cable guidance exists, but the starting point
is missing. For the second case, the reverse situation applies. The starting point is
configuration
available, but the target of the cable guidance is located in another storey.
configuration
In terms of the lines drawn, there are no connections between the storeys. However,
we recommend making each relevant storey visible in order to visualise the positions
of the desired starting or target points as well as the differences in height. extensions,
In the following sections, we describe how to show a storey and how to process
extensions,
these two cases.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
341
Introduction

r!
13.5.6.1 Showing a storey
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin" function:
The "Inserted file administrator" dialogue box appears. This lists all storeys (2)
belonging to the active project and the selected application type (1) under the
tab “Complete List of All Model in the Project". Storeys with the symbol are
invisible. Storeys with the symbol are visible.
(1
)
(2
)
Basic functions
 Click once on the symbol of the relevant storey. The symbol changes to
and further settings (3) are enabled:
Note:
It is useful to use different colours
to distinguish between the different storeys:
Uncheck "Default” at ”Pen”
and choose a different colour for each storey.
 Click OK . The storey with the distribution board is visible. By switching to the
front or side view, you can determine the mounting height of the distribution
board from the perspective of the current storey.
Index
342
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.6.2 Situation 1 – a distribution system supplies several consumers

Sample starting situation
You have placed the installation
equipment (1) and the distribution system
(1) (2) at the designated positions and
constructed the distribution system
according to 11.4. Note that the
distribution board must have a feed.
The drawing operation takes place in the

storey, in which the consumers to be
connected are located. In order to allow
the cabling installation, a terminal must be
created that symbolises the supplying
(2) distribution board.
To do this, a feedthrough (3) is placed,

whose mounting height is adjusted such
that the difference in height between the
storeys is recorded, and possibly a section
Basic functions
to be drawn horizontally for the part list.
By showing the storey (where the
distribution board is located) you can
determine the required mounting height.
The feedthrough is the starting point for

(3) constructing the cable network in the
storey under consideration. We
recommend that you implement the
cabling installation with the assistance of
the cable harness (4). Please refer
configuration
to 13.5.4, page 337 for more information.
configuration
(3)
extensions,
extensions,
 Show the storey where the distribution board is located. You can see the position
of the distribution board and determine the difference in height via the front and
side views.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
343
Introduction

r!
Procedure for inserting the feedthrough
 In the "Insert” menu select the "Storey Pointer” function. The product database is
displayed. The "Storey Pointer" filter is active.
 Select the desired item. The "Connection Devices” dialogue box is displayed:
(1)
Basic functions
 Adjust the mounting height (1) so that the height difference to the position of the
distribution system can be overcome by the cabling guidance and click OK .
The symbol is displayed dynamically at the cursor.

 Fix the symbol at the desired position.
Procedure for the cabling installation

 Start the cable harness function (see , page ).
 Start the installation at the feedthrough. The “Make Connection to:” dialogue box
is displayed:
 Select the distribution board, which is represented by this feedthrough and then
click OK . The starting point of the cabling installation is defined. The cursor
moves the cable harness as a dynamic line.
 Start by constructing the cable harness and note the installation height when do-
ing so. All heights refer to the current storey. The upper edge of the finished floor
corresponds to the height 0.
Index
344
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
13.5.6.3 Situation 2 – One main distribution system supplies sub-distributions
on the storeys

Sample starting situation:
A main distribution system (1) is
located in the basement, the
dependent consumers and/or sub-
distribution (2) are located in the
storeys above. The drawing
operation takes place in the
storey, in which the main
distribution system is located. The
description assumes that a
"Supply line to sub-distribution..."
circuit exists in this system:
Procedure:
 Show the storey where the sub-board to be supplied is located. You can see the
Basic functions
position of the distribution board and determine the difference in height via the
front and side views.
 Select the main distribution
 Call the "Supply line to sub-distribution..." circuit for drawing.
 Start the line at the main distribution system, lead this to the riser point and
change the installation height to reach the sub-distribution.
 Connect the cable to the sub-distribution and end the function with [ESC].
 Hide the storey of the sub-distribution.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
345
Introduction
Erro Building and system schematics

r!
14 Distribution board documentation
14.1 Creating a drawing and enabling a distribution

board
All functions and operations described in this chapter are only possible in the
"Elektrotechnik" (Electrical engineering) application type, from drawing 500 (see
3.2.1).
Each distribution board

requires a separate
drawing. Within this
drawing, you can
manage all sheets,
lists and protocols that
belong to this
distribution board.
You first get to a blank
workspace with grids
Basic functions
and a coordinate
plane. Now the
required distribution
board has to be
activated:
(3)
(2)
(1)
Distribution boards and
 Select the "Circuit List” function. The "Define board” dialogue box is displayed.
 Select the desired distribution board (1) or create a new one (2). The distribution
board is active.
 Activate the sheet list (3).
Index
346
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Building and system schematics Erro
r!
14.2 Managing sheetsand navigating between them

14.2.1 The sheet list
The sheet list is divided into
two sections. On the left you
will see the available page
49
templates . the right-hand
side lists the existing sheets
for this distribution board.
To create a new sheet, select

the desired template by
clicking . In the context
menu, select "Add" to append
a sheet to the end of the list.
Using "Insert” creates the
sheet above the selected
row.
Basic functions
You can edit the list of available sheets by changing the information, entering
revisions or deleting pages.
 Select a single sheet (click ) or several sheets ([Ctrl]+ ).
 Click on the selected sheet. A context menu is displayed.
Function Key Meaning

Open Double click The selected sheet opens.
Edit This displays a dialogue where you can to input the
configuration
sheet information. The modified information is
configuration
displayed in the list of available sheets and in the text
fields of each individual sheet.
Delete The selected sheets are deleted
Local revision You can generate an a revision entry that only appears
of the selected in the text fields of the selected sheets.
sheets
extensions,
extensions,
Global revision This displays a dialogue where you can change

of all sheets various sheet properties.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
49
The contents of this list depend on the license. It may be the case that not all templates shown are available.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
347
Introduction

r!
14.2.2 Navigating between sheets
You can switch from one sheet to the next with the "Previous sheet” and "Next sheet"
functions. The status bar shows you the number of the current sheet and the number
of available sheets. The example shows sheet 1 of 5 (1). In addition, the name of the
current sheet (2) is displayed.
Previous sheet
Basic functions
Next sheet
(1) (2)
14.2.3 Adding a sheet

The "Insert sheet" function creates a subsequent sheet using the

current sheet as a template. In this way, you can build up the
distribution documentation continuously, without having to call the
sheet administration dialogue.
Add sheet
Index
348
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
14.3 Drawing circuits automatically

14.3.1 Organising sheet divisions
The following situation serves
as an example:
Circuits on sheet 1 The distribution board UV11

contains several circuits. The
feed and the circuits F2 to
Circuits on sheet 2 F2.4 are to be displayed on
the first sheet. The circuits F3
and F4 are drawn on the
subsequent sheet. Sheet 1 is
created and opened.
The "Draw circuits" function
analyses the contents of the
distribution board and shows
the addressed circuits. You can determine the sheet division by specifying intervals
Basic functions
(draw circuit from ... to). Sheet limits are not exceeded.
On sheet 1
(1)
configuration
Draw circuits
configuration
extensions,
extensions,
 Select "Draw circuits” (1). The "Draw circuits” dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the interval for sheet 1. For the address, simply select the name of a re-
Adjustments,
source (cable ID or component ID) in that circuit.

Adjustments,
 Click OK . The circuits appear on the sheet.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
349
Introduction

r!
On sheet 2
(1)
Draw circuits
 Add the next sheet with the "Blank sheet and DC" function. DDS-CAD creates
the new sheet and the "Draw circuits” dialogue box is automatically displayed.
Basic functions
The functions suggests the next circuit to be drawn.

 Click OK . The remaining circuits appear on sheet 2.
14.3.2 Specifying the start position before drawing

By default, DDS-CAD starts at a defined position on the left-hand edge of the page. It
may be that the first circuit is meant to be displayed at a different position to leave
room for additions.
Insert point
 Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Click on the position where the first circuit is to be displayed.
 Draw the circuits.
Index
350
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
14.4 Drawing manually

14.4.1 Draw components
Not all circuits can be realised by applying automatic functions. You can call
individual devices as a symbol and place them manually.
(2)
(1) (3)
Figure diagram
(4)
(5)
Basic functions
Each of these components has the character of objects. If a device consists of
several components that can be separately as symbols (e.g. a contactor) the
available types of symbols is displayed in the selection dialogue.
"Name" (1) lists all previously defined objects in the active component group.
New (2) creates a new object for the active component group. You are taken to the
selection in the product database.
Copy (3) duplicates the current object with all settings, parameters, and additional
configuration
auxiliary functions.
configuration
Rename (4) opens a dialogue to configure the contact IDs.
Aux. contacts (5) creates an additional auxiliary function for the current object. So for
example, you can equip a contactor with additional auxiliary contacts.

extensions,
You can only place each component of a device (e.g. the contactor coil) once in the
extensions,
drawing. It shall only be released again after having been deleted from the drawing.
The coherence of the components (e.g. between coil

and contacts) is indicated by cross-references. The
reference in the contact image points to the position of
Adjustments,
the main contact, the reference on the main contact

Adjustments,
points to the position of the coil. In the example, coil

and contact image are on the same sheet. The main
contact is another sheet.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
351
Introduction

r!
14.4.2 Drawing terminals
You can use the "Insert Terminal” function to configure the terminal. Specify the
name of the terminal block and the number of terminals.
Insert Terminal
Basic functions
Index
352
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
14.5 Navigating between the circuit and the sheet

14.5.1 From the drawn circuit to the circuit table
You are looking at a drawn circuit and want to go to the entry in the distribution board
database:
Distribution boards and
Basic functions
 Select the circuit by clicking . The selected circuit is displayed as a selected
object and is highlighted in bold. All other circuits are also selected, but appear
pale.
 Select the "Circuit List” function. The distribution board database is displayed.
The entry for the selected circuit is also highlighted in the table.
How can you recognise the circuits of the open sheet in the distribution board
database?
configuration
The circuits of the
configuration
open sheet are
highlighted in the
table by italic text.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
353
Introduction

r!
14.5.2 From the circuit table to the drawn circuit
You are looking at an entry in the distribution board database and want to go to the
sheet where the item is located. The circuit of interest is not on the current sheet (text
is not in italics). The drawn circuit is to be viewed in its own sheet:
 Select the row by clicking . The row is selected. The context menu is dis-
played.
 Select the
"Goto single Multiline
sheet for circuit or
"Goto Singleline sheet
for circuit" function.
DDS-CAD opens the
sheet where this circuit
was drawn.
Basic functions
Index
354
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Emergency and evacuation routes Erro
r!
15 Emergency and evacuation routes

Enable the"Emergency planning” working mode.
Sheets, title fields and legends

Use as dynamic symbols.
Fire protection signs, emergency signs, warning signs

Use as dynamic symbols.
Emergency routes
The " Escape routes" and "Broken line for Escpae routes"
functions are used as a dynamic line. After opening the
Basic functions
function, define the starting point, the vertices and the end
of the route by clicking . Afterwards, close the function by
pressing [ESC].
The "Direction" function is effected as a symbol.
Immediately after opening the function, the cursor controls
the symbol of an arrowhead.
Labelling specific areas

All functions are effected as cross-hatching. After opening
the function, define the contours of the area by clicking .
Afterwards, close the function by pressing [ESC].
configuration
configuration
Highlighting fire walls and fire compartments
All functions are used as a dynamic line. After opening the
function, define the starting point, the vertices and the end
of the highlighting by clicking . Afterwards, close the
function by pressing [ESC].
extensions,
extensions,
Object grid
The object grid is effected as cross-hatching. After opening
the function, define the contours of the area by clicking .
Afterwards, close the function by pressing [ESC].
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
355
Introduction
Erro Rendering – Image synthesis from the model

r!
16 Analysing – Printing – Exporting
When working with DDS-CAD you develop the virtual model of the system. From this
you can derive graphical representations in various forms, which you can print out on
paper or output to a data exchange format (PDF, DWG/DXF). For quantitative
analysis, create a parts list that you can use in different ways.
DDS-CAD building model
Scal e !:100
Edited
Chec ked
Status
New office building
Ground floor
Modific ati on
Basic functions

Item no. Item name Quantity
Heating – Technical equipment

GF978A Gas boiler burner 15kW 1 pc.
Heating – Piping
Heating – Piping formed parts

BE1808 CU Elbow fitting 90° 18x1 10 pc.
BE1809 CU Elbow fitting 90° 22x1 18 pc
Radiators and accessories

HKV D10 Radiator valve DN10 4 pc.
HKV D10 Lock shield valve DN10 4 pc.
Index
356
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Rendering – Image synthesis from the model Erro
r!
16.1 Working with part drawings (details)

You can create any part drawing for every model. These can be either rectangular or
polygonal cutouts. First, you can specify the sheet division using subframes and then
base your definition on these. For each part drawing, you can:
• add information
• print
• export
• create as presentation
• incorporate into a plot layout
16.1.1 Dividing sheet with subframes

If you have to split a large drawing into several sections, you can use subframes to
help you achieve this. Using this method, you first specify the desired sheet division
and then create the part drawings using the sub-frame:

configuration
1 3
2
extensions,
 In the "Tools” menu  "Part Models / Sections  select the "Help for Defini-
extensions,
tions" function. The product database is displayed and opens a filter containing
various tools for designing part drawings for a variety of applications.
 Call the subframe for the required size. The subframe is displayed at the cursor
as a dynamic symbol.
Adjustments,
Fix the subframe in the drawing to symbolise the position and size of the required
Adjustments,
part drawings.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
357
Introduction

r!
16.1.2 Defining part drawings
Part
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
Basic functions
 Select the "Part drawings” function. The administration dialogue lists all part
drawings in the model (1). The selected part drawing is displayed in the preview.
 Click New (2). The "List of part drawings" dialogue box is displayed.
 Name and describe the part drawing (3).
 Select the type of the part drawing: "Rectangle" or "Polygon" (4).
 Click OK . You can define the geometry of the part drawing.
Rectangular section (diagonal)

section. The cursor draws a
rectangle.
 Click on the second corner of
the section. The operation is
ended.
Polygonal section (outline)

section. The cursor moves a
polyline.
 Draw the outline to the last ver-
[En-
tex.
 Press [Enter]. The operation
is ended.
Index
358
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.1.3 Copying a part drawing definition

You can directly reproduce existing part drawings. To do this, copy the geometry of a
section and insert it again. A new entry appears in the administration dialogue with
the same name. Therefore you have to rename the new section after the operation:
16.1.4 Managing part drawings

To manage the part drawings, use the functions in the
Basic functions
context menu. To do this, click on the entry in the list.
configuration
Menu item Function
configuration
Zoom Displays the contents of the part drawing magnified on the screen.
Properties Opens the "Auschnitt" (Part drawing) dialogue. You can edit the name
and description.
Delete Removes the part drawing from the list and the model
Export Exports the contents of the part drawing as DWG, DXF, 3DS, or CFI.
extensions,
Create Creates a new presentation (see 3.3.2.3, page 27), which only
extensions,
presentation displays the contents of the part drawing and which can be used as a
work area.
Print Starts the print function for the part drawing
New Starts the algorithm to generate a new part drawing.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
359
Introduction

r!
16.2 Working with sections (wall views)

You can create as many sections as

needed in each model. The intersection
line can be placed straight (A) or offset
and defined in sections (B). In this way
you can exclude unwanted objects from
the sectional representation. For each
A A part section, you can:
B
• add information
• Print
• export
B • create as presentation
• incorporate into a print layout
16.2.1 Defining and editing a section

Start function
Basic functions
Sections
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
 Select the "Sections” function. The dialogue box lists all sections present in the
model (1). The part drawing selected in the list is displayed in the preview.
 Click New . The "List of sections" dialogue box is displayed.
 Define the label for the intersection line (4) and use "Description” to enter addi-
tional text information.
 Click OK . The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the fol-
lowing prompt: "Specify section position".
Index
360
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Defining an intersection line and ending the definition
After starting the function, you can

define the start point, route and end
point of the intersection line by clicking
. The position of the starting point
End Start determines the draw direction and
viewing direction, which is always
directed to the left (from the
A A intersection line). In the picture you can
B
see the route of the intersection line A-
A runs from right to left, the section
End
looks down. In contrast, the intersection
B line B-B has been started and led to the
right. The section looks up.
Start
Offset intersection lines are divided into sections, where you can adjust the section
depth individually once the operation has been completed. The procedure for section
B-B is:
Basic functions
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
[Enter]
configuration
configuration
 Start the section definition. The following prompt is displayed: "Specify section
position”.
 Click on the starting point of the intersection line (1). The cursor moves the
movable end of the intersection line. Section symbols and a predefined section
extensions,
depth are visible.
extensions,
 Click on the first vertex in the path of the intersection line (2). One flow seg-
ment is finished. You can continue the intersection line.
 Define the remaining segment up to the end point by clicking (3/4).
 Press [Enter] (5). The definition is complete. The "Sections” dialogue box is
Adjustments,
displayed.
Adjustments,
 Define additional sections or close the dialogue. The last defined section (6) is
displayed as the selected object. You can correct the section depth.
Editing the intersection line and section depth

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
361
Introduction

r!
You can alter the width of the intersection
line and the section depth dynamically. To
do this, select the intersection line by

clicking . The symbols on the segments
and at the end are used for processing.
With the "Adjust width” function you can
stretch or compress the intersection line. The "Adjust length” function determines the
section depth for the current segment.
Reversing the view direction

To rotate the viewing direction of
a section:
 Select the intersection line
by clicking .
 Click . The context menu
is displayed.
 Select "Mirror section". The
section symbol has been re-
versed and shows the new
viewing direction.
Basic functions
Properties of the section symbols
You can edit the

properties of the
section symbols. To
do this, call an
intersection line by
double clicking . In
the section object

dialogue you can
modify the size by a
scaling factor (1).
You choose the
(1) (2) symbols in
"Line" (2).
Index
362
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.2.2 Managing sections

To manage the part drawings, use the functions in the
context menu. To do this, click on the entry in the list.
Menu item Function

Zoom Displays the contents of the section magnified on the screen.
Properties Opens the "Schnitt" (Section) dialogue. You can edit the name and
description.
Delete Removes the section from the list and the model
Export Exports the contents of the section as DWG, DXF, 3DS, or CFI.
Print Starts the print function for the section
To Creates a new presentation (see 3.3.2.3, page 27), which only
presentation displays the contents of the section and which can be used as a work
list area.
New Starts the algorithm to generate a new section.
Basic functions
16.3 Working with print layouts
16.3.1 Creating a new print layout
The print layout is the work area where you can
combine the desired views (complete model views,
part drawings and sections) with layout elements
(frame, title field, legends, etc.). You create a print
configuration
layout from a presentation of the working model (1).
configuration
You can either work manually or use a wizard.
Scal e !:100
Edited
Chec ked
Status New office
b ildi floor
Ground
Modific ati on
Add new layout
Wizard: Plot Assembly

extensions,
extensions,
(3)
(1)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
(2)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
363
Introduction

r!
Manual: Creating a new print layout
Use this option if you want to compile the print layout yourself. DDS-CAD only asks
for the intended name (3), which you can enter freely. After confirming with OK the
work area is created and you are taken to the user interface. Then you develop the
layout.
Wizard: Creating a new print layout

In this case DDS-CAD first asks for the name of the print layout (3). After confirming
with OK an automatic routine is started, which queries these layout elements in
turn
1. Sheet
2. Title field/stamp
3. Desired view (full model, part drawing or section)
4. Drawing information (to fill out the title field)
After the routine has run through completely, it eds and you can continue to build
manually. DDS-CAD arranges the layouts (2) parallel to the working model.
Basic functions
16.3.2 The user interface in the print layout

The user interface in the print layout is the same for all application types. The toolbar
is reduced: The functions for changing perspective and the building model are
hidden, the "Assembly Model” working mode (2) is active. You can use the toolbox to
access the functions in the print layout. You can also activate the geometric functions
(3). Pressing (1) leaves the print layout and returns you directly to the working model.
(2)
(1) (3)
Chapter 19.2
Page 462
Insert model/part drawing/section

see 16.3.3, page 365
Insert layout elements
see 16.3.4, page 365
Complete title field

see 16.3.5, page 366
Index
364
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.3.3 Inserting a model/part drawing/section

The most important
elements in the layout
are the views of the
model (full storeys, part
drawings or sections).
The "Insert model/part
drawing/section"
function automatically
detects all of these
views, and allows their
installation with a
desired scale. You gain
access (when
constructing the plot
(1) layout) directly via the
(2) (3) toolbox or via the
"Insert" menu.
Basic functions
 Select "Model/part drawing/section". The dialogue box is displayed.
 Select the desired element (1). It is displayed in the preview.
 Define the size as a scale ratio or factor (2). The other value is automatically re-
calculated.
 Click Insert (3). The element can be used as a dynamic symbol.
configuration
configuration
16.3.4 Inserting sheets, title fields and legends
When using the wizard, the
querying and arrangement of
sheet and title field takes place
automatically. If you are
extensions,
building the layout manually,

extensions,
you should stick to this order,

because the title field is
automatically based on the
sheet. In any case, legends
must be placed manually. You
Adjustments,
gain access to the functions

Adjustments,
via the toolbox or via the

"Insert" menu.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
365
Introduction

r!
Sheets
(2) (1) You determine the size of the sheet by
selecting the item (1). Its settings are
transferred to Input "Length" and Input
“Width” (2). You can edit these values
manually and adjust the sheet size.
Title field/stamp
The product database (3) contains
several differently designed title fields for
different purposes (for information on
(4) (5) creating your own title fields, please refer
(3) to 23.7 page 584).
If you have previously used a sheet from
the DDS product database, the title field
is automatically assigned to the right or
left lower corner (4). With these settings,
the title field corrects its position
automatically when you change the
Basic functions
sheets afterwards. With "dynamic" you

place the title field manually.
The text in the title field are automatically transferred from the project, drawing and
revision data (see 16.3.5, page 366). By default, the information of the current model
is displayed. If necessary, you can retrieve the information of another model (5). To
do this, enter the ID of the desired drawing. You can find this number in the drawings
list.
Legends
Legends are generally viewed as an item and

placed as a dynamic symbol. In chapter 23.6
(page 581) you can how to create your own
legends.
16.3.5 Filling out the title field

The textual information in the title fields are retrieved from the dialogues for the
project, drawing and revision data. Whether or not a text block is transferred and
50
where it appears and in what form, depends on the design of the title field .
The construction of a title field is explained in Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Hiba! A könyvjelző nem
50
létezik. . This chapter only describes how to input information.

Index
366
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Access is gained via the
toolbox or via the "Project and

Model Information" menu.
Project data
This is where you can enter
global data – in other words,
information relating to all the
drawings in the project. These
include the project description,
project number and address,
for example. You can browse
through the dialogue using the
Back and Next (1) functions.
This takes you to the previous
and next text fields.
Drawing data
Basic functions
(1) Drawing data are specific
information that only affects the
current print layout. The
description of the drawing
content, scale ratio, editors and
data are typical examples. This
is also where you will find the
functions Back and Next (2)
to scroll through the dialogue.
Revision data
configuration
Use the revision data to
configuration
document changes. DDS-CAD
records a continuous list for
each model. To create a new
(2)
revision entry:
(1) (2)  Enter a name for the new revi-

extensions,
sion entry (1) and description

extensions,
(2).
(3)
 Click New (3). The "Revision"
 Check all details and click
Adjustments,
OK (4). The "Revision..." dia-

Adjustments,
logue box is closed. The new

entry is listed in the table. You
can subsequently Delete and
Change any revision entry.
(4)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
367
Introduction

r!
16.4 Printing a drawing and producing a pdf file
16.4.1 Calling the functions

The output functions for printing or exporting to a PDF file can be found in the
"File/print" menu on the toolbar. You can
• print the complete drawing (1) directly
• create the complete drawing as a PDF file (2)
• print a sub-region of the drawing (3)
The first PDF export (2) first shows a dialogue that shows all installed PDF printers.
Your choice is then the default setting for the following export operations. If you want
to change your selection later, press [Ctrl] and then call the "Print to PDF" function
from the toolbar again. The "Print" (1) and "Print selected region" (3) function open
the print preview. You can select the output device, determine the orientation of the
drawing to the page and specify the format and other settings. The region to be
printed is determined by two clicks :
Basic functions
(1) (2)
(3)
Index
368
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.5 Part list

16.5.1 Creating the part list
The part list includes all the visible parts of
the system, while "Calculate to BOQ" (1)
is active in the object dialogue. If you want
to create a part list of all storeys in the
building, first compile the building model
(1) (see 5.5, page 80). Materials are not
covered if the layer is hidden or the object
has been excluded from the analysis in
the part list.
When you call the "Export Bill of Quantity"

function, DDS-CAD creates an ASCII file
with the name of the model and the
extension *.BOQ. It is written to the project
folder and updated constantly.
Basic functions
Building model with system
Beis6001.BOQ.zip
extensions,
configuration
The "Parts list" dialogue

box shows the contents of
the BOQ file and allows
for different analyses:
(2) (3) (4) (5)
• Output with editor (2)
Adjustments,
• Output as report (3)

Adjustments,
• Export to AVA and

costing systems (4)
• Parts list comparison
(5)
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
369
Introduction

r!
16.5.2 Output as configured report
The part list can be used to output automatically and differently configured
evaluations. In this context, the term "report" is used. A report can be printed via the
default printer or exported to various file formats (e.g. Excel, HTML, XML or CSV).
Basic functions
 Click Button [Print]. A selection of reports is displayed.
Note
The following pages describe the contents of the respective reports.
 Select the desired report by double clicking . The report is created. The taskbar
at the bottom of the screen shows the button with the symbol:
 Click this button. The print preview is displayed. You can choose to printout on
the active default printer (1) or choose a format for data export (2):
(1)(2)
Index
370
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.5.2.2 Parts list sorted by product groups

You will receive an evaluation in which the materials used are broken down by
product groups.
BQ_Partslist.rpt
Basic functions
16.5.2.3 Part list by inclusion in rooms
You will receive an evaluation in which the materials used are broken according to
which room they are located in. To use this report it is necessary that you have
constructed the building model (see chapter 5). Objects with the "piece" unit of
quantity are counted according to the position of their insertion point in a room. For
configuration
objects with the metre (m) unit of quantity, the following rules apply:
configuration
Pipeline
Cable ladders, cable canals, conduits, pipes and ventilation ducts are counted toward
the room in which the start of the pipeline is located.
Cables and wires

extensions,
are counted toward the room in which the last electrical connection is located.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
371
Introduction

r!
For this part list by inclusion in rooms, you can choose between two different layouts.
BQ_Partslist by rooms.rpt
Basic functions
BQ_Partslist by rooms 6x.rpt

Index
372
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.5.2.4 Material allowances by rooms

There are two reports available to measure material allowances. In these reports,
materials used in the model are listed as target quantities, next to which there is a
blank space for the actual quantity. Workers at the construction site can enter the
actual amount used by hand. The materials allowance can also be created by
product groups or by inclusion in rooms:
BQ_Partslist for quantity survey.rpt
Basic functions
BQ_Partslist by rooms for quantity survey.rpt
Adjustments,
configuration
extensions,
16.5.2.5 Cable list as checklist

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
373
Introduction

r!
The cable list (in the form of a checklist) is designed to assist workers on the
construction site during execution of the installation work:
BQ_ELP_INS_Kabelliste.rpt
Basic functions
The report consists of a cover sheet with the project details as well as the lists of
lines to be installed.
Index
374
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
16.5.2.6 Output as a text file (to a text editor)

You can transfer the part list to
a text editor or a word
processor. This gives you the
opportunity to make changes to
the output. Notepad is set up as
the default text editor. Pressing
Options (3) takes you to this
setting and you can enter the

path for another application
(such as WINWORD.EXE).
(1) (2) (3)
By
adjusting a structural setting (2)
Basic functions
you can filter the part list in various
ways. Assessments of individual
material groups and layers are
possible (4). You can also sort the
part list in three levels according to
various criteria.
 Click Editor (2). The selected
program starts and opens the
part list as an editable docu-
ment.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
375
Introduction

r!
16.5.3 Absolute quantity vs. comparing two part lists
DDS-CAD can either display the quantities in a part list or compare two part lists to
each other. The decisive factor here is the status of "Compare with revision” (1).
If the check box is not checked,

the dialogue displays the
absolute quantity of the materials
used in the model. To enable a
comparison of two part lists, first
an appropriate comparison
template must be prepared. Use
Revision (2) for this purpose. You
can create as many comparison

(1) (2) templates as needed.
The comparison templates are managed in a separate dialogue box. Click Revision (2).
The "Compare Two Revisions” dialogue box is displayed:
Basic functions
New creates a new comparison template. The dialogue box for entering a name is
displayed. DDS-CAD saves the current part list along with the date and time. All
available comparison templates are listed in "Comparison the part list with this
revision). The comparison is always against the active revision.
You activate the comparison of

the selected template with the
current state by checking
"Compare with revision” (3). The
"Part list" now shows the
differences between the two
processing states. The sign "+"
(3) (4) or "-" (4) shows you whether the
amount has increased or
decreased.
Index
376
DDS-CAD 7.3
DDS-CAD 7.3
functions
377
Part III – Reference to the DDS basic
Reference to the DDS basic functions
Index
Index Adjustments,
Adjustments,extensions, configuration
extensions, configuration Basic functions Strategies for handling projects Introduction
Introduction
Erro General principles and tools

r!
17 General principles and tools
17.1 Coordinate system

Coordinate systems make up the
Y (1) mathematical basis of CAD
systems. In the case of DDS-CAD
Y‘
(2) this is a three-dimensional system,
X‘
Y where each object, each point and
each node is described by an X, Y
X X and Z coordinate.
At the same it is necessary to

distinguish between the fixed, global
(1) and several local systems (2).
Z The global coordinate system is set
Z‘ in stone. Its zero point is the
reference which the entire model is
Y‘ based on. On the other hand, a
X‘
Z local coordinate system is created
Basic functions
Y with each new fixed object at its

insertion point.
X
All angles and directions are related
to the mathematically positive
90° Y direction (counter-clockwise). A
variety of functions (e.g. for defining
areas and regions) is dependent on
180° 0° observing this drawing direction.
X
270°
Index
378
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
General principles and tools Erro
r!
17.2 Grid

A grid is a network of horizontal and vertical lines, whose points of intersection form
the grid points. When the grid is active, the grid points are visible on the screen and
can be used to arrange objects.
Basic functions
The location of the grid, its rotation and the distances between grid points are
variable. You can:
configuration
• enable/disable the grid (see 17.3.1, page 384)
configuration
• snap the grid to a point (see 17.2.1, page 380)
• define the distances between the grid points (see 17.2.2, page 381)
• rotate the grid/coordinate plane (see 17.2.3, page 382)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
379
Introduction

r!
17.2.1 Snapping the grid at a point
Example situation
You need a grid that is oriented to a corner of the room. The origin of the grid is
situated so that there is no grid point at the desired position. You need to align the
grid to a new reference point.
Basic functions
Application
 In the "Format" menu select "Grid settings” and the "Grid origo 1 point" function.
The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following prompt:
"Specify origin".
 Move the cursor to the point at which the grid is to be aligned. The point captures
the cursor and holds it tight. The coordinates are displayed.
 Click . The origin of the grid is located at the selected position. The function is
ended.
Index
380
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
17.2.2 Defining distances between the grid points

Example situation
You need a grid with defined distances between points. The current distances do not
work and must be corrected.
(2)
Basic functions
(1)
Application
 In the "Format" menu select "Grid settings” and select a predefined setting (1) or
the "Grid ?x?x?" function (2).
(1) The grid points immediately change their setting.
(2) The "Grid Settings" dialogue box is displayed. You can define the distances
in the X- and Y-directions.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
381
Introduction

r!
17.2.3 Rotating the grid and coordinate plane
The rotation of the grid may be necessary before or during the application of a
function.
Example I – Rotate before starting a function (e.g. room definition)

You have to develop the building model for a floor plan, consisting of several wings.
One or more wings are oblique. The tools for constructing the floor plan and for
closing contours are always based on the position of the coordinate system.
(1) The illustration shows a

room whose contour has
been closed as a
(1 (2 rectangle.
In the example on the

Right Wrong
left, the coordinate
system was rotated parallel to the oblique part of the building before starting the room
definition. The automatic contour (1) behaves identically. In the example on the right
this step was omitted. The right angle was created and the automatically drawn walls
(2) do not behave the same way as the building. The room geometry is wrong.
Basic functions
Example II – During the application of a symbol

You are moving a symbol at the cursor. It is to be fixed to a
diagonal wall at a certain distance to a reference point (e.g. a
room corner). To be able to enter the distance from the reference
point (see page 407) exactly, the coordinate system be aligned
with the diagonal wall.
Example III – During the application of a pipeline function

A pipeline (piping, ventilation duct, cable ladder,

etc.) is to be drawn parallel to a wall. This wall
includes a diagonal piece. At the break point it is
clear that the pipeline – due to the orthogonal mode
(see 19.1.4.2, page 440) – cannot be constructed in
the desired manner. The coordinate system must
therefore be adjusted for the distance along the
diagonal wall.
Index
382
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Application – rotating the coordinate system

You can rotate the coordinate system with the grid at any time or reset it to its initial
state. The application will be explained using the example III described above
(Application during a pipeline function). All other examples are performed in a similar
manner. The following description assumes that the pipeline has been led to the
position of the direction change (1) and fixed there by clicking :
Grid X-axis – 2 points
Reset grid
(1)
(2)
 Select "Grid X-axis – 2 points". If a function is (3)

active, the object disappears and the cursor
is displayed as a crosshair.
Basic functions
 Click the first end of the reference line (2).
The cursor moves a dynamic line (3). (4)
 Click the second end of the reference line
(4). The active function is continued with a ro-
tated coordinate system. You can execute the
desired drawing operation (5). (5)
 The "Reset grid" function activates the start-
ing position. You can continue working at right
angles (6).
configuration
(6)
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index configuration
extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
383
Introduction

r!
17.3 Snap options in the toolbox

Snap options help you when using dynamic functions (symbols,

pipeline functions and polylines). You can enable or disable snap
options at any time – for example when working with a symbol – by
simply clicking in the toolbox.
We describe the importance of the snap options and the effect

turning them on or off has.
17.3.1 Snap grid

A grid is a network of horizontal and vertical lines, whose points of
intersection form the grid points. If the grid is enabled, the grid
points are visible on the screen and can be used to arrange objects
(see 17.2, page 379).
"Snap to Grid” is OFF

The grid points are ignored and you can move the object freely. This method is useful
Basic functions
in all situations in which full movability on the workspace is necessary.
"Snap to Grid” is ON
If the cursor gets close to a grid point, it is caught and held. The
current position is displayed. This method is useful for example,
when editing circuit diagrams and schematics where the objects
have to be arranged uniformly.
Index
384
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
17.3.2 Snap areas

This option decides which reference plane to use. This
may be the general two-dimensional plane of the
coordinate system (1) or a drawn area in the model
(2).
In most cases, the option is enabled and disabled

(1) automatically, decided by the object used. Thus, a PV
(2) module automatically enables snap areas when called
and selects roof areas as the reference plane. A light
51
also uses the option, but is based on room areas .
None of the other objects use snap areas. However,

you can enable the option manually if, for example, an antenna system is to be
mounted on the roof.
"Surface Mode” is OFF

The two-dimensional plane between the X and Y axis (1) is used as the reference
plane. Areas belonging to the drawn objects (2) are ignored.
Basic functions
"Surface Mode” is ON
The two-dimensional plane between the X and Y axis (1) is ignored and the
reference plane is redefined by the current cursor position. The example shows a
pitched roof in plan view, on which there is a group of PV modules.
(3)
(4)
configuration
X
configuration
X
In the picture on the left the upper area has been activated. In the right-hand picture
extensions,
extensions,
it is the lower area. The active area is surrounded by a wide green line (3). The local
coordinate system of this surface is visualised by a black dot for its origin (4), a
narrow red line for the X-axis (5) and a narrow green line (6) for the Y-axis. Its
rotation depends on the active area. In the left-hand picture it is consistent with the
general two-dimensional plane. In the right-hand picture it is rotated 180° relative to
the two-dimensional plane.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
51
More information on using the lighting calculation (see 13.2.4, page 319) or on working with object groups (see 18.3.2,
page 430.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
385
Introduction

r!
If you select an object which is on an inclined area, it shows the
Y
orientation of the axes of its reference area.
The result of snap areas being enabled is a

coordinate system that matches the area and is
inclined like the area. This means that an object for
the roof installation automatically calculates the
correct installation height.
Basic functions
In the case of overlapping roof areas

(1) there is initially a problem. As long as
the cursor (in this example) is only
located on the flat roof, this area is
active and the mounting height is
adjusted to the surface of the flat roof
(left). However, as soon as the cursor
is pointing to the pitched roof, the
corresponding roof area is activated.
If an object should be placed on the

flat roof under the overhang of the

pitched roof, you can either disable or
enable the automatic change of the
installation level by an option in the
context menu.
Index
386
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
17.3.3 Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key

This option is only relevant for work with objects that are inserted
into the model as individual symbols and fixed on a line (e.g. a
wall).
In the starting situation, the symbol is located at the cursor with a

current orientation. In order to fix it to the line, press [Ctrl] and
move the symbol to the line. The symbol snaps to the line. The
setting defines its behaviour.
"Use Automatic Rotation” is OFF

The symbol captures the lines and maintains its current rotation.
Basic functions
"Use Automatic Rotation” is OFF
The symbol captures the lines and rotates so that it is at right
angles.
17.3.4 Snap points
configuration
The option monitor the geometry of objects. For the purposes of
configuration
this function, the ends and midpoints of lines and intersection points
between two lines are classed as a point. For example, the corners
of rooms and objects in this context should be regarded as
endpoints and intersection points.
"Use Snap Points” is OFF

extensions,
The points are ignored and you can move the object freely.
extensions,
"Use Snap Points” is ON

If the cursor gets close to a point, it is caught and held. The current
position is displayed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
In the case of a polyline, consider also that when the active line
meets an existing line, the perpendicular is taken. The position of
the intersection point is calculated so that the two lines meet at
right angles to each other.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
387
Introduction

r!
17.3.5 Snap object
The option monitors the logic within objects that have connection
possibilities for pipeline functions (e.g. electrical cables, pipes,
ventilation ducts). In this sense for example, electrical components,
sanitary facilities, ventilation units, and also the pipeline functions
themselves are all classed as objects.
"Use Smart Snap” is OFF

All connecting lines and start functions for pipeline are turned off.
"Use Smart Snap” is ON

The significance of the option can only be explained
by a specific example: In the "Sanitär/Heizung"
(Plumbing/heating ) application type a pipeline has
been started and led to a washbasin.
If the cursor gets close to the object, this snaps the cursor in. DDS-CAD checks the
existing connection points in the object and – if the object has multiple connection
Basic functions
points – shows its properties in a list. You can select the desired connection from the
list and start the pipeline at this location.
Index
388
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
17.4 Views and perspectives

17.4.1 Enabling/disabling views
You can view a three dimensional
model from different perspectives. With
52
the exception of the "Render" view,
you activate everything through
functions in the toolbar or the "View"
menu. This amounts to a switch that
you enable or disable. You can edit the
model in all views (except for
53
"Render") .
Plan view Isometry
Basic functions
Camera
Reverse Front view
extensions,
configuration
Side view (from) left Side view (from) right
Render
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Note
In order to better be able to illustrate the contents of a view, the examples of the
front and side views, the back and the renderings are shown without hidden lines.
In fact, however, all views appear as a transparent model (cf. isometric).
52
You enable to "Render" view by calling the corresponding working mode (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található.,
page Hiba! A könyvjelző nem létezik.).
53
Objects, select, delete, move, edit etc.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
389
Introduction

r!
By switching between the views, the representation of all symbols changes between
a 2D and a 3D version. The 2D version is active in the plan view and use graphical
symbols to represent the objects. On the other hand, the various views of the 3D
views show all objects as solid bodies. With regard to navigation in a view, we have
to distinguish between three groups:
• Plan view, front and side view, isometric (see 17.4.2, page 390)
• Camera (see 17.4.3, page 391)
• Render (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Error!
Bookmark not defined.)
17.4.2 Navigation in plan view, front/side view, isometric

17.4.2.1 Enlarge/reduce image (zoom)
The image can be zoomed in or out through different keyboard

(1 shortcuts or by using the scroll wheel on your mouse (1).
Basic functions
Zooming with the mouse (always works – even when a function is active)
Function/shortcut Description
 (Scroll up) Enlarge image (Zoom into the picture). Cursor
determines the focus
 (Scroll down) Reduce image (Zoom out from the picture)
Cursor determines the direction of movement of the
image.
Click, hold and move mouse: Zoom in – select section. The cursor turns into a
magnifying glass. You can drag a window to
determine the screen content.
Click and release Shrink image by 50%.

Double click Zoom all. The representation is optimised so that the
entire model is displayed on the screen.
Zooming with keyboard shortcuts (does not work with active functions)
[Ctrl]+ [PgUp] Reduce image (Zoom out from the picture)
[Ctrl]+ [PgDn] Enlarge image (Zoom into the picture)
[Ctrl]+ [Home] Zoom all
[Ctrl]+ [End] Limit zoom
[Shift]+[W] Zoom window. The cursor turns into a magnifying
glass. You can click, hold and drag a window over
the desired screen content.
Index
390
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
17.4.2.2 Slide image (Pan)

Use the mouse scroll wheel (1) to slide the image. By using
(1 keyboard shortcuts you can move the window over the image
(movement from point of view of the observer).
Panning with the mouse (always works – even when a function is active)
Click, hold and move mouse: Slide image. The cursor turns into a hand. You can
move the image over the screen like a sheet of paper.
Panning with keyboard shortcuts (does not work with active functions)
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[] The observer moves over the image in small
Basic functions
increments in the specified direction
[Ctrl]+[]/[]/[]/[] The observer moves over the image in large
increments in the specified direction
17.4.3 Navigation in the "camera" view

54
When you call the view, DDS-CAD switches to a central perspective . The focus (2)
is automatically directed to the currently selected objects. They are visible at the
centre of the screen (image on the right):
configuration
configuration
(1)
(3)
extensions,
(2)
Adjustments,extensions,
For navigation, you can correct the viewpoint (1), change the distance to the focus (3)
Adjustments,
and choose a different focus (2).
54
Another name is "vanishing point perspective". You perceive the model in a realistically distorted form, in which parallel
planes intersect behind the model in a common vanishing line.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
391
Introduction

r!
Correcting the viewpoint
 Click the scroll wheel and hold it down (without scrolling). The mouse pointer
symbol changes. The crossed ellipses symbolise an orbit.
 Move the mouse. The model on the screen moves with the mouse. The distance
to the focus remains unchanged.
Changing the distance to the focus

 Rotate the scroll wheel. Depending on the direction you move the wheel, the
view axis is extended or shortened (3).
Selecting a different focus

 Select the object (1) you are inter-
(1) ested in by clicking . The context
menu is displayed.
 Select "Zoom Object(s)”. The se-
lected object is displayed in the
centre of the screen and forms the
focus of the 3D view.
Basic functions
17.5 Working with layers

17.5.1.1 Switch layer by clicking
 Select the "Find layers of lines in drawing and turn them off” function. The cursor
turns into a crosshair.
 Point to an element in the drawing whose layer you would like to hide. Number
and name of the layer are displayed as information.
 Click . The layer is hidden.
 Click . The context menu appears and lists all hidden layers. In this way you
can re-activate each layer.
Index
392
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
17.5.1.2 Switch layer in a list

Work with layer structures allows the production of different views and content. DDS-
CAD uses its own layer structure that is generated automatically. All modules and
objects are managed on separate layers.
Layer Display
To call, select the "Layer

(1) Display” function in the
toolbar. The "Layer" dialogue
box is displayed. You can
change the setting for the
switchable properties (1) and
save different configurations
in each case as a set.
Basic functions
(2)
Switching the property of a single layer:

 Click on the symbol of the property for that layer. The property is switched to
the respective different state.
configuration
Switching the property of multiple layers simultaneously:
configuration
 Select the relevant layers. To do this, hold [Ctrl] or [Shift] and select the lay-
ers by clicking .
 Click on the property of the selected layer. A context menu is displayed. You
can set or invert the setting for all selected layers.
extensions,
Saving the configuration as a set

extensions,
In the event that you need to frequently switch between multiple configurations of
layers switched on and off, you can save time by storing each configuration as a set
(2).
 Create the desired layer configuration.
Adjustments,
 Click in "Layer setup” and enter a name.

Adjustments,
 Click Save . The layer configuration has been saved. You can call it again at any
time.
Switchable properties
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
393
Introduction

r!
Switchable setting Contents
On Turns the layer visible or invisible. Hidden layers are

exported (as opposed to frozen layers) with the
... Layer is visible
formats DWG, DXF and CFI. They can be made
... Layer is invisible visible again by the recipient of the file. However, the
content of hidden layers is not included in the part
list.
Freeze Frozen layers are invisible. They are not transferred
to DXF, DWG, CFI or to the part list.
... Layer is not frozen
... Layer is frozen
Lock Lock a layer to protect against accidental changes.
Objects on locked layers are displayed, but they can
... Layer is open
not be selected or moved. New objects can still be
... Layer is locked placed on this layer.
Print Specify whether a layer is allowed to be printed or
not.
... Layer is printed
... Layer is not printed
Layer pen Each component group has a default setting for the
pen and thus for the line width in the printout.
... Layer uses default pen
Basic functions
You can choose: If the objects of this layer are

... Layer uses its own pen printed with their defaults or if the entire layer uses a
single pen (same colour and line width for all
objects)?
The use of a pen for the layer requires that you
define its own pin beforehand ("Pen def.') column).
Pen def. You can assign a pen to the layer for the printout.
Click to get to the table for selecting the pen.
Index
394
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Objects – Building blocks of the model Erro
r!
18 Objects – Building blocks of the model

18.1 ((General properties))
18.1.1 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (ELP)
Symbolic representations of the objects are created in DDS-CAD from the relation
between several components. They are explained in the following graphic, using a
lamp as an example:
Object Display
Graphic icon
Icon text:
Free beaming fluorescent lamp
2x36 W
UV1.1
Basic functions
Distribution
board
UV01
Item
extensions,
configuration
Dimensions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The object uses an item that it takes from the product database. The item's data
record stipulates the symbol to be used, the technical parameters and – in the case
of lamps – the dimensions. The symbol is therefore a property of the item and the
item used is a property of the object.
After assigning the lamp to a circuit (by connecting a line) the information also flows
through the supplying distribution board and the circuit to the symbol.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
395
Introduction
Erro Objects – Building blocks of the model

r!
The text displayed at the symbol provide information that can come from several
sources:
• the position of the object

• the properties of the item
• connection to the supplying distribution board
Basic functions
If for example, you edit the name of the distribution board, this will automatically
result in the correction of the symbol label for the objects connected to that board.
The symbol text can be configured as needed and supplemented by additional
information (see 19.4.1, page 488):
Note
For more information on the role and functioning of the product databases and the
relationship between symbol and item, please refer to chapter 0, from page 532.
Index
396
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.1.2 Origin of symbolic representation of objects (plumbing

and heating)
Representation of an object can be made up of the graphical symbol and the symbol
text. Its content in turn is composed of the interaction of several components. The
principle is explained in the following graphic, using a radiator as an example:
Object Display
Graphic icon
Icon text:
Hygiene plan type 10 505/805
Calculated power: 236 W
kv lock shield valve: 1.5
kv radiator valve: 0.2
Building model
Basic functions
Pipe network calculation
Radiator calculation
Item
configuration
configuration
extensions,
The object uses an item that it takes from the product database. The items' data
extensions,
record stipulates the symbol to use, its dimensions and the technical parameters of
the radiator. The graphical symbol is therefore a property of the item and the item
used is a property of the object.
The symbol text reflects information that can come from several sources. The
Adjustments,
example shows a combination of item information and calculation results, which were
Adjustments,
made on the basis of the building model. The contents of the symbol text are updated
immediately any time there is a change. The symbol text is configurable. You can
decide what information should be displayed or suppressed (see 19.4.1, page 488).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
397
Introduction

r!
18.1.3 The position of the object in the DDS model
Objects are inserted into the DDS model through a variety of drawing operations.
Each individual object is assigned X, Y and Z position and is visualised by a symbol.
At this point it is necessary to explain this concept in detail. To do this, consider the
DDS model initially as a fixed room in which a movable object is to be placed at a
defined position.
Each room can be mapped in a three-dimensional coordinate system. Its origin is

called the zero point, or the Origo. Each point of the room can be written as an X, Y
and Z coordinate, thereby essentially expressing the distance of the point in the room
to the zero point of the coordinate system.
Y
Y‘
X‘
Y
X X
Basic functions
Z
Z‘
Y‘
X‘
Z Y
The object in the DDS model is visualised by a two-or three-dimensional symbol. As

such, it always has a defined extension, either in length and width (2D) or in length,
width and height (3D). At the same time, it is clear that the position data X/Y/Z (for
inserting the object in the room) can only relate to a single point on the object. This is
referred to a the object's insertion point.
The insertion point of the object can only be explained if we considers the object as a
multidimensional structure. This in turn is based on its own object-bound coordinate
system, which also has a zero point and creates the insertion of the object. Thus the
position data X/Y/Z designates the distance between the zero points of the fixed
room -bound coordinate system and that of the movable object-bound coordinate
system.
Index
398
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.1.4 Colour, layer and pen assignment of an object

The visual appearance of a symbol and its
behaviour are determined by the additional
attributes of layer, pen and material.
Default configurations ensure that the
attributes of all objects are already defined
in a manner that makes sense. However,
you can deviate from these settings by
changing the object.
Layer
A layer is a structure level in DDS-CAD, whose behaviour is configured by the layer
Basic functions
management (see 17.5, page 392). Each object is assigned to exactly one layer and
a group of other objects with common properties. The objects of a layer:
• are visible or invisible on the screen.
• are enabled or locked for editing.
• are shown or disabled in the printout.
• use their own pen or that of the layer.
Pen
The pen determines the colour, line type and line width of the object on the screen
and in the printout. The assignment of the pin to each object can be defined by
configuration
configuration
• the default configuration (lowest priority)
• selection in the individual object (disables default configuration)
• the layer's pen configuration layer (disables all other settings)
Material
The material determines the behaviour of the object in the rendered model (see
extensions,
Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Error! Bookmark not defined.).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
399
Introduction

r!
18.1.5 ((Links to external information))
All object dialogues contain the

"Hyperlink" tab, in which the individual
object can be linked to any number of
external documents.
Basic functions
 Call the object by double-clicking. The object

(1)  Switch to the "Hyperlink" (1) tab.
 Click once on the entry
<new line>. You are taken to editing mode
for the address (2).
(2)
 Enter the address (3) as a URL, as a path to
a file or to a folder.
 Press [Enter]. You are taken to editing
(3) mode for the description (4).

 Enter text that described the significance of
the hyperlink (5).
(4)  Press [Enter]. The hyperlink is completed

(6) and can be called by double clicking. In
the case of a URL, the page is opened in
your default browser. If you have you set the
(5) path to a single file, then the associated pro-
gram is launched and opens the document. If
you have you set the path to a folder, then
Windows Explorer shows its content.
(6)
Index
400
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.2 Working with objects (dynamic symbol)

18.2.1 Preliminary remarks
After calling a component, a geometric figure or some text, the
cursor moves a symbol of this object at its installation point. A
crosshair covers the entire screen.
As long as the cursor is moving the symbol, it is dynamic. If it has been fixed, it
receives its position data as X, Y and Z coordinates, which refer to the global
coordinate system (see 17.1, page 378). In addition, each symbol is given a
rotational angle to the Z axis when you insert it (1):
Y Z
Y Y
Z
X X
Basic functions
X
(1)
extensions,
configuration
You have many options to rotate and place the symbol in the model. You can access
the necessary functions via a context menu (click ) or a keyboard shortcut.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
401
Introduction

r!
The image shows the structure of the context menu with an active dynamic symbol.
Working with object-groups is excluded from the descriptions in this chapter, instead
please refer to chapter 18.3 (Page 417).
Working with object groups

see 18.3, page 417
Symbol at the cursor

see 18.2.2, page 403
Calibrate from cursor position

see 0, page 406
Basic functions
Calibrate from last point

see 18.2.4, page 411
Adjust installation height

see 18.3, page 417
Calibrating a symbol means inserting it into the model using dimensional data. This
procedure requires the presence of a starting point. DDS-CAD can use both the
current cursor position or the result of the last drawing operation for this purpose. The
two basic types of calibration are summarised in separate submenus.
The following sections provide an overview of each of the possible functions and then
describe the procedure. The subsequent editing of objects is described in chapter 1,
from page 505.
Index
402
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.2.2 Symbol at the cursor

18.2.2.1 Overview
This section describes the options and situations in which the symbol can be inserted
into the model by directly using the mouse and keyboard shortcuts.
Overview: Symbol at the cursor

Function/shortcut Example/comment Reference
Fix freely page 404
Fix at line page 404

[Ctrl]+ (1)
(2)
Basic functions
Fix at distance to the line page 405
[D]
[Ctrl]+[D]
Fix symbol at the point page 405
configuration
Scale symbol You can change the Help
configuration
[S] symbol size by scal-
ing.
Set rotate and scale to default Sets all scaling to a

values factor of "1" and all
[N] rotations to 0°.
extensions,
extensions,
Rotate symbol The symbol rotates

[Ctrl]+[Shift]+ (to the left) about the active step
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+ (to the right) angle.
Rotate about ZXY axis Help

[R]
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
403
Introduction

r!
18.2.2.2 Functions and examples
Fix symbol freely with

Example
You use a symbol (e.g. a room stamp) whose position does not have
to be determined precisely. It is only to be fixed at an appropriate
place.
Procedure
 Click on the desired position. The symbol has been fixed at the cursor position.
Fix symbol at line with [Ctrl]+

Example
Basic functions
You are using a symbol for wall mounting (e.g. an outlet or

(1) washbasin). The symbol is to be fixed precisely on the wall line.
(2)
Procedure
 If the symbol is to be oriented at right angles to the line during the

operation, select the option "Automatisches Drehen bei gedrück-
ter Strg-Taste" (Automatic rotation while holding the Ctrl key)
(see 17.3.3, page 387).
 Press [Ctrl] and move the cursor closer to the line. The line is
shown in orange and snaps the symbol. You can let it slide along
the line in order to fix it at the desired position.
 Click . The symbol is fixed.
Index
404
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Fix symbol at a distance to the line
Example
You are using a symbol for wall mounting (e.g. an outlet or

washbasin). The symbol is to be fixed with a defined distance to a
wall line.
Procedure
Adjusting the distance to the line

 Press [D]. A dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the distance.
 Enter the value in metres (m) and click OK .
Fixing the symbol at the set distance:

 Press [Ctrl] and move the cursor closer to the line. The line is shown in orange and
snaps the symbol. You can let it slide along the line in order to fix it at the desired posi-
tion.
Basic functions
 Press [Ctrl]+[D]. The symbol is fixed at the set distance.
Fixing the symbol to an existing fixed-point

Example
You are using a symbol that is to be mounted in the corner of a

room.
configuration
configuration
Procedure
 Enable snap points (see 17.3.4, page 387) or press [Shift].

 Move the cursor to the reference point. If the cursor gets close to an existing point, this
point snaps in the cursor and holds it.
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the reference point.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
405
Introduction

r!
18.2.3 Calibrating from cursor position
18.2.3.1 Overview
The current position of the cursor is the starting point of the operation. Therefore
first point the first cursor to a reference point. Then call the function:
Overview: Calibrating symbol from cursor position

Function/shortcut Example Reference
Horizontal/vertical page 407

[Shift]+ []/[]/[]/[]
Construct circle by cursor with radius prompt page 407

[Shift]+[G]
Basic functions
According to relative coordinates page 408

[Shift]+[8] -DX
-Dy
According to polar coordinates page 408

[Shift]+[9] a
L
Perpendicular to the vanishing line page 409

[Shift]+[L]
Move at right angles to the centre point page 409

[Shift]+[C]
Move relatively – distance with next 2 points page 410
(1
)
Index
406
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Overview: Calibrating symbol from cursor position
Centred and rotated to the next point page 410

[Shift]+[S]
Align at right-angles to two points page 411

[Shift]+[A]
Centred to the next point page 411

[Shift]+[X]
18.2.3.2 Examples
Basic functions
Calibrate symbol from cursor at right angles with [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]
Example
The symbol is to be mounted vertically or horizontally at a defined dis-

tance from a room corner.
Procedure
configuration
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the cursor.
configuration
 Press [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]. The "Move Relative from Cur-
sor Position” dialogue box appears. It is used to input the dis-
tance between the rGeference point and symbol.
 Enter the value in metres (m) without a preceding sign. A line shows the position that is
defined by the current input.
extensions,
 Click OK . The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.

extensions,
"Move a Given Distance along Line” with [Shift]+[G]

Example
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
The symbol is to be mounted on a diagonal wall with a defined distance

to a room corner.
Procedure

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
407
Introduction

r!
 Press [Shift]+[G]. A dialogue box is dis-
played where you can enter the radius.
 Enter the value in metres (m). The position of

the cursor is the centre point of the circle with
the set radius.
 Move the cursor to the intersection point between circle and wall line. The intersection
point captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the position of the intersection point.
Symbol from cursor according to relative coordinates with [Shift]+[8]

Example
The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to a room corner.

-DX The distances from the reference point are known as ΔX and ΔY. In this
-Dy way an indirect construction is possible using relative coordinates.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point.

Basic functions
 Press [Shift]+[8]. The "nach relativen oder po-

laren Koordinaten" (by relative or polar coordi-
nates) dialogue is displayed. This is used to input
the distances in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values. Note the effect on the preceding
+ or - sign. A line shows the position that is de-
fined by the current input.
 Click OK . The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.
Symbol from cursor according to polar coordinates with [Shift]+[9]

Example
The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to a room corner.

a The distances from the reference point are know as distance (A) and
A angle a (orientation).
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[9]. The "nach relativen oder polaren Koordinaten" (by relative or polar
Index
408
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
coordinates) dialogue is displayed. It is used to
input the distance and the angle.

 Enter the values. Observe the effect on the pre-
ceding + or - sign. A line shows the position that
is defined by the current input.
 Click OK . The symbol has been fixed at the
position indicated.
Symbol perpendicular to the vanishing line with [Shift]+[L]

Example
The position of the symbol is to be determined by the calculated inter-

(2) section point between the vanishing line (1) and the perpendicular from
the current cursor position to the vanishing line.
Procedure
 Move the cursor to the position from where the perpendicular is to fall on the vanishing
line.
Basic functions
 Press [Shift]+[L]. The symbol is temporarily fixed at the old cursor position and a mov-
able line leads from the symbol to the cursor. The message line shows the "Wählen Sie
die Fluchtlinie" (Select the vanishing line) prompt.
 Point to the desired vanishing line. The line is highlighted orange. From the symbol the
perpendicular will fall on the vanishing line. The intersection point indicates the position of
the symbol:
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.
Move symbol at right angles to the centre point with [Shift]+[C] configuration
configuration
Example
extensions,
extensions,
The position of the symbol is to be defined perpendicular to a line at a

defined distance from its centre point.
Adjustments,
Procedure
Adjustments,
 Enable snap points (see 17.3.4, page 387).

 Move the cursor to the centre point of the reference line. The point snaps in the cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[C]. The "Lotrechte" (Perpendicular distance) dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the desired distance in metres (m) and click Choose side . From the centre point of the
reference line, a helper line goes along the length entered.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
409
Introduction

r!
 Click on the desired side. The symbol has been fixed at the position indicated.
Move symbol relatively – distance with next 2 points

Example
The symbol is to be positioned starting from the current cursor position

so that the direction and distance are defined by a comparison section
(1 (1).
)
Procedure

 From the context menu, select the "Move Relative – Distance by Two Next Points” func-
tion. The symbol is temporarily fixed at the old cursor position. The message line shows
the "Select first point” prompt.
 Click on the first point of the comparison section. From the selected point a movable
line leads to the cursor.
Basic functions
 Click on the second point of the comparison section. The symbol has been shifted so
that distance and direction correspond to the comparison section.
Rotate and Place Centered between This and Next Point [Shift]+[S]
Example
The symbol is to be inserted centred between two points and rotated at

right angles to the section between the two points.
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[S]. From the selected point a movable line leads to the cursor.
 Click on the second reference point. The symbol has been rotated perpendicular to the
reference section and inserted centred.
Rotate in Proportion to This and Next Point [Shift]+[A]

Example
The symbol is to be rotated at right angles to a section between two

points, but not inserted into the drawing.
Index
410
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[A]. From the selected point a movable line leads to the cursor.
 Click on the second reference point. The symbol has been rotated perpendicular to the
reference section.
Place Centered between This and Next Point [Shift]+[X]

Example
The symbol is to be inserted between two points but not rotated.
Procedure

 Press [Shift]+[X]. From the selected point a movable line leads to the cursor.
Basic functions
 Click on the second reference point. The symbol has been inserted centred between
two points. It has retained its original rotation.
18.2.4 Calibrate from last point

When using the "Move Relative from Last Position” method, the current position of
the cursor is irrelevant. The coordinate input refers either to the zero point of the
configuration
global coordinate system or to a local coordinate system (see 17.1, page 378). In the
configuration
latter case, two different scenarios are possible:
1
2 5
4
3
extensions,
extensions,
Scenario 1 (left) – the most recent fixed object

You have selected an object and are moving it with the cursor as a dynamic symbol.
The symbol is to be inserted into the model repeatedly and successively, wherein the
distances from one object to the next are known. The last fixed object forms the
reference in each case (local coordinate system) and is the starting point for the
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
following operation.
Scenario 2 (right) – position of the copy template of an object

You have fixed several objects in the model. One of these objects is to be copied and
pasted at a certain distance from its copy template. The position of the copy template
forms the reference (local coordinate system) and is the starting point for the
following operation.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
411
Introduction

r!
18.2.4.2 Overview
Overview: Calibrate symbol from the last point

Vertical, horizontal Y‘ page 413

[]/[]/[]/[] X‘
Construct circle by cursor Y‘ page 413

with radius prompt
[G] X‘
According to relative Y‘ page 414

coordinates -DX
[8] -DY X‘
According to polar Y‘ page 414

Basic functions
coordinates a
[9] A X‘
According to absolute Y The function refers to the global co-

coordinates ordinate system. After calling the
[0] X function, the values for X, Y and Z
position are queried by a dialogue
and the symbol is fixed at this posi-
tion.
Index
412
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.2.4.3 Examples

Calibrate symbol from last point at right angles with []/[]/[]/[]
Example
Y‘ The is to be inserted at a specified distance either to the right, left, above

X‘
or below the zero point of the reference symbol.
Procedure
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The "Relativ zur aktuellen Position"

(Relative from position) dialogue box is displayed. It is used to
input the distance.
 Enter the value in metres (m) without a preceding + or - sign.
 Click OK or press [Enter]. The new symbol is fixed at the entered distance to the
reference symbol.
Basic functions
Note
You can form chains of individual objects through a consecutive execution of this operation.
The last distance input is saved and is applied as a suggestion for the next operation
Move a Given Distance along Line [G]

Example
Y‘ The reference symbol is located on a diagonal wall. The new symbol is

to be inserted at a defined distance and placed on the same wall.
X‘
configuration
configuration
Procedure
 Press [G]. A dialogue box is displayed

where you can enter the radius.
 Enter the value in metres (m).
extensions,

extensions,
Move the cursor to the intersection point between circle and wall line. The intersection
point captures the cursor and holds it tight.
 Click . The symbol has been fixed at the position of the intersection point.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
413
Introduction

r!
Symbol from last point according to relative coordinates with [8]

Example
Y‘ The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to the zero point of

-DX the local coordinate system. The distances are known as DX and DY.
-DY X‘
Procedure
 Press [8]. The "Relative Co-ordinates" dialogue

is displayed. This is used to separately input the
distances in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values. Note the effect on the preceding
+ or - sign. A line points to the position.
position indicated.
Polar Co-ordinates (Angle + Length) [9]

Basic functions
Example
Y‘ The symbol is to be mounted at a defined distance to the zero point of

a the local coordinate system. The distances are know as distance (A) and
A X‘ angle a (orientation).
Procedure
 Press [9]. The "Polar Co-ordinates (Angle +

Length” dialogue is displayed. It is used to input

the distance and the angle.
 Enter the values. Observe the effect on the pre-
ceding + or - sign. A line shows the position that is
defined by the current input.
position indicated.
Index
414
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.2.5 Adjust installation height

(1) (2) (3) While working with dynamic symbols is
may be necessary to change the
working height.
The mounting height of an object is

initially set in the object dialogue. You
first select an installation type (1). You
can then decide whether the mounting
height should be determined by
components of the building model (2) or
by a free input (3).
(4)
After confirming with OK the symbol
is displayed dynamically at the cursor.
The working height is displayed in the
status bar at the bottom of the screen
Z (4). The reference level for this display
is always the plane "0" in the global
Basic functions
coordinate system (see 17.1,
page 378).
Y
Z DZ
You can set the mounting height either as the difference (DZ) to the current working
height or as an absolute value (Z). If you input a difference the new mounting height
configuration
is calculated. The result can be positive or negative. If you input an absolute value
configuration
you specify the new mounting height directly as a positive or negative value.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
415
Introduction

r!
Change mounting height by a difference with [PgUp] / [PgDn]

Example
You are working with a symbol at the current working height of 2m. You want to change the
mounting height up or down by a difference to the current working height. The example shows
a change of 0.5m downwards.
Procedure
 Press [PgDn] for downwards movement. The "Relative from Last Position) dialogue
box is displayed.
 Enter the value for the height change without preceding + or - sign in metres (m) and
click OK . The working height has been recalculated by the program. The status bar at
the bottom of the screen shows the result of the operation and you can continue working.
Basic functions
Adjusting mounting height as an absolute value with [Home]

Example
You are working with a symbol at the current working height of 2.23m. You want to adjust the
mounting height to 1.5m.
Procedure
 Press [Home] for the new mounting height. The "Mounting height“ dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Enter the desired mounting height. The value can be positive or negative.
 Click OK . The working height has been changed to the specified value. The status
bar at the bottom of the screen shows the result of the operation and you can continue
working.
Index
416
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.3 Working with object groups

The object group simplifies design work whenever a larger quantity of an object is to
be arranged with equal distances between them in an area or along a line. We
distinguish between two functions: The object group (field) and the object group
(line). Typical applications include:
• Light boxes, skylights, etc.
• PV panels on roofs or free-standing installation
• Light poles along the roadside
• Bracket for lightning conductor
We have to differentiate between the group (1) and the individual object (2). The
object group defines the arrangement of each object, i.e. the number and spacing.
The single object can be deleted

independently of the other objects of
Basic functions
the same group and/or all of its
(1) properties (such as item, mounting
height, colour, etc.) can be edited
(2) separately too.
The starting point is the current object that is located at the cursor as a dynamic
symbol. To call the object group, proceed as follows:
configuration
You want to use an object (e.g. a lamp) in an object-group.
configuration
Procedure
 Start the desired function (e.g. fluorescent lamps). The product database is dis-
played and allows you to select an item.
 Select the desired item and click OK . You are taken to the component's object
extensions,
dialogue (for example: fluorescent lamps)

extensions,
 Set the properties of the object (e.g. mounting height and attributes) and click
OK . The symbol of the object is located at the cursor.
 Click . The context menu is displayed and offers two options for forming an ob-
ject group:
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
417
Introduction

r!
18.3.2 Inserting objects on a surface
18.3.2.1 Basic principles of the "Object group" function
Inserting on a surface means the multi-line symmetrical arrangement of objects on a

surface. Their behaviour – whether their expansion is fixed or variable – is defined by
the usage option applied (see 18.3.2.3, page 420).
The area (from the point of view

Area of the function) is in most cases
larger than is actually consumed
by the objects (left). It can also
be the same size (right), but
never smaller.
The function is based on a local

coordinate system, whose origin point forms the insertion point of the group in the
model. The objects are oriented towards this point.
The object group (area) is controlled

Basic functions
Quantity in the X by the interaction of three parameter

i pairs:
Quantity in the Y
i • Quantity X/Y,
dY • Starting point X/Y
• Distance dX/dY
Y
X dX
The starting point X/Y determines the

distance between the origin of the coordinate system and the first object of the group.
The distances between the objectsdX/dY are each the same size.
The group's
Quantity in the X
i
coordinate
Quantity in the X Quantity in the Y system does
i i not have to
Quantity in the Y match the
i
global
coordinate
system of the
whole model. It
dX can be rotated
or tilted
dY X
dX compared to the
Y X model.
dY Y
In this situation,
the respective X- and Y-parameters appear to be exchanged with each other and
must handled as such in the "Objekt-Gruppe (Feld)" (Object group (box)) dialogue.
Index
418
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

18.3.2.2 The "Object group" dialogue box
The "Object group" dialogue is where you specify the ratio between the parameter
pairs. Depending on the usage option (see 18.3.2.5 to 18.3.2.9) it appears at the start
or completion of the drawing operation. The dialogue comes in two variants, which
differ in the "Start point” (1) and "Distance” (2) parameters. The variant is
automatically determined by the object used and the significance of the parameters is
shown by an image (3) in the dialogue.
(3)
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
For most object types, the "Start point” (1) and "Distance” (2) parameters relate to the
mounting points of the objects (left picture). The dimensions (e.g. of strip lights) must
therefore be taken into account when entering the distances. When using PV
modules the "Start point” (1) and "Distance” (2) parameters relate to the physical
boundaries of the object and thus allow the dimensions to be arranged in sequence.
configuration
configuration
The other controls are the same for both types of dialogue box. Different
combinations of options for orientation and placement adjust the object group to the
respective usage context. They are predefined by the usage variant and can be
corrected later.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
419
Introduction

r!
18.3.2.3 Usage variants
There are three usage variants for using the object group (box). The selected variant
determines whether the size of the area is fixed or variable.
Select surface
The "Select surface” usage variant is connected to defined rooms or roof areas of the
building model as per chapter 5. It distributes the objects to the room or the roof area.
The cut of this are can be polygonal. It is invariable in size and contour and specified
by the room. The room boundary defines the limits of the object group. Position and
distances of the objects are variable.
Typical applications occur in the lighting

design (left) and in the arrangement of
PV modules (right). Both cases are
covered in 18.3.2.5 and 18.3.2.6 with an
Basic functions
example.
Define surface
The "Define surface” usage variant is not bound by any conditions. It distributes the
objects symmetrically over a defined area. Position and distances of the objects are
variable. The difference to "Select surface” is that the contour is only formed in the
course of the operation. You can choose a polygonal area (left) by precisely
specifying the sub-sections or a rectangle (right) by defining the diagonal:
Typical applications arise when designing

the lighting, if only one part of a room is to

be lit or there is no building model in
accordance with chapter 5. Designing then
takes place for example, on the basis of a
DWG file (see 18.3.2.7).
Dynamic insert
The "Dynamic insert” usage variant is not bound by any conditions. It defines an
object group as a dynamic symbol. You enter the number of objects, and all
distances. The area expansion is a result of the operation.
Typical applications arise when designing the lighting, if a group

of lamps is to be placed at predetermined intervals (see 18.3.2.9).
Index
420
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.3.2.4 Notes on the settings

As was mentioned in the previous section, the behaviour of the area (a) – whether
fixed or variable – is specified by the usage variants.
The behaviour of the objects on the

area however, is determined by the
active options for the orientation (1)
(1) and arrangement (2). The
combination of the two settings
(b) decides which parameter acts as the
input or the result of a calculation.
(a)
(d)
(c)
(2)
Basic functions
Orientation Meaning and application
Number The typical application is the "Dynamic insert” usage variant.
and All parameters are free to enter. The area (a) is the result of a calculation.
distance It is determined by the number of objects, their distances from each other
and to the starting point. There is no difference between free and centred
arrangement.
Number The number of objects is free to enter. The distances between the objects
are calculated. The objects are distributed evenly across the available area
in the desired quantity.
Typical applications include the "Select surface” and "Define surface”
usage variants.
configuration
Free arrangement Centred arrangement
configuration
The starting point is free to The position of the starting point is
enter. Thus, the object group calculated so that the object group is
can be positioned within the centred on the area. In this way, the
area as desired. distances between the objects are
twice as large as from the external
object to the edge of the area.
extensions,
Distance The distances between the objects is free to enter. The potential number of
extensions,
(dX and dY) objects is calculated as a function of the available area.

usage variants.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
can be positioned within the centred on the area.

area as desired.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
421
Introduction

r!
18.3.2.5 Example for the "Select surface” usage variant (Lighting)


You want to arrange a group of lamps symmetrically in a
room like so. The room is not rectangular, but this has no
effect on the application of the function.
Application
 Select the desired object (e.g. lamp), set its properties and start the usage vari-
ant. The cursor moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. The settings and
distances correspond to the last application.
Basic functions
 Move the cursor to the desired area. The area snaps the object group and the
group is adjusted to the contours of the area. Unnecessary objects are removed
from the group.
 Click . The group is fixed and the "Comp. group” dialogue box is displayed.
 Adjust the settings of the object group.
 Click OK . The cursor again moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. You
can continue to work or end the function with [ESC].
Index
422
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.3.2.6 Example for the "Select surface” usage variant (PV modules on the

roof)

You want to fill a roof area with the maximum possible
number of PV modules. The roof area has been defined
as the working level (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás
nem található., page Error! Bookmark not defined.).
The example assumes an unfavourable configuration, in
which previously a symmetrical arrangement of selected
objects was chosen.
Application
 Select the desired PV module, set its properties and start the usage variant. The
cursor moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. The settings and distances
correspond to the last application.
Basic functions
 Move the cursor to the desired roof area. The area is highlighted by a wide green
line. The object group adjusts to the contours of the area.
configuration
Click . The group is fixed. The "Object group (area)" dialogue box is displayed.
configuration
extensions,
(1)
extensions,
 Check "Place max” (1). The roof area is filled with the maximum possible
number of PV modules of the selected size.
 Click OK . The cursor again moves an object group as a dynamic symbol. You
Adjustments,
can continue to work or end the function with [ESC].

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
423
Introduction

r!
18.3.2.7 Example for the "Define surface” usage variant (Rectangle)

You want to arrange an object group in an area without being
bound to a room.
Application
ant. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Select first point in contour....
 Define the diagonal of the desired rectangle by clicking :
Basic functions
2
1
 Press [Enter]. The area is covered with a number of objects and the "Object-
Group (Area)” dialogue box is displayed. The settings and distances correspond
to the last application.
 Click OK . The object group in the model is displayed according to the new
settings and the dialogue closes. The function remains active and the message
line returns to the prompt: "Select first point in contour.... You can define another
contour or end the function with [ESC].

Index
424
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.3.2.8 Example for the "Define surface” usage variant (Polygon)

You want to arrange an object group in a free, polygonal
area without being bound to a room.
Application
ant. The cursor turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Select first point in contour....
 Define the first corner of the desired area by clicking . The cursor moves a dy-
namic line.
 Draw the area counter-clockwise (to make the use of auxiliary functions possi-
ble).
Basic functions
 Close the contour. To do this, use the auxiliary functions from the context menu
(see 19.1.7, page 457).
The area is covered with a number of objects
and the "Object-Group (Area)” dialogue box
is displayed. The settings and distances cor-
respond to the last application.
configuration
configuration
 Click OK . The object group in the model is displayed according to the new
settings and the dialogue closes. The function remains active and the message
line returns to the prompt: "Select first point in contour.... You can define another
extensions,
contour or end the function with [ESC].

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
425
Introduction

r!
18.3.2.9 Example of the "Dynamic insert” usage variant

You want to define an object group (e.g. a light box) and insert
it into the drawing as a dynamic symbol as often as required.
Application
ant. The "Object group (box)" dialogue box is displayed.
 Adjust the settings of the object group and click OK . The object group is dis-
played at the cursor as a dynamic symbol. You can fix it in the drawing as often
as required. [ESC] ends the function.
18.3.3 Multiple objects on one line

Basic functions
18.3.3.1 Basic principles of the "Object-Group (Line)” function
"Place Symmetrical on a Line” is the single-line, uniform arrangement of objects

along a certain length. Whether the length of the line is fixed or variable, is defined by
the usage variant applied.
The object group is based on a local coordinate

Numbe system, of which only the X axis is used. The
origin forms the insertion point of the group in the
model. The individual objects are oriented
X dX towards this point.
The three parameters number, starting point X and distance dX control the group.
The starting point determines the distance between the origin of the coordinate
system and the first object of the group. The distances between the objects are each
the same size.
In the "Object-Group (Line)” dialogue specify

how the parameters relate to each other.
Depending on the usage option it appears at
the start or completion of the drawing
operation. The significance of the various
settings is described in connection with the
usage variant applied (in the following
sections). There are two usage variants:
Index
426
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
18.3.3.2 "Define Line” usage variant

Use the "Define Line” usage variant to evenly distribute a
Fixed length
number of objects along a section of unknown length. You
1 define the length of the direction of the line by two clicks .
This cannot be changed by the settings in the "Object-
X dX
Group (Line)” dialogue box. The distances between the
objects can be fixed or calculated.
Application
 Select the desired object, set its properties in the object dialogue and confirm
with OK . The object is displayed at the cursor as a dynamic symbol.
 If necessary, adjust the desired rotation for the symbol (see 18.2.2, page 403).
Note
This step is necessary if the current position of the symbol at the cursor does
not match the planned location in the model:
Basic functions
 Select 'Set line "Define Line” usage variant from the context menu. The cursor
turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following prompt: "Select first
point of line”.
 Click on the position where the line is to begin. The cursor moves the movable
end of a line. The message line shows the "Select second point of line” prompt.

configuration
Click on the position where the line is to end. The objects are arranged along
configuration
the defined section and the "Object-Group (Line)” dialogue box is displayed. The
settings (starting point and distance) correspond to the last application.
 Correct the settings as required and click OK . The function remains active.
You can define another line or end the function with [ESC].
extensions,
extensions,
18.3.3.3 "Dynamic insert” usage variant
Use the "Dynamic insert” usage variant to use a number of

Calculated length
objects with defined spacing like a dynamic symbol. The
length of the line is variable. This is calculated by the
Adjustments,
1
settings in the "Object-Group (Line)” dialogue box.
Adjustments,
X dX
Application
 Select the desired object, set its properties in the object dialogue and confirm
with OK . The object is displayed at the cursor as a dynamic symbol.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
427
Introduction

r!
 Select the "Dynamic insert” usage variant from the context menu. The "Object-
Group (Line)” dialogue box is displayed.
 Adjust the settings of the object group and click OK . The object group is dis-
played at the cursor as a dynamic symbol. You can fix it in the drawing as often
as required. [ESC] ends the function.
18.3.3.4 Notes on the settings
As was mentioned in the previous section, the behaviour of the line length (a) –
whether fixed or variable – is specified by the usage variants.
The behaviour of the objects on the

line however, is determined by the
active options for the orientation (1)
(1) and arrangement (2). The
combination of the two settings
(b) decides which parameter acts as the
input or the result of a calculation.
(a)
(d)
(c)
Basic functions
(2)
"Define Line” usage variant

Number The typical application is the "Dynamic insert” usage variant.
and All parameters are free to enter. The length (a) is the result of a
distance
calculation. It is determined by the number of objects, their distances from

each other and to the starting point. There is no difference between free
and centred arrangement.
are calculated. The objects are distributed evenly across the available line
(dX and dY) objects is calculated as a function of the available line.
"Dynamic insert” usage variant

The "Dynamic insert” usage variant is not bound by any conditions. Enter the number
of objects, and all distances, the length of the line is thus a result of the inputs. Once
confirmed, the group is displayed as a dynamic symbol at the cursor, whose position
and orientation (rotation) are defined with the functions of the symbol application
(see 18.2, page 401).

Number All parameters are free to enter. There is no difference between free and
and centred arrangement. The typical application is the "Dynamic insert” usage
distance variant.
Index
428
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
are calculated. The objects are distributed evenly across the available line

can be positioned on the line as centred on the area. In this way, the
desired. distances between the objects are
twice as large as from the external
object to the edge of the area.
(dX and dY) objects is calculated as a function of the available area.
usage variants.
can be positioned within the centred on the area.
area as desired.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
429
Introduction

r!
18.3.4 Editing an object group
When editing an object group, you have to distinguish between the objects within the
group and the group as an independent object.
18.3.4.1 Editing objects within the object group
All operations for deleting, moving or editing properties can be applied to the objects
within the group (see 1, page 505).
Warning!
With the exception of the Undo function, a deleted object cannot be re-inserted
into the group. As such, you should only delete individual objects if all other
adjustments have already been completed.
For editing individual objects carry out the selection with the options described in
20.1, page 505. If on the other hand, you want to edit ALL objects in a group there is
a simplified procedure for selecting them:
 Select an object from the group. The selected object is shown
Basic functions
dark, all are displayed light blue.

 Select the "Select all objects” function. All objects are dis-
played in dark blue.
 Perform the desired editing operation (see 1, page 505)
18.3.4.2 Editing the group as an independent object
If you want to edit the group as an independent object, you first need to select it in
the following way:
 Select an object from the group.
The selected object is shown dark, all others are displayed
light blue.
 Select the "Select Group” function. All objects are displayed in
dark blue.
 Perform the editing operation (see 1, page 505).
Index
430
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Drawing and labelling Erro
r!
19 Drawing and labelling

This chapter describes working with neutral geometric figures and auxiliary
geometries.
WM: Geometric functions
Neutral geometric features are found in the "Use Line Drawing

Tools” working mode. You can choose between free lines and
asymmetric polygons on the one hand and symmetrical shapes
(e.g. circles, rectangles, pyramids) on the other.
A common feature of all functions is the primary dynamic

application. That is, the shape is primarily created by means of
mouse clicks . In this way, you first define points that determine
the position of the shape and its size. For example, after calling the
function a circle requires two clicks : The first determines the
centre of the circle, the second determines the radius. In case of a
Basic functions
three-dimensional shape, DDS-CAD asks for the height.
You can then

handle the object
like a symbol. You
(1 can copy it, move
(2 it or edit its
properties.
Depending on the
type of the object
or the parameters,
configuration
you edit a value
configuration
numerically in the
object dialogue or
Move circle Adjust radius
dynamically with
the mouse. extensions,
extensions,
Auxiliary geometries are used to support a drawing operation. With them you can, for
example, form helper line and intersection points, which will assist you in the
arrangement of other objects. Auxiliary geometries are only displayed on the screen
Adjustments,
and never in the printout (see 19.3, page 479).

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
431
Introduction
Erro Drawing and labelling

r!
19.1 Polylines and asymmetric polygons

19.1.1 Common features of the functions

DDS-CAD contains several functions for creating polylines and two-
and three-dimensional irregular polygons. All functions are thus
characterised by the fact that during the operation, a user-defined
contour is created. All functions are very similar in their application.
The specific properties are explained in the following sections.
The result is always an object that consists of

nodes and segments.
Nodes
Basic functions
Nodes determine the position of the vertices, i.e. the

geometric shape of the polyline. Its position is defined by
X, Y and Z coordinates. Nodes can subsequently
be moved or deleted. Additional nodes are
inserted by editing the segment. When an
object is selected, is displayed as a black solid square .
Segment
A segment is defined as the connections between the nodes. The centre point of a
segment is used as the reference for subsequent editing. When a polyline is
selected, it is displayed as an open square . Using the segment, new nodes can
be inserted in the polyline. A segment can be shifted in parallel, and deleted in the
case of a polyline. The polyline is disconnected.
The application of all functions follows a general procedure:
After calling the function, DDS-CAD

Start function expects the definition of a starting
Chapter 19.1.3
Page 435 point. There are a variety of ways to
achieve this. The cursor then moves
Define starting point a dynamic line that you use to draw
or construct the polyline.
Chapter 19.1.4 to
19.1.6 from page 439
Draw or construct Depending on the function and
polyline situation, you can end the polyline
freely, or close the drawn contour
Chapter 19.1.7 automatically.
End polyline Page 457
Index
432
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.2 Overview of the functions

19.1.2.1 Polyline (as a solid line and dashed line)
In the polyline the nodes are

directly connected by
straight lines. Regardless of
Polyline
its specific geometric shape,
it is always an open polyline.
That is, it cannot be
considered either as an area
Dashed polyline nor a solid body. A crosshatch is
therefore not possible and the polyline is hidden in the rendered
model.
The polyline is the technological basis for pipeline functions, such

as pipes, gutters, ventilation ducts and lightning conductors.
19.1.2.2 Spline (polygonal line)
The visible line of the spline
Basic functions
passes through the nodes
which are support points for
Spline an interpolation. The nodes
are thus connected with
each other by curves.
A spline – like the polyline – is an open polyline (without the

possibility of hatching and rendering).
configuration
configuration
19.1.2.3 Rounded polyline
The rounded polyline runs

between the nodes. The
node connection forms an
extensions,
invisible helper line.

extensions,
Rounded polyline
A circle with computed radius is tangentially applied between the

Adjustments,
segments, which are connected by a single node. A rounded

Adjustments,
polyline – like the polyline itself – is an open polyline (without the

possibility of hatching and rendering).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
433
Introduction

r!
19.1.2.4 Polypolyline
The polypolyline is an open

polyline, whose route may
include all three previously
described types. To switch
to another type, open the
context menu (click ):
Polypolyline
19.1.2.5 Polygon/crosshatch
The polygon is a closed line, which

always forms an area. It can be
Basic functions
detected by the "Surface Mode” option,

can be filled by a crosshatch and is
also visible in the rendered model.
Irregular polygon
The polygon is the basis for area

definitions, such as roofs and heating circuits. A change in height is
not possible while drawing.
Crosshatc
19.1.2.6 3D polygon
The 3D polygon is a closed polyline, which is converted into a solid

body after it is completed. Upon completion of the function, DDS-
CAD asks for the desired height and the solid body is displayed in
the rendered model:
3D polygon
Index
434
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.2.7 Revision cloud

The revision cloud is a polyline of semi-circles strung together,
which is used as a label. The radius of the semi-circle can be set by
the object dialogue.
Revision cloud
19.1.3 Defining the starting point of the polyline

19.1.3.1 Preliminary remarks and overview
Basic functions
After calling the function, DDS-CAD expects the starting point
(1) . It is the first node at the start of the polyline, only after
subsequent operations (1) is a visible result created in the
model.
Overview: Define starting point

Description Variant Example Reference
configuration
configuration
In the cursor position Define freely Segment 19.1.3.2,
You can determine the page 436
start point of the poly-
line by clicking . The
position of the start
point and cursor
Define on existing
extensions,
match
point
extensions,
Continue polyline Segment 19.1.3.3,

You can continue an page 437
Adjustments,
existing polyline.
Adjustments,
Construct starting point Shifted verti- Segment 19.1.3.4,

A construction of the cally/horizontally page 437
starting point is nec- from the cursor
essary if its position
cannot be displayed
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
435
Introduction

r!
exactly by the cursor .
In this case, select a Shifted in the X-
reference point (e.g. a and Y-direction -DX
room corner) as the from the cursor -Dy

starting point for the
operation.
Shifted with
length and direc- a
tion from the cur- L
sor
19.1.3.2 Define starting point in cursor position
Define freely
Example
You want to start a polyline or a polygon at a suitable location. The

position of the starting point does not therefore have to determined
exactly.
Basic functions
Procedure
 Move the cursor to the desired position and click . The cursor moves a dynamic line.
You can execute the next operation.
Define on existing point

Example
You want to start the polyline at an existing point (e.g. at a room

corner).
Procedure
 Enable snap points (see 17.3.4, page 387) or press [Shift].

 Click . The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Index
436
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.3.3 Continuing existing polylines

Continue existing polyline
Example
You can continue an existing polyline.
Procedure
 Enable snap objects (see 17.3.5, page 388).

 Move the cursor to the end of the existing polyline. The entire polyline is displayed as
a selected object. The cursor is snapped in by the end and identified by a blue circle.
The coordinates are displayed on the screen.
 Click . The cursor takes up the line and you can continue drawing. The result of the
operation is merged with the existing polyline and is regarded as one object.
Basic functions
19.1.3.4 Constructing the starting point
Construct starting point: Shifted vertically/horizontally from the cursor

Example
The starting point is to be constructed to the right, left, above or

below the cursor position . The distance is known.
configuration
configuration
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the

cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]. The "Collect Points”
extensions,
 Enter the length of the point shift in metres (m) without preceding + or - sign and click
extensions,
OK . The position of the starting point has been defined at the specified position.
The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
437
Introduction

r!
Construct starting point: Shifted in the X- and Y-direction from the cursor
Example
The distances from the reference point to the starting point are known
-DX as DX and DY. In this way an indirect construction is possible using rela-
-Dy tive coordinates.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in

the cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[8]. The "by relative or polar coor-
dinates" dialogue is displayed. This is used to
separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z
directions.
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m). Note the effect of the preceding + or -
Basic functions
sign. A line shows the reference point at the position of the starting point while main-
taining the current settings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen,
so that you can correct the input.
 Click OK . The position of the starting point has been defined at the specified posi-
tion. The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Construct starting point: Shifted with length and direction from the cursor
Example
The distances from the reference point to the starting point are known
a as length (L) and angle a (orientation). In this way an indirect construc-
L tion is possible using polar coordinates.
Procedure

the cursor.
dinates" dialogue is displayed. It is used to enter
the distance (length of the point shift) and the an-
gle (direction of the point shift).
 Enter the values. Observe the effect of the preceding + or - sign. A line shows the refer-
ence point at the position of the starting point while maintaining the current settings.
Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen.
 Click OK . The position of the starting point has been defined at the specified posi-
tion. The cursor moves a dynamic line. You can execute the next operation.
Index
438
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.4 Draw polyline freely

After determining the starting point, the cursor move a

dynamic line. During the free drawing operation, the position
of a node is defined by clicking . Each click fixes the line at
the cursor position . It is important to set the desired
position in the model quickly and accurately. There are
various auxiliary functions available for this purpose.
Overview: Draw polyline horizontally

Orthogonal mode Ortho mode ON/OFF segment 19.1.4.2,

page 440
Adjust ortho angle
Basic functions
Double/halve ortho angle
Snap functions Snap line at any angle Segment 19.1.4.3,

with [Ctrl] (1) page 441
(2)
Snap line at right an-

gles with "Use Snap (1)
Points” option enabled
(2)
configuration
configuration
Snap point with
[Shift] (1)
extensions,
Delete the last Delete last point with Segment 19.1.4.4,

extensions,
point or line [Backspace] page 442

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
439
Introduction

r!
19.1.4.2 Orthogonal mode (Ortho)
The orthogonal mode (Ortho) supports drawing at a defined

(1) angle. When Ortho is switched on, the end of the dynamic
line (1) does not move exactly with the cursor , but rather
always jumps by a defined Ortho angle (2). In this way, you
(2) can very easily create an angled polyline using the mouse.
However, the Ortho mode interferes with working with snap

features, because not every position can be reached. It must therefore be turned on
or off according to needs. In addition, the Ortho angle may be too large or too small
and must therefore be adjusted.
Orthogonal mode (Ortho)

Target Action
Ortho ON/OFF  Press [F9]. Each key press switches Ortho ON or

with [F9] OFF.

Basic functions
Enter Ortho angle Press [Ctrl]+F9]. A dialogue box is displayed where

[Ctrl]+[F9] you can enter the Ortho angle.
 Enter the desired Ortho angle and click OK . The
dynamic line jumps with a mouse movement by the in-
put angle.
Double Ortho angle  Press [*] on the numeric keypad. The Ortho angle
[*] (numeric keypad) has been doubled.
Halve Ortho angle  Press [/] on the numeric keypad. The Ortho angle
[/] (numeric keypad) has been halved.
Index
440
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.4.3 Snap functions

Snap line at any angle with [Ctrl]
Example
You are drawing a polyline (1) and want to fix a new node directly on
(1) an existing line (2). The angle at which both lines meet each other can
be entered freely and ≠90°.
(2)
Procedure
 Press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the existing line (2). [Ctrl]
(1) enables snap lines. The existing line (2) is highlighted in orange and
snaps in the cursor with the dynamic line. You can slide the cursor
(2)
along the marked line.
 Click . The node has been fixed at the position indicated. It is located precisely on the
existing line.
Snap line at right angles with "Use Snap Points” option enabled
Basic functions
Example
You are drawing a polyline (1) and want to fix a new node on an exist-
(1) ing line (2) so that both are at right angles to each other.
(2)
Procedure
 Enable the "Use Snap Points” option and move the cursor to the
existing line (2). DDS-CAD automatically calculates the correct
configuration
position of the intersection point. The calculated intersection point
configuration
captures the cursor and holds it tight. The position is shown.
 Click . The node has been fixed at the position indicated.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
441
Introduction

r!
Snap point with [Shift]

Example
You are drawing a polyline (1). The "Use Snap Points” option (see
(1) 17.3.4, page 387) is not active and for technical reasons should not be
switched on permanently. Nevertheless, you want to fix a new node
directly to an existing point (e.g. a room corner). Snap points should be
activated temporarily
Procedure
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the reference point. [Shift]
(1) enables snap points. The intended point is marked by an orange
circle (2). It captures the cursor with the dynamic line and snaps it
(2)
in.
 Click . The node has been fixed at the position of the reference point.
19.1.4.4 Deleting the last point or line

Basic functions
Delete last point or line with [Backspace]

Example
1 2 You have snapped or constructed the wrong point

while drawing. The polyline must be drawn differ-
ently from a particular node.
Do NOT end the function!
3 4 You can revert the polyline drawn up to now to an
earlier position:.
Procedure
 Press [Backspace].
Each key press releases the current node .
Index
442
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.5 Construct polyline horizontally

The horizontal construction occurs in parallel to the drawing

plane, without changing the working height (Z). Based on the
current node a segment is to lead to the new node . This
section describes the procedures for different scenarios.
Here, the relationship between current and new nodes /
and the cursor position are explained.
Overview: Draw polyline horizontally

Direct construction Vertical/horizontal with Segment 19.1.5,

Direct construction is []/[]/[]/[] page 443
possible if the section
from the current node
to the new node is
determined numerically.
Basic functions
The starting point is the Diagonally in the X and
Y directions with [8] DX 8
current node , the
-Dy
position of the cursor
plays no role.
Diagonally with length a

and direction with [9] 9
-a
L
Indirect construction Shifted verti- Segment
configuration
Indirect construction is cally/horizontally from 19.1.5.3,
configuration
necessary if the section the cursor with ? page 446
from the current node [Shift]+[]
to the new node is
not determined numeri-
cally. The position of Shifted in the X- and Y-
the new node is de- direction from the cur- -DX
fined indirectly by sor with ? -Dy
extensions,
means of a reference [Shift]+[8]

extensions,
point. The current posi-

tion of the cursor is Shifted with length and
the starting point of the direction from the cur- a
operation. sor with ? L
[Shift}+[9]
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
443
Introduction

r!
19.1.5.2 Direct construction
Vertical/horizontal with []/[]/[]/[]

Example
The draw direction to the new node runs vertically

or horizontally. The length of the section is known.
Procedure
 Press []/[]/[]/[]. The "Collect Points” dialogue

box appears. It is used to input the length of the seg-
ment.
 Enter the value without a preceding + or - sign.
 Click OK . The segment has been drawn in the specified direction. You can execute
the next operation.
Basic functions
Diagonally in the X and Y directions with [8]

Example
The distances from the operation's starting point to the new node
DX 8 are known as DX and DY. In this way, a direct construction is possible
-Dy using relative coordinates, where the preceding + or - signs define the
direction.
Procedure
 Press [8]. The "by relative or polar coordinates`

dialogue is displayed. This is used to separately

input the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m).
Note the effect of the preceding + or - sign. The
segment is displayed in the drawing and shows
the effect of the current settings.
the next operation.
Index
444
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Diagonal with length and direction with [9]
Example
a The distances from the operation's starting point to the new node
9 are known as length (L) and angle a (orientation). In this way an direct
-a
L construction is possible using polar coordinates.
Procedure
 Press [9]. The "by relative or polar coordinates`

dialogue is displayed. It is used to enter the dis-
tance (length of the segment) and the angle (di-
rection of the segment).
 Enter the values. Depending on the direction of
rotation, a negative value is also possible for the
angle. The segment is displayed in the drawing
and shows the effect of the current settings. Each
additional change is immediately visible on the
screen.
Basic functions
the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
445
Introduction

r!
19.1.5.3 Indirect construction
Vertical/horizontal with [Shift}+[]/[]/[]/[]

Example
The cursor points to an existing point that is to be considered as the

starting point of the operation. The new node is to be constructed to
? the right, left, above or below the cursor position . The distance is
known.
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The point snaps in the cur-

sor.
 Press [Shift]+[]/[]/[]/[]. The "Collect Points”
dialogue box appears. It is used to input the point shift.
 Enter the value in metres (m) without preceding + or - sign and click OK . The position
of the new node has been defined at the specified position. You can execute the next
operation.
Basic functions
Diagonally in the X and Y direction with [Shift}+[8]

Example
The cursor points to an existing point that is to be used as the starting

-DX point of the operation. The distances from the reference point to the
? -Dy new node are known as DX and DY.
Procedure

the cursor.
dinates` dialogue is displayed. This is used to
separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z
directions.
 Enter the values. Note the effect of the preceding + or - sign. A line points from the refer-
ence point to the position of the new node . Each change is immediately visible, so
that you can correct the input.
 Click OK . The new node has been fixed. A new segment connects it to the previ-
ously current node . You can execute the next operation.
Index
446
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Diagonally with length and direction with [Shift}+[9]
Example
The cursor points to an existing point that is to be used as the starting

a point of the operation. The distances from the reference point to the
? L new node are known as length (L) and angle a (orientation).
Procedure
 Point to the reference point. The cursor snaps to

the point.
dinates` dialogue is displayed. It is used to enter
the distance (length of the point shift) and the an-
gle (direction of the point shift).
 Enter the values. Note the effect of the preceding + or - sign. A line points from the refer-
ence point to the position of the new node . Each change is immediately visible, so
Basic functions
that you can correct the input.
 Click OK . The new node has been fixed. A new segment connects it to the previ-
ously current node . You can execute the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
447
Introduction

r!
19.1.6 Changes in height in the polyline
For the following descriptions, the three-dimensional coordinate system is used for
the visualisation. We therefore switch from the plan view (left) to the 3D view (right):
Y Z
(1)
(1) Y
X
(2) (2) X
The two-dimensional plane between X- and Y-axis (1) is used as the reference plane.
It corresponds to the height 0m. The viewpoint of the observer (2) is located in the
3rd quadrant slightly above the reference plane in all examples. Its view is directed
Basic functions
towards the 2nd quadrant between the now vertical Z axis and the horizontal Y-axis.
A change in direction (DZ) of the polyline in the positive or negative Z direction is

classed as a change in height for the purposes of this description. A positive DZ
leads to an upward movement (left), a negative DZ leads to a downward movement
(right image). If you look at the screen as the two-dimensional plane, an upward
movement comes out of the screen and a downwards movement goes into the
screen.
Z Z
Z (+DZ (-DZ)
Y Y
Z
X X
As a result of the operation the polyline runs on a different working height (Z), which
is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen:
The resulting working height (Z) is an absolute value, which may be either positive or
negative. The example shows a vertical downward movement (negative DZ), whose
target is below the reference plane (see 17.3.2, page 385). This leads to a
corresponding message in the status bar.
Index
448
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Z Y
X
Z
The change in working height is often necessary, for example when applying pipeline
functions. Typical examples are pipes, ventilation ducts, cable installation systems,
lightning conductors, etc. The same principles apply in all cases.
19.1.6.2 Notes on height and gradient – The "Point" function
One important way is working with height or height difference and the gradient angle.
Examples for the application can be found in the following sections: 19.1.6.4 and
19.1.6.5. At this point, basic instructions are given.
The function is called for the direct construction by [PgUp]/ [PgDn]. For indirect
construction use [Shift]+[PgUp]/ [PgDn]. In both cases, the "Collect Points”
Basic functions
dialogue box is displayed. When entering the different values DDS-CAD
automatically considers the inevitable geometric dependencies of these values to
each other. Changing a value automatically calls a recalculation of all other values.
configuration
configuration
Indirect construction will be used as an example. In this case, X- and Y-coordinates
are already fixed, as they are defined by the cursor position. Therefore, a single value
is sufficient to determine the new Z-coordinate. This can either be the desired height
difference (DZ), the absolute Z-position or the required gradient angle.
For the gradient angle please note:

extensions,
extensions,
If the original drawing direction (1) runs

Z
horizontally, i.e. parallel to the
D reference plane, Input ”Angle (draw
(1 dir.)” (Angle (drawing direction))
Z Y and Input "Angle (coordinate plane)"
a
Adjustments,
always have the same value.

Adjustments,
X
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
449
Introduction

r!
If the original drawing direction runs
Z vertically or diagonally, this results in
different values:
D Input ”Angle (draw dir.)” (a) is the
a Z
deviation from the original drawing
Z Y
b direction.
Input "Angle (coordinate plane)" (b) is
the angle between the new segment

X and the reference plane.
(1
19.1.6.3 Overview of the functions
Overview: Constructing a change in height

Description Variant Example (upwards Reference
movement)
Free drawing segment Hiba! A

An automatic change in height occurs if snap areas is enabled. hivatkozási
Basic functions
forrás nem
található., pa-
ge Error!
Bookmark not
defined.
Direct construction Height and gra- Z Seg-

Direct construction is dient angle: ment 19.1.6.4,
possible if the section [PgUp] a Z page 451
DZ Y
from the current node [PgDn]
to the new node is
X
determined numerically.
The starting point is the
current node , the Relative Z

position of the cursor coordinates
plays no role. [8] DZ DY Y
Polar Z
coordinates a
[9] Y
Indirect construction Height and gra- Z Seg-

Indirect construction is dient angle: ment 19.1.6.5,
necessary if the section [Shift]+[PgUp] a DZ page 454
Z Y
from the current node [Shift]+[PgDn]
to the new node is
X
not determined numeri-
Index
450
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
cally. The position of
the new node is de- Relative Z

fined indirectly by coordinates
[Shift]+[8] DZ
means of a reference Y
point. The current posi-
tion of the cursor is DY X
the starting point of the
operation.
Polar
coordinates
DZ
[Shift]+[9] Z Y
a X
19.1.6.4 Direct construction
Direct construction with height and gradient angle

Example
Z In this operation the current draw direction

is continued. The X- and Y-position of the
Basic functions
new node are calculated by the pro-
gram. For the jump from the current to
D the new node the target height (Z) or
Z Y
a the height difference (DZ) and the angle
for the rise (a) are known.
Procedure
configuration
 Press [PgUp] for an upwards movement and/or [PgDn] for a downwards movement.
configuration
The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears. This is used to separately input the point shift
in the X, Y and Z directions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
extensions,
extensions,
 Enter the values for the height jump. If the difference to the current working height is
known, select Input "Up" / "Down" (1) for the input. If you know the desired target height,
select "Absolute Z position" (2) in Input . The other value is automatically recalculated.
Adjustments,
 Enter the angle for the rise in Input ”Angle (draw dir.)” (Angle (draw direction)) (3).
Adjustments,
Input "Angle (coordinate plane)" automatically receives the same value.
 Click OK . The segment has been continued horizontally in the current draw direction.
The rise starts from the previously current node to the new working height in the de-
fined angle. The position of the new node has been calculated. The status bar (at the bot-
tom of the screen) shows the current working height. Carry out the next operation.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
451
Introduction

r!
When working with height and gradient angle, the draw direction of the last segment to the
current node is crucial. For more information on the "Collect Points” dialogue box, please refer
to 19.1.6.2, page 449.
Direct construction of a change in height with relative coordinates

Example
The distances from the current node to

Z
the new node are known as DX, DY
and DZ. In this way a direct construction is
possible using relative coordinates. The
Y angle for the rise is calculated automati-
D cally.
DY
The example shows a segment that has
been changed by a certain value in the Y
X direction and thus also the height Z.
Procedure
 Press [8]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. This is used to
Basic functions
separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m). Note the effect of the preceding + or -
sign. The segment is displayed in the drawing and shows the effect of the current set-
tings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen, so that you can cor-
rect the input.
 Click OK . The segment has been drawn in the specified direction.
The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current working height. Carry out
the next operation.
Index
452
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Direct construction of a change in height with polar coordinates
Example
For the X- and Y-position of new nodes

Z
the two-dimensional length (L) and the
Z D draw direction to the two-dimensional
plane must be known as the angle (a).
Y The height (Z) can either be defined as an
L absolute value or as the difference (DZ) to
the current working height.
The example shows a segment that
a X (viewed in the plan view) runs directly in
the positive Y direction. The angle a is
therefore =90°. The segment changes the
working height Z to a certain value.
Procedure
 Press [9]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. It is used to in-
put the distance (length of the segment), the angle (orientation of the segment) and the
height.
Basic functions
 Enter the values and observe the effect of the preceding + or - sign. You can define the
height as the difference to the current height ( Input "Relative Z-height") or you can de-
configuration
fine a target height ( Input "Absolute mounting height"). The other value is recalculated.
configuration
The segment is displayed in the drawing and shows the effect of the current settings.
Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen, so that you can correct the
input.
The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current working height. Execute
the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
453
Introduction

r!
19.1.6.5 Indirect construction
Indirect construction of a height change with height and gradient angle

Example
Z In this operation, X- and Y-position of the

new node are defined by the current
D cursor position. For the jump from the cur-
rent to the new node only the follow-
Y ing parameter is relevant:
Z a
• Target height (Z)
• Height difference (DZ)
• Angle for the rise (a)
X
The other values are calculated automati-
cally.
Procedure
 Move the cursor to the reference point. The point snaps in the cursor.
 Press [Shift]+[PgUp] for an upwards movement or [Shift]+[PgDn] for a downwards
Basic functions
movement. The "Collect Points” dialogue box appears. This is used to separately input
the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Enter the values. All other values depend on these and are calculated automatically.
 Click OK . The segment has been continued horizontally in the current draw direction.
The rise starts from the previously current node to the new working height in the de-
fined angle. The position of the new node has been calculated. The status bar (at the bot-
tom of the screen) shows the current working height. Carry out the next operation.
When working with height and gradient angle, the draw direction of the last segment to the
current node is crucial. For more information on the "Collect Points” dialogue box, please re-
fer to 19.1.6.2, page 449.
Index
454
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Indirect construction of a change in height with relative coordinates

Example
Z The distances from the reference point

to the new node are known as DX, DY
and DZ. In this way an indirect construc-
D tion is possible using relative coordinates.
Y The example shows the cursor at an
existing point. The new node is to be
constructed on this assumption in the dis-
tances DY and DZ. This results in the
X length and orientation of the segment.
DY
Procedure
 Press [Shift]+[8]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. This is
used to separately input the point shift in the X, Y and Z directions.
Basic functions
 Enter the values for each direction in metres (m). Observe the effect of the preceding + or
- sign. A line points from the reference point to the position of the new node while
maintaining the current settings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the
screen, so that you can correct the input.
 Click OK .
configuration
The position of the new node has been fixed and a new segment connects it to the
configuration
previously current node. The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current
working height. Execute the next operation.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
455
Introduction

r!
Indirect construction of a change in height with polar coordinates

Example
Starting point for the construction of the new

Z
D node is the current cursor position .
Z
For the X and Y position of the new node
the distance (A) and the drawing direction on
Y the two-dimensional plane must be known
A
as an angle (a).
The height (Z) can either be defined as an
absolute value or as the difference (DZ) to
A X
the cursor position .
Procedure
 Press [Shift]+[9]. The "by relative or polar coordinates` dialogue is displayed. It is used to
input the distance (length of the segment), the angle (orientation of the segment) and the
height.
Basic functions
 Enter the values and observe the effect of the preceding + or - sign. You can define the
height as the difference to the current height ( Input "Relative Z-height") or you can define
a target height ( Input "Absolute mounting height"). The other value is recalculated. A line
points from the reference point to the position of the new node while maintaining the
current settings. Each additional change is immediately visible on the screen, so that you
can correct the input.
The status bar (at the bottom of the screen) shows the current working height. Execute the
next operation.
Index
456
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.7 End polyline, close contour

There are several ways to end a polyline. To do
this, you can open the context menu by clicking
or select a shortcut.
Basic functions
Overview: End function, close contour
Function/shortcut Polyline result Polygon result
Ready The polyline ends at the current node . The function remains
active and you can start the next polyline.
[Enter]
configuration
configuration
Start Start
End at cursor position The polyline ends at the position of the cursor . The function
remains active and you can start the next polyline.
extensions,
[Shift]+[Enter]
extensions,
Start Start
Adjustments,
Close region The polyline is closed. The current node is connected to

Adjustments,
starting node . The function remains active and you can start
[H] the next polyline.
Start Start
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
457
Introduction

r!
Overview: End function, close contour
Function/shortcut Polyline result Polygon result
Close region with 90° an- The polyline is closed. A new node is constructed so that
gle there is a right angle between the last two segments. The func-
tion remains active and you can start the next polyline.
[E]
Start Start
Close region with two 90° The polyline is closed. A new node is constructed, so that
angles the segments between the current node and the start node
form two right angles. The function remains active and you can
start the next polyline.
Start Start
Basic functions
Close region at right angle The polyline is closed and a new node is constructed. Here,
to first line. the last segment is extended so that the new node is located
perpendicular above the starting point. The function remains
[V] active and you can start the next polyline.
Start Start
Abort/end/Beenden The polyline ends at the current node . The function is

ended.
[ESC]
Start Start
Index
458
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.1.8 Edit polyline

You can change the contours of polylines and polygons in a variety of ways. If an
object is selected, then the node is shown as a black solid square . An open square
is displayed on the centre points of the segments .
Move the cursor onto it, then the symbol turns green.
You receive a message about dynamic editing function
that you call by clicking .
On the other hand, if

you click the right
mouse button a
context menu is
displayed that offers
more editing options.
We shall introduce the functions and contrast the starting position and the result of
the operation.
Basic functions
19.1.8.1 Dynamic editing functions
Edit node
Function Example Procedure
Shift  Click on the node and release the

node mouse button. The cursor moves the ends of
the segments that are connected to each
other via the selected nodes.
 Click on the desired position. The contour
has been changed. The operation is
configuration
concluded.
configuration
Insert  Click on the centre point of the segment
node and release the mouse button. The segment
has been divided at its centre point. The cur-
sor moves the new node.
 Click on the desired position. The node
extensions,
has been fixed at the new position. You can

extensions,
fix additional nodes or end the function with

[ESC].
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
459
Introduction

r!
19.1.8.2 Editing functions in the context menu
Edit node
Function Example Explanation, procedure
Move node After calling the function, the cursor moves

the ends of the segments that are connected
to each other via the selected nodes.
 Click on the desired position. The
contour has been changed. The opera-
tion is concluded.
Position node After calling the func-

tion, a dialogue is dis-
played with the coor-
dinates of the node.
You can change the
values numerically.
Delete node After calling the function, the selected node

is removed and the remaining two adjacent
Basic functions
nodes are directly connected by a segment.
Move polyline After calling the function, the cursor moves

the entire object as a dynamic symbol. The
selected node is the reference point for re-
fixing.
Index
460
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Edit segment
Function Example Explanation
Insert After calling the function, the selected segment

node is divided at its centre point. The cursor moves
the new node.
 Click on the desired position. The node
has been fixed.
Delete line (1) After calling the function, the selected segment
segment is removed. There are two independent objects
(1) and (2).
(2)
Shift line After calling the function, the cursor moves the
segment in selected segment and enables a parallel shift.
parallel
Basic functions
Shift polyline After calling the function, the cursor moves the
in parallel entire polyline and enables a parallel shift.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
461
Introduction

r!
19.2 Symmetrical shapes

This chapter describes working with regular geometric shapes such

as circles, rectangles, squares, etc. After calling a function, you can
draw the position and size of the selected shape dynamically or by
numerical input of the parameters. To do this, open the context
menu (click ).
In the dynamic method you generate the shape by a series of mouse clicks . For
example, after calling the function a circle requires two clicks : The first determines
the centre of the circle, the second determines the radius. In case of a three-
Basic functions
dimensional shape, DDS-CAD asks for the height.
(1
(2
You can then handle the object like a symbol. You can copy it, move it or edit its
properties. Depending on the type of the object or the parameters, you edit a value
numerically in the object dialogue or dynamically with the mouse:
Move circle Adjust radius

Index
462
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.2.1 Circle

The function creates a circle by defining the centre point and radius
by clicking . You can then edit the shape.
Circle
Basic functions
Application
Adjust radius
configuration
configuration
(1
(2 Move circle
 Select the "Circle" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Click on the position of the centre point (1). The cursor moves a line, which
extensions,
symbolises the radius and the circle is visible. Its size is determined by the cur-
extensions,
sor.
 Fix the shape by clicking (2). The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
Adjustments,
If you have selected a circle, you can dynamically change the position and the radius
Adjustments,
of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.

Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
463
Introduction

r!
19.2.2 Arc
The function creates an arc by defining the points (by clicking )

• (1) Beginning of the arc.
• (2) Transition point.
Arc
• (3) End of the arc.
DDS-CAD calculates the radius of the circle, the angle of the
displayed sector (arc angle) and the opening direction of the bend
as a rotation of the shape about the Z axis.
(3)
(1
Basic functions
(2)
Application
(3
(1
(2
Stretch angle
Stretch radius
Move arc
 Select the "Arc" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Click on the position of the starting point (1). The cursor moves the end of a
dynamic line.
 Click on the position of the transition point (2). The cursor moves the end of
the arc. The cursor determines the rotation direction and the radius.
 Click on the position of the end point (3). The shape is prepared. The function
remains active.
Index
464
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
If you have selected an arc, you can dynamically change the position and the radius
of the shape as well as the positions of the transition and end point. To do this, click

on the handle on the object.
19.2.3 Cylinder
The function creates a cylinder. The geometry of the shape results
from the radius of the circle and the height. You define the centre
point of the circle and its radius by clicking . The height is queried
during the operation.
Cylinder

configuration
Application
Adjust radius
(1
extensions,
(2
extensions,
Move cylinder
 Select "Cylinder". The cursor turns into a crosshair.

symbolises the radius and the circle is visible. Its size is determined by the cur-
Adjustments,
sor.
Adjustments,
 Fix the radius by clicking (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.

 Enter the height and click OK . The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected a cylinder, you can dynamically change the position and the
radius of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
465
Introduction

r!
19.2.4 Cone (cone/truncated cone)
The function generates a cone or a truncated cone. Base and top

surface form concentric circles. The geometry of the shape results
from the radii of the circles and the height.
Cone You define the centre point of the two circles and their radii by
clicking . The height is queried during the operation.
Basic functions
Application
(1
(2 (3
Adjust radius
Move cone
 Select the "Cone" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). The cursor moves a
line, which symbolises the radius. The circle of the base is visible, its size is de-
termined by the cursor.
 Fix the radius by clicking (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
 Enter the height and click OK . The cursor determines the size of the top (3).
Index
466
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
active.

If you have selected a cone, you can dynamically change the position of the shape
as well as the radii of the base and top surface. To do this, click on the handle on the
object.
19.2.5 Rectangle
The function creates a rectangle by defining the starting point (1)
and end point (2) of the diagonals (in each case by clicking ).
DDS-CAD transfers the length and width dimensions to the shape's
object dialogue.
Rectangle
Basic functions
(1
(2)
Application
extensions,
configuration
(1
(2
Adjustments,
Shift seg-
Adjustments,
ment
Move corner
Move rectangle
 Select the "Rectangle" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

dynamic line.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
467
Introduction

r!
 Click on the position of the end point (2). The shape is prepared. The function
remains active.
If you have selected a rectangle, you can dynamically change the position of the
entire shape. You change the size by moving the vertices and line segments. To do
this, click on the handle on the object.
19.2.6 Cuboid
The function creates a cuboid. You define the diagonal of a
rectangle (as base), the height is requested during the operation.
Cuboid
Basic functions
(1
(2)
Application
(1
(2
Shift seg-
ment
Move corner
Move rectangle
Index
468
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Select the "Cuboid" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

dynamic line.
 Click on the position of the end point (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
active.
If you have selected a cuboid, you can dynamically change the position of the entire
shape. You change the size by moving the vertices and line segments. To do this,
click on the handle on the object.
19.2.7 Regular polygon

The function creates an equilateral polygon. The vertices are at
equal distances on a circle. The geometry of the shape results from
the radius of the circle and the number of sides.
Basic functions
You define the centre point of the circle and its radius by clicking .
You correct the number of sides by subsequent editing of the
Regular object.
polygon
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
469
Introduction

r!
Application
(1 (2
Adjust radius
Move polygon
 Select "Regular polygon". The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). An equilateral triangle is
displayed. Size and rotation are determined by the cursor (2).
active.
If you have selected a regular polygon, you can dynamically change the position and
the radius of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Basic functions
19.2.8 Pyramid
The function creates an equilateral pyramid with polygonal base.
The vertices are at equal distances on a circle. The geometry of the
shape results from the radius of the circle, the number of sides and
the height.
Pyramid The height is queried during the operation. You can correct the
number of sides by subsequently editing the object.
Index
470
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Application
(1 (2
Adjust radius
Basic functions
Move pyramid
 Select the "Pyramid” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). A three-sided pyramid is
 Fix the shape by clicking (2). DDS-CAD queries the height.
configuration
configuration
active.
If you have selected a pyramid, you can dynamically change the position and the
extensions,
extensions,
19.2.9 Prism
The function creates an equilateral prism with polygonal base. The
vertices are at equal distances on a circle. The geometry of the
Adjustments,
shape results from the radius of the circle, the number of sides and
Adjustments,
the height.
Prism The height is queried during the operation. You can correct the
number of sides by subsequently editing the object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
471
Introduction

r!
Application
Basic functions
(1 (2
Adjust radius
Move prism
 Select "Pyramid". The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). An equilateral triangle is

active.
If you have selected a prism, you can dynamically change the position and the radius
of the shape. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Index
472
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.2.10 Truncated pyramid (polyhedron)

The function creates a polyhedron in the form of a regular truncated
pyramid. The vertices of base and top surface are evenly spaced
on concentric circles. The geometry of the shape results from the
radii of the circles, the number of sides and the height.
You define the centre point of the two circles and their radii by
Polyhedron clicking . The height is queried during the operation. You can
correct the number of sides by subsequently editing the object.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
473
Introduction

r!
Application
(1 (2 (3
Adjust radius
Move polyhedron
 Select the "Polyhedron" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

 Specify the position of the centre point by clicking (1). A three-sided pyramid is
displayed. The cursor determines the size and rotation of the base (2).
 Enter the height and click OK . The cursor determines the size of the top (3).
 Fix the shape by clicking (3). The shape is finished. The function remains ac-
Basic functions
tive.
If you have selected a truncated pyramid, you can dynamically change the position of
the shape as well as the radii of the base and top surface. To do this, click on the
handle on the object.
Index
474
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.2.11 Ball

The function creates a sphere by defining the centre point and
radius by clicking . You can then edit the shape.
Ball
Basic functions
Application
configuration
configuration
(1
(2
Adjust radius
extensions,
extensions,
Move sphere
 Select the "Sphere" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

symbolises the radius. The sphere is visible, its size is determined by the cursor.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Fix the radius by clicking (2). The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected a sphere, you can dynamically change the position and the
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
475
Introduction

r!
19.2.12 Ellipse
The function creates an ellipse from two concentric circles, whose

diameters define the minor and major axes. You determine the
centre point and the radii of the concentric circles by clicking .
You can then edit the shape.
Ellipse
Basic functions
Application
(1 (2
(3
Stretch ellipse
Move ellipse
 Select the "Ellipse" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.

symbolises the radius of the first circle.
 Fix the radius 1 by clicking (2). The first circle is visible. The movement of the
cursor dynamically determines the radius of the second (hidden) circle. The el-
lipse resulting from the cursor position is visible.
 Fix the radius by clicking (3). The shape is prepared. The function remains
active.
If you have selected an ellipse, you can dynamically change the position of the shape
as well as the radii. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
Index
476
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

19.2.13 Elliptic arc
The function creates an elliptical arc. First, the ellipse is formed
from two concentric circles, whose diameters define the minor and
major axes (see 19.2.12, page 476). Then you define the start and
end points of the arc, also by clicking . DDS-CAD transfers it as
start angle and delta angle to the shape's object dialogue.
Elliptic arc
Basic functions
Application
(1 (2 configuration
configuration
(3
extensions,
Stretch ellipse
extensions,
(4
Move ellipse
(5
 Select the "Elliptical arc" function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
symbolises the diameter of the first circle.
 Fix the radius 1 by clicking (2). The first circle is visible. The movement of the
cursor dynamically determines the radius of the second (hidden) circle. The el-
lipse resulting from the cursor position is visible.
 Fix the radius by clicking (3). The cursor moves a dynamic line (4). This speci-
fies the starting point (starting angle) of the arc.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
477
Introduction

r!
 Fix the starting point of the arc by clicking (4) and move the cursor. The cursor
moves the endpoint of the arc along the previously defined elliptical orbit.
 Fix the endpoint of the arc by clicking (5). The shape is prepared. The function
remains active.
If you have selected an elliptical arc, you can dynamically change the position of the
shape as well as the radii. To do this, click on the handle on the object.
19.2.14 Network
The function creates a network of horizontal and vertical lines. You
can enter the dimensions of the object (1) and the distances
between the lines (2) as parameters. The network is used as a
dynamic symbol. Use this function for labelling and assistance
when designing.
Net-
Basic functions
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Index
478
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.3 Working with auxiliary geometries

You can construct helper lines, points and circles, for example to determine an
intersection or to form a reference point. Auxiliary geometries are visible on the
screen, but they will not be printed. Enable auxiliary geometries by
• Call from the toolbox or by the activated point
• Keyboard shortcuts
• Active circle/arc
• Active line
19.3.1 Auxiliary geometry on an active point

19.3.1.1 Call from the toolbox
 Select the "View" menu  Menu item "Help Geometry". The
function is active. The cursor appears as crosshairs. The mes-
sage line shows notes on calling the individual auxiliary ge-
ometries.
 Click . A menu is displayed with the individual tools.

 Select the function required from the menu. To finish working with help geome-
configuration
try, press [Esc].
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
479
Introduction

r!
19.3.1.2 Application by activated point
 Select the point (vertex, intersection, endpoint). Press and hold [Shift] and move
the cursor to the point. If the cursor gets close to the point, the cursor is snapped
in. The point is indicated by an orange circle:
 Click . A menu is displayed with all the help geometry functions that are useful
for an active point (see 19.3.1.1, page 479) as above, when accessing from tool-
box).
 Select the function required from the menu. The function is executed and then
ended.
Basic functions
19.3.1.3 Help geometry – points
Function/menu item Key Meaning

Point(s)=? between [Shift]+[6] The function divides the section between the
cursor pos. + next cursor position and another point into sub-
point sections of equal length.
Index
480
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.3.1.4 Help geometry – lines

Vertical help line [Shift]+[V] The function places a vertical auxiliary line through
the cursor position.
Horizontal help line [Shift]+[H] The function places a horizontal auxiliary line
through the cursor position.
Line through the [Shift]+[1] The function places a helper line through the
cursor position at the cursor position and asks for the inclination angle.
angle?
Basic functions
Line through the [Shift]+[3] The function places a helper line from the cursor to
cursor position to the the selected circle. Select the circle by clicking .
circle
Line between cursor [Shift]+[2] The function places a helper line through the
position + next point cursor position and another point. Select the point
configuration
by clicking .
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index configuration
extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
481
Introduction

r!
19.3.1.5 Help geometries - circles

Circle through cursor [Shift]+[7] The function draws a circle through the cursor
position + next 2 position and two other points. Select the points by
points clicking
Circle through cursor [Shift]+[5] The function draws a circle through the cursor
position + next point position and one other point. Determine the point
with r=? by clicking . The radius of the circle is then
queried.
Circle through cursor [Shift]+[4] The function draws a circle around the cursor
Basic functions
position with radius position. You can enter the radius or define by
query/ dyn. radius clicking .
Circle with r=? At [Shift]+[3] The function place a circle tangent to the selected
limiting geometry geometric shapes, e.g. between intersecting lines.
The radius is queried. Thereafter, the lines have to
be determined by clicking . Finally, you also
define the position by clicking (In this example
there are four possible positions.)

Index
482
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.3.2 Help geometry on active circle/arc

19.3.2.1 Call
 Select the circle/arc. To do this press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the line or
the circle/arc. If the cursor gets close to the circle/arc, these are highlighted or-
ange:
 Click . A menu is displayed with the available functions
Basic functions
ended.
19.3.2.2 Overview

Completed selected [Ctrl]+[2] The function completes the active arc to a full circle
configuration
arc as circle without prompting.
configuration
Line through circle [Ctrl]+[1] After calling the function the cursor moves a
centre point dynamic line. It begins in the centre point of the
extensions,
active circle. Clicking fixes the line.

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
483
Introduction

r!
Parallel circle with [Ctrl]+[3] The function creates a circle that is concentric to the
dynamic radius active circle. You can define the radius by clicking
or enter it numerically.
Tangent to the next [Ctrl]+[6] The function places a line tangent from the active
selected circle circle to the next selected circle. Select the second
circle by clicking .
Circle with r=? at page 19.3.1.5

limiting geometry
19.3.3 Help geometry on active line

Basic functions
19.3.3.1 Call
 Select the line. To do this press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the line. If the
cursor gets close to the line, this is highlighted orange:
ended.
Index
484
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.3.3.2 Overview

Extend selected line [Ctrl]+[2] The active line is used as a reference for a
helper line. The helper line is then identical to
the active line.
Dynamic [Ctrl]+[1] The function is the perpendicular to the active

perpendicular line line. The position needs to be determined by
clicking .
Repeat last geometry [Ctrl]+[7] The last operation is applied to the active line
again.
Basic functions
Dynamic parallel line [Ctrl]+[3] The function places a parallel to the active
line. The position needs to be determined by
clicking .
Parallel help lines The function creates parallel helper lines with
equal distances between the active line and
the next point.
configuration
After calling the function the cursor moves a
configuration
dynamic line. Define the next point by clicking
. The distance between the lines is queried.
extensions,
extensions,
Parallel line at [Ctrl]+[4] The function places a parallel at a defined

distance =? distance to the active line. The distance must
be entered and the side determined by clicking
.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
485
Introduction

r!

Divide selected line [Ctrl]+[5] The function splits the active line into an
into segments predetermined number of sub-sections of
equal length.
Circle with r=? at page 19.3.1.5

limiting geometry
Basic functions
Index
486
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.3.4 Delete help geometry

19.3.4.1 Delete all auxiliary geometries
 Select "Delete help geometry" function in the toolbox. All help
geometries are removed from the drawing.
19.3.4.2 Delete individual help geometry

 Select the line, circle or arc. To do this press [Ctrl] and move the cursor to the
Basic functions
help geometry. If the cursor gets close to the geometry, this is highlighted or-
ange:
configuration
configuration
extensions,
extensions,
 Select "Delete selected help geometry".

Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
487
Introduction

r!
19.4 Working with text and labels

19.4.1 Symbol text on objects, pipelines and in rooms

Objects, pipelines and rooms contain information that can be applied as a

configurable text symbol (see 18.1.1, page 395). Each of these categories is
considered and configured separately. DDS-CAD includes prepared standards, but
you can change and expand these as desired. The following example shows the
settings of the symbol text to a washbasin with the associated visual result in the
model:
For a washbasin, the symbol text configuration "Washbasin (item name+mounting

height)" (1) has been selected. Looking at the details in the configuration (2) shows
the current settings.
(1)
(2) (4)
Basic functions
(5)
(3)
All variables are displayed with the label "x" (3) in the symbol text. Their final
appearance can be complemented by pre-text and attachment, and be adjusted
further (for more information please refer to 19.4.1.3, page 491). The entire text can
be framed (4) and given a reference line (5) to the object. The information and values
displayed originate from the object or the item used.
Index
488
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.4.1.2 Propose symbol texts

A symbol text is proposed in different ways depending on the task and category:
• Activate symbol text in the object (see below)
• Propose symbol text dynamically an object or pipeline (see below)
• Insert room text (see 5.3.6, page 61)
Activate symbol text in the object

Each object contains the “Marker” tab in the object dialogue, where you can make all
settings described above. The status of "Activate position marker” (1) decides the
general visibility of the symbol text. The chosen configuration (2) determines the
information displayed:
 Double click on the object. The ob-
ject dialogue is displayed.
(1)
 Open “Marker” tab.
(2)
 Enable "Activate position marker”
(1) and correct all the other settings.
 Click OK . The symbol text is visible
Basic functions
in the model. You may need to adjust
the position (see 19.4.4, page 498).
Propose symbol text dynamically an object or pipeline

By using the “Part Text” function you can label objects and pipelines with a dynamic
configuration
text symbol and thereby determine the position of the text directly. The description
configuration
uses the example of a washbasin. It is assumed that all washbasins in the model
should be labelled with a symbol text:
 Select an object of the component group (in this case any washbasin).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
489
Introduction

r!
Symbol text
 Select the “Part Text” function. The

"Part text” dialogue box is displayed.
All available text configurations for
washbasins are listed.
 Correct all settings and click OK .
The cursor moves a movable text
symbol without information.
 Move the text symbol to a

washbasin. The symbol changes its
contents. It detects the object and
Basic functions
displays the name and parameters

of the washbasin.
 Move the text symbol to the desired position.

 Fix it by clicking . The function remains active. You can label other
washbasins.
Index
490
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.4.1.3 Setting the text properties (font, font size, colour)

You can change the text properties of the symbol text, either for a single object or all
objects of the same component group. The decisive factor here is the status of
"Allow properties per text” (1)
(3)
Basic functions
(2) (1)
By default, the function is not active. Therefore a configuration (2) of the text
configuration
properties (3) applies to all objects of the same component group. For example, all
configuration
washbasins are affected by the change, but toilets or showers are not.
If "Allow properties per text” (1) is active, you can change the text properties for
each individual object in the respective component group. Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
491
Introduction

r!
19.4.1.4 Creating your own text configuration
At the beginning of this chapter, we mentioned that you can create, adjust and save
additional text configurations for every type of object, pipeline or room. This operation
consists of three steps:
1. Create text configuration
2. Select and arrange blocks for display
3. Configure block
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
Basic functions
(5)
(6)
(7)
1. Create text configuration

 Open the “Part Text” dialogue box and select an existing configuration as a tem-
plate.
 Click Copy (1). This opens the "New name" (2) dialogue.
 Give the new configuration an appropriate name and click OK . The dialogue
box is closed. The new configuration is listed.
Index
492
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
2. Select and arrange blocks for display

Every object, every pipeline and every room has several variables, the values of
which can be read by DDS-CAD and reproduced in the symbol text. Variables with
the sign "x" as in the example (5) are imported as a text block. To enable or disable a
variable as a text block:
 Double click on the variable. The status is changed.
The order of the variables in the table determines the arrangement of the text blocks
in the symbol text. To correct the position of the text block in the symbol text:
 Select the variable.
 Click Up or Down (6). The variable changes its position in the table by one
step with every click. You can check the result in the preview.
3. Configure block
The display of a variable in the text block must often be supplemented by additional
characters in the pre-text or in the post-text in order to be able to appear as
understandable information. Additional adjustments are necessary in order to limit the
text length. Displaying the height of the object shall be used as an example:
(8) (9)
Basic functions
(13 (14
(10) (11)
configuration
• The status of "New line” (8) determines whether the block starts a new line
configuration
(checked) or attaches to the end of the previous line (unchecked).
• With "left" or "right" (9) you define the arrangement of the text in the row
(left/right justified).
• You can use any character or string of characters as pre-text (10) or post-text
extensions,
(11).
extensions,
• Input "Width" (13) and "Decimal" (14) are only displayed in the case of a
numeric variable. With Input "Width" you define the minimum width as number
of characters that will take the displayed value. Input "Decimal" determines the
number of decimal places displayed.
Adjustments,
• In the case of an alphanumeric variable (e.g. item) the fields (13) and (14) are
Adjustments,
named as "Min Width" and " Max Width". Adjust the number of characters.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
493
Introduction

r!
19.4.2 Position marker (on objects)
19.4.2.1 Settings and components of the position marker
The "PositionMarker” function allows the identification of objects by a consecutive

number (position number). This function is often used in electrical engineering in
particular. You can design your own "free numbering" (1) or choose from different
pre-configured types (2) (see 19.4.2.3, page 496).
Symbol numbering
(4)
(1)
(2)
(5)
Basic functions
(3)
The position marker is designed for continuous application. At the same time, for
some systems it is necessary to limit the number of components in a line or a group.
For example, a maximum of 64 EIB/KNX components are permitted in one line. For
monitoring, you can enter the maximum number in Input "Open dialogue after
number” (3). If you have placed the specified number of labels in the model, DDS-
CAD opens the dialogue automatically. By adapting the pre-text, you can define a
new line.
The settings for the frame (4) and reference line (5) have the same meaning as the
symbol text (see 19.4.1.1, page 488).
Pre-text and post-text

You can use any character or string of characters as pre-text or post-text.
Index
494
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Separator

Pre-text and number or number and post-text can be separated or not separated.
Make your selection in "Separators":
Selection Effect in the model

None No separation between number and pre-text/post-text
New line Line break between number and pre-text/post-text
Period, comma, Selected character between number and pre-text/post-
etc. text
Number
The number can be either a digit, a letter or a series of letters. Through continued
use, the subsequent numbers are assigned automatically:
Number entry Subsequent numbers

1 … 2; 3; 4 etc.
a … b; c; d etc.
A … B; C; D etc.
Basic functions
AA … AB; AC; AD etc.
19.4.2.2 Propose position marker
As with the symbol text, the position marker in the object can be applied enabled or
dynamically to the objects (cf. 19.4.1.2, page 489). The dynamic proposal is
displayed as the more appropriate option:
 Select the "PositionMarker” function. The dialogue box (see above) appears.
 Correct all settings and click OK . The cursor moves the label as a movable
symbol. It shows the set number.
configuration
configuration
 Move the label to an object. The object is selected. This indicates that this num-
ber belongs to the selected object.
extensions,
 Move the label to the desired position and fix it by clicking . The function re-
extensions,
mains active and already displays the next number. You can assign them to the
next object.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
495
Introduction

r!
19.4.2.3 Standardized types of position marker
In the "PositionMarker” dialogue box there are preconfigured types for labelling
electrical engineering system parts. Some settings are fixed, they should not be
changed.
EIB/KNX (region/line/member)
When you call the type, you are given suggestions for pre-text,
number, and the number of labels. However, these can be changed.
The first two digits (region and line) are defined as pre-text. They
remain unchanged during application.
The last digit (member) corresponds to the number and is
incremented. Frame and reference line can also be activated. The
number of labels until the dialogue box is reopened is suggested with
64 and can be changed.
Emergency lighting
The frame is defined as a circle with centre line. The top figure is
suggested in the pre-text and can be adjusted. It remains unchanged
during application.
Basic functions
The bottom figure corresponds to the number and is incremented.

The dialogue box is displayed again after the tenth label. Pre-text and
number contain the "New line" separator. The number of labels until
the dialogue box is reopened is suggested with 10 and can be
changed.
Type 1 fire alarm / Type 2 fire alarm

The frame is defined as a circle with centre line. The top figure is
suggested in the pre-text and can be adjusted. It remains unchanged
during application.
The bottom figure corresponds to the number and is incremented.

The dialogue box is displayed again after the tenth label. Pre-text and
number contain the "NNew line” separator. Types 1 and 2 differ in the
suggested number of labels until the dialogue is re-opened (type 1 =
12 / Type 2 = 20).
Lightning protection: Numbering section points/terminals

The frame is defined as a fixed circle. You can set the
number which is incremented continuously without
limit.
Index
496
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.4.3 Free text

To enter free text select the "Text" function in the
toolbar.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
Enter the text in the input field (1). Text blocks (2) are stored in the UserText.txt file
as a template. You can edit the file and write new text blocks.
To set a font, choose "Style” (3). This selection accesses an attribute mapping,
in which the various styles are defined. DDS-CAD uses this as a template (see
configuration
also Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Error! Bookmark not
configuration
defined.).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
497
Introduction

r!
19.4.4 Move text and labels
It is often necessary to correct the position of a text or a label. The example of a

symbol with frame and reference line shall be used to show all the various
possibilities.
(3) (2) (1)  Select the symbol text by clicking . The text
appears as a selected object with the three
handles (1), (2) and (3). You can click a han-
dle and make the desired change in position.
Handle (1) only moves the text box. The tip of the
reference line remains directed to the old
position.
Basic functions
Handle (2) move the text box and reference line

together
Handle (3) only moves the tip of the reference

line. The text box remains at the old position.
Index
498
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.5 Working with the dimension type

This chapter describes the options for the dimension function DDS-CAD. Here the
necessary concepts are introduced and several examples are shown. Then the
general application of the function is described. The last section describes the editing
options and settings of a dimension type.
19.5.1 Terms and general connections

The dimension type (1) is based on a polyline, which connects all dimension-relevant
points in a chain. Is in this context, we often refer to the dimensional chain (2) and the
dimension points (3).
The dimensional chain

(2) is normally hidden.
(1)
However, it is visible
when you select the
associated dimension
type by clicking .
(2) You can move or
Basic functions
delete existing
dimension points or
insert new ones.
(3)
A single dimension
Main dimension
type can be executed
in a maximum of two
planes. The main
dimension line shows
configuration
configuration
the sum of all sections
of a dimensional
chain, the sub-
dimension line shows
Sub-dimension Measure Selection Dimension the length of a section. extensions,
extensions,
Measures can be adjusted in the layout, the application of units of measurement and
rounding. A manual correction of content is not possible. The length of the dimension
helper lines results from the combination of different parameters and the selection
(between the sections of a dimensional chain) can be altered in terms of size and
symbol.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
499
Introduction

r!
You can specify different dimension types. In this way, you determine what type of
dimension line (main/sub) should appear on which side of a dimensional chain – top,
bottom, left or right. The graphic shows an example for each configuration.
Top (X distance)
Right (Y distance)
Left (Y distance)
Basic functions
Y
X
Bottom (X distance)
For the upper dimension type, main and sub dimension lines were selected. The
dimension types at the bottom and right side show only the main dimension line, the
left dimension type only shows the sub-dimension line. You can also see that with the
upper and lower dimension types, the X distances between the dimension points are
evaluated. The left and right dimension types consequently consider the Y distances.
The dimension type in the top

example behaves at right angles

to the dimensioned object. The
example (left) shows a situation
in which a diagonal body edge
should be dimensioned. To do
this, it was necessary to rotate
the dimension type (see 19.5.3,
page 502).
Index
500
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
19.5.2 General application

The following example describes
the structure of a right-angled
dimension above the body edge.
It is assumed that the dimension
chain is to be defined along
visible reference points (e.g.
corners of the building).
Application
Basic functions
Points captu-
Dimensionin
configuration
configuration
 Activate snap points.
 Select the "Points to be Dimensioned” function. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
The message line shows the following prompt: "Localize the first point of dimen-
sions...”..
extensions,
 Move the cursor to the first reference point. The point captures the cursor and
extensions,
holds it tight. The properties of the point are displayed.

 Click . The cursor moves a dynamic line. The message line shows the follow-
ing message: "Localize the next point - confirm with [Enter], Cancel with [Esc].
 Click through all the reference points that should be included in the dimensional
Adjustments,
chain.
Adjustments,
 Press [Enter]. The dimension type dialogue box is displayed (see 19.5.4,
page 504).
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
501
Introduction

r!
 Set the properties of the dimen-
sional chain – in particular the
dimension type (1).

 Click OK . The dimension
chain is displayed in the model.
It can be supplemented and
modified.
(1)
19.5.3 Oblique dimension type

Basic functions
The dimension type can be adjusted to any angle. The dimension figures are
corrected automatically.
Example situation
An oblique body edge has been
dimensioned and the dimension
lines are horizontal in the model.
However, they are to be rotated
parallel to the edge of the body.
Index
502
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Application

 Double click on the dimensions type. The object dialogue is displayed.
 Enable "Adjust angle with line A-B" and click OK . The dimension appears in
purple. The reference line A-B defines the inclination of the dimension:
Basic functions
 Select the reference line. You
can move the start and end
nodes.
configuration
configuration
 Correct the position. The dimen-
sion fits its position.
 Call the object dialogue again
and disable "Set angle with
line A-B". The reference line is
extensions,
hidden and the dimension is

extensions,
again displayed in its default

colour.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
503
Introduction

r!
19.5.4 ((The properties of the dimension type))
The properties of a dimension type are managed from an object dialogue. In the
"Dimensioning Points” tab, define the outer shape of a dimension, in the
"Parameters" tab, define the unit of measurement and rounding.
19.5.4.1 "Dimensioning Points” tab
The "Dimensioning Points” tab is where you can alter the dimension type (1) and the
layout (2).
The text size is entered in decimeters (dm). For the selection, you can select a type
and alter its size by a factor. The value "1" is the default size. A factor < 1 reduces
the selection, a factor > 1 results in an enlargement.
Basic functions
19.5.4.2 "Parameters" tab

Right-angle dimension: Starting the function, select dimension points, end the
function and configure dimension type
Oblique dimension: Subsequent definition of the inclination line
Subsequent moving
Subsequent addition, moving or deleting of dimension types

Index
504
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
General editing functions Erro
r!
20 General editing functions

20.1 Copy, delete, move and edit objects
To copy, delete or move an object, or to edit its properties, it must first be selected. In
addition, most editing functions can be applied to several objects at the same time –
if these have been selected beforehand. For this reason, there are various functions
available that allow you to select individual or multiple objects.
In this context, it may happen that you have accidentally selected one or more
objects. To remove them from the following editing operation (e.g. deleting) you can
deselect individual objects.
Selected objects are shown in blue and with a dashed line. Each selected object has
one or more handles, where you take hold of the objects and place them as dynamic
symbols.
Basic functions
You can call other editing functions from the context menu (click ) or via a keyboard
shortcut.
The following pages provide overviews for the topics:
configuration
configuration
• Select object
• Remove selections
• Editing functions for selected objects
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
505
Introduction
Erro General editing functions

r!
20.1.2 Select objects for editing
Overview: Select object
Before the opera- No object is selected ...

tion: Object is selected ...
After the operation:

Select single object Click on an object. The object is
selected, all other selections are re-
moved.
Collect individual objects Keep [Ctrl] pressed and click on

[Ctrl]+ the desired objects one after the
other. The objects are selected.
Basic functions
All objects in the model Press [Ctrl]+[A]. All objects in the

[Ctrl]+[A] model are selected.
All objects that are affected Keep pressed and move down
by a region and right. The cursor draws a rectan-
gle (red, dashed). All objects affected
by the region are selected.
All objects that fully enclosed Keep pressed and move up and
by a region right. The cursor draws a rectangle
(red, solid line). All objects within the
region are selected.
Index
506
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
20.1.3 Remove selections

Overview: Remove selection
Before the opera- ... Object is selected

tion: ... No object is selected
After the operation:
Function/shortcut Example Remark/Reference

For individual objects Keep [Ctrl] pressed and click on
[Ctrl]+ a selected object. The selection of
the object is removed.
For all objects in the model Click once in the free workspace.
All selections are removed.
For all objects that are Keep pressed and move down
Basic functions
touched by a region and left. The cursor draws a rectan-
gle (green, dashed). The selection is
removed for all objects touched by
the region.
For all objects that are fully Keep pressed and move up and
enclosed by a region left. The cursor draws a rectangle
(green, solid line). The selection is
removed for all objects that are fully
enclosed by the region.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
507
Introduction

r!
20.1.4 Editing functions for selected objects
Overview: Editing functions for selected objects

Function Description
Copy The function writes the selected objects to the Windows clip-
[Ctrl]+[C] board. Reference is the mounting height of the last placed
object. Use [Ctrl]+[V] to insert this object into the model
once more.
Copy with free reference The function expects the definition of the reference point
point (click ) and writes the selected objects to the Windows
clipboard. Use [Ctrl]+[V] to insert this object into the model
once more.
The objects stored in the Windows clipboard appear at the

Paste [Ctrl]+[V] cursor as a dynamic symbol. They can be placed using the
symbol functions.
Delete [Del] The selected objects are deleted from the model.
Basic functions
The selected objects are converted into dynamic symbols.

Move [Ctrl]+[M] They can be moved with the cursor and placed again with
the assistance of the symbol functions. Reference is the
mounting height of the last placed object.
Move with free reference The selected objects are converted into dynamic symbols.
point They can be moved with the cursor and placed again with
the assistance of the symbol functions. The function expects
the definition of the reference point (click ).
Absolute Z-axis The function asks for the new height for the selected objects.
[Home] Enter the value in metres (m) and observe the effect of the
preceding + or - sign.
From the last point: The function asks for a difference, with which the selected
right/left/up/down objects are be moved in the direction indicated. Enter the
[]/[]/[]/[] value in metres (m) without a preceding + or - sign.
From the last point: The function asks for the difference to change the height.
Z-axis positive / negative Enter the value in metres (m) without a preceding + or - sign.
[PgUp] / [PgDn]
Index
508
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Overview: Editing functions for selected objects

Function Description
From the last point: The function asks for the differences by which the selected
According to relative coor- objects are moved in the X, Y and Z direction. Enter the val-
ues in metres (m) and observe the effect of the preceding +
dinates [8] or - sign.
From the last point: The function asks for the direction (as an angle) and distance
According to polar coordi- for the shift of the selected objects.
nates [9]
Rotate object freely The object is rotated about its mounting point with the cursor.
Click to fix it.
Zoom to selected object The zoom range is changed so that all selected objects are
[Shift]+[Z] fully visible on the screen.
Basic functions
Filter selected type from The function expects the definition of an area by which all
the range objects of the selected type (e.g. all openings) should be fil-
tered. Note the movement directions:
Properties The function opens the object dialogue.

[Alt]+[Enter]
configuration
configuration
Open item documentation The function opens the document that is connected to the
item of the selected object.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
509
Introduction

r!
20.2 Undo/restore operation

DDS-CAD stores all operations in a drawing from

the moment it is opened and lists them in the
docking window under the
Undo "Rückgängig/Wiederherstellen" (Undo/restore) tab
(2) (1). This allows you to undo both individual and
multiple operations in one step .
(1)
Undo individual operation
 Select the "Undo Last Function” function (2).
The most recent operation (in this case 11 =
Delete) is retracted. The deleted object will
reappear in the drawing.
Undo several operations in one step

Basic functions
 Select the first operation to be undone in the change list by clicking (in this
case, row 8). All underlying entries are also marked. A single-line context menu
is displayed.
 Select "Undo marked action(s)”.
A separator line is inserted above the selected row. The status appears on the
screen up to the last operation above the separating line (in this case, row 7).
 Check the status. Have you set the handle at the correct point?
 Yes: Continue working as normal. The rows below the separating line are re-
jected.
No, I have to return: Repeat the procedure further up in the list.
No, I've gone too far: See "Wiederherstellen der markierten Zeilen" (Restoring
the selected rows).
Restoring the selected rows

If you have chosen too
many operations you can
move the line further
down in the list.
Index
510
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Click on a row below the separator line. The selected row (and all rows above
the separator line) are selected. A single-line context menu is displayed.

 Select "Redo marked action(s)”. The separator line is shifted down by the num-
ber of selected rows. The status appears on the screen up to the last operation
above the separating line.
 Check the status. Have you set the handle at the correct point?
 Yes: Continue working as normal. The rows below the separating line are re-
jected.
No, I have to return: See "Several operations in one step”
No, I've gone too far: Repeat the procedure further down in the list.
20.3 The "Find and Edit Objects” function

20.3.1 Introduction and application
The function filters objects with the same properties from the model and allows them
to be editing together in one step. In this way you can filter e.g. all windows with a
certain sill height and then edit their settings or delete these objects.
Basic functions
Properties of
multiple objects
configuration
(1)
configuration
(2)
extensions,
extensions,
Edit settings of the filtered objects

 Filter the desired objects (see below).
 Click Change (1). The object dialogue is displayed.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
 Edit the settings in the object dialogue and click OK .

 Click Close (2). The objects have been changed, the function is ended.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
511
Introduction

r!
Delete filtered objects:
 Filter the desired objects (see below).

 Click Close (2). The filtered objects remain selected.
 Press [Del].
The possibilities of the function are extremely varied, the key step is filtering the
objects to be edited. You can use two strategies:
• Filter by template of a selected object (see 20.3.2, page 512)
• Manually define the properties of the search filter (see 20.3.3, page 513)
20.3.2 Filter by template of a reference object

With this method, you
first select a reference
(4) object in the model.
Then start the function
(3) and let the program
search the other objects
Basic functions
in the model. The

(5) method can be
(1) (6) executed quickly, but
offers fewer options.
 Add same in model (4) filters
all objects that belong to the same component group as the reference object (e.g. all
windows, all electrical sockets or all washbasins). Special features, like item used or
the installation height are not considered.
Add equal objects

(5) filters all objects that use the same item as the reference object and
that have bee installed at the same height.
 Add same articles (6) filters all objects that use the same item as the reference object.
Other properties (e.g. height) are not considered.
Application
 Select the reference object (e.g. a window) by clicking .
 Select the "Find and Edit Objects” function. The dialogue box is displayed. The
table contains a single entry (3).
 Select a filter function (4), (5) or (6). All suitable objects are filtered and listed in
the table. These objects are selected in the model.
 Edit the objects in the manner required.
Index
512
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
20.3.3 Manually define properties of the search filter

In this method, you
(7) define a search filter
by manually
specifying
(8) characteristic
parameters. This
version offers a wider
range of search
criteria than is
(11 possible when using
(10 a reference object.
You can basically
(9) use any setting as a
search criterion.
Application
Basic functions
 Select the "Find and Edit Objects” function. The dialogue box is displayed. There
are no entries in the table.
 Select the required object group (7).
 Click Properties (8). The object dialogue of the selected object group is displayed.
It is used as an input form for the search filter. The input fields are blank.
 Define all parameters that are to apply as search criteria. Search criteria can be
numeric values of certain dimensions (9), the item (10) and the setting of the pen
and layer inclusion (11).
 Click OK . All suitable objects are filtered and listed in the table. These objects
configuration
are selected in the model.
configuration
 Edit the objects in the manner required.
20.4 The "Move Area”

(Move region) function
extensions,
extensions,
The "Move Area” function considers all objects and coordinates (e.g. the end of a
line) within a determined region. These are shifted by the same distance in the same
direction. The relationships between shifted and unshifted coordinates are retained
(i.e. lines may be extended or shortened).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
513
Introduction

r!
You have drawn a floor plan. Now the vertical wall shown in black is to be moved to
the left. The doors 1 and 2 are to be included in this operation.
Procedure
 Select the "Move Area” function in the toolbox. The cursor
turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Enter point no 1 for the demarcation rectangle”.
 Determine the movement area with two clicks :
Basic functions
The message line shows the

"[Shift]+[Spacebar] to add new
area or enter a reference point
for the move” prompt.
[Shift+Spacebar]=select addi-
tional region
 If another region is to be defined: Press [Shift]+[Spacebar]. You can define

another region (as pictured above).
 If the shift is to be performed: Click on the reference point. The cursor moves
a dynamic line. The message line shows the following prompt: "Enter a point for
the move distance”
For free movement (by the mouse):

 Click on the new position of the reference point. The shift is executed, the
query "Keep changes in drawing?” is displayed.
Index
514
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
To shift in a certain direction, by a certain amount

 Press []/[]/[]/[]. A dialogue box is displayed where you can enter the
distance.
 Enter the value in metres (m) and click OK . The shift is executed, the query
"Keep changes in drawing?” is displayed.
Basic functions
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
configuration
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
515
Introduction
Erro Working with the DWG/DXF editor

r!
21 Working in the DWG/DXF Editor
Editing the source file is not a task that has to be performed in one step at a time. It
may be required at various times when encountering different situations. For
example, editing a freshly imported DWG/DXF file is the classical case, but this need
can also arise later. A step-by-step adjustment is of course possible, and often
recommended. Therefore, you can switch between the action areas "DDS Model"
and "DWG/DXF Editor" at any time.
21.1 The "DWG/DXF Editor" action area

To be able to edit the contents of a DWG/DXF file, you must
enter the "DWG/DXF Editor" action area. Here you have
access to the individual drawing objects.
Warning!
The "Undo" function is not available in the DWG/DXF
editor. For example, a deleted object cannot be restored.
Basic functions
In most cases – in the case of editing the floor plan – you start the DWG/DXF Editor
via the DDS model (see 21.1.1, page 516). However, if you want to isolate individual
symbols from the DWG/DXF file (for further use in the DDS model), start the Editor at
the program level (see 21.1.2, page 517).
21.1.1 On editing the floor plan: Starting from the DDS model
Import and model Admin
 Select the "Import- and Model Admin” function. The "Inserted file administrator”
dialogue box appears. This lists all imported objects in the model.
 Select the import object by clicking . The context menu is displayed.
 Select the "Open in new window” function. The DWG/DXF Editor is opened in a
new window. You have access to the contents of the DWG/DXF file.
Index
516
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Working with the DWG/DXF editor Erro
r!
21.1.2 To transfer a symbol: Starting from the program level

Start the DWG/DXF Editor from the program level if you only want to edit or save a
DWG/DXF file, or export it to other formats. To do this, first close the current project
and all drawings:
Open drawings list
(1)
Basic functions
 Open the Project Menu. The "Project Menu” dialogue box appears.
 Click Close (1). The program asks whether the changes in the current project
should be saved. Afterwards the project and all open drawings are closed. You
are taken to the program level.
configuration
Then start the DWG/DXF Editor in the "File" menu.
configuration
Open the DWG/DXF file and you can start editing.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
517
Introduction

r!
21.2 Strategies for editing DWG/DXF files

21.2.1 Isolate detail of interest

The amount of work in the DWG/DXF Editor depends on the quality of the data and
the aim of the operation. In many cases, the idea is to tidy up the drawing to the
extent that the result can be used for further work. Two situations can be mentioned
as examples:
Isolate floor plan

You may occasionally receive drawings, in which individual
fragments are outside the floor plan. The result is that the floor
plan is displayed as a point on the screen after using the "Zoom
all" function. You can rectify this effect with the following
operation.
Isolate single symbol

You can transfer symbols from a DXF/DWG file and use them in
the DDS model. This is necessary for example when editing
revision designs, if the symbols present in the DWG file are to be
Basic functions
used (see 23.3, page 575).
By combining different functions, you can reduce the effort

required.
Insulate floor plan

Place zoom at the Zoom Extent of Drawing

region of interest
Select objects outside of

the zoom range
Delete selected objects
Place zoom to region of interest

 Select the "Zoom Extent of Drawing” function. The fragments outside of the floor
plan are ignored. The floor plan fills the screen completely.
Index
518
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Select objects outside of the zoom range

An object must be selected before it can be deleted. To do this, the general selection
functions are available (see 20.1, page 505). Additionally, the "Edit” menu contains
two other selection functions. These can be used to isolate a sub-area (e.g. a single
symbol, part of floor plan or a legend) from the drawing. Both functions monitor the
zoom area and detect objects outside of this area.
(1) Example:
The black square (1) symbolises an object or part of an area to
(2) be isolated. The light grey rectangle (2) represents the active
zoom range (screen view).
To select objects lying outside the area, select these functions from the "Edit” menu:
 "...completely outside of the zoom area". Only objects completely outside of the
zoom area are selected. Objects that are partially visible are not selected and
therefore not deleted.
Basic functions
 "...partially outside of the zoom area". All objects that are wholly or partly outside
of the zoom area are selected. Objects that are fully visible are not selected and
therefore not deleted.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
configuration
DDS-CAD 7.3
519
Introduction

r!
21.2.2 Adjust layer structures to the DDS model
The layer structure of an imported DWG/DXF file will always differ from the DDS
layer structure. It may be that the imported file contains several layers that you want
to merge with layers in DDS-CAD. The layer structure of the DWG/DXF file should
then be transferred into the layer structure of DDS-CAD.
Procedure
 Select "Format" menu  "Assign DWG layers to a DDS layer" function. The "As-
sign DWG layers to a DDS layer" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
 Select the layer of the DWG/DXF file that you want to assign to a DDS layer.
 Click Map . The "Select layer" dialogue box is displayed.
(1)
(2)
 Select the DDS layer (1) to which you want to assign the DWG/DXF layer and
click OK (2). The assignment is shown.
 Click OK . The settings are saved and apply for the entire project.
Index
520
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
21.2.3 Edit file properties

In different situations, it may be necessary to edit the basic settings in the DWG/DXF
file. The following two cases occur repeatedly:
The object to be edited is part of a block

If an object (1) is part of a block, it cannot be selected individually. The selection is
instead for the entire block (2). The blocks in the drawing must first be broken up in
order to obtain access to the object (3).
(1) (2) (3)
The scale of DWG/DXF file is be adapted to the DDS model

In some cases, the adjustment of the scale by a scaling factor in the DDS model is
not successful (see 4.3.2, page 38). Using the file properties, you can re-define the
basic settings for the unit of length and get around the problem in this way.
Basic functions
Application
Properties of the active file/drawing
You can adjust the scale of the DWG/DXF
configuration
file to the DDS model by adjusting the
configuration
drawing unit.
Enable "Explode INSERTs" to receive

access to individual elements
(components of blocks).
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
521
Introduction

r!
21.2.4 Define the insertion point (Origo) – Shift zero point
With the "Insertion point (Origo) of the file" function you specify the zero point of the
DWG/DXF file to a defined position, and thus correct the insertion point of the import
object (see 18.1.3, page 398). You can use this operation, for example, to produce
the positionally correct arrangement of the storeys in the DDS model (see 4.3.3,
page 41).
Insert point (Origo) of the file...

Basic functions
Use
 Select the insertion point (Origo) of the file. The cursor turns into a crosshair.
 Press [Shift] and move the cursor to the desired position of the insertion point.
The point captures the cursor and holds it tight. The character of the point and its
coordinates are displayed.
 Click . The "Insertion point (Origo) of the file" dialogue box is displayed. This
shows the displacement of the insertion point (Origo) on the X, Y and Z coordi-
nates.
 The values for X and Y may not be changed. However, make sure that Z=0 and
click OK . The operation is ended. You can continue the work.
Index
522
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
21.3 Transfer DWG/DXF objects to the DDS model

Your DWG/DXF file may already contain a design that you want to use for working in
the DDS model. If this has been created using insert objects, you can link to DDS
items and transfer these objects into the DDS model. The following example explains
the principle:
"DWG/DXF editor" action space "DDS model" action space
Basic functions
(1)
(5)
(2)
configuration
(3)
configuration
extensions,
extensions,
(4)
The graphic shows the part drawing of a DWG/DXF file from the perspective of the
Adjustments,
DWG/DXF Editor (left) and the DDS model (right). The file contains an electrical
Adjustments,
engineering design and the properties (2) for the two labelled double sockets (1) are
displayed:
Both sockets are symbolised by the insert object "ST03" (3), for which a link to a DDS
item (4) has been created in the "Artikel-Zuordnung" (Map symbol) tab. By saving the
link, you switch back to the DDS model. A DDS object (5) is placed at each position
of a "ST03" object.
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
523
Introduction

r!
Position and rotation of the DDS objects do not have to behave identically to the
original in the first step. This correction is carried out in a subsequent step. Finally,
the successfully linked insert objects are hidden in the DWG/DXF Editor. It is
therefore necessary to switch between the two action areas several times.
Note:
The item mapping is not possible if only geometric functions were used when
creating the DWG/DXF (such as circles, rectangles, lines). Admittedly, this creates
a visual symbol, but not a usable object.
The link between the insert object in the DWG/DXF file to the DDS item can be
produced both at the individual object (the "Properties" dialogue) or by using an
administration function in a table. Then, the changes are saved and the position of
objects corrected.
Warning!
Before starting this operation, the correct position of the storeys must be checked
and corrected if necessary. If you skip this step, the transferred objects will be in
the wrong position in the model. Please refer to chapter 4.3.3, page 41.
Basic functions
21.3.2 Create link to individual item

The link to a DDS item can be made
in the "Properties (selected object)"
dialogue. To do this, the DWG/DXF
file must be open in the Editor.
(1)
(2)
(3)
 Call a single object (e.g. a double socket, ST03) by double clicking . The
"Properties (selected object)" is displayed.
 Switch to the "Map symbol" tab and select the application type (1) and the DDS
item group (2).
 Click Select DDS item (3). The product database is displayed and allows you to se-
lect an item.
Index
524
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
 Select the item. The selected item is transferred into the "Properties (selected
object)" dialogue.

 Click OK . The product database is displayed and allows you to select an item.
The assignment applies to all double sockets (ST03) in the drawing.
 Call the next object.
This operation can be realised quickly and easily. In addition, you automatically
check the symbol for its suitability:
Symbol of a double socket as Symbol of a lamp as

an insert object Combination of circle and line
Basic functions
You can see whether it has been
inserted as a insert object (left) and
thus suitable for linking or whether it
was created by a combination of
different functions (right). In this case
you cannot create a link.
configuration
For a large variety of objects in large-scale drawings, however, the overview may get
configuration
lost. You can forget about objects or call them many times unnecessarily. You also
have no information about the frequency of an object. Therefore, you should use the
following method as a supplement.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
525
Introduction

r!
21.3.3 Link with a central management function
Linking insert objects with matching DDS items can be done with the assistance of a
central management function. This function displays all the objects in an overview,
the frequency of their use (1) and the associated DDS item (2). A preview window (3)
shows an image of the selected object:
Assign DDS item to DWG/DXF objects
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
(4)
(3) (5)
(6)
Application (create link)

 Select the "Assign DDS item to DWG/DXF objects" function. The table is dis-
played.
 Select a row from the list. An illustration of the object is displayed in the preview
window (3).
 Select the application type (4) and the DDS item group (5).
 Click Select DDS item (6). The product database is displayed and allows you to se-
lect an item.
 Select the item. The selected item is transferred into the row of the object.
 Create the next link.
Index
526
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
21.3.4 Save object mapping and transfer to the DDS model

Transferring the linked items to the DDS model takes place when you save the
changes in the DWG/DXF file.
Apply changes
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
Application
 Select the "Apply changes" function. The "Apply changes" dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Check "Apply changes made in symbol-mapping” (1).
 Select an option (2) according to your requirements. For more information,
configuration
please see 21.4, page 531.
configuration
 Click OK . The DDS model is displayed on the screen. The selected DDS ob-
jects are placed at the positions of the associated insert objects (DWG/DXF).
Position and rotation of the DDS objects do not have to be identical to the origi-
nal, the correction takes place in the next step. extensions,
Warning!
extensions,
"Forget history of mapped symbols...” (4) leads to another transfer of all existing
links to the DDS model. DDS-CAD ignores the existing objects and places new
objects at the corresponding positions.
Note the impact this has on the part list. Use this function for example, for a
Adjustments,
completely new transfer or the creation of several variants.

Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
527
Introduction

r!
21.3.5 Correcting the position of the objects in the DDS model
The inserted DDS objects do not have to

behave the same as the original. In the
graphic for example, you can see that the
DDS objects are rotated 180° relative to the
original.
This is caused by differences between CAD

systems. In DDS-CAD, the pictured double
socket faces downward, if the rotation angle
is 0°. In the CAD system used to create the
DWG/DXF file, it is pointing up. Similar
effects arise when the insertion points are
arranged differently in the symbols.
In these cases, you have to correct the position of objects in the DDS model.
However, you do not have to replace any individual object. It is sufficient if (as in the
example) you edit a single double socket. DDS-CAD asks if this change should be
transferred to all objects of the same type:
Basic functions
 Select a DDS object and move it with the cursor.

 Correct the rotation and place it at the desired position. You are asked whether
all objects of the same type should be treated the same.
 Click Yes . DDS-CAD corrects the positions of objects of the same type.
Warning!
If you answer with No , this mode is ended and can no longer be activated.
Therefore, first correct all objects before going on to refine the model.
21.3.6 Hide original

If you have transferred all objects and corrected their position in the DDS model, only
DDS objects should be visible. The objects from the DWG/DXF file should be hidden.
The starting point of this operation is first the DDS model; hiding the DWG/DXF
objects is carried out in the DWG/DXF Editor.
Index
528
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!

Connect DWG/DXF Symbols to DDS Products
(1)
Basic functions
 Open the DWG/DXF file in the Editor (see 21.1, page 516).
 Select the "Choose the article to assosiate with” function. The table is displayed.
 Check "Hide inserted symbols from DXF model" (1) and click OK . All
DWG/DXF objects that were connected with a DDS item disappear.
 Save the changes in the DWG/DXF file (see 21.4, page 531). The DDS model is
configuration
configuration
displayed on the screen. The linked insert objects (DWG/DXF) are hidden, only
the DDS objects are visible:
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index extensions,
extensions,
DDS-CAD 7.3
529
Introduction

r!
21.3.7 Notes on the parts list
Linking DWG/DXF objects with DDS items and their transfer into the DDS model is a
useful tool when working with DDS-CAD. As a result of this operation, you can
quickly and easily end up with a part list. This list is always dependent on the
available data and must be evaluated in this context.
In 21.3.2 we talked about the symbol of a lamp, which is only created by the drawing-
related combination of geometric objects. It was shown that linking is not possible for
this example, and therefore it has no effect on the part list. Negative or incorrect
effects are to be expected, however, whenever a symbol has been combined from
objects that are suitable for linking.
Example
In the graphic, you can see a symbol that represents a four-way socket. However, in
creating the DWG/DXF file, the object was a single socket object with an additional
caption:
Basic functions
This state of affairs results in a single socket being transferred into the DDS model
and thus in the part list.
Note:
Please note that the result of the part list is always dependent on the available
data.
Index
530
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
21.4 Apply changes – Save

If you have finished editing the DWG/DXF file, you must save your changes. There is
a configurable function in the DWG/DXF Editor for this purpose.
Apply changes
This function is only useful if you have created a link

between DWG/DXF objects and DDS items as per 21.3
(from page 523). You control the transfer of the links to the
DDS model (see 21.3.4, page 527).
Ignore changes (close without saving)

The DWG/DXF Editor is closed without saving the
changes made so far. You are returned to the DDS
model. Select this option if you have made mistakes in
Basic functions
editing the DWG/DXF file and do not want to transfer
these to the DDS model.
Apply changes made in the drawing, but do NOT save the DWG/DXF file
This option is only useful if you have created a link between DWG/DXF objects and
DDS items as per chapter 21.3 (from page 523). This setting only allows the mapping
of objects to the DDS model. Any changes to the drawing in the DWG/DXF file are
ignored.
configuration
configuration
Apply changes made in the drawing AND save the DWG/DXF file
All changes (object mapping and drawing-related editing) are saved. Changes to the
drawing are written directly into the current DWG/DXF file. Select this option if you
have made a repeated post edit.
Save changes in a new DWG/DXF file

extensions,
All changes (object mapping and drawing-related editing) are saved. Changes to the
extensions,
drawing are saved by creating a new DWG/DXF file. After confirming with OK
DDS-CAD asks for the name of the new file.
Select this option if you have received a new DWG/DXF file and save it after the first
edit. Thus you protect the original file by creating a new one. You can access it later
again if necessary.
Adjustments,
Adjustments,
Index
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
531
Part IV – Adjustments
Adjustments
DDS-CAD 7.3
532
Introduction Strategies for handling projects Basic functions Adjustments, extensions, configuration Index
Introduction
Working with the product database Erro
r!
22 Working with the product database

22.1 Basic relationships
22.1.1 The relationship between item and symbol
In DDS-CAD you work with virtual objects that behave like real objects in the model.
On this basis, you simulate real situations, such as when designing the lighting, when
constructing the distribution systems and sizing equipment. The object is represented
visually by a graphical symbol.
Drawing operation
Product database Item: Lamp
*.ARD
Number, description
Lamps
Output, size
Sockets
Distribution Symbol
board
Basic functions
DDS model
Object: Lamp
Item
Position

The object therefore has drawing-related visual AND reality-based technical
properties. The object gets its properties as a result of the allocation of an item. This
item is stored in the product database. It includes both the technical parameters and
the reference to the symbol to use. While working, you fix the symbol in the model by
a drawing operation. The object now has the characteristics of the item and a
position.
Conclusion:
Always distinguish between the terms "object", "item" and "symbol"! The article is
a property of the object. The symbol is a property of the item.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
533
Introduction
Erro Working with the product database

r!
22.1.2 Data types and hierarchy of the data storage
22.1.2.1 Distinction between data
The visible symbol is a property of the item. However, it is not part of the product
database, but rather an independent data record. The symbol is only accessed via an
addressing in the item settings. It is therefore not just a case of distinguishing the
term "item" and "symbol" logically: they are actually different data types.
An item is always part of a product database (*.ARD). It can only be called, used or
manipulated via the database interface (see 22.2, page 536).
A symbol is always a drawing file, whose file name follows a fixed format. It is either
stored as an open file in one of three hierarchical levels (see below) or packaged into
a symbol library (*.LIB).
You do not have direct access to symbols within a symbol library. However, you can
copy a symbol from the library and use it as a template for a new symbol. This
procedure is simpler than constructing one from scratch. You can modify the
template and save it under a new name (see 23.1, page 545).
Basic functions
22.1.2.2 Hierarchical levels of data storage
DDS-CAD manages all data hierarchically in three different levels or folders.
SYS (lowest priority)

The SYS folder contains the basic equipment for all system data that DDS-CAD can
access after installation. Its path is set during the installation routine. The contents of
this folder are overwritten by the installation of an update. Therefore, do not make
any changes here, as they could possibly be lost. Always save data with company-
specific customisations in the USER folder.
USER
The folder is designed to store all company-specific adaptations. This will include for
example, your logo for the drawing stamp, your own symbols, title boxes, legends
and even product databases. These data are available in all projects. The path for
this folder is set during the installation routine.
Project (highest priority)

The data of one project are not directly and readily available for other projects. They
are used exclusively in each project.
Warning
Copy the projects and also the "USER" folder to your backup!
Index
534
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
22.1.3 Application of the hierarchy, search mechanisms

The hierarchical organisation
Item calls symbol, search starts described above results in a fixed
search algorithm:
Project When you call an object, you

assign an item to it. With this
*.LIB
information, DDS-CAD starts the
1 2 n 1 2 n search for the corresponding
symbol and proceeds according to
the hierarchy. The folders are first
checked in order of priority as to
Yes whether the symbol is part of a
found? symbol library.
No
found?
Yes If the desired symbol is not found,
the search starts for an open file
No stored in one of the three folders.
USER The search again follows the order
*.LIB mentioned above. If DDS-CAD
Basic functions
finds the desired symbol in this
1 2 n 1 2 n chain, it is accessed and can be
displayed in the model. If none of
the search queries are successful,
DDS-CAD gives an error message.
Yes
found?
This relationship is best explained
No using the example of a logo:
Yes
found?
You have created your company's
No logo and saved it in the "USER"

SYS
folder. Now you receive a project
*.LIB with the condition that another logo
be used in the title box. In this
1 2 n 1 2 n
case, you create the logo and save
it in the directory of the project.
Because of the hierarchy in the
search, you can access your logo
Yes
found? in all standard projects. However,
this particular project accesses the
No version in the project folder.
Yes
found?
No
Message: "Symbol library Symbol is

not loaded" displayed
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
535
Introduction

r!
22.2 The product database in action

22.2.1 Accessing the product database

In 22.1.2.2 (page 534) we described the three hierarchical levels "SYS", "USER" and
"Project". These levels apply during project work and they also affect access to
individual items. There is a product database for each of the three levels, with the
filename extension *.ARD.
By default, the management interface for the product database displays the contents
of all three hierarchy levels. However, you can disable the display of the USER and
SYS product databases, by checking "Show only used products”. In this case, the
table only lists the items that have actually been used at least once in the current
project.
Basic functions
The project product database is created when you access the first object in a new
project. The requested item is automatically taken from the USER or the SYS product
database and written into the project product database. The size of the project
product database grows with the variety of objects used. If you create a new item,
this is also part of the active project product database.
You create and manage the USER product database through an administration
process. Perform this step if you have created new items and want to use them in all
other projects. The procedure is described in 22.2.3, page 538.
The SYS product database is installed and maintained by DDS. You have only read
permission.
Index
536
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
22.2.2 Item search

The user interface for the product database is structured in filters (1) and has a multi-
level fragmented search (2).
(2)
(1)
Basic functions
(3)
The example shows the string "Wall" in the first search box for the item description.
DDS-CAD now searches through all item descriptions in the current filter for that
string. The display in the table is narrowed down accordingly. You can limit the
display further, if you use additional search boxes (see below). The table lists items
containing the strings "Wall" and "Partition".

You can expand the search according to the terms entered across the entire product
database. To do this, check "Flat mode". In the table you will see both openings
and wall vents:
(3)
You can save your searches. To do this, check the checkbox next to the search box
(3).
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
537
Introduction

r!
22.2.3 Expand product database – Create new item
You can expand the product database for the current project (project product
database) or for all projects (USER product database):
First, decide
A new item to be created whether the new
item is to be
available only for the
current project or for
For the all projects. This is
current project
important if you want
or for all?
to keep the USER
product database
Current project All projects
"clean" and
structured. Because
Remain in the project Project: Chapter 22.2.3.1
Page 539 ALL new or changed
_700-DDS- items are transferred
Artikel
open/create
from a project to
Chapter 22.2.3.2
USER, no
differentiation is
Basic functions
Page 539
Call function, copy item possible.
Chapter 22.2.3.3 To create commonly

Customise copy of the item Page 540 available items, use
a separate project
that only serves this
Transfer edited Chapter 22.2.3.4 one purpose. If the
items to USER Page 542 items are only to be
used in the current
working project,
Switch to working
however, you do not
project
need to observe any
special features.
Use item
You can them duplicate any item and edit the copy. Correct the description of the
item, its technical parameters and the link to a symbol if necessary.
If the edited items are to be transferred to USER, perform the necessary admin step.
Index
538
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
22.2.3.1 The project "_700-DDS-Artikel" – The item workshop

If a new item is to be created and transferred to the USER product database (so it
can be applied to all projects) you should use a special project as an item workshop.
In this way, you avoid "contaminating" your USER product database with records that
were only used in one project.
Create the project in the

normal way (as per
3.2.2.1, page 22). You
can assign the project
any name. However, we
recommend the name
"_700-DDS-Artikel. This
ensures that your item
workshop will always
appear at the top of the
list of projects and you
will have no trouble
finding it.
Basic functions
22.2.3.2 Create new item by copying
Creating an item is simply a copy process:
 Start the function (e.g. "Builders Work”). The product database is displayed.
 Select a suitable item (to be copied copy) and click . The context menu is dis-
played.
 Select the "Copy" function. The entry is duplicated. The item ID number is gen-
erated automatically and the item description begins with the word "copy". You
can edit the copy and customise its properties.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
539
Introduction

r!
22.2.3.3 Editing item properties
You can change any item, configure its technical properties and alter its visual
representation in the model.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Basic functions
(4)
(5)
 Select the copy of the item by clicking . The context menu is displayed.
 Select the "Edit” function. The "Change Product” dialogue box is displayed.
 Adjust the settings of the item and click OK .
Input "Productnumber” (1)

The item ID is automatically generated by DDS-CAD. You can use your own item IDs
(such as order numbers). You can enter up to 15 characters of any kind. Make sure,
however, that no number is duplicated.
Input "Description” (2)
The description (the item) is the text that appears in the item selection and also in the
part list. For the description, you can use 256 characters of any kind.
Input "Symbol" (3)

The symbol ID is a maximum of three-digit number, and accesses a DDS symbol for
this item. The search mechanism described in 22.1.3, on page 535 applies here.
Note
The entered number is irrelevant, if a path to an external symbol has been entered
in Input "External Symbol" (5) (see below)
Index
540
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Input "External info" (4)
You can place any document (e.g. PDF file, Excel spreadsheet, text document, etc.)

in a DDS item and open it from the drawing. Typical applications include:
• Data sheets with the technical specifications of a device (e.g. a PDF file)
• Part lists for composite components (e.g. as an Excel spreadsheet)
• Image files
Enter the full path to the document, noting the syntax rules:
Notes on Example of syntax

Storing on the Internet ;http://www.example.com/temp/Pump.pdf
Storing on the network or ;file:///C:/temp/Pump.rtf
the local drive
Spaces in the path Spaces in the path must be replaced by %20:
;file:///C:/Program%20Files/freeCommander2007
If you have assigned a document to the item, you can open it from the model:
Basic functions
 Select the object in the model by clicking .
 Open the context menu (click ).
 Select the "Show product sheet” function.
Input "External symbol" (5)

You can copy symbols from an external source
and use them in the DDS model. To open in the
model, create an item and enter the file name in
Input "External symbol". For more information,
please refer to:

• Symbol from DWG/DXF (page 23.3,
page 575)
• Copy 3DS symbol (see 23.4, page 576)
• Legends (see 23.6, page 581)
The input has priority over the symbol ID.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
541
Introduction

r!
22.2.3.4 Transfer edited items to USER
Warning!
The function transfers ALL amended items in the current project to USER. To
avoid filling your USER product database with redundant entries, only perform this
operation if:
- you are in your item workshop (the project "_700-DDS-Artikel")
- you are sure that ALL edited items can be copied to USER
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
(3)
 Select an item by clicking . The context menu is displayed.

 Select the "Admin" function. The "Export to User Product Database” dialogue
box appears. The default settings correspond to the intended target: The source
product database is in the current project (1). From this, all changed items (2)
are copied to the user product database (3).
 Click OK . All new and modified items have been copied to the USER data-
base and are thus available in all projects.
Index
542
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
22.2.4 Working with the manufacturer database (electrical)

In several areas, the use of manufacturers' databases is required or recommended.
This applies for example to working with radiators (for a radiator calculation) or with
the LCN bus system in electrical engineering. Enable the required manufacturer
database from the "Tools" menu
Basic functions
 Select the "Extra product databases" function. The "Select Manufacturer Data-
base(s)" dialogue is displayed, listing all available records with a description of
the content.
 Select the desired data record and click Load . The data record is denoted as
active by the "x" character.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can use the items from that manu-
facturer.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
543
Introduction

r!
22.2.5 Working with manufacturer databases (heating)
In several areas, the use of manufacturers' databases is required or recommended.

This applies for example to working with radiators (for a radiator calculation) or with
the LCN bus system in electrical engineering. Enable the required manufacturer
database from the "Tools" menu
Basic functions
 Select the "Extra Product Database" function. The "Select Manufacturer Data-
base(s)" dialogue is displayed, listing all available records with a description of
the content.
 Select the desired data record and click Load . The data record is denoted as
active by the "x" character.
 Click OK . The dialogue box is closed. You can use the items from that manu-
facturer.
Index
544
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Symbol creation Erro
r!
23 Symbol creation

23.1 Develop DDS symbols
23.1.1 Introduction
DDS symbols are drawings whose file name is structured according to a set pattern.
This is divided into three components, and must be maintained if the symbol is to
function.
Switch icon no. 901 (2D) Switch icon no. 901 (3D)
S11901.bi S13901.bi
Keyword of the Keyword of the
component group component group
"1" = 2D version "3" = 3D version
Symbol number Symbol number
The keyword defines the use of the symbol for a certain component group within the
Basic functions
product database (see table below).
55
The digits "1" or "3" control the display. Each symbol exists as a 2D and 3D
version, which appears as a schematic symbol in the plan view, but as a three-
dimensional object in the 3D view. Therefore each object requires two symbols!
The symbol ID is used as the address in the properties of the item (see 22.2.3.3,
page 540). For your symbols, use the numbers 900 to 999.
Comm Com Meaning, content and

Meaning

and mand application
E2 Telephone, data equipment LB Light rail (without bulbs)
Alarm systems and monitoring
E3 LF Fluorescent lamps
equipment (intrusion, fire, video)
Incandescent bulbs, light outlets,
E4 Bell, intercom and PA systems LI
spotlights
E5 Antennas and satellite dishes S1 Switching devices
Building systems technology
E6 SB Distributions
(EIB/KNX, wireless bus, LCN)
E7 Light signalling systems SK Plug-in devices, sockets
Cabinets, boxes, connection work,
E8 Low power - not used T1
feedthroughs
E9 Low power - not used T2 Thermostat for electric heating
H1 Electric heating T3 general or labelling symbols
H2 Heating cable TF Title field (see 23.7, page 584)
55
The only exceptions are title fields and legends (see xxx).
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
545
Introduction
Erro Symbol creation

r!
To be able to use the new symbol in all projects, the drawing file must be stored in
the USER directory:
 Open the drawings list.
Open drawings list
 Click more >> (1).

The dialogue enables
additional functions.
 Click User dir. (2).
DDS-CAD goes to the
USER directory.
(3) (4)  Enter the file name (3).
 Click Open (4).
(1)
(2)
Basic functions
The user interface during symbol creation differs in some respects from the user
interface during project work:
Execute command The toolbar contains general and specific

functions, which are shown by the working
Command input field mode (see below).

Functional elements in the
symbol are called by manu-
ally entering commands (see
xxx).
The command list only con-

tains the "MO" command for
defining the zero point at the
start of icon editing. The toolbox only contains
auxiliary and geometric func-
tions, regardless of the active
working mode (see chapters
17.3 and 19).
Index
546
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Project menu Import and drawing manager (page 80)

Save Print (page 368) Measure Export part list/VEC
Undo Views (page 389) Text
Working modes enable

additional functions
Basic functions
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
547
Introduction

r!
23.1.2 Notes on the title field
23.1.2.1 General notes
The contents of the title fields can be divided into four categories: the wireframe (1),
the logogram (2), unchangeable text (3) and dynamic information (4), which are read
56
as a text block from the project, drawing and revision data dialogue boxes.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
The default width of a title field is 18m. While maintaining this width, you can use it
Basic functions
either in the left or right bottom corner of a sheet via the "Title field/stamp" dialogue
box, without having to move it dynamically. If the width ≠ 18m, it can only be used
right/dynamic or left/dynamic. Bear this in mind when setting up the wireframe (see
xxx).
57
Title fields can be scaled, like any other object . Before developing a new title field,
you should decide whether there is a need for re-sizing. The answer to this question
is crucial for the incorporation of text and text blocks, as they only adjust their sizes
using a specific combination of commands in the symbols.
If the question about scalability is answered in the affirmative,we recommend

developing the new title field on the basis of a DDS template (as described in the
56
see 16.3.5, page 375
57
Changing the size on the basis of a factor (factor <1 causes a reduction; factor >1 causes an enlargement)
Index
548
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
following section). However, if you want to draw a new field title (without using a
template) observe the notes given in xxx.

23.1.2.2 Creating a title field from a template
The project "_700-DDS-

(1) Titelfelder-Logo" (1)
contains a template that
can be used as a basis for
developing new title fields.
Open the "Dds_1000
(2) Kopiervorlage Titelfeld"
(3) (4)
Basic functions
drawing (2). The pattern
(3) shows the proportions
of a DDS title field. Use
this as a guide for building
the wireframe. Slide the
logo and the prepared text
blocks (4) into the desired
positions.
The first step is to duplicate

the drawing in order to leave

the template intact for future
title fields. To do this, save
the drawing under a new
name (in this example
DDS_1001.BIM). For
additional title fields you
assign the same name in the
same way: DDS_1002.BIM;
DDS_1003.BIM etc.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
549
Introduction

r!
The second step is to construct the
wireframe and set the position of the

logo. You can use all the geometric
functions. The square and the
Polyline
polyline are particularly relevant. In
addition, you can import a DWG/DXF
58
file as a template .
Rectangle
The pattern shown is used for
orientation for size and zero point (1),
(1) which is an important reference for
the construction of the wireframe. If
the new title is to be suitable for an
automatic link alignment, always start the wireframe directly at the zero point.
However, if it is to be suitable for an automatic right alignment on the sheet, note the
following rule:
Width of the new title field
> 18 m = 18 m < 18 m
Basic functions
Lattice frame begins Lattice frame begins Lattice frame begins

right of the zero point in the zero point left of the zero point
Standard width 18m Standard width 18m Standard width 18m
The logo is an integrated symbol and

can be moved with the standard
functions.
The third step is to prepare to move

(1) the text blocks into the wireframe.
59
Using the auxiliary geometries (1)
create the intersection points (2),
(2) which you can target when moving by
snap points. In this way, you ensure
a uniform alignment of text and text
blocks in the title field.
58
They must be removed once you have finished editing.
59
See 19.3, page 491.
Index
550
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The fourth step is to shift the required

text blocks to their positions in the
wireframe. For a better overview, we
(1) recommend the "Display points”
option in the "View” menu. Thus, the
reference points for the text blocks
are visible as "x". Then use the
"Move Area” function to slide the
blocks into the wireframe (see 20.4,
Move region
page 513).
Basic functions
Once completed, the title field must
be cleaned up and stored in the
USER directory as a symbol file:
 Delete any remaining (surplus)
Generate title field entries and text.
 Select the "Generate title field"
function. A message indicates
that the title field has been saved
under a specific name in the
USER directory.

 Click OK . The "Apply
changes?" prompt is displayed.
 Click Yes . The "Export model
(1) (2) in format" dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Select the USER directory (1)
and enter the file name (2).
TF1901.BIM (first title field)
TF1902.BIM (second title field)
TF19nn.BIM (consecutive num-
bering for additional title fields)
 Click Save . The title field can be
used in the project.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
551
Introduction

r!
23.1.2.3 Constructing a title field manually
Create
drawing file Chapter 23.1.1
Scalability
Page 545
of title fields
Construct
lattice frame
construct with: supported by:
Static text Rectangle Auxiliary

(TH/TV/TR/TL/TC) geometry
Polyline DWG/DXF file

Dynamic as template
text blocks (TT)
Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Page Page Page Page
Create a drawing file

Basic functions
and declare it as part of the object. Use the following file names in accordance with
60
the naming convention for DDS symbols :
• TF1901.BIM (for your first title field)
• TF1902.BIM (for your second title field)
• TF19nn.BIM (consecutive numbering for additional title fields)
1. Should the title field be scalable (i.e. size can be changed)?

Special text commands must be used for static text: TH, TC, TV, TR are
used
The text height is not set directly but rather determined by integrated
calculations
2. The title field should read the contents of the project and drawing data as
blocks
Static text in title fields
Text blocks in title fields – the wildcard command TT
The scalability of title fields
see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem található., page Hiba! A könyvjelző nem létezik.
60
Index
552
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.1.2.4 Using a title field

Use the title field by creating an item and
entering the ID of a symbol.
23.1.3 Functions and commands for editing symbols

61
A symbol is a combination of geometric and functional elements . The geometric
functions are accessed from the toolbox, their application is described in chapter 19,
from page 431. In addition, please note the following:
Basic functions
Warning!
Geometric objects within a symbol must
remain neutral with regards to layer and
pen assignment. Otherwise, the layer
management layer cannot affect the sym-
bol in its display. Therefore, choose the
settings shown for layers and pens.

Functional elements ensure that a symbol acts intelligently. These include, for
example, connection points for cables and cable harnesses, or accessing text blocks.
The position of these elements is based either directly on the last point or aligned
between the last two points. Therefore, you first define the reference points. Then
select the element with a command:
Defining the reference point(s)

 Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair.
 Click on the desired position. A red "+" appears at the se-
lected position. The function is finished. You can start the next
operation.
Insert point
61
In many cases, you can create a new symbol based on an already existing symbol. You can choose a suitable template in the
symbol catalogue and apply this to your new symbol (see xxx).
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
553
Introduction

r!
Calling the command for a functional element (1) (2)
 Enter the command in the input field (1).

 Press [Enter] or click the icon (2). The
command is executed, input is requested
where necessary.
Description Options Remark/Reference
Connection point for electrical Side

cables and cable harnesses
Scalable text Side

Basic functions
Static text in a point Horizontal left-justified TH
Vertical (read from right) TV
Static text between two points Left justified TL
Right justified TR
Centred TC
Text blocks from project, draw- TT

ing, revision and sheet informa-
tion
Scalability of static text and text Side

blocks
Side
Index
554
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.1.3.2 MO – define reference points

A point is described in the command list by the MO command. This is displayed in
the command list at different locations. (1) Symbol editing automatically begins from
the zero point of the coordinate system. It corresponds to the subsequent insertion
point of the symbol. The example shows the values of X, Y and Z coordinates each
with the value "0". (2) At position 5 in the command list you will see the EP command.
This is the definition of a connection and label point for an electrical line. The position
of this connection point must be defined beforehand. In the parameters of the
command MO (position 4 on the command list), the values for the X and Y
coordinates have been set to the value "0.5".
(3) You should always finish editing the symbol with a point at the position of the zero
point (see position 6 in the example).
You can define a point dynamically (by clicking ) or construct it by entering

commands which specify the coordinates numerically.
Set point dynamically


Basic functions
Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair.
lected position. The function is ended.
Insert point

Construct point
 Enter the command MO and press [Enter].
 Enter the shift in metres (m). The preceding +
or - sign determines the direction on the axis.
 Click OK . The point has been moved.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
555
Introduction

r!
23.1.3.3 EP – Connection and label point

The function creates a connection point for cables
and cable harnesses in the current position. In this
UV01.1 way you ensure the possibility of electrical
connection and for identification with the circuit
information.
 Call the "EP" command. The "Connec-
tion/symbol text point" dialogue box is dis-
played.
Basic functions
 Enter a text type

1 = connection point for cables
2 = connection point for cable harness
 Click OK . The function is ended.
23.1.3.4 TM – Static text (single line, scalable)

This function applies a single-line static text in the current position
1/N/16A (MO) to the symbol, which is rotated and scaled together with the
symbol. The application is only relevant to electrical installation
symbols.
(1)
(2)
 Call the "TM" command. The "Text" dialogue box is displayed.

 Define the position of the text to the reference point (1) as a type (see table).
 Click OK . The "TM" dialogue box (2) is displayed.
 Enter the text and click OK . The text is displayed at the symbol. The function
is ended.
Index
556
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Type Vertical/horizontal alignment Example Rotation

0 Centred Centred +
1/N/16A
1 Bottom Centred 1/N/16A
+
edge
2 Centred Left justified +1/N/16A Always with the symbol
3 Top edge Centred +
1/N/16A
4 Centred Right aligned 1/N/16A+
5 Bottom Centred 1/N/16A
+ as dimension type
edge (read from right or bottom)
23.1.3.5 Static text (multi-line, not scalable)
Multi-line, static texts
The functions described in this section are text-only functions. They are not related to
automatic annotation and labelling functions or text symbols. The text is configured
by a command (TH, TV, TL, TR or TC) in terms of size, line spacing and font. Then it
Basic functions
is written and confirmed line by line:
Horizontal text - 1 point (TH)
This function causes the entered text to be written horizontally from left to right from
the reference point. After activating this function, an input window is displayed, in
which the following settings can be made:
After confirming the input, you get to the text entry field.
Each line of text is entered in this field and confirmed with OK.
Afterwards this screen is displayed again. You can continue entering the next line
or stop the function here.

Vertical text - 1 point (TV)
This function causes the entered text to be written
vertically from the reference point. The text can be read from
the right.
Example:
To adjust the size, line spacing and font of the text,
the same parameters as for horizontal text apply.
Text right justified, left justified or centred - 2 pts
(TR, TL, TC)
With these functions, the text is aligned to the two last set
points (MO). Depending on the location of the two points
it may also appear diagonally in the drawing. After selecting the
function the same settings need to be made as for
horizontal text. The selected function determines the orientation
of the text to the two points.
Example for TC:

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
557
Introduction

r!
23.1.3.6 TT – Dynamic text blocks
Variable information that is to be displayed as text in the model can, by using the TT
62
command, be retrieved from the project, drawing and revision data dialogue boxes.
In principle, you can use this function anywhere, but it is mainly used to design title
fields. The graphic shows the relationship using global project information as an
example:
Basic functions
The position of a text block can be based on one or between two reference points.
The font is automatically decided by the a setting in the TT command. Therefore first
specify the by first specifying a single point. You then call the TT command via the
input box. Two dialogue boxes are displayed one after the other, which are used to
address the desired text block:
Which dialogue should be evaluated?
Which module should be read from the

addressed dialogue box?
Only in dialogue 4 ("Revision"):

Which revision record should be evaluated?
How should the text block be arranged?
From which
...should the
From which drawing... information be taken?
From which sheet...
62
cf. 16.3.5, page 375
Index
558
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Parameters of the first query

Which dialogue should be analysed?
Dialogue Meaning
1 Project data
2 Drawing data
3 Sheet information (electric only)
4 Revision data
Which block is to be read from the addressed dialogue?

Line Meaning
n A line of text from the selected dialogue is accessed by specifying the line
number. The line number is declared in the configuration file DDSPMN.INI.
Example – Extract from DdsPmn.ini:
Project.Group.2=Building project,3,4,5,6
Project.Cat.3=Name;30
Project.Cat.4=Street;30
Project.Cat.5=Postcode;30
Project.Cat.6=Tel/Fax (*);30
-1 "Created" date
Basic functions
-2 "Created" editor's character
-11 "Tested" date
-12 "Tested" editor's character
-21 Three-digit drawing or sheet number (not is dialogue 1 and 4)
-22 from project data Project name
from drawing data Full file name of the drawing
from sheet information Not active
From revision data Index of the revision entry

Only for dialogue 4 – Revision – Which revision entry should be analysed?
Revision Meaning
1 first registered revision
2 second registered revision
n …
-1 last registered revision
-2 penultimate registered revision
-n …
How should the text block be arranged?

Positioning Meaning According to
command
1 horizontal to the right from the last point TH
2 vertical from the last point, readable from the TV
right
3 left justified between the last two points TL
4 right justified between the last two points TR
5 centred between the last two points TC
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
559
Introduction

r!
Parameters for the second query
From which application type should the information be taken?

Application Meaning
type:
-1 Always from the current application type
1 From architecture
6 From electrical engineering
7 From ventilation and air conditioning
8 From heating and sanitation
From which drawing should the information be taken?

Application Meaning
type:
-1 Always from the current drawing
nnn From the drawing with the number specified
From which sheet should the information be taken?

Application Meaning
type:
Basic functions
-1 Always from the current sheet

nnn From the sheet with the number specified
Index
560
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.1.4 Notes on installation and labelling symbols

23.1.4.1 Find and load master copy in the symbol catalogue
All functions are grouped together in "Installation and labelling symbols" working
mode.
Copy -> change general/architectural 2D symbol

Copy -> change installation 3D symbol (5)
(1) (2) (4) Copy -> change installation 2D symbol Clean up symbol
Installation and labelling symbols
(3)
Basic functions
 Select the "Installation and labelling symbols" working mode (1).
 From the "Help" menu  "Symbol catalogue" (2). The symbol catalogue is dis-
played as a help window.
 Find a suitable template, and note the file name (3)
 Select the copy function (4, see below, in this case "Copy 2D symbol installation
-> edit)". The "CI" dialogue box appears.
 Enter the code of the master template (here s11001) and click OK . The "In-
sert command file" dialogue box is displayed.
 Click OK . The template is displayed on screen.
 Select "Clean up symbol". You can start designing.
Significance of the copy functions (4)

Copy 2D symbol installation->edit:
To develop the 2D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the "CI" dialogue, enter the
symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. S11001).
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
561
Introduction

r!
To develop the 3D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the "CI" dialogue, enter the
symbol code for the 3D version the symbol (e.g. S13001).
Copy 2D symbol general/architecture->edit:

To develop symbols from the "Labelling/general symbols (various)" area. In the "CI"
dialogue, enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. T31001).
Basic functions
Index
562
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.2 Drawing a DDS symbol (HCS)

Symbols are drawings whose file name is structured according to a set pattern. They
are packaged in a symbol library (*.LIB) or stored as an open file. The project folder
or the SYS or USER folders can be used as save locations (see 22.1.2.2, page 534).
Most symbols are summarised in libraries and stored in the SYS directory. However,
you do not have direct access to this database. However, you can copy a symbol
from the library and use it as a template for a new symbol. This process is described
using an example:
General procedure Chapter Hiba! Chapter Hiba!

Create symbol A hivatkozási A hivatkozási
drawing forrás nem forrás nem
Find and load Draw symbol

template
Geometric
functions
Basic functions
Draw symbol
Connection and
identification points
Scalable text
Chapter Hiba!
A hivatkozási
forrás nem Material mapping for
rendering

General procedure Chapter Hiba!
Create symbol A hivatkozási
drawing forrás nem
Draw symbol
Draw symbol Geometric

functions
Connection and
identification points
Chapter Hiba!
Material mapping for
A hivatkozási
rendering
forrás nem
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
563
Introduction

r!
23.2.1 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E)
The naming convention for DDS symbols must be respected if the symbol is to work.
The structure of the file name is explained with a switch:
Switch icon no. 401 (2D) Switch icon no. 401 (3D)
S11401.bim S13401.bim
Identifies the 2D Identifies the 3D

version version
The keyword is an internal command to call the component group. The following
table lists all keywords and their contents:
Meaning, content Meaning, content

Basic functions
Command Command
and application and application
Weak current total up to version
E1 LB Light rail (without bulbs)
6.24, not included in version 6.3x
E2 Telephone, data equipment LF Fluorescent lamps
Alarm systems and monitoring
E3 LG Legends
equipment (intrusion, fire, video)
Incandescent bulbs, light outlets,
E4 Bell, intercom and PA systems LI
spotlights
E5 Antennas and satellite dishes S1 Switching devices
Building systems technology

E6 SB Distributions
(EIB, wireless bus, LCN)
E7 Light signalling systems SK Plug-in devices, sockets
Cabinets, boxes, connection work,
E8 Low power - not used T1
feedthroughs
E9 Low power - not used T2 Thermostat for electric heating
general or
H1 Electric heating T3
labelling symbols
H2 Heating cable TF Title field (see 23.7, page 584)
Almost every symbol exists as a 2D and 3D version. Therefore each object requires
two symbol files! The only exceptions are title fields and legends. In this way it is
ensured that a schematic symbol appears in the plan view and a three-dimensional
object in the 3D view.
The symbol ID is used throughout the product database (see 22.2.3.3, page 540).
Use the numbers 900 to 999 for your symbols.
Index
564
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
A new symbol is to be developed for a switching device. It is assumed that the
symbol catalogue contains a template that can be copied, modified and can be saved

as a new symbol.
the USER directory.
Open drawings list
(4)
(3)
Basic functions
(2) (1)
 Start the drawings list. The "Project Menu” dialogue box appears.
 Click more >> (1). The "Project Menu” dialogue enables additional functions.
 Click User dir. (2). DDS-CAD leaves the directory of the current project and goes to
the USER directory.

 Enter the file name (3) of the new symbol (in this example, "S11901"). Be sure to
comply with the naming convention.
 Click Open (4). The symbol drawing is opened.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
565
Introduction

r!
23.2.2 Naming convention for DDS symbols, create symbol (E)
The naming convention for DDS symbols must be respected if the symbol is to work.
The structure of the file name is explained with a boiler:
Boiler icon no. 401 (2D) Boiler icon no. 401 (3D)
GF2401.bin GF3401.bin
Identifies the 2D Identifies the 3D

version version
The keyword is an internal command to call the component group. The following
table lists all keywords and their contents:
Command
Meaning, content and Command
Meaning, content and
Basic functions
application application
BA Bathtub LG Legends
Operating equipment, irrigation
BI SI Washbasin
and drainage
Assembly equipment, mounting
BK SW Outlet fitting
accessories
FH Fire extinguisher TF Title field (see 23.7, page 584)
Heat generators, tanks, safety
GF WC Toilet, urinal
equipment
GU Floor drain WH Tank, water heater

Domestic appliances (e.g. washing
H1 Radiator WM
machine, dishwasher)
Almost every symbol exists as a 2D and 3D version. Therefore each object requires
two symbol files! The only exceptions are title fields and legends. In this way it is
ensured that a schematic symbol appears in the plan view and a three-dimensional
object in the 3D view.
The symbol ID is used throughout the product database (see 22.2.3.3, page 540).
Use the numbers 900 to 999 for your symbols.
Index
566
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
A new symbol is to be developed for a boiler. It is assumed that the symbol catalogue

contains a template that can be copied, modified and can be saved as a new symbol.
the USER directory.
Open drawings list
(4)
(3)
Basic functions
(2) (1)
 Start the drawings list. The "Project Menu” dialogue box appears.
 Click more >> (1). The "Project Menu” dialogue enables additional functions.
 Click User dir. (2). DDS-CAD leaves the directory of the current project and goes to
the USER directory.

 Enter the file name (3) of the new symbol (in this example, "GF2901"). Be sure
to comply with the naming convention.
 Click Open (4). The symbol drawing is opened.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
567
Introduction

r!
23.2.3 Find and load master copy in the symbol catalogue (E)
In many cases, you can create a new symbol based on an already existing symbol.
You can choose a suitable template in the symbol catalogue and apply this to your
new symbol. All functions are grouped together in "Installation and labelling symbols"
working mode.
23.2.3.1 Transfer procedure (apply copy function)

Copy -> change installation 3D symbol (5)
(1) (2) (4) Copy -> change installation 2D symbol Clean up symbol
Installation and labelling symbols
(3)
Basic functions
 Select the "Installation and labelling symbols" working mode (1).

 From the "Help" menu  "Symbol catalogue" (2). The symbol catalogue is dis-
played as a help window.
 Find a suitable template, and note its file name (3)
 Select the copy function (4). In the example, the 2D symbol is transferred, there-
fore "Copy 2D symbol installation->edit" (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem
található., page Error! Bookmark not defined.). The "CI" dialogue box
appears.
 Enter the code of the master template (here s11001) and click OK . The "In-
sert command file" dialogue box is displayed.
 Click OK . The template is displayed on screen.
 Select "Symbol bereinigen" (Clean up symbol). You can start designing.
Index
568
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.2.3.2 Notes on the copy function and symbol codes

The toolbar contains three copy functions. This is necessary because the desired
template of a symbol may originate from different symbol libraries.
Copy -> change installation 2D symbol

Copy -> change installation 3D symbol

Use this function when developing the 2D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the
"CI" dialogue, enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. S11001).
Copy 2D symbol installation->edit

Use this function when developing the 3D version of an electric circuit symbol. In the
"CI" dialogue, enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. S13001).
Basic functions
Copy 2D symbol general/architecture->edit
Use this function when developing a symbol for the "Kennzeichnung/Allgemeine
Symbole (Diverse)" (Labelling/general symbols (various)) area. In the "CI" dialogue,
enter the symbol code for the 2D version the symbol (e.g. T31001).

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
569
Introduction

r!
23.2.4 General functions of symbol editing
Symbols are usually combinations of geometric functions (1) and

application type specific commands that allow, for example,
intelligent connection points to be programmed into the symbol.
These commands can be activated manually. To do this, enter the
command in the command box (2). Then press [Enter] or click the
(1) icon (3).
(2) (3)
The general geometric functions are described in chapter 19.2, from page 462. The
following sections include notes on the functions
• Define point (see 23.1.3.2, page 555)
• Connection and label point (electrical) (see 23.1.3.3, page 556)
•
Basic functions
Scalable text (electrical) (see 23.1.3.4, page 556)

• Connection point (plumbing and heating) (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás
nem található., page Error! Bookmark not defined.)
• Material mapping for rendering (see Hiba! A hivatkozási forrás nem
található., page Error! Bookmark not defined.)
Warning!
Select these settings
for layers and pens for
all objects within a
symbol.
23.2.4.1 Define point – MO
A point is generated by the MO command.

This is displayed in the command list at
(1) different locations.
(2)
(3)(1) Symbol editing automatically begins from
the zero point of the coordinate system. It
corresponds to the subsequent insertion point
of the symbol. The example shows the values of X, Y and Z coordinates, each with
the value "0".
(2) At position 5 in the command list you will see the EP command. This is the
definition of a connection and label point for an electrical line. The position of this
connection point must be defined beforehand. In the parameters of the command MO
Index
570
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
(position 4 on the command list), the values for the X and Y coordinates have been
set to the value "0.5".

(3) You should always finish editing the symbol with a point at the position of the zero
point (see position 6 in the example).
You can define a point dynamically (by clicking ) or construct it by entering

commands which specify the coordinates numerically.
Set point dynamically

 Select the "Insert point” function. The cursor turns into a cross-
hair.
lected position. The function is ended.
Insert point
Basic functions
Construct point
 Enter the command MO and press [Enter].
 Enter the shift in metres (m). The preceding +
or - sign determines the direction on the axis.
 Click OK . The point has been moved.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
571
Introduction

r!
23.2.4.2 Connection and label point – EP
The function defines a connection or label point in the

current position (MO). Thus, for example, an electrical line
or cable harness can be connected to the symbol and the
circuit identification is displayed.
 Enter the "EP" command and press

[Enter]. The "Connection/symbol text point"
 Enter a text type and click OK . The connec-
tion point has been defined at the current posi-
tion. The function is ended.
Text type Description

1 Connection point for cables
2 Connection point for cable harness
Basic functions
3 Display component label (circuit

identification)
4 below last point:
23.2.4.3 Scalable text – TM

This function applies a static text in the current
position (MO) to the symbol. It is rotated and
scaled together with the symbol.
 Enter the "TM" command. The

Type Alignment Example
"Text" dialogue box is displayed.
0 centred
 Define the position of the text to
the reference point as a type.
1 above last point
 Click OK . The "TM" dialogue
2 centred left-aligned box is displayed.
3 below last point:  Enter the text and click OK .

The text is displayed at the sym-
4 centred right-aligned bol. The function is ended.
5 above last point, rotated like
dimension type (readable
from right or below)
Index
572
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.2.4.4 Connection point – IP

The function defines a connection or label point in the current
position (MO). At this point a pipe can be starting or
connected. In the IP command, define the medium, size and
the flow direction of the pipe.
 Enter the IP command and

Text Description
press [Enter]. The "Connec-
type
tion point" dialogue box
Pipe Number of the medium (click appears.
type Button [Help] for an overview)
 Enter the parameters and click
Dimens. Nominal size, for example, OK . The connection or label
"20" = DN 20
point is defined. The function
DirHor horizontal start direction of the is ended.
pipe in degrees (°)
DirVer vertical start direction of the pipe
in degrees (°)
"90" (straight up)
Basic functions
Note:
If the starting direction of the line is to be any direction from the line, enter the
value "0" for Input "DirVer" and Input "DirHor". You can draw the pipe in any
direction after starting it.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
573
Introduction

r!
23.2.4.5 Material mapping for rendering – IM
If a solid body is to be associated with a

material for rendering, this setting must be
made BEFORE this body is drawn. In this
way, each sub-body of a symbol can be
linked with another material.
 Enter the "IM" command. The "Mate-
rial index" dialogue box is displayed.
 Enter the parameters and click OK
Parameter Description . The material allocation starts for the
Application Application type code: next body and/or area to be drawn.
1 Architecture
6 Electrics  Draw the shapes that are to receive a
7 Ventilation common material association.
8 Plumbing/heating
 Enter the IM command again. The
Component 988 "Materialindex" (Material index) dia-
Material ID any four-digit number logue box is displayed.
(Document which ID
has been used!)  Set all parameters the value "0" and
click OK . The material mapping is
Basic functions
ended.
Index
574
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.3 Transferring a symbol from a DWG/DXF file

You can transfer symbols from
Procedure in the DWG/DXF
Editor:
Chapter 21.1.2 any DXF/DWG file and use them
Open file in the Page 517 in the DDS model. This is
DWG/DXF Editor necessary for example when
editing revision designs, if the
Chapter 21.2.1 symbols present in the DWG file
Isolate symbol Page 518 are to be used.
Chapter 21.2.4 To do this, first isolate the symbol

Define the zero point Page på side in the DWG/DXF file and transfer
522 it to the CFI format. Save the file
in the project or USER directory.
Export file Chapter 23.3.1 To open in the model, create a
to *.CFI Page 575 new item and enter the file name
in Input "External symbol". You
can then use the item with the
former symbol.
Apply symbol
Basic functions
Creating and editing Chapter 22.2.3
new items Page 538
Input to set "External Chapter 23.3.2

symbol" Page 576
Use item

23.3.1 Export symbol to CFI
If you have finished editing the DWG/DXF file, export the results as a CFI file
(depending on the intended application) into the project or USER directory.
 Select "File" menu  "Export
file" function. The "Export file"
 Set the path (1), select the file
type (2) and enter a file name
(3).
(1) (2) (3)
 Click Save . The symbol is ex-
ported. You can apply it in an
item.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
575
Introduction

r!
23.3.2 Apply CFI file as a symbol
You use a CFI file as a symbol by entering the

file name as an external symbol for an item.
Open the item for editing (see 22.2.3.3,
page 540). Enter the full filename of the CFI file
in Input "External symbol".
For an electrical appliance, you need three entries:
Entry Meaning
symbol1.cfi Example name for the plan view
symbol1.cfi Example name for the 3D view
Name of an auxiliary symbol for the electrical connection. These entries are
Basic functions
ep1
required if the symbol is to be connected electrically.
The entries are separated by semicolons. After confirming with OK this item can
be used with all functions. It may be necessary to adjust the scaling.
23.4 Apply 3DS file as a symbol

Many providers supply elaborately designed objects, such as boilers, plumbing
objects and lamps, as well as home furnishings and decorative elements in the 3DS
format (3D Studio).
 Copy the 3DS file into the project directory.

 Create a new item in the DDS project (see
22.2.3, page 538).
 Edit the new items and in Input "External
symbol" enter the full file name of the 3DS
file for the plan view and the 3D view.
When using the item, it may be necessary to correct the scaling.
Warning!
A wide range of 3DS objects is available online. Please note that some of these
may be fee-based. Copyright issues must be respected.
Index
576
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.5 Creating a logo

23.5.1 Logo in drawings
When first installing DDS-CAD a
placeholder is shown instead of
your logo. it is a drawing of a
defined size and a defined name,
which you replace with your own
version.
23.5.1.1 Determining the file name and size of the new logo
First you need to know what the new logo must be called and what size it has to be to
be used in the tile field:
 From the "Insert” menu select  "Prepare for print"  "Title field/stamp". The "
Title field/stamp" dialogue box is displayed.
Basic functions
 Click … . The product database is displayed:
(1) (2)
 (1) shows the logo's file name, (2) shows its size in metres (m).
The description below uses the example "VI9901 6x1.50"

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
577
Introduction

r!
23.5.1.2 Creating the drawing file for a logo
The first step is to create a drawing file for the new logo. You also have to decide
whether it should behave as a default for all projects or whether it should be project-
specific:
Open drawings list

Basic functions
(1)
(2) (3)
 Start the drawings list. The "Project Menu” dialogue box is displayed.
 Click more >> (1). The dialogue enables additional functions.
In the next step you decide the availability of the new logo:
As default for all projects:

 Click User dir. (2). DDS-CAD leaves the current project directory and opens the
USER directory:
As a project-specific logo
 Click Directory (3). DDS-CAD remains in the current project directory:
Index
578
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The description below is based on the default version for all projects.

 Enter the file name (4) of the new logo (in this example "vi9901") and click Open
(5):
(4) (5)
The drawing is opened. You can start designing the logo.
Basic functions
23.5.1.3 Designing the logo
 Select the working mode "WM: Create logo". The toolbar changes and enables
additional functions.
Create WM logo
(1) (2)

(3) (4)
(5)
(1) Define border with 6m x 1.5m (standard size for almost all title fields)
(2) Import graphics files
(3) Import DWG/DXF files
(4) Enter text
(5) Use geometric functions and crosshatching
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
579
Introduction

r!
23.5.1.4 Saving the logo
If you have finished designing the logo, you have to save the drawing (1) and then
export in the *CFI format (2):
Save file/drawing Export CFI
(1) (2)
Basic functions
23.5.2 Logo in reports, lists and logs

The logogram in calculation
protocols, parts lists and room lists
is a simple bitmap.
Edit the DdsCr.bmp file in the folder

C:\DdsCr with an image editing
program.
Warning!
Only edit the content, not the size of the image!
Index
580
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.6 Creating a legend

DDS-CAD includes ready-
In the "700-DDS-Legenden" project made legends, which are
Open, edit and save a Chapter 23.6.1.1 called as an object and fixed
template Page 581 in the model as a symbol.
The templates are stored in
the "_700-DDS-Legenden"
Export legend to CFI Chapter 23.6.1.2 project. Use these to create
Page 583 new legends.
Apply legend
Creating and editing new Chapter 22.2.3
items Page 538
Input to set "External

Chapter 23.6.1.3
symbol"
Page 583
Basic functions
Use item
23.6.1.1 Open, edit and save a template
(1)

(2)
(3)
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
581
Introduction

r!
 Switch to the "_700-DDS-Legenden" project (1). Project menu (2) shows the
templates of the existing legends for the selected application type.
 Open a template and first save this template with a new file name. Select "File”
menu  "Save As” function. The "Speichern unter" (Save as) dialogue box is
displayed.
 Enter a new file name. Only change the last three digits of the original name.
Example: The legend Lege1000.BIM is used as an example in this description.
As a new file name, enter e.g. Lege1100.BIM (3).
 Click Save . The modified legend has been saved as a new template in the
"_700-DDS-Legenden" project.
 Edit the new legend to your requirements.
Now correct the drawing data of the new legend. This step provides a better overview
in the "_700-DDS-Legenden" project:
Basic functions
 Select "File”  "Project/drawing data“  "Edit drawing data". The "Information

about Lege6100" dialogue box is displayed.
 Edit the description and click OK . The dialogue box is closed. The drawing
remains open. The edited description is displayed in Project menu for the "_700-
DDS-Legenden" project.
Index
582
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.6.1.2 Export legend to CFI

The edited legend must now be exported as a CFI file to the USER directory:
 Select "File”  "Export"  "Export CFI”. The "Export file" dialogue box is dis-
Basic functions
played.
 The CFI file must be exported to the USER directory so that it can be used in all
projects. Therefore, enter the path to the USER directory (1). The file name can
remain the same, however, you can use any file name you like.
 Click Save . The CFI file of the new legend is exported to the USER directory.
You can close the drawing and use the legend in your projects.
23.6.1.3 Apply legend
You use a CFI file as a symbol by entering the

file name as an external symbol for an item.
Open the item for editing (see 22.2.3.3,
page 540). Enter the full filename of the CFI file
in Input "External symbol".
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
583
Introduction

r!
23.7 Creating an automatic title field

23.7.1 ((Introduction))
The title field is an object that can read text blocks from the project, drawing and
revision data and copy them to the symbol.
The file name of the TF symbol...
3. The title field should be called with the default function and used as an item.
A new symbol must be created in the user directory. The file name must be
based on the TF19xx naming convention.
Afterwards an item has to be created that will access the new symbol.
4. Should the title field be aligned to the right/left corner?

Yes -> Then it must be 18m wide. The function is tailored to this width. If the
width ≠ 18m, it can only be used right/dynamic or left/dynamic.
Basic functions
5. Should the title field be scalable (i.e. size can be changed)?

Special text commands must be used for static text: TH, TC, TV, TR are
used
The text height is not set directly but rather determined by integrated
calculations
6. The title field should read the contents of the project and drawing data as
blocks
Challenges/tasks
• Create a drawing
• Construct wireframe
• Recommendation: auxiliary geometries for constructing the text positions?
• Static text: with TP points

Index
584
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
23.7.2 Creating a title field from a template

DDS-CAD contains
In the "700-DDS-Titelfelder-Logo" project default title fields,
which automatically
Open, edit and Chapter 23.7.2.1
Page 585 display and maintain
save a template
the project, drawing
and revision data.
Designing a title field Chapter 23.7.2.2
Wildcard commands in
Page 586 the title field copy the
text blocks from the
dialogues and display
Tidying up and generating a title them in the drawing.
Chapter 23.7.2.3
field
Page 587
You can use a
Applying a title field template as the basis
Chapter 23.6.1.3
for your own title fields.
Creating and editing
new items Page 583
Basic functions
23.7.2.1 Open, edit and save a template
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
585
Introduction

r!
 Open the "_700-DDS-Titelfelder-Logo" project (1) and the "Dds_1000 Kopiervor-
lage Titelfeld" drawing (2). The drawing shows a pattern (3), which corresponds
to the size of the "Standard 1 size" existing title field. To the right (4) there are all
the wildcards for the project, drawing and revision dates, as well as the logo-
gram.
 Duplicate the drawing in order to leave the template intact for future title fields.
Select "File” menu  "Save As” function. The "Save As” dialogue box is dis-
played.
 Create a new title field drawing with the name DDS_1001.BIM and click Save .
You have created a new template that you can now edit.
23.7.2.2 Designing a title field
Once you have opened the new title field drawing, you can start designing your title field.
The individual actions are:
• Design the layout
• Correct the logo position
• Correcting the text block position
Basic functions
Design the layout

To design the layout, you can use all the
geometric functions of the program. We
recommend the "Dynamisches
Rechteck" (Dynamic rectangle) function.
Please consider the pattern shown
Rectangle
simply as a template to maintain the
size ratio. Design the layout to suit your
requirements.
Correct the logo position

The logo is a built-in symbol, and can be
moved with the standard functions
Index
586
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Correcting the text block position

Correct the text
blocks position
with the "Move
Move region Area” function
(see 20.4,
page 513)
Basic functions
23.7.2.3 Tidying up and generating a title field
If the title field is complete, it needs to be tidied up and saved in the USER directory
using a specified naming convention:
Generate title field
 Delete all remaining (surplus) entries and text, but not the "pattern for size ratio"
(this is removed automatically in the next step).
 Select the "Generate title field" function. A message indicates that the title field has
been saved under a specific name in the USER directory.
 Click OK . The "Apply changes?" prompt is displayed.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
587
Introduction

r!
 Click Yes . This opens the "Export model" dialogue box:
(1) (2)
 Select the USER directory (1) and enter the file name (2).
TF1901.BIM (for your first title field)
TF1902.BIM (for your second title field)
TF19nn.BIM (consecutive numbering for additional title fields)
Basic functions
 Click Save . The title field can be used in the project.
23.7.3 ((Manually designing and editing a title field))
23.7.4 The title field in the product database

Use the title field by creating an item and
entering the ID of a symbol.
Index
588
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
Options, settings and auxiliary functions Erro
r!
24 Custom circuit layouts

Basically, we have to distinguish between the content design of a custom circuit
layout (create/edit) and its application in the current distribution:
Design circuit layout
Start editing mode

Chapter 24.2
Page 594
Chapter 24.5 Configure

Page 597 circuit
Position
Chapter 24.6 equipment
Page 598
Draw
wiring Chapter 24.7
Page 602
Basic functions
Close editing
mode
Apply circuit layout

to Chapter 24.1
Page 590
one new
circuit

one existing circuit Chapter 24.3
Page 595
several existing
circuits Chapter 24.8
Page 603
Both complexes are discussed in the chapters 24.2 to 24.6. The descriptions use
terms that are first explained in 24.1.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
589
Introduction
Erro Options, settings and auxiliary functions

r!
24.1 Relationships and terms

24.1.1 Access to customised circuit layouts

When constructing the distribution board database, select a circuit layout in the "New
Circuit” dialogue box. Confirming with Add or Insert starts a sequence of
prompts where you choose the necessary equipment from the product database.
DDS-CAD follows an algorithm that will result from the chosen circuit layout. This
includes the type and position of the equipment and the circuitry for the distribution
board documentation.
The basic DDS-

(4) CAD configuration
(3) includes variety of
layouts. They
should be referred
(1)
to as system
layouts.
(2) All layouts are

Basic functions
divided into groups.

By choosing a
layout group (1),
you can access the
layouts available in
it (2). Each layout
has an
alphanumeric code
(3), which can also
be used to access
the layout.
From a system
layout, you can derive your own, customised layouts. You can edit the circuit, save
the layout with a new name and then use it. By checking "Custom layouts" you can
control access to customised or system layouts.
The graphic shows that there is a correlation between the codes of the selected
layout of the basic equipment (above) and the listed custom layouts (4). This
indicates that a custom layout is always derived from a template.
The following sections explain some important terms that are used later on.
Index
590
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
24.1.2 System layout

System layouts are installed together with DDS-CAD on your computer. They are
available when constructing the distributions if "Custom layouts" is not checked in
the "New Circuit” dialogue. System layout cannot be changed, but they form the
basis for creating custom layouts.
24.1.3 Custom layout

A custom layout is always a derivation from a different layout. When constructing the
distribution system you get access to it by checking "Custom layouts” in the "New
Circuit” dialogue.
System layouts Custom layouts The first custom

layout must
Variants of necessarily be
ZZF1A ZZF1A- ZZF1A
AA created from a
ZZF1A- system layout. After
AB that, it is suitable
ZZF1A- itself to be used as a
Basic functions
AC template for other
ZZF1A- layouts. It uses the
AD code of the original
Variants of system layout, and
ZZF3A ZZF3A- passes it on to other
ZZF3A
AA custom layouts.
ZZF3A-
AB
In this way, several
variations are
created from one system layout. They are given the consecutive suffix "AA"; "AB";
"AC" etc.

24.1.4 Variant
Variant is the general term for all custom layouts that have been created from the
same system layout. The graphic (see above) shows the relationships using
examples.
The first variant "AA" has been derived from the system layout ZZF1A (light with
MCB, single pole). The following variants "AB" and "AC" are derived from "AA".
Finally, "AD" was re-created on the basis of the system layout. All four custom
layouts, however, are variants of the system layout ZZF1A.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
591
Introduction

r!
24.1.5 Types (of a variant)
Each new variant of a circuit layout requires several types for flexible use in different
situations. This need arises from the fact that a circuit
a) can be illustrated in single-pole and multi-pole representation.
b) the electrical connection is configured using the following parameters:
- assignment to a level
- number of phase conductors used
- use of neutral and earth
The relationships are described by the following example:
Circuit F3 uses a custom layout. For this reason, the system layout ZZF1A was taken
as the starting point and expanded. The contactor contact (K1) was inserted and
bridged by switch (S1).
On the first sheet (left) you will see that circuit F3 draws its voltage directly from
level 1. By switching in the circuit table, this circuit should now tap from level 2.
Basic functions
By switching from level 1 to level 2, DDS-CAD uses a different type of the new
variant. Because this type does not yet exist, first the system layout is again used as
a template. In the picture on the right, you can see that the same components are
contained in the circuit, but the new circuit does not yet exist for this type. The layout
must therefore be re-created.
Mathematically, this relationship results in a large number of types for each variant.
Effectively, a new type only has to be developed when needed. DDS-CAD
automatically indicates this. This is the case:
Index
592
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
a) when creating a new circuit in the circuit table

b) if there is a subsequent change to a configuration in the circuit table
c) when using a different representation (single pole/multi-pole)
d) if there is subsequent assignment of a layout variant to an existing circuit.
Cases a), b) and c)

The message line displays an error message after the operation is completed and the
circuits have been drawn:
In this situation, act as follows:
 Go to the reported circuit and open it for editing (see 24.2, page 594). The layout
manager is displayed.
Basic functions
 Click Edit . You are taken to editing mode.
 Correct and save the circuit. All circuits that have caused this error message use
the corrected type of this layout variant. The error message disappears after a
screen refresh for these circuits.
Case d)
This case is solved directly via the layout manager. You can only use a variant if the
required type already exists. The layout manager prompts you to create the type
through Edit .

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
593
Introduction

r!
24.2 Start editing mode

Access to editing is via the circuit drawn on the sheet:
 Click on an element of the circuit. The

selected circuit (1) is displayed as a se-
lected object. It is highlighted. All other
circuits (2) are also selected. They
appear pale.
(1
(2  Select the "Edit Macro" function.
Basic functions
If the selected circuit has been created with a system layout, for which there are no
additional variants, you go straight to the editing mode. The previous changes in the
circuit table (e.g. changes to the number of poles, additional components) are
transferred to the editing mode and re-used. You can start building the circuit. Please
refer to chapter 24.4, page 595.
If variants for the layout of the selected

circuit already exist, the layout manager
is displayed first. Here you can make the
decision whether to create a new variant,

edit an existing one or apply to the
selected circuit (see 24.3, page 595).
Index
594
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
24.3 The layout manager

The layout manager is automatically
(2) displayed when at least one custom
variant exists for the layout of the
selected circuit. The available
variants are listed in table (1). In
(1) Display "Group" and Display "Use
Application Default Tools” (2) you

will see the name of the system
layout and the group under which
the "New Circuit” dialogue can be
found.
New
The function creates a new custom layout for the current project. The starting point is
the layout that the selected circuit uses. The previous changes in the circuit table
(e.g. changes to the number of poles, additional components) are transferred to the
Basic functions
editing mode and re-used. After the operation you can access the new variant.
Edit
The function starts the editing mode for the selected custom layout. You can edit both
the circuit and the description. This is queried again when you leave the editing mode
(see 24.7, page 602).
Warning!
The drawing-related editing of a circuit is applied to all circuits of the project that
use the modified circuit layout.

Map
The function assigns the variant selected in the list to the circuit and closes the
dialogue. The circuit is then shown with the selected switching. As a prerequisite, the
required type (see 24.1.5, page 592) is available.
Note:
If you want to reassign an existing circuit to its original system layout, open the
"Circuits” cell in the circuit table by double clicking. Uncheck "Custom layout"
(1
24.4 The user interface in editing mode

After opening the editing for a variant, the use interface changes. Menus, the toolbar
and the functions in the toolbox are adapted to the changed work environment.
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
595
Introduction

r!
C
Basic functions
Y X
(1) (2)
The drawing surface (A) allows work on the circuit (1) that you have opened. It is
displayed in its original colours and contains all the elements that have been
confirmed up to this point in the circuit table. The coordinate system is located at the
intersection between the first branching conductor and the phase conductor L1. The
placeholder "Next layout" (2) controls the distance to the next circuit. The other
circuits remain visible in order to visualise the space. For better distinction, they are
displayed lighter.
In DDS Explorer (B) you will see that a library is open (DC-Edit.LIB) in which you are
now working. The names (in this case DU3ZZ-ZZF1A-02AB) are automatically
administered by DDS-CAD.
At the bottom of the screen you have access to the distribution (C). The opened
circuit is highlighted in the table and can be reconfigured. You can replace or delete
existing equipment and add new equipment. In this way you define the item selection
algorithm, if you call the circuit layout via the "New Circuit” dialogue. The possibilities
and limitations are described in the following chapter 24.5.
Index
596
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
The tool box (D) has specific functions available that are suitable for drawing-related
editing and addition to the circuitry (see 24.6, page 598).

24.5 Configuring a circuit
By starting the editing mode, the current distribution board table is visible at the
bottom of the screen. The row of the selected circuit is selected in the table and you
can re-configure the equipment in the "Sicherung" (Fuse), "Baut. 1" (Comp. 1),
"Baut. 2" (Comp. 2) and "Cables” cells:
Add new components
Change or delete Change cable type and number
Basic functions
All changes are immediately visible on the screen. You can then correct the positions
of the components.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
597
Introduction

r!
24.6 Drawing in editing mode

24.6.1 Symbols for the equipment

You can move the equipment of the circuit just like any other
symbol.
A symbol (e.g. switch, contact) only opens existing lines that are already included in
the system layout. If you need to add new lines to the circuit, you should first place
the components and then integrate them with the circuit through new lines.
24.6.2 Wiring lines and wiring points

The existing wiring lines from the potential to the terminal have been converted into
polylines. They can be edited directly by means of the polyline. For other circuits, it
may be that the old lines must be deleted and redrawn.
Basic functions
Warning!
(1) The circuit's access to the potential, i.e. the connection to
a busbar must not be deleted. The positions of the
connections cannot be changed.
Index
598
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Editing existing wiring lines

You can edit the lines later by adding nodes. First, select the line. The following
procedure is similar to editing ordinary polylines (see 19.1.8, page 459)
Basic functions
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
599
Introduction

r!
Start new wiring line
You can draw new wiring lines to supplement the circuit.

 Select the "dynamic line" function from the toolbox. The cursor
turns into a crosshair. The message line shows the following
prompt: "Specify first point".
 Click on the desired start position. The cursor moves a dy-
namic line. You can draw the line. Each click fixes a vertex.
Start and end on the line

You can start and connect a wiring line to an existing wiring line. DDS-CAD
automatically inserts the necessary wiring points. The line is split at this position. You
can edit the segments on both sides of the wiring point separately.
Basic functions
Draw new wiring line (starting at corner)

Start and connection can also be performed directly at a break point. This break point
is converted into a wiring point.
Index
600
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Move wiring point

You can select a wiring point and move it like a symbol. The connected wiring lines
are updated automatically.
Editing wiring points

The symbol of a connection point can be exchanged:
 Double click on the connection point. The "BldPolylineTee" dialogue box
appears.
 Click … . The product database is displayed and allows you to select an item.
Basic functions
 Select the desired branch.
24.6.3 Space requirement – start position of the next circuit

In order to determine the space required by
the new layout, move the "next circuit"
placeholder.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
601
Introduction

r!
24.7 Exiting the editing mode

If you have finished editing the circuit layout, you can exit the editing mode:
 In the toolbar, select the "Save and apply" function:
The "Apply changes" dialogue box is displayed.

Basic functions
This function controls the naming (1), storage (2) and use (3) of the circuit layout.
Apply
The editing mode for circuit layouts is ended and you are returned to the editing level
for the distribution system. Changes to an existing circuit layout are applied to all
circuits that are already using this variant.
Note!
You can automatically transfer the variant to all the circuits with the same starting
position. To do this, use:
Update matching system layouts with this custom layout

Update matching custom layouts with this custom layout
Please refer to chapter 24.8, page 603.
Abort and
The editing mode for circuit layouts is ended and you are returned to the editing level
for the distribution system. The changes to the circuit layout are not saved. Use this
function for example, if you opened the wrong circuit for editing.
Cancel
The editing mode for the circuit layout is not ended. You can continue the work.
Index
602
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
24.8 Apply variants to several circuits

When you leave the editing mode, you can transfer a new circuit layout to circuits of
the same type. The "Apply changes" dialogue box is displayed.
(1)
If when saving with Apply neither of the two checkboxes (1) is checked, the variant
is only applied to the current circuit. However, by selecting a setting for the variant
you can:
Make all equal original system circuits in this board use this macro
The new variant is applied to all circuits that either
Basic functions
• use the same system layout as the edited circuit or
• use the same system layout that the edited custom variant is based on.
Transfer to circuits with the same custom layout

The new variant is applied to all circuits that use the same custom layout. This
setting is only available if you are editing a circuit that is already using a custom
layout.

Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
603
Introduction

r!
The following scenarios are conceivable for using these settings:
a) New variant for a circuit that uses a system layout.

The new variant can only be transferred to circuits with the same system
layout (see example 1).
b) New variant for a circuit that uses a custom layout.

The new variant can be transferred to circuits with the same system or
custom layout (see examples 2 and 3).
c) Edit existing variants of a custom layout.

The change is automatically applied to all circuits that use the same custom
layout. In addition, they can be applied to all circuits with the appropriate
system layout (see example 4).
Basic functions
The interaction of a scenario with the selected setting results in four possible or
meaningful combinations. They are explained in the examples:
Initial situation
The circuits F1 to F3 use the system layout ZZF1A. The circuits F4 to F6 use the
variant 1 (AA), of this layout.
Index
604
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Example 1 – Scenario a)

Circuit F1 has been transferred to the editing
mode and the new variant 2 has been created.
When leaving the editing mode, the "Apply
changes" dialogue box is displayed.
You can represent all circuits that use the

same system layout at this time with the new
variant:
Basic functions
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
605
Introduction

r!
Example 2 – Scenario b)
Transfer to circuits with the same custom layout

changes” dialogue box is displayed.
You can represent all circuits that use the

same custom layout at this time with the new
variant:
Basic functions
Index
606
DDS-CAD 7.3
Introduction
r!
Example 3 – Scenario b)

Transfer to circuits with the appropriate system layout

changes” dialogue box is displayed.
You can represent all circuits with the new

variant 4 if they use the system layout on
which this variant is based:
Basic functions
Index
DDS-CAD 7.3
607
Introduction

r!
Example 4 – Scenario c)
Circuit F4 has been transferred to editing

mode. The existing variant 3 has been opened
and modified. When leaving the editing mode,
the "Apply changes” dialogue box is displayed.
The variant was renamed 3a and applied to
the appropriate system layouts.
Basic functions
By editing the existing variant 3 a modification of all circuits that use this variant to
date is automatically given. As a result of the additional transfer to the appropriate
system layouts, the circuitry of circuits F1 to F3 is displayed in the edited variant 3a.
Index
608
DDS-CAD 7.3

DDS-CAD 7.3 Manual ENG PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DDS-CAD 7.3 Manual ENG PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

Strategies for handling projects

Edition Chapter Modification

9 Pipes and ventilation ducts Newly created

1.1.1.2 ((Safety facilities))

Pipe network calculation in

DDS-CAD is more than drawing,

Strategies for handling projects

Being up-to-date is the most important requirement for the documentation of

industry standard software systems.

Data Design System

Notes on the structure of this manual

Part IV describes ways to configure, expand and adjust the system.

The descriptions use symbols to denote the input controls:

Controls in dialogue boxes

Display Display field for values and text

Procedures are described as instructions with a description of the effect, e.g.:

Strategies for handling projects

PART II – STRATEGIES FOR HANDLING PROJECTS 28

4 IMPORTING EXTERNAL DATA 32

5.2.1 Levels of detail according to the task at hand 49

5.2.2 Requirements due to the heat load calculation 50

5.3.4 Doors and windows 58

5.3.5 Suspended ceiling 60

5.4 Edit building model 72

5.4.2 Editing the floor plan and room geometry 77

7 HEAT LOAD CALCULATION 89

7.2 Checking and correcting building data 91

7.4.1 Terms and connections 102

8 HEATING AND SANITARY FACILITIES 119

8.3.7 Printing results 144

Strategies for handling projects

9 PIPES AND VENTILATION DUCTS 155

9.7.2 Changing insulation status and linetype 206

9.8 Editing pipes and ventilation ducts 208

10 NETWORK CALCULATIONS 215

10.1 Introduction and general procedure 215

10.3.4 Working with the pipe network table 221

10.4 Pipe network calculation in the potable water network 226

11 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND SWITCHBOARDS 237

11.4 Notes on the high-voltage current distribution board 255

12 ((INSTALLATION SYSTEMS)) 270

12.1.3 Display options 273

13 GENERAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 306

Strategies for handling projects

14 DISTRIBUTION BOARD DOCUMENTATION 346

14.5.1 From the drawn circuit to the circuit table 353

15 EMERGENCY AND EVACUATION ROUTES 355

16 ANALYSING – PRINTING – EXPORTING 356

16.1 Working with part drawings (details) 357

16.2.2 Managing sections 363

16.3 Working with print layouts 363

PART III – REFERENCE TO THE DDS BASIC FUNCTIONS 377

17 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS 378

17.2.1 Snapping the grid at a point 380

17.4.2 Navigation in plan view, front/side view, isometric 390

18 OBJECTS – BUILDING BLOCKS OF THE MODEL 395

18.3.3 Multiple objects on one line 426

Strategies for handling projects

19.5 Working with the dimension type 499

19.5.1 Terms and general connections 499

20 GENERAL EDITING FUNCTIONS 505

20.1 Copy, delete, move and edit objects 505